Triumph-Adler DCC 2935 Copy system Owner Manual

Triumph-Adler DCC 2935 Copy system Owner Manual
DCC 2930 / 2935
DCC 2945/2950
User Manual
DCC 2930 / 2935
DCC 2945/ 2950
Digital Colour Multifunctional Systems
Copy / Print / Scan / Fax
A3
Introduction
Thank you for your purchase of CDC 1930/DCC 2930/CDC 1935/DCC 2935/CDC 1945/DCC 2945/
CDC 1950/DCC 2950.
This Operation Guide is intended to help you operate the machine correctly, perform routine maintenance and
take a simple troubleshooting action as necessary, so that you can always use the machine in good condition.
Please read this Operation Guide before you start using the machine, and keep it close to the machine for easy
reference.
We recommend the use of our own brand supplies. We will not be liable for any damage caused by the use of
third party supplies in this machine.
In this Operation Guide, CDC 1930/DCC 2930/CDC 1935/DCC 2935/CDC 1945/DCC 2945/CDC 1950/DCC
2950 are referred to as 30/30 ppm model, 35/35 ppm model, 45/45 ppm model, and 55/50 ppm model
respectively.
Included Guides
The following guides are supplied with the machine. Refer to them as necessary.
Quick Guide
Describes the procedures for frequently-used operations.
Safety Guide
Provides safety and cautionary information for the installation and use of the machine. Be sure to read this guide
before using the machine.
Safety Guide (CDC 1930/DCC 2930/CDC 1935/DCC 2935/CDC 1945/DCC 2945/CDC 1950/DCC 2950)
Describes the machine installation space, cautionary labels, and other information. Be sure to read this guide
before using the machine.
DVD (Product Library)
• Operation Guide (This Guide)
• Printing System Driver User Guide
• FAX Operation Guide
• Network FAX Driver Operation Guide
• Card Authentication Kit (B) Operation Guide
• Network Tool for Direct Printing Operation Guide
• Data Security Kit (E) Operation Guide
• Network Print Monitor User Guide
• Embedded Web Server RX Operation Guide
• File Management Utility User Guide
Safety Conventions in This Guide
The sections of this guide and parts of the machine marked with symbols are safety warnings meant to protect
the user, other individuals and surrounding objects, and ensure correct and safe usage of the machine. The
symbols and their meanings are indicated below.
WARNING: Indicates that serious injury or even death may result
from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the
related points.
CAUTION: Indicates that personal injury or mechanical damage
may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance
with the related points.
Symbols
The  symbol indicates that the related section includes safety warnings. Specific points of attention are
indicated inside the symbol.
.... [General warning]
.... [Warning of high temperature]
The
symbol indicates that the related section includes information on prohibited actions. Specifics of the
prohibited action are indicated inside the symbol.
.... [Warning of prohibited action]
.... [Disassembly prohibited]
The  symbol indicates that the related section includes information on actions which must be performed.
Specifics of the required action are indicated inside the symbol.
.... [Alert of required action]
.... [Remove the power plug from the outlet]
....
[Always connect the machine to an outlet with a ground
connection]
Please contact your service representative to order a replacement if the safety warnings in this Operation Guide
are illegible or if the guide itself is missing (fee required).
NOTE: An original which resembles a bank note closely may not be copied properly in some rare cases
because this machine is equipped with a counterfeiting prevention function.
i
Contents
Contents
Quick Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi
Menu Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxiii
Laser Safety (Europe). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv
Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxvi
Legal and Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvii
1
Part Names
Operation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
2
Preparation before Use
Check the Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Connecting Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Power On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Sleep and Auto Sleep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Switching the Language for Display [Language]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Setting Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Installing Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Embedded Web Server RX (Settings for E-mail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Loading Paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Loading Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
3
Basic Operation
Login/Logout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Enter key and Quick No. Search key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Original Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Selecting Color Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Copying. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Sending. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Confirmation Screen of Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Preparation for sending a document to a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Specifying Destination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Using the Document Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Canceling Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
Quick Setup Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
Registering Shortcuts (Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
Using the Internet Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
Using Weekly Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
Checking Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
Help Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
4
Copying Functions
Original Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
ii
Contents
Paper Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Mixed Size Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Original Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Fold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Paper Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Combine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Margin/Centering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Border Erase. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Booklet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Form Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Page #. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Memo Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Poster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Image Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Text Stamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Bates Stamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
EcoPrint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Single Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Color Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Hue Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
One-touch Image Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Sharpness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Background Density Adj.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Saturation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Prevent Bleed-thru . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Continuous Scan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Auto Image Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Negative Image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Mirror Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Job Finish Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
File Name Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Priority Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Repeat Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
OHP Backing Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
5
Printing
Printing - Printing from Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Banner printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Using a Job Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
6
Sending Functions
Original Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Sending Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Zoom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Centering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Mixed Size Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
2-sided/Book Original . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Original Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
File Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
PDF Encryption Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Original Image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
iii
Contents
Scan Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Sharpness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Background Density Adj.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Color Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Continuous Scan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Prevent Bleed-thru . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Border Erase. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
File Name Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
E-mail Subject/Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
WSD Scan/DSM Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Scanning using TWAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Job Finish Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
Send and Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
Send and Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
FTP Encrypted TX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
Text Stamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
Bates Stamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
Color Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
Scanning with FMU Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
7
Document Box
Using a Custom Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Job Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Removing USB Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
8
Status / Job Cancel
Checking Job Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Checking Job History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Pause and Resumption of Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Canceling of Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Priority Override for Waiting Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Reordering Print Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper (Paper/Supplies) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Device/Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
9
Default Setting (System Menu)
Common Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Document Box/Removable Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56
Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58
Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-65
Adjustment/Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69
Date/Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-77
Edit Destination (Address Book/Adding One Touch Keys) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-83
Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-90
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-92
System Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-95
Restart Entire Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-95
Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-96
Interface Block Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-109
Security Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-110
iv
Contents
Document Guard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optional Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessibility Display (Enlarged Touch Panel Display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-110
9-112
9-114
9-115
10
Management
User Login Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Job Accounting Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
11
Maintenance
Regular Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
12
Troubleshooting
Solving Malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Responding when Error Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Clearing Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23
Appendix
Optional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-2
Character Entry Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-9
Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-12
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-21
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-34
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Index-1
v
Quick Guide
Be sure to read Legal and Safety Information
before using this machine.
Administrator tasks
To make copies
It copies.
To print
Simply press the Start key to make
copies. You can also fine-tune the
copy settings by changing the
paper size, adjusting the density,
etc.
What
you want
to do
Copying with
specific
settings
It prints.
You can print via a network or print
a PDF file directly from USB
memory.
Printing Documents
Stored in Removable
USB Memory
Print
via a
network
Connecting Cables
Network Setup
(LAN Cable Connection)
Install the printer
driver on your
computer *1
Setup
Loading Paper...2-27
Placing Originals on
the Platen...2-44
Operation
Copying Functions
...4-1
Printing
Documents Stored
in Removable USB
Memory... 7-22
*1: For more information, refer to the Printing System Driver User Guide.
vi
Printing Printing from
Applications
...5-2
Administrator tasks
To send documents
It sends.
You can send scanned images via a network. Or, you can also store scanned images in
USB memory.
What
you want
to do
Send to
Folder
(SMB)
Send
as
E-mail
Saving
Documents to
USB Memory
Connecting Cables
Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection)
Plug in the USB
memory
Create a shared folder on the destination computer.
Setup
Edit Destination (Address Book/Adding One
Touch Keys)...9-83 *1
Placing Originals on the Platen...2-44
Operation
Sending...3-23
Sending Functions...6-1
Saving Documents
to USB Memory
(Scan to USB)...7-24
*1: If the destination is not stored in the address book, you can send by entering the address
directly.
vii
Administrator tasks
To send a FAX
As well as sending a FAX via telephone lines, you can also send a FAX via a network.
It faxes.
NOTE: For more information on setting up and sending a FAX, refer to the FAX System
(V) Operation Guide.
What
you want
to do
FAX directly
from a
computer
Send a FAX
FAX without using the
telephone line
(Internet FAX (i-FAX))
Connect the modular cord for the
telephone line to this machine.
Selection of Telephone Line
(Inch version only)
Network Setup
(LAN Cable Connection)
Install the Network FAX
Driver on your computer *1
Setup
Using the Address Book...3-17
on the FAX System (V) Operation Guide
*2
Loading Paper...2-27
Operation
FAX Operation
(Basic)...3-1
on the FAX System (V)
Operation Guide
About Network
FAX...9-1
on the FAX System (V)
Operation Guide
Internet Fax (i-FAX)
(Optional)...8-1
on the FAX System (V)
Operation Guide
*1: For more information, refer to the Network FAX Driver Operation Guide.
*2: If the destination is not stored in the address book, you can send the FAX by entering the
address directly.
viii
Menu Map
(The names displayed on the touch panel are used here. These may differ from the referenced titles.)
Org./Paper/Finishing
Original Size (page 4-2)
Paper Selection (page 4-3)
Mixed Size Originals (page 4-6)
Original Orientation (page 4-9)
Fold (page 4-11)
Collate/Offset (page 3-15)
Staple/Punch
Staple
(page 3-19)
Punch
(page 3-21)
Paper Output (page 4-13)
Color/Image Quality
Density (page 3-9)
Original Image (page 3-10)
Color Selection
Auto Color
(page 3-7)
Full Color
(page 3-7)
Black & White
(page 3-7)
Single Color
(page 4-34)
EcoPrint (page 4-34)
Color Balance (page 4-35)
Hue Adjustment (page 4-36)
One-touch Image Adjust (page 4-37)
Sharpness (page 4-39)
Background Density Adj. (page 4-40)
Saturation (page 4-41)
Prevent Bleed-thru (page 4-42)
Layout/Edit
Zoom (page 3-11)
Combine (page 4-14)
ix
Margin/Centering (page 4-16)
Border Erase (page 4-18)
Booklet (page 4-20)
Duplex (page 3-13)
Cover (page 4-22)
Form Overlay (page 4-23)
Page # (page 4-24)
Memo Page (page 4-26)
Poster (page 4-28)
Image Repeat (page 4-29)
Text Stamp (page 4-31)
Bates Stamp (page 4-32)
Advanced Setup
Continuous Scan (page 4-43)
Auto Image Rotation (page 4-44)
Negative Image (page 4-44)
Mirror Image (page 4-45)
Job Finish Notice (page 4-46)
File Name Entry (page 4-48)
Priority Override (page 4-48)
Repeat Copy (page 4-49)
OHP Backing Sheet (page 4-51)
Program (page 3-56)
Destination
Address Book (page 3-40)
E-mail Addr Entry (page 3-24)
Folder Path Entry (page 3-25)
FAX No. Entry (refer to Fax Operation Guide)
i-FAX Addr Entry (refer to Fax Operation Guide)
WSD Scan/DSM Scan (page 6-30)
Org./Sending Data Format
Original Size (page 6-2)
Mixed Size Originals (page 6-8)
2-sided/Book Original (page 6-11)
x
Original Orientation (page 6-12)
Sending Size (page 6-4)
File Format (page 6-14)
File Separation (page 6-15)
Long Original (refer to Fax Operation Guide)
Color/Image Quality
Density (page 6-19)
Original Image (page 6-18)
Scan Resolution (page 6-20)
FAX TX Resolution
(refer to Fax Operation Guide)
Color Selection (page 6-23)
Sharpness (page 6-21)
Background Density Adj. (page 6-22)
Prevent Bleed-thru (page 6-25)
Advanced Setup
Zoom (page 6-6)
Centering (page 6-7)
Border Erase (page 6-26)
FAX Delayed Transmission
(refer to Fax Operation Guide)
Continuous Scan (page 6-24)
Job Finish Notice (page 6-36)
File Name Entry (page 6-28)
E-mail Subject/Body (page 6-29)
i-FAX Subject/Body
(refer to Fax Operation Guide)
FAX Direct Transmission
(refer to Fax Operation Guide)
FAX Polling RX
(refer to Fax Operation Guide)
Send and Print (page 6-37)
Send and Store (page 6-37)
FTP Encrypted TX (page 6-38)
Text Stamp (page 6-39)
Bates Stamp (page 6-40)
Program (page 3-56)
xi
Custom Box
Store File
Functions Original Size (page 6-2)
Mixed Size Originals (page 6-8)
2-sided/Book Original (page 6-11)
Original Orientation (page 6-12)
Storing Size (page 7-4)
Prevent Bleed-thru (page 6-25)
Density (page 6-19)
Original Image (page 6-18)
Scan Resolution (page 6-20)
Color Selection (page 6-23)
Sharpness (page 6-21)
Background Density Adj. (page 6-22)
Zoom (page 6-6)
Centering (page 6-7)
Border Erase (page 6-26)
Continuous Scan (page 6-24)
Job Finish Notice (page 6-36)
File Name Entry (page 6-28)
Open
Print
Functions
Paper Selection (page 4-3)
Collate/Offset (page 3-15)
Staple/Punch
Staple
(page 3-19)
Punch
(page 3-21)
Paper Output (page 4-13)
Combine (page 4-14)
Margin/Centering (page 4-16)
Booklet (page 4-20)
Duplex (page 3-13)
Cover (page 4-22)
Form Overlay (page 7-9)
Page # (page 4-24)
Job Finish Notice (page 4-46)
File Name Entry (page 4-48)
Delete after Printed
(page 7-2)
xii
Priority Override (page 4-48)
EcoPrint (page 4-34)
Zoom (page 6-6)
Fold (page 4-11)
Text Stamp (page 4-31)
Bates Stamp (page 4-32)
Color Balance (page 4-35)
Hue Adjustment (page 4-36)
One-touch Image Adjust
(page 4-37)
Saturation (page 4-41)
Color/Image
Quality
Density (page 3-9)
Original Image (page 3-10)
Color Selection (page 6-23)
Sharpness (page 4-39)
Background Density Adj.
(page 4-40)
Prevent Bleed-thru
(page 4-42)
Send
Destination (page 3-40)
Functions
Sending Size (page 6-4)
File Format (page 6-14)
FAX TX Resolution
(refer to Fax Operation
Guide)
Centering (page 6-7)
FAX Delayed Transmission
(refer to Fax Operation
Guide)
Job Finish Notice (page 6-36)
File Name Entry (page 6-28)
E-mail Subject/Body
(page 6-29)
i-FAX Subject/Body
(refer to Fax Operation
Guide)
FTP Encrypted TX
(page 6-38)
Delete after Transmitted
(page 7-8)
xiii
Zoom (page 6-6)
File Separation (page 6-15)
Text Stamp (page 6-39)
Bates Stamp (page 6-40)
Color/Image
Quality
Density (page 6-19)
Original Image (page 6-18)
Resolution (page 6-18)
Color Selection (page 6-23)
Sharpness (page 6-21)
Background Density Adj.
(page 6-22)
Prevent Bleed-thru
(page 6-25)
Join (page 7-11)
Move/Copy (page 7-10)
Detail (page 3-46)
Search(Name) (page 3-46)
Search(No.) (page 3-46)
Add/Edit Box (page 7-2)
Job Box
Private Print/Stored Job (page 7-14)
Quick Copy/Proof and Hold (page 7-15)
Repeat Copy (page 7-18)
Form for Form Overlay (page 7-20)
Removable
Memory
Store File
Functions Original Size (page 6-2)
Mixed Size Originals (page 6-8)
2-sided/Book Original (page 6-11)
Original Orientation (page 6-12)
Storing Size (page 7-4)
Prevent Bleed-thru (page 6-25)
Density (page 6-19)
Original Image (page 6-18)
Scan Resolution (page 6-20)
Color Selection (page 6-23)
Sharpness (page 6-21)
Background Density Adj. (page 6-22)
Zoom (page 6-6)
Centering (page 6-7)
xiv
Border Erase (page 6-26)
Continuous Scan (page 6-24)
Job Finish Notice (page 6-36)
File Name Entry (page 6-28)
File Format (page 6-14)
Text Stamp (page 6-39)
Bates Stamp (page 6-40)
Print
Functions Paper Selection (page 4-3)
Collate/Offset (page 3-15)
Staple/Punch
Staple
(page 3-19)
Punch
(page 3-21)
Paper Output (page 4-13)
Duplex (page 3-13)
Job Finish Notice (page 4-46)
Priority Override (page 4-48)
Fold (page 4-11)
Text Stamp (page 4-31)
Bates Stamp (page 4-32)
Encrypted PDF Password (page 7-23)
JPEG/TIFF Print (page 7-23)
XPS Fit to Page (page 7-23)
Color/
Image
Quality
FAX Box (refer to Fax Operation Guide)
Program (page 3-56)
Printing Jobs (page 8-3)
Sending Jobs (page 8-5)
Storing Jobs (page 8-6)
Device/Communication (page 8-14)
Paper/Supplies (page 8-13)
xv
Color Selection (page 6-23)
Common Settings
Language (page 9-2)
Default Screen (page 9-3)
Sound
Buzzer (page 9-4)
FAX Speaker Volume
(refer to Fax Operation Guide)
FAX Monitor Volume
(refer to Fax Operation Guide)
Keyboard Layout (page Appendix-9)
Original / Paper
Settings
Custom Original Size (page 9-4)
Custom Paper Size (page 9-5)
Cassette Setting (page 9-6)
MP Tray Setting (page 9-7)
Media Type Setting (page 9-8)
Default Paper Source (page 9-9)
Original Auto Detect (page 9-10)
Media for Auto (Color) (page 9-10)
Media for Auto (B & W) (page 9-10)
Paper Source for Cover (page 9-11)
Special Paper Action (page 9-11)
Measurement (page 9-12)
Error Handling
Duplexing Error (page 9-13)
Finishing Error (page 9-13)
No Staple Error (page 9-13)
Finished Pages Exceeded (page 9-13)
Punch Waste Full Error (page 9-14)
Paper Mismatch Error (page 9-14)
Inserted Paper Mismatch (page 9-14)
Paper Jam before Staple (page 9-14)
Skewed originals (page 9-14)
Paper Output (page 9-15)
Orientation Confirmation (page 9-16)
Color Toner Empty Action (page 9-16)
Function Defaults
Original Orientation (page 9-17)
Original Image (Copy) (page 9-17)
Org. Image (Send/Store) (page 9-18)
Scan Resolution (page 9-18)
xvi
FAX TX Resolution
(refer to Fax Operation Guide)
Color Selection (Copy) (page 9-19)
Color Select.(Send/Store) (page 9-19)
File Format (page 9-20)
File Separation (page 9-20)
Backgrnd Density (Copy) (page 9-21)
BackgrndDens.(Send/Store)
(page 9-21)
Prevent Bleed-thru (Copy) (page 9-21)
Prevent Bleed(Send/Store)
(page 9-22)
Zoom (page 9-22)
Border Erase Default (page 9-23)
Border Erase to Back Page
(page 9-23)
Margin Default (page 9-24)
Auto Image Rotation (page 9-24)
EcoPrint (page 9-24)
Toner SaveLevel(EcoPrint)
(page 9-25)
High Comp. PDF Image (page 9-25)
Color TIFF Compression (page 9-26)
Image Quality (File Format)
(page 9-26)
Collate/Offset (page 9-26)
JPEG/TIFF Print (page 9-27)
XPS Fit to Page (page 9-27)
Continuous Scan (page 9-27)
PDF/A (page 9-28)
File Name Entry (page 9-28)
E-mail Subject/Body (page 9-29)
Repeat Copy (page 9-29)
USB Keyboard Type (page 9-30)
System Stamp (page 9-30)
Manual Staple (page 9-39)
Customize Status Display (page 9-40)
xvii
Low Toner Alert Level (page 9-40)
Offset One Page Documents (page 9-41)
Display Jobs Log (page 9-41)
Message Banner Print (page 9-42)
Copy
Paper Selection (page 9-43)
Auto Image Rotation Action (page 9-44)
Auto Paper Selection (page 9-44)
Auto % Priority (page 9-45)
Reserve Next Priority (page 9-45)
Paper Size for Small Original (page 9-45)
Preset Limit (page 9-46)
Quick Setup Registration (page 9-46)
Send
Quick Setup Registration (page 9-47)
Dest. Check before Send (page 9-47)
Entry Check for New Dest. (page 9-48)
Color Type (page 9-48)
Default Screen (page 9-49)
Send and Forward (page 9-49)
Document Box/
Removable Memory
Custom Box (page 9-56)
FAX Box (refer to Fax Operation Guide)
Job Box
Quick Copy Job Retention (page 7-15)
Repeat Copy Job Retention
(page 7-18)
Deletion of Job Retention (page 7-21)
Polling Box (refer to Fax Operation Guide)
Quick Setup Registration (page 9-57)
FAX (refer to Fax Operation Guide)
Printer
Emulation (page 9-58)
Color Setting (page 9-59)
Gloss Mode (page 9-59)
EcoPrint (page 9-60)
Toner SaveLevel(EcoPrint) (page 9-60)
Override A4/Letter (page 9-60)
Duplex (page 9-61)
Copies (page 9-61)
Orientation (page 9-62)
xviii
Form Feed Timeout (page 9-62)
LF Action (page 9-63)
CR Action (page 9-63)
Job Name (page 9-63)
User Name (page 9-64)
Paper Feed Mode (page 9-64)
System
Network
Host Name (page 9-96)
TCP/IP Setting
TCP/IP
(page 9-96)
IPv4 (page 9-97)
IPv6 (page 9-98)
Protocol Detail
(page 9-100)
NetWare (page 9-101)
AppleTalk (page 9-101)
WSD Scan (page 9-102)
WSD Print (page 9-102)
Enhanced WSD (page 9-102)
Enhanced WSD (SSL) (page 9-103)
Secure Protocol
SSL (page 9-103)
IPP Security
(page 9-104)
HTTP Security
(page 9-104)
LDAP Security
(page 9-105)
SMTP Security
(page 9-105)
POP3 Security
(User 1)
(page 9-106)
POP3 Security
(User 2)
(page 9-106)
POP3 Security
(User 3)
(page 9-107)
IPSec (page 9-107)
LAN Interface (page 9-108)
Restart Network (page 9-108)
xix
Restart Entire Device (page 9-95)
Interface Block
Setting
USB Host (page 9-109)
USB Device (page 9-109)
Optional Interface 1 (page 9-109)
Optional Interface 2 (page 9-109)
Security Level (page 9-110)
Document Guard (page 9-110)
Data Security (page 9-112)
Optional Function (page 9-114)
Date/Timer
Date/Time (page 9-77)
Date Format (page 9-77)
Time Zone (page 9-78)
Auto Panel Reset (page 9-78)
Auto Sleep (page 9-79)
Auto Error Clear (page 9-80)
Low Power Timer (page 9-79)
Panel Reset Timer (page 9-78)
Sleep Timer (page 9-80)
Interrupt Clear Timer (page 9-81)
Error Job Skip (page 9-81)
Error Clear Timer (page 9-80)
Sleep Act. (Job Separator) (page 9-82)
Adjustment/
Maintenance
Density Adjustment
Copy (page 9-69)
Send/Box (page 9-69)
Background Density
Adj.
Copy (Auto) (page 9-70)
Send/Box (Auto) (page 9-70)
Drum Refresh (page 9-70)
Correcting Black Line (page 9-71)
System Initialization (page 9-71)
Display Brightness (page 9-72)
Silent Mode (page 9-72)
Auto Color Correction (page 9-72)
Color Registration (page 9-72)
Calibration Cycle (page 9-74)
Tone Curve Adjustment (page 9-75)
xx
Calibration (page 9-75)
Developer Refresh (page 9-76)
Laser Scanner Cleaning (page 9-76)
First Print Position (page 9-76)
Report
Print Report
Status Page (page 9-65)
Font List (page 9-65)
Network Status (page 9-66)
Service Status (page 9-66)
Result Report Setting
Send Result Report (page 9-66)
FAX RX Result Report
(refer to Fax Operation Guide)
Job Finish Notice Setting
(refer to Fax Operation Guide)
Sending Log History
Auto Sending (page 9-68)
Send Log History (page 9-68)
Destination (page 9-67)
Job Log Subject (page 9-68)
Edit Destination
Address Book (page 9-83)
One Touch Key (page 9-87)
Print List (refer to Fax Operation Guide)
User Login/Job
Accounting
Address Book
Defaults
Sort (page 9-89)
User Login Setting
User Login (page 10-2)
Narrow Down (page 9-89)
Local User List (page 10-5)
Local Authorization (page 10-9)
Group
Authorization Set.
Group
Authorization
(page 10-10)
Group List
(page 10-11)
Guest
Authorization Set.
Guest
Authorization
(page 10-12)
Guest Property
(page 10-13)
Obtain NW User Property
(page 10-15)
xxi
Simple Login
Settings
Simple Login
(page 10-17)
Simple Login Key
(page 10-17)
Job Accounting
Setting
Job Accounting (page 10-20)
Print Accounting Report (page 10-32)
Total Job Accounting (page 10-29)
Each Job Accounting (page 10-29)
Accounting List (page 10-22)
Default Setting
Apply Limit
(page 10-26)
Copy/Printer
Count
(page 10-24)
Default Counter
Limit
(page 10-26)
Count by Paper
Size
(page 10-30)
Unknown ID Job (page 10-10)
User Property(page 10-9)
Application (page 9-114)
Internet (page 9-90)
xxii
Environment
The service environmental conditions are as follows:
•
Temperature: 50 to 90.5 °F (10 to 32.5 °C)
(But humidity should be 70% or less when temperature is 90.5 °F (32.5 °C).)
•
Humidity: 15 to 80%
(But temperature should be 86 °F (30 °C) or less when humidity is 80%.)
Use coated paper at a temperature of 80.6 °F (27°C) or less and a humidity of 60% or less.
Adverse environmental conditions may affect the image quality. It is recommended to use the machine at a
temperature: around 60.8 to 80.6 °F or less (16 to 27 °C), humidity: around 36 to 65%. In addition, Avoid the
following locations when selecting a site for the machine.
The machine automatically detects and displays the following message when the environmental temperature is
too high or too low.
Message: "Warning for high temperature. Adjust the room temperature." or "Warning for low temperature.
Adjust the room temperature."
To use the machine under optimum conditions, adjust the temperature and the humidity of your room if the
message is displayed.
•
Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight.
•
Avoid locations with vibrations.
•
Avoid locations with drastic temperature fluctuations.
•
Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air.
•
Avoid poorly ventilated locations.
If the floor is easily damaged by casters, when this machine is moved after installation, the floor material may
be damaged.
During copying, some ozone is released, but the amount does not cause any ill effect to one’s health. If,
however, the machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when making an
extremely large number of copies, the smell may become unpleasant. To maintain the appropriate environment
for copy work, it is suggested that the room be properly ventilated.
xxiii
Cautions when handling consumables
CAUTION
Do not attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box. Dangerous sparks may cause
burns.
Keep the toner container and the waste toner box out of the reach of children.
If toner happens to spill from the toner container or the waste toner box, avoid inhalation and ingestion,
as well as contact with your eyes and skin.
•
If you do happen to inhale toner, move to a place with fresh air and gargle thoroughly with a large amount of
water. If coughing develops, contact a physician.
•
If you do happen to ingest toner, rinse your mouth with water and drink 1 or 2 cups of water to dilute the
contents of your stomach. If necessary, contact a physician.
•
If you do happen to get toner in your eyes, flush them thoroughly with water. If there is any remaining
tenderness, contact a physician.
•
If toner does happen to get on your skin, wash with soap and water.
Do not attempt to force open or destroy the toner container or the waste toner box.
Other precautions
Return the exhausted toner container and waste toner box to your dealer or service representative. The
collected toner container and waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant
regulations.
Store the machine while avoiding exposure to direct sunlight.
Store the machine in a place where the temperature stays below 40ºC while avoiding sharp changes of
temperature and humidity.
If the machine will not be used for an extended period of time, remove the paper from the cassette and the Multi
Purpose (MP) Tray, return it to its original package and reseal it.
If the optional Fax kit is installed and the main power switch is off, transmitting/receiving Fax is disabled. Do not
turn off the main power switch, but press the Power key on the operation panel to enter Sleep mode.
xxiv
Laser Safety (Europe)
Laser radiation could be hazardous to the human body. For this reason, laser radiation emitted inside this
machine is hermetically sealed within the protective housing and external cover. In the normal operation of the
product by user, no radiation can leak from the machine.
This machine is classified as Class 1 laser product under IEC/EN 60825-1:2007.
Caution: Performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation
exposure.
These labels are attached to the laser scanner unit inside the machine and are not in a user access area.
The label shown below is attached on the right side of the machine.
xxv
Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning
It may be prohibited to copy/scan copyrighted material without permission of the copyright owner.
Copying/Scanning the following items is prohibited and may be penalized by law.
It may not be limited to these items. Do not knowingly copy/scan the items that are not to be copied/scanned.
•
Paper money
•
Bank note
•
Securities
•
Stamp
•
Passport
•
Certificate
Local laws and regulations may prohibit or restrict copying/scanning of other items not mentioned above.
EN ISO 7779
Maschinenlärminformations-Verordnung 3. GPSGV, 06.01.2004: Der höchste Schalldruckpegel beträgt 70 dB
(A) oder weniger gemäß EN ISO 7779.
EK1-ITB 2000
Das Gerät ist nicht für die Benutzung im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz vorgesehen. Um
störende Reflexionen am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz zu vermeiden, darf dieses Produkt nicht im unmittelbaren
Gesichtsfeld platziert werden.
xxvi
Legal and Safety Information
Please read this information before using your machine. This chapter provides information on
the following topics.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Legal Information ............................................................................. xxviii
Regarding Trade Names.................................................................. xxviii
Energy Saving Control Function .......................................................xxxv
Automatic 2-Sided Copy Function ....................................................xxxv
Paper Recycling................................................................................xxxv
Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program.........................................xxxv
About this Operation Guide .............................................................xxxvi
xxvii
Legal Information
Copying or other reproduction of all or part of this guide without the prior written consent of Copyright owner is
prohibited.
Regarding Trade Names
•
PRESCRIBE and KPDL are trademarks of Kyocera Corporation.
•
Microsoft, Windows, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008,
Windows 7 and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
U.S.A. and/or other countries.
•
PCL is a trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
•
Adobe Acrobat, Adobe Reader and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
•
Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
•
Novell and NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc.
•
IBM and IBM PC/AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
•
AppleTalk, Bonjour, Macintosh, and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
•
TypeBankG-B, TypeBankM-M and Typebank-OCR are trademarks of TypeBank®.
•
All European language fonts installed in this machine are used under licensing agreement with Monotype
Imaging Inc.
•
Helvetica, Palatino and Times are registered trademarks of Linotype GmbH.
•
ITC Avant Garde Gothic, ITC Bookman, ITC ZapfChancery and ITC ZapfDingbats are registered
trademarks of International Typeface Corporation.
•
UFST™ MicroType® fonts by Monotype Imaging Inc. are installed in this machine.
•
This machine contains the software having modules developed by Independent JPEG Group.
•
This machine contains the NF module developed by
ACCESS Co., Ltd.
•
This product contains NetFront Browser of ACCESS CO.,
LTD.
•
ACCESS, ACCESS logo and NetFront are trademarks or
registered trademarks of ACCESS CO., LTD. in the United States, Japan and other countries.
•
© 2011 ACCESS CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
•
Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates.
All other brands and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective
companies. The designations ™ and ® will not be used in this Operation Guide.
xxviii
GPL/LGPL
This product contains GPL (http://www.gnu.org/licenses/gpl.html) and/or LGPL (http://www.gnu.org/licenses/
lgpl.html) software as part of its firmware. You can get the source code, and you are permitted to copy,
redistribute and modify it under the terms of GPL/LGPL.
Open SSL License
Copyright (c) 1998-2006 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3
All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgment:
“This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http:/
/www.openssl.org/)”
4
The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “OpenSSL Project” must not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without prior written permission.
For written permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.
5
Products derived from this software may not be called “OpenSSL” nor may “OpenSSL” appear in their
names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.
6
Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: “This product includes
software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)”
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY
OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
xxix
Original SSLeay License
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was
written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are adhered to.
The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code;
not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright
terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Copyright remains Eric Young’s, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed.
If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library
used.
This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided
with the package.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1
Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3
All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgment:
“This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)”
The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic
related :-).
4
If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application
code) you must include an acknowledgment:
“This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)”
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be
changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU
Public Licence.]
xxx
Monotype Imaging License Agreement
1
Software shall mean the digitally encoded, machine readable, scalable outline data as encoded in a
special format as well as the UFST Software.
2
You agree to accept a non-exclusive license to use the Software to reproduce and display weights, styles
and versions of letters, numerals, characters and symbols (Typefaces) solely for your own customary
business or personal purposes at the address stated on the registration card you return to Monotype
Imaging. Under the terms of this License Agreement, you have the right to use the Fonts on up to three
printers. If you need to have access to the fonts on more than three printers, you need to acquire a multiuser license agreement which can be obtained from Monotype Imaging. Monotype Imaging retains all
rights, title and interest to the Software and Typefaces and no rights are granted to you other than a
License to use the Software on the terms expressly set forth in this Agreement.
3
To protect proprietary rights of Monotype Imaging, you agree to maintain the Software and other
proprietary information concerning the Typefaces in strict confidence and to establish reasonable
procedures regulating access to and use of the Software and Typefaces.
4
You agree not to duplicate or copy the Software or Typefaces, except that you may make one backup
copy. You agree that any such copy shall contain the same proprietary notices as those appearing on the
original.
5
This License shall continue until the last use of the Software and Typefaces, unless sooner terminated.
This License may be terminated by Monotype Imaging if you fail to comply with the terms of this License
and such failure is not remedied within thirty (30) days after notice from Monotype Imaging. When this
License expires or is terminated, you shall either return to Monotype Imaging or destroy all copies of the
Software and Typefaces and documentation as requested.
6
You agree that you will not modify, alter, disassemble, decrypt, reverse engineer or decompile the
Software.
7
Monotype Imaging warrants that for ninety (90) days after delivery, the Software will perform in
accordance with Monotype Imaging-published specifications, and the diskette will be free from defects in
material and workmanship. Monotype Imaging does not warrant that the Software is free from all bugs,
errors and omissions.
The parties agree that all other warranties, expressed or implied, including warranties of fitness for a
particular purpose and merchantability, are excluded.
8
Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Monotype Imaging in connection with the Software and
Typefaces is repair or replacement of defective parts, upon their return to Monotype Imaging.
In no event will Monotype Imaging be liable for lost profits, lost data, or any other incidental or
consequential damages, or any damages caused by abuse or misapplication of the Software and
Typefaces.
9
Massachusetts U.S.A. law governs this Agreement.
10 You shall not sublicense, sell, lease, or otherwise transfer the Software and/or Typefaces without the prior
written consent of Monotype Imaging.
11 Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in the Rights in
Technical Data and Computer Software clause at FAR 252-227-7013, subdivision (b)(3)(ii) or
subparagraph (c)(1)(ii), as appropriate. Further use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions
applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in FAR 52.227-19 (c)(2).
12 You acknowledge that you have read this Agreement, understand it, and agree to be bound by its terms
and conditions. Neither party shall be bound by any statement or representation not contained in this
Agreement. No change in this Agreement is effective unless written and signed by properly authorized
representatives of each party. By opening this diskette package, you agree to accept the terms and
conditions of this Agreement.
xxxi
Knopflerfish License
This product includes software developed by the Knopflerfish Project.
http://www.knopflerfish.org
Copyright 2003-2010 The Knopflerfish Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that
the following conditions are met:
- Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
- Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
- Neither the name of the KNOPFLERFISH project nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse
or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
Apache License (Version 2.0)
Apache License
Version 2.0, January 2004
http://www.apache.org/licenses/
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION
1
Definitions.
“License” shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and distribution as defined by
Sections 1 through 9 of this document.
“Licensor” shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the
License.
“Legal Entity” shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control, are controlled by,
or are under common control with that entity. For the purposes of this definition, “control” means (i) the
power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or
otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty percent (50%) or more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial
ownership of such entity.
“You” (or “Your”) shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this License.
“Source” form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications, including but not limited to software
source code, documentation source, and configuration files.
“Object” form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source
form, including but not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation, and conversions to
other media types.
xxxii
“Work” shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object form, made available under the
License, as indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work (an example is
provided in the Appendix below).
“Derivative Works” shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object form, that is based on (or derived
from) the Work and for which the editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications
represent, as a whole, an original work of authorship. For the purposes of this License, Derivative Works
shall not include works that remain separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of,
the Work and Derivative Works thereof.
“Contribution” shall mean any work of authorship, including the original version of the Work and any
modifications or additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to
Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to
submit on behalf of the copyright owner. For the purposes of this definition, “submitted” means any form of
electronic, verbal, or written communication sent to the Licensor or its representatives, including but not
limited to communication on electronic mailing lists, source code control systems, and issue tracking
systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor for the purpose of discussing and improving
the Work, but excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise designated in writing
by the copyright owner as “Not a Contribution.”
“Contributor” shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has
been received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work.
2
Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby
grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable copyright license
to reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of, publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the
Work and such Derivative Works in Source or Object form.
3
Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby
grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable (except as stated
in this section) patent license to make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer
the Work, where such license applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are
necessarily infringed by their Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their Contribution(s) with the Work
to which such Contribution(s) was submitted. If You institute patent litigation against any entity (including a
cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that the Work or a Contribution incorporated within the
Work constitutes direct or contributory patent infringement, then any patent licenses granted to You under
this License for that Work shall terminate as of the date such litigation is filed.
4
Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative Works thereof in any
medium, with or without modifications, and in Source or Object form, provided that You meet the following
conditions:
(a)You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License; and
(b)You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files; and
(c)You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute, all copyright, patent,
trademark, and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work, excluding those notices that do
not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works; and
(d)If the Work includes a “NOTICE” text file as part of its distribution, then any Derivative Works that You
distribute must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file,
excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of the
following places: within a NOTICE text file distributed as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source
form or documentation, if provided along with the Derivative Works; or, within a display generated by
the Derivative Works, if and wherever such third-party notices normally appear. The contents of the
NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the License. You may add Your own
attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside or as an addendum to the
NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed as
modifying the License.
xxxiii
You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide additional or different
license terms and conditions for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or for any such
Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use, reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise
complies with the conditions stated in this License.
5
Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise, any Contribution intentionally
submitted for inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of this
License, without any additional terms or conditions. Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall
supersede or modify the terms of any separate license agreement you may have executed with Licensor
regarding such Contributions.
6
Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade names, trademarks, service marks,
or product names of the Licensor, except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the
origin of the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file.
7
Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the
Work (and each Contributor provides its Contributions) on an “AS IS” BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES
OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or
conditions of TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. You are solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the
Work and assume any risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License.
8
Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory, whether in tort (including negligence),
contract, or otherwise, unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly negligent acts) or
agreed to in writing, shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages, including any direct, indirect,
special, incidental, or consequential damages of any character arising as a result of this License or out of
the use or inability to use the Work (including but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill, work
stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all other commercial damages or losses), even if
such Contributor has been advised of the possibility of such damages.
9
Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing the Work or Derivative Works thereof, You
may choose to offer, and charge a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity, or other liability
obligations and/or rights consistent with this License. However, in accepting such obligations, You may act
only on Your own behalf and on Your sole responsibility, not on behalf of any other Contributor, and only if
You agree to indemnify, defend, and hold each Contributor harmless for any liability incurred by, or claims
asserted against, such Contributor by reason of your accepting any such warranty or additional liability.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
APPENDIX: How to apply the Apache License to your work.
To apply the Apache License to your work, attach the following boilerplate notice, with the fields enclosed by
brackets “[]” replaced with your own identifying information. (Don't include the brackets!) The text should be
enclosed in the appropriate comment syntax for the file format. We also recommend that a file or class
name and description of purpose be included on the same “printed page” as the copyright notice for easier
identification within third-party archives.
Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the “License”); you may not use this file except in compliance
with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software distributed under the License is distributed
on an “AS IS” BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
See the License for the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License.
xxxiv
Energy Saving Control Function
The device comes equipped with a Low Power Mode where energy consumption is reduced after a certain
amount of time elapses since the device was last used, as well as a Sleep where printer and fax functions
remain in a waiting state but power consumption is still reduced to a minimum when there is no activity with the
device within a set amount of time.
Low Power Mode
The device automatically enters Low Power Mode when 3 minutes (for the 30/30 ppm, 35/35 ppm, or 45/45 ppm
model) or 5 minutes (for the 55/50 ppm model) have passed since the device was last used. The amount of time
of no activity that must pass before Low Power Mode is activated may be lengthened. For more information refer
to Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode on page 2-9.
Sleep
The device automatically enters Sleep when 30 minutes (for the 30/30 ppm model), 45 minutes (for the
35/35 ppm model), or 60 minutes (for the 45/45 ppm or 55/50 ppm model) have passed since the device was
last used. The amount of time of no activity that must pass before Sleep is activated may be lengthened. For
more information see Sleep and Auto Sleep on page 2-10.
Automatic 2-Sided Copy Function
This device includes 2-sided copying as a standard function. For example, by copying two 1-sided originals onto
a single sheet of paper as a 2-sided copy, it is possible to lower the amount of paper used. For more information
see Duplex on page 3-13.
Paper Recycling
This device supports the recycled paper which reduces the load on the environment. Your sales or service
representative can provide information about recommended paper types.
Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program
We have determined as a participating company in the International Energy Star Program that
this product is compliant with the standards laid out in the International Energy Star Program.
xxxv
About this Operation Guide
This Operation Guide contains the following chapters.
Chapter 1 - Part Names
Identifies machine parts and operation panel keys.
Chapter 2 - Preparation before Use
Explains adding paper, placing originals, connecting the machine, and necessary configurations before first use.
Chapter 3 - Basic Operation
Describes the procedures for basic copying, printing and scanning.
Chapter 4 - Copying Functions
Describes the functions you can use when copying.
Chapter 5 - Printing
Describes the functions you can use when printing originals.
Chapter 6 - Sending Functions
Describes the functions you can use when sending originals.
Chapter 7 - Document Box
Provides a basic guide to using document boxes.
Chapter 8 - Status / Job Cancel
Explains how to check the job status and job history and how to cancel jobs being printed or waiting to print.
Also explains how to check the remaining paper and device status and how to cancel fax transmission
Chapter 9 - Default Setting (System Menu)
Describes the System Menu options for general machine operation.
Chapter 10 - Management
Explains user login administration and job accounting.
Chapter 11 - Maintenance
Describes cleaning and toner replacement.
Chapter 12 - Troubleshooting
Explains how to handle error messages, paper jams and other problems.
Appendix
Explains how to enter characters, and lists the machine specifications.
Introduces the convenient optional equipment available for this machine.
Provides information on media types and paper sizes. Also includes a glossary of terms.
xxxvi
Conventions in This Guide
The following conventions are used depending on the nature of the description.
Convention
Description
Example
Bold
Indicates the operation panel
keys or a computer screen.
Press the Start key.
[Regular]
Indicates the touch panel keys.
Press [OK].
Italic
Indicates a message displayed
on the touch panel.
Ready to copy is displayed.
Used to emphasize a key word,
phrase or references to
additional information.
For more information refer to Sleep and
Auto Sleep on page 2-9.
Note
Indicates supplemental
information or operations for
reference.
NOTE:
Important
Indicates items that are required
or prohibited so as to avoid
problems.
IMPORTANT:
Indicates what must be
observed to prevent injury or
machine breakdown and how to
deal with it.
CAUTION:
Caution
Description of Operation Procedure
In this Operation Guide, continuous operation of the keys on the touch panel is as follows:
Description in this
Operation Guide
Actual procedure
Press [Copy].

Press [Next] of Quick Setup.

Press [ ] twice.

Press [Change] of Original Image.
Press [Copy], [Next] of Quick
Setup, [ ] twice, and then
[Change] of Original Image.
xxxvii
Originals and Paper Sizes
This section explains the notation used in this guide when referring to sizes of originals or paper sizes.
As with A4, B5 and Letter, which may be used either in the horizontal or vertical direction, horizontal direction is
indicated by an additional letter R in order to indicate the orientation of the original/paper.
Placement direction
Vertical direction
Original
Indicated size *
A4, B5, A5, B6,
A6, 16K, Letter,
Statement
Paper
For the originals/paper, dimension A is longer
than B.
Horizontal direction
Original
A4-R, B5-R, A5-R,
B6-R, A6-R, 16KR, Letter-R,
Statement-R
Paper
For the originals/paper, dimension A is shorter
than B.
*
The size of the original/paper that can be used depends on the
function and source tray. For further details, refer to the page
detailing that function or source tray.
Icons on the Touch Panel
The following icons are used to indicate originals and paper placement directions on the touch panel.
Placement direction
Originals
Vertical direction
Horizontal direction
xxxviii
Paper
1 Part Names
This chapter identifies the machine parts and operation panel keys.
•
•
Operation Panel ..................................................................................1-2
Machine ..............................................................................................1-4
1-1
Part Names
Operation Panel
Displays the Status/Job Cancel screen.
Displays the Copy screen.
Switches the touch panel display to enlarged display in the
Copy screen or Send screen.
Displays help guidance.
Returns settings to their default states.
Displays the System Menu.
Displays number
of sheets printed
and number of
pages scanned.
Lights or blinks when an error occurs
and a job is stopped.
Blinks while the machine is accessing the hard disk,
fax memory or USB memory (general-purpose item).
Blinks during printing, fax sending and receiving,
scan send, and print data receiving.
Displays the FAX screen.
Displays the screen for sending.
You can also change this to show the address book screen.
Displays the Document Box screen.
Displays the Application screen.
Displays the Program screen.
1-2
Part Names
Clears entered numbers and characters.
Pauses the printing job in progress.
Puts the machine into Low Power Mode.
Puts the machine into Sleep
Mode. Recovers from Sleep
if in Sleep Mode.
Lit when the machine's
main power is on.
Numeric keys.
Enter numbers and symbols.
Scans all documents in black & white.
Perform user switching
authentication and logout.
Displays the Interrupt Copy screen.
Scans all documents in full color.
Automatically recognizes whether a document is color
or black & white and then scans the document.
Starts copying and scanning operations
and processing for setting operations.
Finalizes numeric key entry, and finalizes screen
during setting of functions. Operates linked with
the on-screen [OK].
Recalls already registered destinations
and programs for sending.
1-3
1
Part Names
Machine
1
2
3
5-h
5-e
5-b 5-c
5-d
4
1
Platen Cover (Option)
2
Mailbox (Option)
3
Front Cover
4
Document Finisher (Option)
5
Cassette 1 to 7 (Cassette 3 to 7 are Options)
5-f
5-g
5-a
5-j
5-i
• 5-d: Cassette 4
• 5-a: Cassette 1
• 5-b: Cassette 2
• 5-c: Cassette 3
• 5-e: Cassette 5
• 5-f: Cassette 6
• 5-g: Cassette 7
• 5-h: Cassette 5
• 5-i: Cassette 3 or 6
• 5-j: Cassette 4 or 7
1-4
5
Part Names
1
16
10
17
6
7
8
11
9
12
13
14
18
19
15
25
24
21
20
22 23
6
Network Interface Connector
21 Release key
7
USB Port (A2)
22 Waste Toner Box
8
USB Interface Connector (B1)
23 Cleaning Brush
9
Option Interface
24 Waste Toner Tray
10 Original Size Indicator Plates
25 Toner Container Release Lever
11 Slit Glass
12 Toner Container (Black)
13 Toner Container (Magenta)
14 Toner Container (Cyan)
15 Toner Container (Yellow)
16 Document Processor (Option)
17 Platen
18 Clip Holder
19 Operation Panel
20 Handles
1-5
Part Names
26
27
28 29
30
31
33
32
36
37
38
39
34
40
41
42
35
26 Paper Length Guide
27 (Paper Width Guide) Lock
28 Inner Tray
29 Paper stopper
30 USB Port (A1)
31 Right Cover 1 Lever
32 Right Cover 1
33 Main Power Switch
34 Paper Width Adjusting Tab
35 Handle
36 Right Cover 2 Lever
37 Right Cover 2
38 Paper Width Guide
39 Support Tray Section of the Multi Purpose Tray
40 Multi Purpose Tray
41 Right Cover 3 Lever
42 Right Cover 3
1-6
2 Preparation before Use
This chapter explains the preparations before using this equipment for the first time as well
as the procedures for loading paper and originals.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Check the Accessories .......................................................................2-2
Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables...............2-3
Connecting Cables..............................................................................2-5
Power On/Off ......................................................................................2-7
Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode ....................................2-9
Sleep and Auto Sleep .......................................................................2-10
Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle ................................................2-10
Switching the Language for Display [Language]...............................2-11
Setting Date and Time ......................................................................2-12
Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection) ..........................................2-13
Installing Software.............................................................................2-16
Embedded Web Server RX (Settings for E-mail)..............................2-24
Loading Paper...................................................................................2-27
Loading Originals ..............................................................................2-44
2-1
Preparation before Use
Check the Accessories
Check that the following accessories are included.
•
Safety Guide
•
Quick Guide
•
DVD (Product Library)
Documents Contained in the Included DVD
The following documents are contained in the included DVD (Product Library). Refer to them as necessary.
Documents
Operation Guide (This Guide)
FAX Operation Guide
Card Authentication Kit (B) Operation Guide
Data Security Kit (E) Operation Guide
Embedded Web Server RX Operation Guide
Printing System Driver User Guide
Network FAX Driver Operation Guide
Network Tool for Direct Printing Operation Guide
Network Print Monitor User Guide
File Management Utility User Guide
2-2
Preparation before Use
Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables
Check the method to connect the equipment to a PC or network, and prepare the necessary cables.
2
Connection Example
Determine the method to connect the equipment to a PC or network by referring to the illustration below.
Connecting a scanner to your PC network with a network
cable (1000BASE-T, 100BASE-TX or 10BASE-T)
Administrator’s
PC
Embedded Web Server
RX
Network
Send E-mail
Sends the image data
of scanned originals to
the desired recipient
as a file attached to an
E-mail message.
Network settings, Scanner
default settings, User and
destination registration
MFP
Printing
Network
USB
Saves the scanned
image as a data file on
your PC.
Network
Network FAX
(Option)
Send SMB
Network
Network
Send FTP
Sends the scanned
image as a data file on
the FTP.
FAX (Option)
TWAIN Scanning
FAX
Network
WIA Scanning
Network
2-3
TWAIN and WIA are
standardized interface
for communication
between software
applications and image
acquisition devices.
Preparation before Use
Preparing Necessary Cables
The following interfaces are available to connect the equipment to a PC. Prepare the necessary cables
according to the interface you use.
Available Standard Interfaces
Function
Interface
Necessary Cable
Printer/Scanner
/Network FAX*
Network interface
LAN (10BASE-T or
100BASE-TX, 1000BASE-T
Shielded)
Printer
USB interface
USB2.0 compatible cable
(Hi-Speed USB compliant,
Max. 5.0 m, Shielded)
*
Function available when using optional fax kit. For details on
Network FAX, refer to the Fax System (V) Operation Guide.
2-4
Preparation before Use
Connecting Cables
Connecting LAN Cable (Optional)
Follow the steps below to connect a LAN cable to the machine.
1
When the machine is powered up, first press the
Power key on the operation panel. Check that the
Power indicator, the processing indicator and the
memory indicator are off. After this, turn off the
main power switch.
2
Connect the LAN cable to the network interface
connector located on left side of the body.
3
Connect the other end of the cable to the hub.
4
Power on the machine, and configure the network.
For details, refer to Network Setup (LAN Cable
Connection) on page 2-13.
Make sure that lamps
other than this lamp
are off.
2-5
2
Preparation before Use
Connecting USB Cable
Follow the steps below to connect a USB cable to the machine.
1
When the machine is powered up, first press the
Power key on the operation panel. Check that the
Power indicator, the processing indicator and the
memory indicator are off. After this, turn off the
main power switch.
2
Connect the USB cable to the USB interface
connector (B1) located on the left side of the body.
3
Connect the other end of the cable to the PC.
Make sure that lamps
other than this lamp
are off.
Connecting the Power Cable
Connect one end of the supplied power cable to the machine and the other end to a power outlet.
IMPORTANT: Only use the power cable that comes with the machine.
2-6
Preparation before Use
Power On/Off
Power On
When the main power indicator is lit... (Recovery from sleep)
Press the Power key.
When the main power indicator is off...
Open the main power switch cover and turn the main
power switch on.
NOTE: If the optional Data Security Kit is installed, a message might display indicating the security function is
being activated and time may be taken to start up when the power is turned on.
IMPORTANT: When turning off the main power switch, do not turn on the main power switch again immediately.
Wait more than 5 seconds, and then turn on the main power switch.
2-7
2
Preparation before Use
Power Off
Before turning off the main power switch, press the Power key on the operation panel to off. Make sure that the
Power key, the processing indicator and the memory indicator are off before turning off the main power switch.
If you will not switch of the main power switch, refer to Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode on page 2-9,
and Sleep and Auto Sleep on page 2-10.
CAUTION: The hard disk may be operating when the Power key, the Processing indicator or Memory indicator
is lit or blinking. Turning off the main power switch while the hard disk is operating may cause damage.
Make sure that lamps
other than this lamp
are off.
In case of not using the machine for an extended period of time
CAUTION: If this machine will be left unused for an extended period (e.g. overnight), turn it off at the
main power switch. If the machine will not be used for an even longer period of time (e.g. vacation),
remove the power plug from the outlet as a safety precaution. If the optional Fax kit is installed, note that
turning the machine off at the main power switch disables fax transmission and reception.
CAUTION: Remove paper from the cassettes and seal it in the paper storage bag to protect it from humidity.
2-8
Preparation before Use
Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode
Low Power Mode
To activate Low Power Mode, press the Energy Saver
key. Touch panel and all indicators on the operation
panel will go out to save power except the Energy
Saver, Power, and main power indicators. This status
is referred to as Low Power Mode.
If print data is received during Low Power Mode, the
machine automatically wakes up and starts printing.
Also when fax data arrives while the machine is in Low
Power Mode when using the optional fax, the machine
automatically wakes up and starts printing.
To resume, perform one of the following actions. The
30/30 ppm or 35/35 ppm model will be ready to operate
within 15 seconds, or the 45/45 ppm or 55/50 ppm
model will be ready within 20 seconds.
•
Press any key on the operation panel.
•
Open the platen cover or the optional document
processor.
•
Place originals in the optional document processor.
Note that ambient environmental conditions, such as
ventilation, may cause the machine to respond more
slowly.
Auto Low Power Mode
Auto Low Power Mode automatically switches the machine into Low Power Mode if left idle for a preset time.
The default preset time is 3 minutes (for the 30/30 ppm, 35/35 ppm, or 45/45 ppm model) or 5 minutes (for the
55/50 ppm model).
2-9
2
Preparation before Use
Sleep and Auto Sleep
Sleep
To enter Sleep, press the Power key. Touch panel and
all indicators on the operation panel will go out to save
a maximum amount of power except the Main Power
indicator. This status is referred to as Sleep.
If print data is received during Sleep, the print job is
performed while the touch panel remains unlit.
When using the optional fax, received fax data is printed
out while the operation panel also remains unlit.
To resume, press the Power key. The 30/30 ppm or
35/35 ppm model will be ready within 20 seconds, or the
45/45 ppm or 55/50 ppm model will be ready within 30
seconds.
Note that ambient environmental conditions, such as
ventilation, may cause the machine to respond more
slowly.
Auto Sleep
Auto Sleep automatically switches the machine into Sleep if left idle for a preset time in the Low Power Mode.
The default preset time is 30 minutes (for the 30/30 ppm model), 45 minutes (for the 35/35 ppm model), or 60
minutes (for the 45/45 ppm or 55/50 ppm model).
Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle
Adjust the angle of the operation panel in two as shown
by releasing the operation panel lock lever.
2-10
Preparation before Use
Switching the Language for Display [Language]
Select the language displayed on the touch panel.
2
Use the procedure below to select the language.
Common Settings - Language
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings] and then [Change] of
Language.
3
Press the key for the language you want to use.
4
Press [OK].
Set the language to use for the touch panel display.
English
Deutsch
Français
Nederlands
Ɋɭɫɫɤɢɣ
Português
Español
Italiano
Cancel
Status
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
The touch panel language will be changed.
2-11
Preparation before Use
Setting Date and Time
Follow the steps below to set the local date and time at the place of installation.
When you send an E-mail using the transmission function, the date and time as set here will be printed in the
header of the E-mail message. Set the date, time and time difference from GMT of the region where the machine
is used.
NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with
administrator privileges. If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter
a login user name and password, and press [Login]. Refer to Adding a User (Local User List) on page 10-5 for
the default login user name and password.
Be sure to set the time difference before setting the date and time.
If you change Date/Time setting, trial functions will be unavailable. For details, refer to Optional Function on
page 9-114.
Date/Timer - Time Zone
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [ ], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of
Time Zone.
3
Select the region.
Set time zone.
Select the location nearest you.
NOTE: Press [
Time Zone
] or [
] to view the next region.
-12:00 International Date Line West
4
-11:00 Samoa
Press [Off] or [On] of Summer Time and press [OK].
-11:00 Universal Coordinated Time-11
1/16
-10:00 Hawaii
-09:00 Alaska
-08:00 Baja California
Cancel
OK
NOTE: If you select a region that does not utilize
summer time, the summer time setting screen will not
appear.
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
Date/Timer - Date/Time
5
Press [Change] of Date/Time.
6
Set the date and time. Press [+] or [–] in each
setting.
7
Press [OK].
Set the date and time.
2010
Year
10
Month
10
Day
Off
10
Hour
10
Minute
31
Second
Cancel
Status
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
2-12
Preparation before Use
Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection)
The machine is equipped with network interface, which is compatible with network protocols such as TCP/IP
(IPv4), TCP/IP (IPv6), IPX/SPX, NetBEUI, IPSec, and AppleTalk. It enables network printing on the Windows,
Macintosh, UNIX, NetWare and other platforms.
This section explains the TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup and AppleTalk Setup procedures. For other network settings,
refer to the Network on 9-96.
•
TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup...2-13
•
AppleTalk Setup...2-15
NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with
administrator privileges. If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter
a login user name and password, and press [Login]. Refer to Adding a User (Local User List) on page 10-5 for
the default login user name and password.
TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup (by Entering IP Addresses)
Set up TCP/IP (IPv4) to connect to the Windows network. Set the IP addresses, subnet masks, and gateway
addresses. The default settings are "TCP/IP Protocol: On, DHCP: On, Bonjour: Off, Auto-IP: On".
NOTE: Prior to the IP address entries, obtain permission from the network administrator.
Use the procedure below.
System - IPv4
Set TCP/IP (IPv4).
* The setting will be changed after restarting the device or network.
Off
DHCP
IP Address
0.0.0.0
Subnet Mask
On
0.0.0.0
Default
Gateway
0.0.0.0
2
Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Next]
of TCP/IP Setting.
3
Press [Change] of TCP/IP.
4
Press [On] and then press [OK].
5
Press [Change] of IPv4.
6
Press [DHCP].
7
Press [Off] of DHCP and then press [OK].
8
Press [Bonjour].
9
Press [Off] of Bonjour and then press [OK].
numeric keys.
Auto-IP
Bonjour
Cancel
Status
Press the System Menu key.
10 Press [IP Address] and enter the address using the
On
Off
1
OK
11 Press [Subnet Mask] and enter the address using
the numeric keys.
10/10/2010 10:10
12 Press [Default Gateway] and enter the address
using the numeric keys.
2-13
2
Preparation before Use
13 Check if all the address entries are correct and
press [OK].
14 After changing the setting, restart the network from
the system menu, or turn the machine OFF and
then ON.
For detailed information on restarting the network,
refer to Restart Network on page 9-108.
DHCP Settings
Select whether or not to use the DHCP server. The default setting is On.
Use the procedure below.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Next]
of TCP/IP Setting.
3
Press [Change] of TCP/IP.
4
Press [On] and then press [OK].
5
Press [Change] of IPv4.
6
Press [DHCP].
7
Press [On] or [Off] of DHCP and then press [OK].
8
After changing the setting, restart the network from
the system menu, or turn the machine OFF and
then ON.
For detailed information on restarting the network,
refer to Restart Network on page 9-108.
Bonjour Settings
Select whether or not to use Bonjour. The default setting is Off.
Refer to Bonjour Settings on page 9-97 about the procedures.
2-14
Preparation before Use
Auto-IP Settings
Select whether or not to use Auto-IP. The default setting is On.
Use the procedure below.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Next]
of TCP/IP Setting.
3
Press [Change] of TCP/IP.
4
Press [On] and then press [OK].
5
Press [Change] of IPv4.
6
Press [Auto-IP].
7
Press [On] or [Off] of Auto-IP and then press [OK].
8
After changing the setting, restart the network from
the system menu, or turn the machine OFF and
then ON.
For detailed information on restarting the network,
refer to Restart Network on page 9-108.
AppleTalk Setup
Select the Apple Talk network connection. The default setting is On.
Refer to AppleTalk on page 9-101 about the procedures.
2-15
2
Preparation before Use
Installing Software
Install appropriate software on your PC from the included Product Library DVD (Product Library) if you want to
use the printer function of this machine or perform TWAIN / WIA transmission or FAX transmission from your PC.
The following softwares are supported:
•
Printing System Driver
•
Printing System (XPS) Driver
•
Mini printer driver (PCL/KPDL)
•
TWAIN driver
•
WIA driver
•
Network FAX driver
•
File Management Utility
•
Network Tool for Direct Printing
•
Network Print Monitor
•
Font
NOTE: Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.
The optional Fax Kit is required in order to make use of fax functionality.
The WIA driver cannot be installed on Windows XP.
If you are connecting this machine to a Windows PC, follow the next steps to install the software. The example
shows you how to connect your machine to a Windows 7 PC.
Installing Printer Driver in Windows
NOTE: If the Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box displays, select Cancel.
If the autorun screen is displayed, click Run Setup.exe.
If the user account management window appears, click Allow.
You can use either Express Mode or Custom Mode to install the software. Express Mode automatically detects
connected machines and installs the required software. Use Custom Mode if you want to specify the printer port
and select the software to be installed. For details, refer to Custom Installation in the Printing System Driver User
Guide on the DVD.
1
2-16
Insert the DVD.
Preparation before Use
2
Click View License Agreement and read the
License Agreement. Click Accept.
2
3
Click Install Software.
4
Click Express Mode.
5
Select the print system to be installed and click
Next.
NOTE: If the print system detection window appears
and the installer fails to detect the machine, verify that
it is connected to the computer via a network or USB
cable and that it is turned on and click Reload.
2-17
Preparation before Use
6
Customize the print system name if the print
system is connected via a network and click Next.
7
Click Install.
NOTE: If the Windows security window appears, click
Install this driver software anyway.
8
A message appears saying that the printer has
been installed successfully. Click Finish.
This completes the printer driver installation procedure. Follow the on-screen instructions to restart the system,
if required.
The TWAIN driver and WIA driver can be installed if the machine and computer are connected via a network.
You can install the WIA driver using Custom Mode.
If you are installing the TWAIN driver or WIA driver, continue by configuring the Setting TWAIN Driver (page 222) or Setting WIA Driver (page 2-23).
2-18
Preparation before Use
Installing Printer Driver in Macintosh
The machine's printer functionality can be used by a Macintosh computer.
The example shows you how to connect your machine to a Macintosh running MAC OS X v10.6.
NOTE: When printing from a Macintosh computer, set the machine’s emulation to [KPDL] or [KPDL(Auto)].
For details about the configuration method, refer to Printer on page 9-58.
If connecting by Bonjour, enable Bonjour in the machine's network settings. For details, refer to Bonjour
Settings on page 2-14.
In the Authenticate screen, enter the name and password used to log in to the operating system.
1
Insert the DVD.
Double-click GEN_LIB icon.
2
Double-click either OS X 10.2 and 10.3 Only, OS X
10.4 Only or OS X 10.4 or higher depending on
your Mac OS version.
3
Double-click (Brand Name) OS X vx.x.
4
Install the printer driver as directed by the
instructions in the installation software.
This completes the printer driver installation.
2-19
2
Preparation before Use
Next, specify the print settings. If an IP or AppleTalk connection is used, the settings below are required. If a
USB connection is used, the machine is automatically recognized and connected.
5
Open System Preferences and click Print & Fax.
6
Click the plus symbol (+).
7
Click the IP icon for an IP connection or the
AppleTalk icon for an AppleTalk connection and
then enter the IP address and printer name. Click
Add.
NOTE: When using a Bonjour connection, select
[Default] and click the item that appears in "Printer
Name". The driver with the same name as the machine
automatically appears in "Driver".
2-20
Preparation before Use
8
Select the options available for the machine and
click Continue
2
9
2-21
The selected machine is added.
Preparation before Use
Setting TWAIN Driver
Register this machine to the TWAIN Driver.
3
1
Select the Start Button of the Windows display, All
Programs, (Brand Name) and then TWAIN Driver
Setting. TWAIN Driver screen appears.
2
Click Add.
3
Enter the machine name in the Name field.
4
Select this machine from the list. To scan in a
document stored in a custom box, select a model
name with (Box).
5
Enter the machine's IP address or host name in the
Scanner Address.
4
5
NOTE: When the machine’s IP address is unknown,
contact the Administrator.
7
6
6
When using SSL, select the checkbox beside SSL.
7
When user login administration is enabled, select
the checkbox beside Authentication, and enter a
Login User Name (up to 64 characters) and
Password (up to 64 characters).
To use job accounting, select the checkbox of the
account, enter an Account ID (maximum of 8
digits), and click OK.
8
Click OK.
9
Click Close.
8
NOTE: Click Delete to delete the added machine.
Click Edit to change names.
2-22
Preparation before Use
Setting WIA Driver
Register this machine to the WIA Driver.
The following explanation assumes that Windows 7 is being used.
3
4
5
1
Click the Windows Start button and enter Scanner
in Program and File Search. Click Show
scanners and cameras in the search list. The
Scanners and Cameras screen appears.
2
Select the same name as this machine from WIA
Drivers, and click Properties.
3
Enter the machine name or the host name.
4
When using SSL, select the checkbox beside SSL.
5
When user login administration is enabled, select
the checkbox beside Authentication, and enter a
Login User Name (up to 64 characters) and
Password (up to 64 characters).
6
When job accounting is enabled, select the
checkbox beside Account ID, and enter the
account ID with as many as eight digits.
6
2-23
Click OK.
2
Preparation before Use
Embedded Web Server RX (Settings for E-mail)
Embedded Web Server RX is a tool used for tasks such as verifying the operating status of the machine and
changing the settings for security, network printing, E-mail transmission and advanced networking.
NOTE: Here, information on the FAX settings has been omitted. For more information on using the FAX, refer
to the Fax System (V) Operation Guide.
The optional Fax Kit is required in order to make use of fax functionality.
To change settings in Embedded Web Server RX, you must log in as an administrator of the machine.
The default factory settings are set as shown below.
Login User Name: Admin
Login Password: Admin
* Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).
The procedure for accessing Embedded Web Server RX is explained below.
1
Launch your Web browser.
2
In the Address or Location bar, enter the machine’s IP address.
e.g.) http://10.183.51.41/
The web page displays basic information about the machine and Embedded Web Server RX as well as their
current status.
3
Select a category from the navigation bar on the left of the screen. The values for each category must be
set separately.
If restrictions have been set for Embedded Web Server RX, enter the correct user name and password to
access pages other than the startup page.
For details, refer to the Embedded Web Server RX Operation Guide.
2-24
Preparation before Use
E-mail Setting
Specifying the SMTP settings allows you to send images scanned with this machine as E-mail attachments.
To use this function, this machine must be connected to a mail server using the SMTP protocol.
Before sending images scanned with this machine as E-mail attachments, check the following:
•
•
•
The network environment used to connect this machine to the mail server
A full-time connection via a LAN is recommended.
SMTP Settings
Use Embedded Web Server RX to register the IP address or host name of the SMTP server.
If limits have been set on the size of E-mail messages, it may not be possible to send very large E-mails.
The procedure for specifying the SMTP settings is explained below.
1
Click Settings -> Advanced -> SMTP -> General.
2-25
2
Preparation before Use
2
Enter the correct settings in each field.
The settings to be specified in the SMTP settings screen are shown below.
Item
SMTP Protocol
Enables or disables SMTP protocol. To use E-mail, this protocol must be
enabled.
SMTP Port Number
Set the SMTP Port Number or use the SMTP default port 25.
SMTP Server Name
Enter the SMTP server IP address or its name. The maximum length of the
SMTP server name and IP address is 64 characters. If entering the name, a DNS
server address must also be configured. The DNS server address may be
entered on the TCP/IP General tab.
SMTP Server Timeout
Set the amount of time to wait before time-out in seconds.
Authentication
Protocol
Enables or disables the SMTP authentication protocol or sets POP before SMTP
as the protocol. The SMTP authentication supports Microsoft Exchange 2000.
Authenticate as
Authentication can be set from three POP3 accounts or you can choose a
different account.
Login User Name
When Other is selected for Authenticate, the login user name set here will be
used for SMTP authentication. The maximum length of the login user name is
64 characters.
Login Password
When Other is selected for Authenticate, the password set here will be used for
authentication. The maximum length of the login password is 64 characters.
SMTP Security
Enables or disables the SMTP Security. When this protocol is enabled, either
SSL/TLS or STARTTLS must be selected. To enable SMTP security, the SMTP
port may have to be changed according to the server settings. Typically, 465 for
SSL/TLS and 25 or 587 for STARTTLS are well-known SMTP ports.
POP before SMTP
Timeout
Test
3
Description
Set the amount of time to wait before time-out in seconds when you have
selected POP before SMTP as the Authentication Protocol.
This will test if the SMTP connection can be successfully established.
E-mail Size Limit
Enter the maximum size of E-mail that can be sent in kilobytes. When the value is
0, the limitation for E-mail size is disabled.
Sender Address
Enter the E-mail address of the person responsible for the machine, such as the
machine administrator, so that a reply or non-delivery report will go to a person
rather than to the machine. The sender address must be entered correctly for
SMTP authentication. The maximum length of the sender address is
128 characters.
Signature
Enter the signature. The signature is free form text that will appear at the end of
the E-mail body. It is often used for further identification of the machine. The
maximum length of the signature is 512 characters.
Domain Restriction
Enter the domain names that can be permitted or rejected. The maximum length
of the domain name is 32 characters. You can also specify E-mail addresses.
Click Submit.
2-26
Preparation before Use
Loading Paper
Paper can be loaded in the two standard cassettes and the multi purpose tray. Paper feeders are also available
as an option (refer to Optional Equipment on Appendix-2).
For the paper feed methods for each cassette, refer to the page below.
Cassette
Standard
Option
Name
Page
Cassette 1,
Cassette 2
Standard cassettes
2-29
Multi Purpose Tray
Multi Purpose Tray
2-36
Cassette 3,
Cassette 4
Paper Feeder (500-sheet x 2)*
2-29
Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet x 2)
2-32
Cassette 5
Side Feeder (3,000-sheet)
2-35
Side Feeder (500-sheet x 3)*
2-29
Large Capacity Side Feeder
(500*, 1,500-sheet x 2**)
2-29
Side Feeder (500-sheet x 3)*
2-29
Large Capacity Side Feeder
(500*, 1,500-sheet x 2**)
2-32
Cassette 6
Cassette 7
* The paper feed method is the same as standard cassettes 1 and 2.
** The paper feed method is the same as the Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet x 2).
IMPORTANT:
•
The number of sheets that can be held varies depending on your environment.
•
For clearer and brighter color copies, use special color paper.
You should not use inkjet printer paper or any paper with a special surface coating. (Such paper may cause
paper jams or other faults.)
2-27
2
Preparation before Use
Before Loading Paper
When you open a new package of paper, fan the sheets
to separate them slightly prior to loading in the following
steps.
1
2
3
4
Bend the whole set of sheets to swell them in the
middle.
Hold the stack at both ends and stretch it while
keeping the entire stack risen.
Raise the right and left hands alternately to create
a gap and feed air between the paper.
Finally, align the paper on a level, flat table.
If the paper is curled or folded, straighten it before
loading. Paper that is curled or folded may cause a
jam.
CAUTION: If you copy onto used paper (paper already used for copying), do not use paper that is stapled or
clipped together. This may damage the machine or cause poor image quality.
Avoid exposing opened paper to high temperatures and high humidity as dampness can be a cause of problems.
Seal any remaining paper after loading in the multi purpose tray or cassettes back in the paper storage bag.
If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period, protect all paper from humidity by removing it from the
cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag.
NOTE: Note that some paper types have a tendency to curl and may jam in the paper eject unit.
If the output paper scatters or stacks unevenly, turn the paper over in the cassette, or change the orientation
(vertical/horizontal) of the paper in the cassette.
If you use special paper such as letterhead, paper with holes or paper with pre-prints like logo or company
name, refer to the Paper on Appendix-12.
2-28
Preparation before Use
Loading Paper in the Cassettes
The standard cassettes
The 2 standard cassettes will each hold plain paper, recycled paper or color paper.
Cassette 1 and 2 hold up to 500 sheets of plain paper (80 g/m2) (or up to 550 sheets of 64 g/m2 plain paper).
The following paper sizes are supported: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, 12 × 18",
Letter, Letter-R, Statement-R, Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R and 216 × 340 mm.
IMPORTANT:
•
When using media types other than plain paper (such as recycled or colored paper), always specify the
media type and paper weight settings. (Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes on
page 2-40, Media Type Setting on page 9-8.)
The cassettes can hold paper with weights between 60 and 220 g/m2 (for the 30/30 ppm or 35/35 ppm) or
between 60 and 256 g/m2 (for the 45/45 ppm or 55/50 ppm). If you are using a paper weight between 106
and 220 g/m2 (for the 30/30 ppm or 35/35 ppm) or between 106 and 256 g/m2 (for the 45/45 ppm or 55/
50 ppm), set the media type to Thick and set the weight of the paper you are using.
•
Do not load thick paper that is heavier than 256 g/m2 in the cassettes. Use the multi purpose tray for paper
that is heavier than 256 g/m2.
If you wish to use 330 × 210 mm to 356 × 220 mm paper, contact a service technician.
•
1
Pull the cassette out toward you until it stops.
NOTE: Do not pull out more than one cassette at a
time.
2
Squeeze the ends of the bottom of the paper length
guide and move the guide to fit the length of the
paper.
NOTE: Paper sizes are marked on the cassette.
2-29
2
Preparation before Use
3
Press the (Paper Width Guide) Lock to release the
lock. Grasp the paper width adjusting tab and move
the paper width guides to fit the paper.
4
Align the paper flush against the right side of the
cassette.
Example: A4
After removing new paper from its packaging, fan
the paper before loading it in the cassette.
(Refer to Before Loading Paper on page 2-28)
IMPORTANT:
•
Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not
curled or folded. Paper that is curled or folded may
cause paper jams.
•
Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the
level indicator (see illustration on the left).
•
When loading the paper, keep the side that was
closest to the package seal facing up.
•
The paper length and width guides must be
adjusted to the paper size. Loading the paper
without adjusting these guides may cause skewed
feeding and paper jams.
2-30
Preparation before Use
5
Be sure that the paper length and width guides rest
securely against the paper. If there is a gap,
readjust the guides to fit the paper.
2
6
Press the (Paper Width Guide) Lock to lock.
7
Insert the indication on the sheet so as to match the
size and type of paper to be placed. (The indication
is printed on both sides of the sheet.)
8
Gently push the cassette back in.
NOTE: If the machine will not be used for a prolonged
period, protect all paper from humidity by removing it
from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage
bag.
9
2-31
Select the media type (plain, recycled, etc.) loaded
in the cassette. (Refer to Specifying Paper Size
and Media Type for the Cassettes on page 2-40.)
Preparation before Use
The Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet x 2) (Option)
The Optional cassettes will each hold plain paper, recycled paper or color paper.
The Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet x 2) holds up to 3,000 sheets (1,500-sheet x 2) of plain paper
(80 g/m2) (or up to 3,500 sheets (1,750-sheet x 2) of 64 g/m2 plain paper).
The following paper sizes are supported: A4, B5 and Letter.
IMPORTANT:
•
When using media types other than plain paper (such as recycled or colored paper), always specify the
media type and paper weight settings. (Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes on
page 2-40,Media Type Setting on page 9-8.)
The cassettes can hold paper with weights up to 256 g/m2. If you are using a paper weight between 106
and 256 g/m2, set the media type to Thick and set the weight of the paper you are using.
•
Do not load thick paper that is heavier than 256 g/m2 in the cassettes. Use the multi purpose tray for paper
that is heavier than 256 g/m2.
Clamp
1
Pull the cassette out toward you until it stops.
2
Rotate the Paper Size Guide (A) clamp and
remove. Pull the Paper Size Guide (A) up and out.
3
Insert the Paper Size Guide (A) into the slot
(bottom of cassette) for the paper size to be used.
Paper Size Guide (A)
Make sure that the top of the paper size guide (A)
matches the paper size to be used, attach the
clamp, and rotate the clamp to lock it.
Gently try moving the Paper Size Guide (A) to
verify that it is fixed.
2-32
Preparation before Use
4
With the bottom of the cassette pressed all the way
down, press the hook on the side of the Paper Size
Guide (B) to release it and pull out the Paper Size
Guide (B).
2
Paper Size Guide (B)
5
Adjust the Paper Size Guide (B) to the paper size.
A4
Insert the Paper Size Guide (B) into the slot marked
A4 (on the bottom of the cassette), and lock the
hook (it will make a "click" sound).
Gently try moving the Paper Size Guide (B) to
verify that it is fixed.
B5
Open the Paper Size Guide (B) as shown, insert
into the slot marked B5 (on the bottom of the
cassette), and lock the hook (it will make a "click"
sound).
Gently try moving the Paper Size Guide (B) to
verify that it is fixed.
Letter
The Paper Size Guide (B) is not attached.
2-33
Preparation before Use
6
Insert the paper into the cassette.
After removing new paper from its packaging, fan
the paper before loading it in the cassette.
(Refer to Before Loading Paper on page 2-28)
IMPORTANT:
•
Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not
curled or folded. Paper that is curled or folded may
cause paper jams.
•
Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the
level indicator (see illustration below).
•
When loading the paper, keep the print side facing
up.
7
Insert the indication on the sheet so as to match the
size and type of paper to be placed. (The indication
is printed on both sides of the sheet.)
8
Gently push the cassette back in.
NOTE: If the machine will not be used for a prolonged
period, protect all paper from humidity by removing it
from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage
bag.
9
2-34
Select the media type (plain, recycled, etc.) loaded
in the cassette. (Refer to Specifying Paper Size
and Media Type for the Cassettes on page 2-40.)
Preparation before Use
Side Feeder (3,000-sheet) (Option)
The optional side feeder hold up to 3,000 sheets of plain paper (80 g/m2). The following paper sizes are
supported: A4, B5, Letter.
Pull the cassette out toward you until it stops and insert
the paper into the cassette. After loading paper, gently
push the cassette back in.
NOTE: The default paper size setting is A4. If you
need the paper size changed to B5 or Letter, contact
your service representative.
IMPORTANT:
• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not
curled or folded. Paper that is curled or folded may
cause paper jams.
• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the
level indicator (see illustration below).
• When loading the paper, keep the print side facing up.
2-35
2
Preparation before Use
Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray
The multi purpose tray will hold up to 150sheets of A4 or smaller plain paper (80 g/m2) (or up to 165 sheets of 64 g/
m2 plain paper) or up to 50 sheets of plain paper (80 g/m2) (or up to 55 sheets of 64 g/m2 plain paper) lager than A4.
The multi purpose tray accepts paper sizes 12×18" and from A3 to A6-R and Hagaki and from Ledger to
Statement-R, 8K, 16K and 16K-R. Be sure to use the multi purpose tray when you print on any special paper.
IMPORTANT: When using media types other than plain paper (such as recycled or colored paper), always
specify the media type and paper weight settings. (Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi
Purpose Tray (MP Tray Setting) on page 2-42, Media Type Setting on page 9-8.) If you are using a paper weight
of 106 g/m2 or more, set the media type to Thick and set the weight of the paper you are using.
The capacity of the multi purpose tray is as follows.
•
•
•
•
•
•
A4 or smaller plain paper (80 g/m2), recycled paper or color paper: 150 sheets
(64 g/m2 plain paper :165 sheets)
B4 or larger plain paper (80 g/m2), recycled paper or color paper: 50 sheets
(64 g/m2 plain paper :55 sheets)
Hagaki: 30 sheets
OHP film: 10 sheets
Envelope DL, Envelope C4, Envelope C5, Envelope #10 (Commercial #10), Envelope #9 (Commercial #9),
Envelope #6 (Commercial #6), Monarch, Youkei 4, Youkei 2: 10 sheets
Banner paper: 470.1 mm (18.51") to a maximum of 1220.0 mm (48"):
1 sheet (manual feed), 10 sheets (when optional banner tray is attached)
NOTE: When you load custom size paper, enter the paper size by referring to Specifying Paper Size and
Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray (MP Tray Setting) on page 2-42.
When you use special paper such as transparencies or thick paper, select the media type by referring to
Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray (MP Tray Setting) on page 2-42.
1
Open the Multi Purpose tray until it stops.
2
When loading paper sizes 12×18" and from A3 to
B4 and Ledger to Legal, extend the support tray
section of the multi purpose tray until the mark "∆"
is fully appeared.
2-36
Preparation before Use
3
Adjust the paper width guides to the width of the
paper.
After removing new paper from its packaging, fan
the paper before loading it in the multi-purpose tray.
(Refer to Before Loading Paper on page 2-28)
4
Insert the paper along the paper width guides into
the tray until it stops.
IMPORTANT: Keep the print side facing up.
Curled paper must be uncurled before use.
Straighten the top edge if it is curled.
When loading paper into the multi purpose tray, check
that there is no paper left over in the tray from a previous
job before loading the paper. If there is just a small
amount of paper left over in the multi purpose tray and
you want to add more, first remove the left-over paper
from the tray and include it with the new paper before
loading the paper back into the tray.
If there is a gap between the paper and the paper width
guides, readjust the guides to fit the paper in order to
prevent skewed feeding and paper jams.
IMPORTANT: Ensure that the loaded paper does not
exceed the level indicator (see illustration).
2-37
2
Preparation before Use
Loading Envelopes
Up to 10 envelopes may be loaded in the multi purpose tray.
Acceptable envelope sizes are as follows.
Acceptable Envelope
Size
Monarch
3 7/8"×7 1/2"
Envelope #10 (Commercial #10)
4 1/8"×9 1/2"
Envelope #9 (Commercial #9)
3 7/8"×8 7/8"
Envelope #6 (Commercial #6)
3 5/8"×6 1/2"
Envelope DL
110×220 (mm)
Envelope C4
229×324 (mm)
Envelope C5
162×229 (mm)
Youkei 2
162×114 (mm)
Youkei 4
235×105 (mm)
1
Open the multi purpose tray.
2
Adjust the paper width guides to the width of the
envelope.
2-38
Preparation before Use
3
Insert along the paper width guide all the way in as shown.
2
When you load envelopes or
cardstock in the multi purpose tray
Close
the flap.
Load envelopes with the print side facing down.
e.g.) When printing the address.
Landscape
Cardstock Portrait
Return
form
postcard (Hagaki) form
envelopes envelopes
(Oufuku
hagaki)
Open the flap.
IMPORTANT: Use unfolded return postcard (Oufuku hagaki).
IMPORTANT: How to load envelopes (orientation and facing) will differ depending on the type of envelope. Be
sure to load it in correctly, otherwise printing may be done in the wrong direction or on the wrong face.
NOTE: When you load envelopes in the multi purpose tray, select the envelope type by referring to Specifying
Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray (MP Tray Setting) on page 2-42.
Paper stopper
To use the sheet ejection stopper, open as shown below. (Example: A3, B4, Leger, Legal)
2-39
Preparation before Use
Specifying Paper Size and Media (Cassette Setting)
The default paper size setting for cassettes 1 and 2, for the multi purpose tray and for the optional paper feeder
(cassettes 3 to 7) is [Auto], and the default media type setting is [Plain].
To fix the type of paper to be used in cassettes, specify the paper size and media type setting. (Refer to
Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes on page 2-40.)
To fix the type of paper to be used in multi purpose tray, specify the paper size setting. (Refer to Specifying
Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray (MP Tray Setting) on page 2-42.)
Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes
To fix the type of paper to be used in cassettes 1 or 2 or the optional paper feeders (cassettes 3 to 7), specify
the paper size. Also, if you use a media type other than plain paper, specify the media type setting.
Selection Item
Paper
Size
Auto
Paper size is automatically detected and selected. Select whether the
paper is in Metric size or in Inch size.
Standard
Sizes 1*
Select from the standard sizes. Selectable paper sizes are as follows.
Inch models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R, Statement-R, 12×18",
Oficio II
Metric models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, Folio, 216×340 mm
Standard
Sizes 2*
Select from the standard sizes not included in Standard Sizes 1.
Selectable paper sizes are as follows.
Inch models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B5, B5-R, Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R
Metric models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R, Statement-R, 12×18",
Oficio II, 8K, 16K, 16K-R
Media Type
*
**
***
Selectable Size/Type
Plain (105 g/m2 or less), Rough, Vellum** (60 to 105 g/m2 or less),
Recycled, Preprinted***, Bond**, Color**, Prepunched***, Letterhead***,
Thick (106 g/m2 and more)**, High Quality and Custom 1~8**
Only A4, Letter, and B5 can be specified when the optional Large Capacity Feeder (1,500sheet x 2) and the optional Large Capacity Side Feeder (500, 1,500-sheet x 2) are used.
To change to a media type other than Plain, refer to Media Type Setting on page 9-8. When
the paper weight settings shown below are selected, the media indicated for each setting
cannot be selected.
• Rough: Heavy 5
• Vellum: Heavy 5
• Preprinted: Heavy 5
• Color: Heavy 5
• Letterhead: Heavy 5
• Thick: Heavy 5
• Custom 1 to 8: Heavy 5, or Extra Heavy
On the 30/30 ppm model and 35/35 ppm model, the paper of each also cannot be selected
when Heavy 4 is set.
To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to Special Paper Action on
page 9-11.
NOTE: If the optional FAX kit is installed, the available media types for printing received faxes are as shown
below.
Plain, Recycled, Bond, Vellum, Color, Thick, High Quality, Rough and Custom 1 to 8
2-40
Preparation before Use
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
2
Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original /
Paper Settings, [Next] of Cassette Setting.
3
Cassette Setting, select one of [Cassette 1] to
[Cassette 7] and press [Next].
Then press [Change] of Paper Size.
NOTE: [Cassette 3] to [Cassette 7] are shown when
the optional paper feeder is installed.
4
For automatic detection of the paper size, press
[Auto] and select [Metric] or [Inch] as the unit.
To select the paper size, press [Standard Sizes 1]
or [Standard Sizes 2] and select the paper size.
Common Settings - Paper Size
Set cassette paper size.
Auto
A3
A4
A4
A5
Standard
Sizes 1
B4
B5
B5
216x340mm
5
Press [OK]. The previous screen reappears.
6
Press [Change] of Media Type and select the
media type. Then press [OK].
Standard
Sizes 2
Cancel
OK
Status
10/10/2010 10:10
Common Settings - Media Type
Select type of paper in Cassette 1.
Rough
Plain
Recycled
Preprinted
Vellum
Bond
Prepunched
Letterhead
Custom 1
Custom 2
Custom 3
Custom 6
Custom 7
Custom 8
Color
Thick
High Quality
Custom 4
Custom 5
Cancel
Status
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
2-41
Preparation before Use
Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray (MP Tray Setting)
To fix the type of paper to be used in the multi purpose tray, specify the paper size. When using other than a
plain paper, specify the media type.
Item
Paper
Size
Auto
Paper size is automatically detected and selected. Select whether the
paper is in Metric size or in Inch size.
Standard
Sizes 1
Select from the standard sizes. Selectable paper sizes are as follows.
Inch models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R, Statement-R, 12×18",
Oficio II, Executive
Metric models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, B6-R, A6-R, Folio,
216×340 mm
Standard
Sizes 2
Select from the standard sizes not included in Standard Sizes 1.
Selectable paper sizes are as follows.
Inch models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, B6-R, A6-R, Folio, 8K,
16K, 16K-R
Metric models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R, Statement-R, 12×18",
Oficio II, Executive, 8K, 16K, 16K-R
Others
Select from special standard sizes and custom sizes.
Selectable paper sizes are as follows.
ISO B5, Envelope #10 (Commercial #10), Envelope #9 (Commercial #9),
Envelope #6 (Commercial #6 3/4), Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL,
Envelope C5, Envelope C4, Hagaki, Oufuku hagaki, Youkei 4, Youkei 2
Size
Entry
Enter the size not included in the standard size.
Selectable paper sizes are as follows.
Inch size
X (Horizontal): 5.83~17.00" (in 0.01" increments),
Y (Vertical): 3.86~11.69" (in 0.01" increments)
Metric size
X (Horizontal): 148~432 mm (in 1mm increments),
Y (Vertical): 98~297 mm (in 1mm increments)
Media Type
*
**
Description
Selectable media types are as follows.
Plain (105g /m2 or less), Rough, Transparency,
Vellum (60 to 105 g/m2 or less), Labels, Recycled, Preprinted**, Bond,
Cardstock, Color, Prepunched**, Letterhead**, Envelope, Thick (106 g/m2
and more), Coated, High Quality and Custom 1~8
To change to a media type other than Plain, refer to Media Type Setting on page 9-8.
To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to Special Paper Action on
page 9-11.
NOTE: If the optional FAX kit is installed and the multi purpose tray is used to print a received FAX, the
available media types are as shown below.
Plain, Labels, Recycled, Bond, Vellum, Color, Coated, Cardstock, Envelope, Thick, High Quality, Rough and
Custom 1 to 8
2-42
Preparation before Use
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Common Settings - Paper Size
2
Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original /
Paper Settings, [Next] of MP Tray Setting, and then
[Change] of Paper Size.
3
For automatic detection of the paper size, press
[Auto] and select [Metric] or [Inch] as the unit.
Set the multi-purpose tray paper size.
Auto
A3
A4
A4
A5
Standard
Sizes 1
A6
B4
B5
B5
Standard
Sizes 2
B6
216x340mm
To select the paper size, press any of [Standard
Sizes 1], [Standard Sizes 2], [Others] or [Size
Entry] and select the paper size.
Others
Size Entry
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
If you have chosen [Size Entry], press [+] or [–] to
enter X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) sizes. You may
enter the size directly using the numeric keys by
pressing [# Keys].
Common Settings - Paper Size
Set the multi-purpose tray paper size.
Auto
X(148 - 432)
Standard
Sizes 1
297
Standard
Sizes 2
Y(98 - 297)
210
mm
4
Press [OK]. The previous screen reappears.
5
Press [Change] of Media Type and select the
media type. Then press [OK].
mm
Others
# Keys
# Keys
Size Entry
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
Common Settings - Media Type
Select type of paper in Multi-Purpose Tray.
Plain
Transparency
Rough
Vellum
Labels
Recycled
Preprinted
Bond
Cardstock
Color
Prepunched
Letterhead
Envelope
Thick
Coated
High Quality
Custom 1
Custom 2
Custom 3
Custom 4
Custom 5
Custom 6
Custom 7
Custom 8
Cancel
Status
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
2-43
Preparation before Use
Loading Originals
Follow the steps below to load originals for copying, sending or storing.
Placing Originals on the Platen
You may place books or magazines on the platen in addition to ordinary sheet originals.
1
Open the platen Cover or the optional document
processor.
NOTE: Before opening the document processor, be
sure that there are no originals left on the original table
or on the original eject table. Originals left on the
original table or on the original eject table may fall off
when the document processor is opened.
When placing books or magazines on the machine, do
so with the platen Cover or the optional document
processor in the open position.
Shadows may be produced around the edges and in the
middle of open-faced originals.
2
Place the original. Put the scanning side facedown
and align it flush against the original size indicator
plates with the back left corner as the reference
point.
NOTE: For details on Original Orientation, refer to
When placing originals on the platen on page 4-9.
2-44
Preparation before Use
 Original size indicator plates
(Inch models)
2
(Metric models)
3
Close the platen Cover or the optional document
processor.
IMPORTANT: Do not push the platen cover forcefully
when you close it. Excessive pressure may crack the
platen glass.
CAUTION: Do not leave the platen cover or the
optional document processor open as there is a danger
of personal injury.
2-45
Preparation before Use
Loading Originals in the Document Processor
The optional document processor automatically scans each sheet of multiple originals. Both sides of two-sided
originals are scanned.
Part Names of the Document Processor
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1) Original placement indicator
(2) Top cover
(3) Original width guides
(4) Original table
(5) Original eject table
(5)
(6)
(6)
Original stopper
(7) Opening handle
(7)
Originals Supported by the Document Processor
The document processor supports the following types of originals.
Document Processor
Document Processor (Dual scan DP)
Weight
45 to 160 g/m2 (duplex: 50 to 120 g/m2)
35 to 220 g/m2 (duplex: 50 to 220 g/m2)
Size
Maximum A3 to Minimum A5
Maximum Ledger to Minimum Statement-R
Maximum A3 to Minimum A5
Maximum Ledger to Minimum Statement-R
Capacity
Plain paper (80 g/m2), Colored paper,
Recycled paper, High Quality: 100 sheets
(Mixed size originals: 30 sheets)
Thick paper (157 g/m2): 50 sheets
Thick paper (120 g/m2): 66 sheets
Art paper: 1 sheet
Plain paper (80 g/m2), Colored paper,
Recycled paper, High Quality: 175 sheets
(Mixed size originals: 30 sheets)
Thick paper (157 g/m2): 89 sheets
Thick paper (120 g/m2): 116 sheets
Art paper: 1 sheet
Originals Not Supported by the Document Processor
Do not use the document processor for the following types of originals.
•
Soft originals such as vinyl sheets
•
Transparencies such as OHP film
•
Carbon paper
•
Originals with very slippery surfaces
•
Originals with adhesive tape or glue
•
Wet originals
•
Originals with correction fluid which is not dried
•
Irregularly shaped (non-rectangular) originals
•
Originals with cut-out sections
•
Crumpled paper
•
Originals with folds (Straighten the folds before loading. Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam).
•
Originals bound with clips or staples (Remove the clips or staples and straighten curls, wrinkles or creases
before loading. Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam).
2-46
Preparation before Use
How to Load Originals
IMPORTANT: Before loading originals, be sure that there are no originals left on the original eject table.
Originals left on the original eject table may cause the new originals to jam.
1
Adjust the original width guides.
2
Place the originals. Put the side to be scanned (or
the first side of two-sided originals) face-up. Slide
the leading edge into the document processor as
far as it will go. The original placement indicator will
be lit.
NOTE: For details on Original Orientation, refer to
When placing originals on the optional document
processor on page 4-9.
IMPORTANT: Confirm that the original width guides
exactly fit the originals. If there is a gap, readjust the
original width guides. The gap may cause the originals
to jam.
Ensure that loaded originals do not exceed the
level indicator. Exceeding the maximum level may
cause the originals to jam (see the figure).
Originals with punched holes or perforated lines
should be placed in such a way that the holes or
perforations will be scanned last (not first).
2-47
2
Preparation before Use
Original placement indicator
The original placement indicator is lit or unlit depending
on how originals are placed.
Indications and their status are as follows.
•
•
2-48
Green lit: Original is placed properly.
Green blinking: Original is not placed properly.
Remove and place again.
3 Basic Operation
This chapter explains the following operations.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Login/Logout .......................................................................................3-2
Enter key and Quick No. Search key ..................................................3-4
Touch Panel Display ...........................................................................3-5
Original Preview..................................................................................3-6
Selecting Color Mode..........................................................................3-7
Copying...............................................................................................3-8
Sending.............................................................................................3-23
Confirmation Screen of Destinations ................................................3-29
Preparation for sending a document to a PC....................................3-30
Specifying Destination ......................................................................3-40
Using the Document Box ..................................................................3-43
Canceling Jobs .................................................................................3-52
Quick Setup Screen ..........................................................................3-53
Program ............................................................................................3-56
Registering Shortcuts (Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings) ...3-58
Using the Internet Browser ...............................................................3-59
Using Weekly Timer ..........................................................................3-61
Checking Counter .............................................................................3-62
Help Screen ......................................................................................3-62
3-1
Basic Operation
Login/Logout
If user login administration is enabled, it is necessary to enter the login user name and password to use the
machine.
NOTE: You will be unable to login if you forget your login user name or login password. In this event, login with
administrator privileges and change your login user name or login password.
If the guest authentication setting is enabled, the Authentication/Logout key must be pressed when logging in.
For details, refer to the Guest Authorization Set. on page 10-12.
Login
1
Enter login user name and password.
Login to:
Login
User Name
If the screen shown appears during operations,
press [Login User Name].
Press [# Keys] to enter the login data using the
numeric keys.
Local
abcdef
# Keys
Login
Password
********
# Keys
ID Card
Login
Check Counter
Status
Cancel
Login
10/10/2010 10:10
2
Enter the login user name and press [OK].
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on
Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
3
Press [Login Password].
Press [# Keys] to enter the login data using the
numeric keys.
4
Enter the password and press [OK].
5
Check the login user name and password are
correct, and press [Login].
NOTE: If Network Authentication is selected as the
user authentication method, either Local or Network
can be selected as the authentication type.
3-2
Basic Operation
Simple Login
If this screen is displayed during operations, select a
user and log in.
Select the user to login.
01
02
03
A
B
C
No.
NOTE: If a login password is required, an input screen
will be displayed.
For details, refer to the Simple Login on page 10-17.
1/2
Keyboard
Login
Status
10/10/2010 10:10
Logout
To logout from the machine, press the Authentication/
Logout key to return to the login user name/login
password entry screen.
Users are automatically logged out in the following circumstances:
•
•
•
•
•
When the machine is put to Sleep by pressing the Power key.
When the Auto Sleep function is activated.
When the auto panel reset function is activated.
When Auto Low Power Mode is activated.
When the machine is placed in Low Power Mode by pressing the Energy Saver key.
3-3
3
Basic Operation
Enter key and Quick No. Search key
This section explains how to use the Enter key and Quick No. Search key on the operation panel.
Using the Enter (
) key
The Enter key works in the same way as keys displayed on the touch panel, such as [OK] and [Close].
The Enter symbol ( ) is displayed next to the keys whose operations are carried out by the Enter key (e.g.
[ OK], [ Close]).
The operation of the Enter key is explained below using copy paper selection as an example. For details of the
procedure, refer to Paper Selection on page 4-3.
Copies
1
In the paper selection screen, press the key for the
cassette containing the required paper size.
Paper Selection
The Enter ( ) symbol appears on the [OK] on the
touch panel, indicating that the Enter key performs
the same action as [OK].
Auto
Cassette
A4
Plain
Original
Zoom
Paper
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Preview
A3
Plain
A4
Plain
A4
Plain
A4
Plain
A4
Plain
A4
Plain
MP Tray
2
MP Tray
To copy using the selected paper, press the Enter
key (or [OK]).
Paper Set.
Add Shortcut
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
Using the Quick No. Search (
) key
Use the Quick No. Search keys to perform an action by simply entering a number directly using the numeric
keys. For example, you can specify the speed dial for a transmission destination or recall a stored program by
its program number.
The Quick No. Search key performs the same action as the [No.] displayed on the touch panel.
The use of the Quick No. Search key is explained below using an example in which a speed dial number is
specified and used to select a destination. For more information on speed dialing, refer to Specifying
Destination on page 3-40.
Destination
1
Press the Quick No. Search key (or [No.]) in the
basic send screen.
2
In the number entry screen, use the numeric keys
to enter the speed dial number.
3
If you entered a speed dial number between 1 and
3 digits long, press the Enter key (or [OK]).
Place original.
Destination
Detail
Address
Book
abcd@efg.com
A OFFICE
1/1
B OFFICE
Enter One Touch key number
using # keys.
C OFFICE
Folder Path
Entry
(0001 - 1000)
On Hook
Direct
E-mail
Addr Entry
0011
The specified destination appears in the
destination list.
FAX No.
Entry
0001
AAA
BBB
Cancel
0006
FFF
Destination
Status
0007
GGG
Quick Setup
0009
0008
HHH
i-FAX
Addr Entry
OK
III
Org./Sending
Data Format
0010
1/100
JJJ
Color/
Image Quality
Advanced
Setup
WSD Scan
/DSM Scan
Program
10/10/2010 10:10
NOTE: If you enter a 4-digit speed dial number, the
operation in step 3 can be omitted. The basic send
screen appears and the specified destination appears
in the destinations list.
3-4
Basic Operation
Touch Panel Display
Display for Originals and Paper
The touch panel displays the selected paper source and output tray.
Press Start key to start printing.
Copies
3
Press [Cancel] to change settings.
Original
position
Copy Image
Output
tray
Shortcut 1
Shortcut 2
Paper
source
Size/orientation of
original and paper
Auto
100%
Shortcut 3
Normal 0
Shortcut 4
Original
Zoom
Paper
Paper
Selection
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Off
Duplex
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Density
Shortcut 5
1-sided
>>1-sided
Cancel
Quick Setup
Zoom
Off
Combine
Color/
Image Quality
Shortcut 6
Staple
/Punch
Layout/Edit
Advanced
Setup
Status
Program
10/10/2010 10:10
Remaining amount of toner
Display of keys that cannot be set
Keys of features that cannot be used due to feature combination restrictions or non-installation of options are in
a non-selectable state.
Normal
Off
Grayed out
Off
Combine
Off
Staple
/Punch
Off
Combine
Hidden
Off
Staple
/Punch
In the following cases, the key is
grayed out and cannot be
selected.
•
Cannot be used in
combination with a feature that
is already selected.
•
Use prohibited by user control.
•
[Preview] has been pressed.
(Refer to Original Preview on
page 3-6)
Off
Combine
Staple
/Punch
Cannot be used because an
option is not installed.
Example:
When a finisher is not installed,
[Staple/Punch] does not appear.
NOTE: If a key that you wish to use is grayed out, the settings of the previous user may still be in effect. In this
case, press the Reset key and try again.
If the key is still grayed out after the Reset key is pressed, it is possible that you are prohibited from using the
function by user control. Check with the administrator of the machine.
3-5
Basic Operation
Original Preview
You can display a preview image of the scanned document on the panel.
NOTE: To view a preview of an image stored in a Custom Box, refer to Previewing Documents/Checking
Document Details on page 3-49.
The procedure described here is for copying a single-page original.
The procedure for previewing scanned originals is explained below.
Copies
Copy Image
1
Press the Copy key and place the original on the
platen.
2
Press [Preview].
3
The machine starts scanning the original. When
scanning is completed, the preview image appears
on the panel.
4
To change the quality or the layout, press [Cancel]
or the Stop key. Change the settings and press
[Preview] again to see a preview image with the
new settings.
Shortcut 1
Shortcut 2
Place original.
Shortcut 3
Auto
100%
Normal 0
Shortcut 4
Original : A4
: --Original
Zoom
: 100%
Zoom
: 100%
Paper
: --Paper
: A4
Paper
Selection
1-sided
>>1-sided
Preview
Preview
Quick Setup
Zoom
Shortcut 5
Off
Duplex
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Density
Off
Staple
/Punch
Combine
Color/
Image Quality
Layout/Edit
Advanced
Setup
Status
Shortcut 6
Program
10/10/2010 10:10
Press Start key to start printing.
Copies
Press [Cancel] to change settings.
Copy Image
Shortcut 1
Shortcut 2
Shortcut 3
Auto
Normal 0
100%
Shortcut 4
Original
Zoom
Paper
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Paper
Selection
1-sided
>>1-sided
Cancel
Quick Setup
Status
Shortcut 5
Off
Duplex
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Density
Zoom
Color/
Image Quality
NOTE: If you scan a multi-page original, only the first
page is previewed.
Off
Combine
Layout/Edit
Staple
/Punch
Advanced
Setup
Shortcut 6
Program
10/10/2010 10:10
5
3-6
If there is no problem with the preview image, press
the Start key. Copying begins.
Basic Operation
Selecting Color Mode
When you scan and then copy, send or store documents, you can select the color mode used for scanning from
the operation panel.
3
Automatically recognizes whether scanned
documents are color or black & white.
Scans all documents in full color.
Scans all documents in black & white.
The basic procedure for selecting the color mode is explained below, using an example in which the scanned
document is copied.
1
2
Press the Copy key.
3
Press the Auto Color key, Full Color key or Black
& White key to select the color mode.
4
5
Specify the required settings for copying.
Place the originals in the document processor or on
the platen.
Press the Start key.
NOTE: You can fine-tune the color mode from the
touch panel.
•
Copying:
You can use Single Color copying
in Cyan, Green, etc. (page 4-34).
•
Sending/Storing: You can select Auto Color (Color/
Gray), Auto Color (Color/B & W),
Full Color or Grayscale (page 623).
You can also change the default color mode for copying
and sending/storing. For details, refer to Color Selection
(Copy) on page 9-19 or Color Selection (Send/
Store) on page 9-19.
3-7
Basic Operation
Copying
Follow the steps as below for basic copying.
1
Press the Copy key.
NOTE: If the touch panel is turned off, press the
Energy Saver key or the Power key and wait for the
machine to warm up.
2
Place the originals on the platen or in the optional
document processor.
NOTE: For loading instructions, refer to Loading
Originals on page 2-44.
Copies
Copy Image
3
Shortcut 1
Shortcut 2
To change the paper size, press, [Org./Paper/
Finishing], [Paper Selection] and select the desired
paper source.
Place original.
Shortcut 3
Auto
Normal 0
100%
Shortcut 4
Original : A4
: --Original
Zoom
: 100%
Zoom
: 100%
Paper
: --Paper
: A4
Paper
Selection
1-sided
>>1-sided
Preview
Preview
Quick Setup
Status
Density
Zoom
Shortcut 5
Off
Duplex
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Check that [Auto] is selected of Paper Selection on
the touch panel. Paper that matches the size of the
original will be selected automatically.
Color/
Image Quality
Off
Combine
Layout/Edit
Staple
/Punch
Advanced
Setup
Shortcut 6
Program
10/10/2010 10:10
4
Use the numeric keys to enter the copy quantity.
Specify the desired number up to 999.
5
Press the Start key to start copying.
3-8
Basic Operation
Density
Use this procedure to adjust the density when copying.
You can adjust density using 7 or 13 levels.
The procedure for adjusting the density of copies is explained below.
Copies
1
Press the Copy key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Set the original on the platen and press [Color/
Image Quality] -> [Density].
4
Adjust density pressing [-3] (Lighter) to [+3]
(Darker). You can change the density level [-3]
(Lighter) to [+3] (Darker) in half-steps.
5
Press [OK].
6
Press the Start key. Copying begins.
Density
Lighter
-3
Original
Zoom
Paper
: A4
: 100%
: A4
-2
-2.5
Darker
Normal
-1
-1.5
0
-0.5
+1
+0.5
+2
+1.5
+3
+2.5
Preview
Add Shortcut
Status
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
3-9
3
Basic Operation
Original Image
Select image quality suited to the type of original.
The table below shows the quality options.
Image Quality Option
Original Image
Text+Photo*,**
Photo
Text*
Graphic/Map*
*
**
Description
Original Type
Printer Output
For mixed text and photo documents
printed on this machine originally.
Book/Magazine
For mixed text and photos printed in a
magazine, etc.
Printer Output
For photos printed on this machine
originally.
Book/Magazine
For photos printed in a magazine, etc.
Photo Paper
Suitable for photographs taken with a
camera.
Off
(original type not set)
For documents that are mostly text and
were originally printed on this machine.
On
(original type is set)
Sharply renders pencil text and fine lines.
Printer Output
For maps and diagrams printed on this
machine originally.
Book/Magazine
For maps and diagrams printed in a
magazine.
Highlighter can be selected.
If gray text is not printed completely using [Text + Photo], selecting [Text] may improve the result.
The procedure for selecting the quality of copies is explained below.
Copies
1
Press the Copy key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Set the original on the platen and press [Color/
Image Quality] -> [Original Image].
4
Select Original Type.
Original Image
Text+Photo
NOTE: When the Highlighter checkbox is selected
Original Type
and a fluorescent pen is copied, this can be used to
prevent the color reproduction of the fluorescent pen
from becoming too faint.
Photo
Printer Output
Book
/Magazine
Text
Original
Zoom
Paper
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Graphic
/Map
Highlighter
5
Press [OK].
6
Press the Start key. Copying begins.
Preview
Add Shortcut
Status
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
3-10
Basic Operation
Zoom
Adjust the magnification to reduce or enlarge the original image. The following zoom options are available.
Auto Zoom
Ledger: 129 %
Automatically reduces or enlarges the original image
suitably to the selected paper size.
Letter-R
A4
A3: 141 %
Statement-R: 64 %
A5: 70 %
Manual Zoom
Manually reduces or enlarges the original image in 1%
increments between 25% and 400%.
25 %
400 %
Preset Zoom
Reduces or enlarges at preset magnifications.
The following magnifications are available.
Model
Zoom Level (Original Copy)
Inch Models
100%, Auto, 400% (Max.), 200% (STMT >>
Ledger), 154%(STMT >> Legal), 129% (Letter >>
Ledger), 121% (Legal >> Ledger), 78% (Legal >>
Letter), 77% (Ledger >> Legal), 64% (Ledger >>
Letter), 50% (Ledger >> STMT), 25% (Min.)
Metric Models
100%, Auto, 400% (Max.), 200% (A5 >> A3),
141% (A4 >> A3, A5 >> A4), 127% (Folio >>
A3), 106% (11×15" >> A3), 90% (Folio >> A4),
75% (11×15" >> A4),
70% (A3 >> A4, A4 >> A5), 50%, 25% (Min.)
Metric Models (Asia
Pacific)
100%, Auto, 400% (Max.), 200% (A5 >> A3),
141% (A4 >> A3, B5 >> B4), 122% (A4 >> B4,
A5 >> B5), 115% (B4 >> A3, B5 >> A4), 86%
(A3 >> B4, A4 >> B5), 81%(B4 >> A4, B5 >>
A5), 70% (A3 >> A4, B4 >> B5), 50%, 25%
(Min.)
3-11
3
Basic Operation
XY Zoom
Select vertical and horizontal magnifications
individually. Reduce or enlarge original images in 1%
increments between 25% and 400%.
Y
X
The procedure for using zoom copying is explained below.
Copies
1
Press the Copy key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Set the original on the platen and press [Layout/
Edit] -> [Zoom].
4
Press [Standard Zoom] to use Auto Zoom.
Press [+] or [–] to change the displayed
magnification as desired. You can also enter the
magnification directly using the numeric keys by
pressing [# Keys].
Zoom
(25 - 400)
Standard
Zoom
XY Zoom
400
400%
200%
141%
Original
Zoom
Paper
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Max.
A5>>A3
A4>>A3
A5>>A4
A4>>B4
122%
A5>>B5
115%
Preview
Add Shortcut
%
86%
A3>>B4
A4>>B5
# Keys
81% 81%
100%
70% A3>>A4
Auto
50%
When using Preset Zoom, select the key of desired
magnification.
A4>>A5
B4>>A3
B5>>A4
25% Min.
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
When using XY Zoom, press [XY Zoom].
Copies
Press [+] or [–] to change the displayed
magnifications of X (horizontal) and Y (vertical).
You can also enter the magnification directly using
the numeric keys by pressing [# Keys].
Zoom
Standard
Zoom
X
(25 - 400)
100
%
XY Zoom
# Keys
Y
Original
Zoom
Paper
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Preview
Add Shortcut
Status
(25 - 400)
100
Press [Original Orientation] to select orientation of
the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge
on Left]. Then press [OK].
%
Top Edge
on Top
# Keys
Cancel
Original
Orientation
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
5
Press [OK].
6
Press the Start key. Copying begins.
3-12
Basic Operation
Duplex
Produce two-sided copies. The following duplex options are available.
You can also create single-sided copies from two-sided originals or originals with facing pages such as books.
The following modes are available.
One-sided to Two-sided
Produces two-sided copies from one-sided originals. In
case of an odd number of originals, the back side of the
last copy will be blank.
5
4
5
3
3
4
1
2
2
1
Original
Copy
A
ghi
def
ghi
abc
A Original Left/Right to Binding Left/Right: Images on
the second sides are not rotated.
abc
def
abc
The following binding options are available.
B
ghi
def
Original
B Original Left/Right to Binding Top: Images on the
second sides are rotated 180°. Copies can be bound
on the top edge, facing the same orientation when
turning the pages.
Copy
Two-sided to One-sided
1
Copies each side of a two-sided original onto two
individual sheets. The optional document processor is
required.
2
1
2
Original
Copy
The following binding options are available.
•
•
Binding Left/Right: Images on the second sides
are not rotated.
Binding Top: Images on the second sides are
rotated 180°.
Two-sided to Two-sided
5
5
3
3
Produces two-sided copies from two-sided originals.
The optional document processor is required.
4
4
1
1
2
2
Original
Copy
NOTE: The paper sizes supported in Two-sided to
Two-sided are A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R,
Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R, Executive, StatementR, Oficio II, 216×340mm and Folio.
3-13
3
Basic Operation
Book to One-sided
1
2
Produces a 1-sided copy of a 2-sided or open book
original.
2
1
The following binding options are available.
Original
•
Copy
•
Binding Left: Originals with facing pages are
copied from left to right.
Binding Right: Originals with facing pages are
copied from right to left.
NOTE: The following sizes of originals and paper are
supported in Two-sided to One-sided and Book to Onesided. Original: A3, B4, A4-R, B5-R, A5-R, Ledger,
Letter-R and 8K. Paper: A4, B5, Letter and 16K. You
may change paper size and reduce or enlarge copy to
match that size.
Book to Two-sided
Facing pages
-> Facing pages
Facing pages
-> Two-sided
4
2
1
4
3
3
1
1
2
2
1
0
3
4
2
3
2
1
3
4
3
1
0
2
Original
Produces two-sided copies from an open book original
with facing pages.
NOTE: The following sizes of originals and paper are
supported in Book to Two-sided mode. Original: A3,
B4, A4-R, B5-R, A5-R, Ledger, Letter-R and 8K. Paper:
A4, B5 and Letter.
Copy
The procedure for using two-sided/duplex copying is explained below.
Copies
Duplex
1
Press the Copy key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Duplex].
4
Select the desired Duplex option.
5
If you choose [1-sided>>2-sided] or
[2-sided>>2-sided], select the binding edge of the
finished copies of Finishing.
1-sided
>>1-sided
1-sided
>>2-sided
2-sided
>>1-sided
2-sided
>>2-sided
Original
Zoom
Paper
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Preview
Add Shortcut
Status
Book
>>1-sided
Book
>>2-sided
If you choose [Book>>2-sided], press [Book>>2sided] or [Book>> Book] of Finishing to select the
setting for duplex.
Finishing
Binding
Left/Right
Binding
Top
Cancel
Top Edge
on Top
Original
Orientation
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
3-14
Basic Operation
Copies
6
If you choose [2-sided>>1-sided],
[2-sided>>2-sided], [Book>>1-sided] or
[Book>>2-sided], select the binding edge of the
originals of Original.
7
Press [Original Orientation] to select orientation of
the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge
on Left]. Then press [OK].
8
Press [OK].
9
Press the Start key.
Duplex
Original
1-sided
>>1-sided
1-sided
>>2-sided
Binding
Left/Right
2-sided
>>1-sided
Binding
Top
2-sided
>>2-sided
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Original
Zoom
Paper
Preview
Top Edge
on Top
Book
>>1-sided
Original
Orientation
Book
>>2-sided
Add Shortcut
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
Once an original placed on the platen is scanned,
replace it with the next one. Then, press the Start
key.
After scanning all originals, press [Finish Scan] to
start copying.
Collate/Offset
The machine can collate and offset at the same time as it copies.
You can use the Collate/Offset copy function for tasks such as those shown below.
Collate
Scan multiple originals and deliver complete sets of
copies as required according to page number.
3
2
1
3
3
2
2
1
1
3
2
1
Original
Copy
Offset
Without Document Finisher
If the optional document finisher is not installed, when
you use offsetting, printed copies are produced after
rotating each set (or page) by 90º.
3
2
1
3
1
1
2
3
2
3
2
1
Original
NOTE: To use sorting, the same size of paper as the
selected paper tray must be loaded in a different
orientation in a different paper tray. The paper sizes
supported in Offset are A4, B5, Letter and 16K.
Copy (each set)
3-15
3
Basic Operation
With Document Finisher
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
Original
3
2
1
When you use offsetting, printed copies are segregated
after each set of copies (or after each page).
NOTE: The optional document finisher is required.
The paper sizes supported in Offset are A3, B4, A4,
B5, Letter, Legal, Ledger, Oficio II, 8k, 16k,
216×340mm, Folio.
Copy (each set)
The procedure for using collate/offset copying is
explained below.
Copies
1
Press the Copy key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Org./Paper/Finishing] and then [Collate/
Offset].
4
To use collate copying, press [On] of Collate.
To use offset copying, press [Each Set] of Offset.
Collate/Offset
Collate
Off
On
Off
Each Set
Press [OK].
Offset
Original
Zoom
Paper
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Preview
Add Shortcut
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
If [Off] is selected for Collate, press [Off] or [Each
Page] of Offset.
Copies
Collate/Offset
Collate
Off
On
Off
Each Page
5
Press [OK].
6
Press the Start key. Copying begins.
Offset
Original
Zoom
Paper
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Preview
Add Shortcut
Status
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
3-16
Basic Operation
Reserve Next
This function allows you to reserve the next job during printing. Using this function, the original will be scanned
while the machine is printing. When the current print job ends, the reserved copy job is printed. The procedure
differs depending on the Reserve Next Priority (refer to page 9-45).
If Reserve Next Priority is set to [On]
The Copy function default screen appears on the touch panel during printing.
Copies
Copy Image
1
Place the originals onto the machine for reserving
copy, and configure the copy settings.
2
Press the Start key.
Shortcut 1
Shortcut 2
Place original.
Shortcut 3
Auto
Normal 0
100%
Shortcut 4
Paper
Selection
Original : A4
: --Original
Zoom
: 100%
Zoom
: 100%
Paper
: --Paper
: A4
1-sided
>>1-sided
Preview
Preview
Quick Setup
Shortcut 5
Off
Duplex
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Density
Zoom
Color/
Image Quality
Off
Combine
Staple
/Punch
Layout/Edit
Shortcut 6
Program
Advanced
Setup
Status
10/10/2010 10:10
The machine starts scanning the originals.
When the current print job ends, the reserved copy
job is printed.
If Reserve Next Priority is set to [Off]
The Copying screen appears on the touch panel during printing.
Copies
Job No.: 000021
Scanner Setting
Job Name: doc20081010101034
1
Press [Reserve Next].
The default screen for copying appears.
User Name: ----Printer Setting
Scanned Pages
Copies
A4
A4
100%
2-sided
2-sided
Collate
Plain
Top Edge on Top
Tray A
Cancel
Status
Reserve Next
10/10/2010 10:10
2
Place the originals onto the machine for reserving
copy, and configure the copy settings.
3
Press the Start key.
The machine starts scanning the originals.
When the current print job ends, the reserved copy
job is printed.
3-17
3
Basic Operation
Interrupt Copy
This function allows you to pause the current jobs in progress when you need to make copies immediately.
When the interruption copy ends, the machine resumes the paused print jobs.
NOTE: If the machine is left unused for 60 seconds in interrupt copy mode, interrupt copying is automatically
canceled and printing resumes. You can change the delay until interrupt copying is canceled. Change the delay
as required. For more information, refer to Interrupt Clear Timer on page 9-81.
Copies
Copy Image
1
Press the Interrupt key.
The current print job is temporarily interrupted.
Shortcut 1
Shortcut 2
Place original.
Shortcut 3
Auto
100%
Normal 0
Shortcut 4
Original : A4
: --Original
Zoom
: 100%
Zoom
: 100%
Paper
: --Paper
: A4
Paper
Selection
1-sided
>>1-sided
Preview
Preview
Quick Setup
Status
Zoom
Shortcut 5
Off
Duplex
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Density
Color/
Image Quality
Off
Combine
Layout/Edit
Staple
/Punch
Advanced
Setup
Shortcut 6
Program
10/10/2010 10:10
2
Place the originals onto the machine for interrupt
copy, and configure the copy settings.
3
Press the Start key to start interrupt copying.
4
When interrupt copying ends, press the Interrupt
key.
The machine resumes the paused print jobs.
3-18
Basic Operation
Staple
Use this feature to staple your finished copies.
NOTE: Stapling requires the optional document finisher. Note also that saddle stitching (center stapling)
requires the folding unit.
For details on paper sizes and numbers of sheets that can be stapled, refer to 1,000-sheet Finisher (Option) on
page Appendix-29 or 4,000-sheet Finisher (Option) on page Appendix-30.
The following stapling options and orientations are available.
Original Orientation:
Top Edge (Back Edge)
Original Orientation:
Top Edge (Back Edge)
Cassette Paper Load
Direction
Cassette Paper Load
Direction
NOTE: B5-R and 16K-R "one staple" is not diagonal.
3-19
Original Orientation:
Original Orientation:
Left Top Edge (Left top Left Top Edge (Left top
corner)
corner)
3
Basic Operation
Follow the steps as below for stapling.
1
Press the Copy key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
NOTE: When performing Mixed Size Stapling, refer to
Mixed Size Originals on page 4-6.
Copies
3
Press [Org./Paper/Finishing] and then [Staple/
Punch].
4
Select the staple position.
Staple/Punch
Top
Left
2 staples
Top
Top
Right
2 staples
Right
2 staples
Left
Saddle
Stitch
Punch
2 holes
Left
3 holes
Left
Off
2 holes
Top
3 holes
Top
2 holes
Right
3 holes
Right
Staple
Off
Original
Zoom
Paper
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Preview
Add Shortcut
Cancel
NOTE: To use saddle stitching, press [Saddle Stitch].
When placing originals, be sure to place the cover
page at the bottom. For more information on saddle
stitching, refer to Booklet on page 4-20.
Top Edge
on Top
Original
Orientation
5
Press [Original Orientation] to choose orientation of
the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge
on Left]. Then press [OK].
6
Press [OK].
7
Press the Start key. Copying begins.
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
Mixed Size Stapling
Even with mixed paper sizes, if the sizes have the same width or same length as shown in the combinations
below, the output can be stapled. The maximum number of sheets that can be stapled is 30.
A4
B5
Letter
A4
B5
Letter
A3
B4
Ledger
•
A3 and A4
•
B4 and B5
•
Ledger and Letter
•
Ledger and Letter-R
•
8K and 16K
A3
B4
Ledger
Letter-R Legal
Letter-R Legal
3-20
Basic Operation
Punch
Punch holes in sets of finished copies in preparation for binding.
NOTE: Requires the optional document finisher and punching unit.
For details on paper sizes that can be punched, refer to Hole Punch Unit (Option) on page Appendix-30.
The orientations of the original and corresponding punch positions are as follows.
Original
Copy
Orientation of Original
Platen
Document
processor
NOTE: The inch model provides two-hole and three-hole punching. The metric model provides two-hole and
four-hole punching.
3-21
3
Basic Operation
Follow the steps as below for punching.
Copies
Staple/Punch
Top
Left
2 staples
Top
Top
Right
2 staples
Right
2 staples
Left
Saddle
Stitch
Punch
2 holes
Left
3 holes
Left
Off
2 holes
Top
3 holes
Top
2 holes
Right
3 holes
Right
Staple
Off
Original
Zoom
Paper
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Preview
Add Shortcut
Status
Cancel
1
Press the Copy key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Org./Paper/Finishing]and then press
[Staple/Punch].
4
Select the type of hole punching.
5
Press [Original Orientation] to choose orientation of
the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge
on Left]. Then press [OK].
6
Press [OK].
7
Press the Start key.
Top Edge
on Top
Original
Orientation
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
If the original is placed on the platen. Place the next
original and press the Start key. Copying begins.
If all original pages have been scanned, press
[Finish Scan]. Copying begins.
3-22
Basic Operation
Sending
This machine can send a scanned image as an attachment of an E-mail message or to a PC linked to the
network. In order to do this, it is necessary to register the sender and destination (recipient) address on the
network.
A network environment which enables the machine to connect to a mail server is required. It is recommended
that a Local Area Network (LAN) be used to assist with transmission speed and security issues.
At the same time as you send a scanned image, you can also print the image or send it to the Document Box.
To use the Scanning Function perform the following steps:
•
Program the settings, including the E-mail setting on the machine.
•
Use Embedded Web Server RX (the internal HTML web page) to register the IP address, the host name of
the SMTP server, the recipient, and Settings for E-mail.
•
Register the destination in the Address Book or One Touch keys.
•
When the PC Folder (SMB/FTP) is selected, it is necessary to share the destination folder. To set up the PC
Folder, contact your administrator.
•
Create/Register a Document Box (when a Document Box is selected as the destination)
•
Select detailed transmission settings (to select a Document Box as the destination or to print and send the
image at the same time)
Follow the steps below for basic sending. The following five options are available.
•
Send as E-mail: Sends a scanned original image as an E-mail attachment...page 3-24
•
Send to Folder (SMB): Stores a scanned original image in a shared folder of any PC...page 3-25
•
Send to Folder (FTP): Stores a scanned original image in a folder of an FTP server...page 3-25
•
Send to Document Box: Sends a document stored in a document box on this machine...page 7-7
•
Image Data Scanning with TWAIN / WIA: Scan the document using a TWAIN or WIA compatible application
program...page 6-33
NOTE: Different sending options can be specified in combination. Refer to Sending to Different Types of
Destinations (Multi Sending) on page 3-42.
The fax function can be used when the optional fax kit has been installed. For details about this function, refer
to the FAX Operation Guide.
3-23
3
Basic Operation
Send as E-mail (E-mail Addr Entry)
Sends a scanned original image as an E-mail attachment.
NOTE: Access the Embedded Web Server RX beforehand and specify the settings required for sending email. For details, see Embedded Web Server RX (Settings for E-mail) on page 2-24.
1
Press the Send key.
Displays the screen for sending.
NOTE: Depending on the settings, the address book
screen may appear. In this event, press [Cancel] to
display the screen for sending.
Destination
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [E-mail Addr Entry] and then [E-mail
Address].
Enter Destination.
E-mail Address Entry
E-mail
Address
NOTE: Destinations can be specified using the
Address Book or the One Touch Keys. Refer to
Specifying Destination on page 3-40.
Add a new e-mail destination.
Press [E-mail Address], then enter
the address using the keyboard screen.
Add to Addr Book
Next Dest.
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
4
Enter destination E-mail address and press [OK].
5
Press [Next Dest.] and repeat step 3 to specify the
destination. Up to 100 e-mail addresses can be
specified.
NOTE: When [Add to Addr Book] is displayed, the
destinations are registered in the Address Book.
Destination
Destination
Detail
ABCD
192.168.188.120
Group1
Group1
On Hook
Direct
Chain
Press [OK]. The destinations are registered in the
destination list.
7
Check the destination list.
Select a destination and press [Detail/Edit] to check
and edit it.
Address
Book
abcd@efg.com
TUVW
6
1/1
E-mail
Addr Entry
Select a destination and press [Delete] to remove
the destination from the list.
Folder Path
Entry
Detail/Edit
Delete
Recall
FAX No.
Entry
0001
AAA
0002
BBB
0006
FFF
Destination
Status
0003
CCC
0007
GGG
Quick Setup
0004
HHH
0009
III
Org./Sending
Data Format
No.
0010
1/100
EEE
DDD
0008
0005
i-FAX
Addr Entry
JJJ
Color/
Image Quality
Advanced
Setup
WSD Scan
/DSM Scan
Program
10/10/2010 10:10
3-24
Basic Operation
NOTE: When selecting [On] for Entry Check for New
Destination (page 9-48), the confirmation screen
appears. Enter the same destination again and press
[OK].
When selecting [On] for Destination Check before Send
(page 9-47), the confirmation screen appears after
pressing the Start key. For details, refer to Confirmation
Screen of Destinations on page 3-29.
8
Press the Start key. Sending begins.
Send to Folder (Folder Path Entry)
Stores a scanned original image file in the specified shared folder of any PC.
Stores a scanned original image in a folder of an FTP server.
NOTE:
•
Refer to Creating a Shared Folder on page 3-32 for details on how to share a folder.
•
Be sure that SMB Protocol or FTP in the Embedded Web Server RX is On. For details, refer to the
Embedded Web Server RX Operation Guide.
1
Press the Send key.
Displays the screen for sending.
NOTE: Depending on the settings, the address book
screen may appear. In this event, press [Cancel] to
display the screen for sending.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Folder Path Entry] and then [SMB] or [FTP].
NOTE: Destinations can be specified using the
Address Book or the One Touch Keys. For details, refer
to Specifying Destination on page 3-40.
3-25
3
Basic Operation
Destination
4
Enter Destination.
Folder Path Entry
SMB
Enter host name, path, login user name and login
password. Press the key of each item to first
display the entry screen.
Host Name
To search for a folder on a PC on the network,
press [Search SMB Host] or [Windows Network].
Path
FTP
Login
User Name
If you pressed [Search SMB Host], you can enter
the Domain/Workgroup, and Host Name to search
PCs on the network for the destination.
Login
Password
Search
SMB Host
Add to Addr Book
Windows
Network
Next Dest.
Connection
Test
Cancel
OK
If you pressed [Windows Network], you can search
all PCs on the network for a destination.
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
If you pressed [Windows Network], all PCs on the
network are searched. A maximum of 500
addresses can be displayed. Select the host name
(PC name) that you want to specify in the screen
that appears, and press [Next]. The login user
name and login password entry screen appears.
After you enter the login user name and login
password name of the destination PC, the shared
folders appear. Select the folder that you want to
specify and press [Next]. The address of the
selected shared folder is set.
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on
Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
Press [Connection Test] to check the connection to the
computer you chose. If the connection fails, check the
entries you made.
Select the folder from the Search Results list, and
go to step 6.
5
Use the keyboard to enter.
Limit: 128 characters
Input: 0 characters
Backspace
!
@
Q
#
W
A
S
Z
Upper-case
$
E
D
X
%
R
F
C
Lower-case
Lower-case
^
T
G
V
&
Y
H
B
No./Symbol
*
U
J
N
(
I
K
M
)
O
L
<
_
P
:
>
˜
}
|
"
?
Space
Cancel
Status
+
{
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
3-26
Enter the destination data and press [OK].
Basic Operation
Data to be entered are as follows.
NOTE: You will be unable to send the data if you forget your login user name or login password. Contact your
administrator and check your login user name or login password.
For send to folder (SMB)
3
Item
Data to be entered
Max. characters
Host Name*
Host name or IP address of the PC to receive the data.
Up to 64 characters
Path
Path to the receiving folder such as follows.
For example, User\ScanData.
Up to 128 characters
Login User Name
User name to access the PC
For example, abcdnet\james.smith
Up to 64 characters
Login Password
Password to access the PC
Up to 64 characters
*
To specify a port number different from the default (139), enter using the format “host name: port number”
(e.g., SMBhostname:140).
To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ].
(e.g., [3ae3:9a0:cd05:b1d2:28a:1fc0:a1:10ae]:140)
For send to folder (FTP)
Item
Data to be entered
Max. characters
Host Name*
Host name or IP address of FTP server
Up to 64 characters
Path
Path to the receiving folder.
For example, User\ScanData.
Otherwise the data will be saved in the home directory.
Up to 128 characters
Login User Name
FTP server login user name
Up to 64 characters
Login Password
FTP server login password
Up to 64 characters
*
To specify a port number different from the default (21), enter using the format “host name: port number”
(e.g., FTPhostname:140).
To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ].
(e.g., [3ae3:9a0:cd05:b1d2:28a:1fc0:a1:10ae]:140)
Destination
6
Enter Destination.
Upon completion of all entries, press [Connection
Test] to check the connection.
Folder Path Entry
SMB
FTP
Host Name
NOTE: Connected. appears when connection to the
destination is correctly established. If Cannot connect.
appears, review the entry.
Path
Login
User Name
Login
Password
Search
SMB Host
Add to Addr Book
Status
Next Dest.
Windows
Network
Cancel
To specify another destination, go to step 7. To
specify only one destination, go to step 8.
Connection
Test
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
3-27
Basic Operation
7
Press [Next Dest.] and repeat steps 4 to 6 to
specify the destination. You can specify a
combined total of up to 10 FTP and SMB
destination folders.
NOTE: When [Add to Addr Book] is displayed, the
entry is registered in the Address Book.
Destination
Destination
Detail
ABCD
192.168.188.120
Group1
Group1
On Hook
Direct
Chain
Press [OK] to register the entry in the destination
list.
9
Check the destination list.
Select a destination and press [Detail/Edit] to check
and edit it. Edit it, if necessary, referring to steps 4
to 6.
Address
Book
abcd@efg.com
TUVW
8
1/1
E-mail
Addr Entry
Folder Path
Entry
Detail/Edit
Delete
Select a destination and press [Delete] to remove
the destination from the list.
Recall
FAX No.
Entry
0001
AAA
0002
BBB
0006
FFF
Destination
Status
0003
CCC
0007
GGG
Quick Setup
0004
0009
III
Org./Sending
Data Format
No.
EEE
DDD
0008
HHH
0005
i-FAX
Addr Entry
0010
1/100
JJJ
Color/
Image Quality
Advanced
Setup
WSD Scan
/DSM Scan
Program
10/10/2010 10:10
NOTE: When selecting [On] for Entry Check for New
Destination (page 9-48), the confirmation screen
appears. Enter the same host name and path again,
and press [OK].
When selecting [On] for Destination Check before Send
(page 9-47), the confirmation screen appears after
pressing the Start key. For details, refer to Confirmation
Screen of Destinations on page 3-29.
10 Press the Start key. Sending begins.
3-28
Basic Operation
Confirmation Screen of Destinations
When selecting [On] for Destination Check before Send (page 9-47), the confirmation screen of destinations
appears after pressing the Start key.
Follow the steps below to confirm the destinations.
Check the destination list through the last page.
Destination
1
Press [
] or [
] to confirm every destination.
After checking the list, press [Check] and then Start key.
Destination
A OFFICE
Press [Detail] to display the detailed information on
the selected destination.
Detail
1234567890
To delete the destination, select the destination you
want to delete and press [Delete]. Press [Yes] in the
confirmation screen. The destination is deleted.
Detail
Delete
To add the destination, press [Cancel] and then
return to the destination screen.
Check
Cancel
Status
10/10/2010 10:10
2
Press [Check].
NOTE: Be sure to confirm every destination by
displaying them on the touch panel. You cannot press
[Check] unless you have confirmed every destination.
3
3-29
Press the Start key to start sending.
3
Basic Operation
Preparation for sending a document to a PC
Check the information that needs to be set on the machine and create a folder to receive the document on your
computer. Screens of Windows 7 are used in the following explanation. The details of the screens will vary in
other versions of Windows.
NOTE: Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
Checking what to enter for [Host Name]
Check the name of the destination computer.
1
From the Start menu, select Computer and then
System Properties.
Check the computer name in the window that
appears.
In Windows XP, right-click My Computer and select
Properties. The System Properties dialog box
appears. Click the Computer Name tab in the
window that appears and check the computer
name.
If there is a workgroup
All characters appearing in "Full computer name"
should be entered in Host Name. (Example:
PC4050)
If there is a domain
The characters to the left of the first dot (.) in "Full
computer name" should be entered in Host Name.
Example: pc4050)
2
After checking the computer name, click the [ X ]
(Close) button to close the System Properties
screen.
In Windows XP, after checking the computer name,
click the Cancel button to close the System
Properties screen.
3-30
Basic Operation
Checking what to enter for [Login User Name]
Check the domain name and user name for logging onto Windows.
1
From the Start menu, select All Programs (or
Programs), Accessories and then Command
Prompt.
The Command Prompt window appears.
2
At the Command Prompt, enter "net config
workstation" and then click Enter.
Screen example: user name "james.smith" and
domain name "ABCDNET"
3-31
3
Basic Operation
Creating a Shared Folder
Create a shared folder to receive the document in the destination computer.
NOTE: If there is a workgroup in System Properties, configure the settings below to limit folder access to a
specific user or group.
1 From the Start menu, select Control Panel, Appearance and Personalization, and then Folder Options.
In Windows XP, click My Computer and select Folder Options in Tools.
2 Click the View tab and remove the checkmark from Use Sharing Wizard (Recommended) in Advanced
settings.
In Windows XP, click the View tab and remove the checkmark from Use Simple File Sharing
(Recommended) in Advanced settings.
3 Click the OK button to close the Folder Options screen.
1
Create a folder on the local disk (C).
NOTE: For example, create a folder with the name
"scannerdata" on the local disk (C).
2
Right-click the scannerdata folder and click Share
and Advanced sharing. Click the Advanced
Sharing button.
The scannerdata Properties dialog box appears.
In Windows XP, right-click the scannerdata folder
and select Sharing and Security... (or Sharing).
3-32
Basic Operation
3
Select the Share this folder checkbox and click
the Permissions button.
The Permissions for scannerdata dialog box
appears.
In Windows XP, select Share this folder and click
the Permissions button.
4
Click the Add button.
5
Enter the user name in the text box and click the
OK button.
Click the location button and select the location. To
select the area to be searched, select a location. If
you are in a domain, your domain is selected by
default as the area to be searched.
3-33
3
Basic Operation
6
Select the entered user, select the Change and
Read permissions, and click the OK button.
In Windows XP, go to step 8.
NOTE: "Everyone" gives sharing permission to everyone on the network. To strengthen security, it is
recommended that you select Everyone and remove the Read permission checkmark.
7
Click the OK button in the Advanced Sharing
screen to close the screen.
8
Click the Security tab and then click the Edit
button.
In Windows XP, click the Security tab and then click
the Add button.
9
3-34
Select the entered user, make sure that
checkmarks appear in allow Modify and allow
Read & execute, and click the close button.
Basic Operation
Checking the [Path]
Check the share name of the shared folder that will be the destination for the document.
1
Enter "\\pc4050" in "Program and File Search" in
the Start menu.
The Search Results screen opens.
In Windows XP, click Search in the Start menu,
select All files and folders, and search for the
destination computer to which the file will be sent.
In Search Companion, click Computers or people
and then A computer on the network.
In the "Computer name:" text box, enter the name
of the computer that you checked (pc4050) and
then click Search.
2
Click "\\pc4050\scannerdata" that appears in the
search results.
In Windows XP, double-click the computer
("pc4050") that appears in the search results.
3
Click "\\pc4050\scannerdata" that appears in the
search results.
Check the address bar. The third and following text
strings (f ) should be entered for the path.
In Windows XP, double-click the scannerdata folder
and check the address bar. The text string to the
right of the third backslash (\) should be entered in
Path.
(Example: scannerdata)
NOTE: You can also specify a subfolder in the shared folder as the location where data is to be sent. In this
case, "share name\name of folder in the shared folder" should be entered for the Path. In the example
windowabove, "scannerdata\projectA" is the Path.
3-35
3
Basic Operation
Configuring Windows Firewall (for Windows 7)
Permit sharing of files and printers and set the port used for SMB transmission.
NOTE: Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
Checking file and printer sharing
1
From the Start menu, select Control Panel,
System and Security, and Allow a program
through Windows Firewall.
NOTE: If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click the Continue button.
2
3-36
Click Change settings, select the File and Printer
Sharing checkbox, and click OK.
Basic Operation
Adding a port
1
From the Start menu, select Control Panel,
System and Security, and Check firewall status.
3
2
Click Advanced settings.
3
Click Inbound Rules.
4
Click New Rule.
5
Select Port and click Next.
3-37
Basic Operation
6
Select TCP, select Specific local ports, enter
"139", and click Next.
7
Select Allow the connection and click Next.
8
Make sure all checkboxes are selected and click
Next.
3-38
Basic Operation
9
Enter "Scan to SMB" in "Name" and click Finish.
3
NOTE: In Windows XP or Windows Vista, follow the procedure below to set the port.
1 From the Start menu, select Control Panel, System and Security (or Security Center), and then Check
Firewall Status) (or Windows Firewall).
If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click the Continue button.
2 Click the Exceptions tab and then the Add port... button.
3 Specify Add a Port settings.
Enter any name in "Name" (example: Scan to SMB). This will be the name of the new port. Enter "139" in
"Port Number". Select TCP for "Protocol".
4 Click the OK button to close the Add a Port dialog box.
3-39
Basic Operation
Specifying Destination
When specifying destination, choose from the Address Book or use the One Touch Keys.
NOTE: You can set the machine up so that the address book screen appears when you press the Send key.
For details, refer to Default Screen on page 9-49.
When the optional fax kit has been installed, you can specify the fax destination. Enter the other party’s number
using the numeric keypad.
Address Book
Select a destination registered in the Address Book.
For more information about how to register destinations in the Address Book, refer to Edit Destination (Address
Book/Adding One Touch Keys) on page 9-83.
Destination
Destination
Detail
ABCD
abcd@efg.com
TUVW
192.168.188.120
Group1
Direct
Chain
In the basic screen for sending, press [Address
Book].
2
Press the checkbox to select the desired
destination from the list. You may choose multiple
destinations. The selected destinations are
indicated by a checkmark in the check box. To use
an address book on the LDAP server, select [Ext
Address Book] from the Addr Book pull-down menu.
Address
Book
1/1
Group1
On Hook
1
E-mail
Addr Entry
Folder Path
Entry
Detail/Edit
Delete
Recall
FAX No.
Entry
0001
0002
AAA
BBB
0006
0003
CCC
0007
FFF
GGG
Destination
0004
0008
i-FAX
Addr Entry
0009
0010
III
Org./Sending
Data Format
No.
EEE
DDD
HHH
Quick Setup
0005
1/100
JJJ
Color/
Image Quality
Advanced
Setup
WSD Scan
/DSM Scan
Program
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
Address Book
Addr Book
Dest.
No.
Address Book
Type
Name
Sort
Name
Detail
0001
ABCD
abcd@efg.com
0002
TUVW
tuvw@xyz.com
0003
Group1
0004
Group2
Search(Name)
0005
ABC
DEF
E-mail
Search(No.)
1/2
Group3
GHI
JKL
MNO
Folder
PQRS TUV
FAX
WXYZ
You can change the order in which the destinations
are listed by selecting [Name] or [No.] from the Sort
pull-down menu.
0-9
Group
i-FAX
Cancel
Status
Register/Edit
Address Book
Detail
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
NOTE: To cancel the selection, press the check box
and remove the checkmark. For details on the external
address book, refer to Embedded Web Server RX
Operation Guide.
3
Press [OK] to register the selected destination in
the destination list.
NOTE: To delete a destination in the list, select the
destination and press [Delete].
To change the default setting for Sort, refer to Sort on
page 9-89.
3-40
Basic Operation
Destination Search
Destinations registered in the Address Book can be searched.
Advanced search by type or by initial letter is also available.
Address Book
Addr Book
Dest.
(1)
(2)
No.
Address Book
Type
Detail
0001
ABCD
abcd@efg.com
0002
TUVW
tuvw@xyz.com
0003
Group1
0004
Group2
Search(Name)
0005
(3)
Name
Sort
Name
ABC
(4)
DEF
Search(No.)
1/2
Group3
GHI
E-mail
JKL
MNO
Folder
PQRS TUV
WXYZ
FAX
0-9
Group
i-FAX
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
Keys
used
Register/Edit
Address Book
Detail
Search type
Subjects searched
1
Search by name
Search by registered name.
2
Search by address
number
Search by registered address number.
3
Advanced search
by initial letter
Advanced search by initial letter of registered name.
4
Advanced search
by destination
Advanced search by type of registered destination
(E-mail, Folder (SMB/FTP), FAX, i-FAX or Group).
(FAX: Only when the optional fax kit is installed. i-FAX:
Only when the optional internet fax kit is installed).
You can set this function up so that destination types
are selected when the address book is displayed.
For more information, refer to Narrow Down on page 989.
The procedures for using the different search modes are explained below.
Search by name
Press [Search(Name)] and enter the required name.
Search by address number
Press [Search(No.)] and enter the address number you wish to search.
Advanced search by initial letter
Press the key for the required initial letter.
Advanced search by destination
Press any of [E-mail], [Folder], [FAX], [i-FAX] or [Group]. The destinations registered by that type are displayed.
3-41
3
Basic Operation
One Touch Key
Destination
Destination
Detail
ABCD
TUVW
192.168.188.120
Group1
Group1
On Hook
Address
Book
abcd@efg.com
Direct
Chain
1/1
E-mail
Addr Entry
Folder Path
Entry
Detail/Edit
Delete
Recall
FAX No.
Entry
0001
AAA
0002
0003
BBB
0006
FFF
CCC
0007
HHH
Quick Setup
0009
III
Org./Sending
Data Format
0005
No.
0010
1/100
EEE
DDD
0008
GGG
Destination
0004
i-FAX
Addr Entry
JJJ
Color/
Image Quality
Advanced
Setup
WSD Scan
/DSM Scan
Program
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
Select the destination using the One Touch Keys.
In the basic screen for sending, press the One Touch
Keys where the destination is registered.
NOTE: If the One Touch Keys for the desired
destination is hidden on the touch panel, press [ ] or
[ ] to scroll and view next or previous One Touch
Keys.
This procedure assumes that One Touch Keys have
already been registered.
Refer to Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One
Touch Key) on page 9-87 for more information on
adding One Touch keys.
Speed Dial
Destination
Destination
Detail
ABCD
TUVW
192.168.188.120
Group1
On Hook
Address
Book
abcd@efg.com
1/1
Group1
Direct
Chain
E-mail
Addr Entry
Folder Path
Entry
Detail/Edit
Delete
Recall
FAX No.
Entry
0001
AAA
0002
BBB
0006
FFF
Destination
Status
0003
CCC
0007
GGG
Quick Setup
0004
HHH
0009
III
Org./Sending
Data Format
No.
0010
1/100
EEE
DDD
0008
0005
In the basic screen for sending, press the Quick No.
Search key or [No.] and use the numeric keys to enter
the One Touch key number in the numeric entry
screen.
i-FAX
Addr Entry
JJJ
Color/
Image Quality
Access the destination by specifying the 4-digit (0001 to
1000) One Touch Key number (speed dial).
Advanced
Setup
WSD Scan
/DSM Scan
Program
NOTE: if you entered the speed dial in 1 to 3-digit,
press [OK].
10/10/2010 10:10
Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending)
You can specify destinations that combine e-mail addresses, folders (SMB or FTP) and fax numbers (optional).
This is referred to as Multi Sending. This is useful for sending to different types of destination (e-mail addresses,
folders, etc.) in a single operation.
No. of broadcast items E-mail
Folders (SMP, FTP)
FAX
i-FAX
: Up to 100
: Total of 10 SMB and FTP
: Up to 500
: Up to 100
Also, depending on the settings, you can send and print at the same time.
Procedures are the same as used in specifying the destinations of respective types. Continue to enter E-mail
address or folder path so that they appear in the destination list. Press the Start key to start transmission to all
destinations at one time.
NOTE: If the destinations include a fax, the images sent to all destinations will be black and white.
3-42
Basic Operation
Using the Document Box
What is Document Box?
Document Box is an area in the hard disk in which you can save documents for later retrieval or sharing among
multiple users.
Document Box contains four types of component boxes which provide the following functions.
Custom Box...page 7-2
Custom Box is a component box which you can create within the Document Box and store data for later retrieval.
You can create or delete a Custom Box, and manipulate data in various ways as described below:
•
Creating a box...page 7-2
•
Storing Documents in a Custom Box...page 7-4
•
Printing a Document in a Custom Box...page 7-5
•
Sending a Document from a Custom Box...page 7-7
•
Moving/ Copying /Joining Documents in a Custom Box...page 7-10
•
Deleting Documents in a Custom Box...page 7-13
Job Box
Job Box holds temporary or permanent print data for use with job options including Private Print, Stored Job,
Quick Copy, Proof and Hold, Repeat copy and Form Overlay which will be discussed later.
Four individual Job Boxes corresponding to these job options are already provided in the Document Box. These
Job Boxes cannot be created or deleted by a user.
NOTE: You can set up the machine so that temporary documents in job boxes are automatically deleted. For
details, refer to Deletion of Job Retention on page 7-19.
Private Print/Stored Job Box...page 7-14
In Private Printing, you can specify that a job is not printed until you release the job at the operation panel. When
sending the job from the application software, specify a 4-digit access code in the printer driver. The job is
released for printing by entering the access code on the operation panel, ensuring confidentiality of the print job.
The data will be deleted upon completion of the print job or after the main power switch is turned off.
In Hold Job, access codes are not mandatory, but can be set on the printer driver if printing with PIN security is
required. In this event, you need to enter the access code to print the stored jobs. Print data will be stored in the
hard disk after printing. This will allow printing of the same print data repeatedly.
Quick Copy/Proof and Hold Box...page 7-15
Quick Copy feature facilitates additional prints of a document already printed. Activating Quick Copy and printing
a document using the printer driver allow the print data to be stored in the Quick Copy Job Box. When additional
copies are required, you can reprint the required number of copies from the operation panel. By default, up to
32 documents can be stored. When power is turned off, all stored jobs will be deleted.
NOTE: When you attempt to store documents in excess of the above maximum, the oldest document data will
be overwritten by the latest document data.
3-43
3
Basic Operation
The Proof and Hold feature produces only a single proof print of multiple-print job and holds printing of the
remaining copies. Printing a multiple-print job in Proof and Hold using the printer driver allows only a single copy
to be printed while maintaining the document data in the Job Box. To continue to print the remaining copies, use
the operation panel. You can change the number of copies to print.
Repeat Copy Box...page 7-18
Repeat Copy feature stores the copied original document data in the Job Box and allows you to print additional
copies later. By default, up to 32 documents can be stored. When power is turned off, the original data will be
deleted.
NOTE: Repeat Copy function is not available when the optional Data Security Kit is installed.
Form for Form Overlay Box...page 7-20
Image Overlay feature copies the original document overlaid with a form or image. This Job Box is used to store
the forms or images for overlaying.
Removable Memory Box
A USB memory inserted into the USB Port (A1) of the machine is also recognizable as a Job Box. This allows
printing of the PDF data stored in the USB memory. You can print PDF data directly from the USB memory
without a PC. Image files scanned using this machine can also be saved to USB memory in the PDF, TIFF,
JPEG, XPS or high compression PDF format (Scan to USB).
Fax Box
Fax Box stores the fax data received. For details, refer to the Operation Guide supplied with the fax kit.
3-44
Basic Operation
Basic Operation for Document Box
This section explains basic operations for document boxes, using examples where tasks are carried out with
custom boxes.
NOTE: In the following explanation, it is assumed that user login administration is enabled. For details on User
Logon privileges, refer to User Privileges on page 3-50.
3
The basic procedure for using document boxes is explained below.
1
Press the Document Box key.
The default document box screen appears.
2
No.
0001
Name
Owner
SALES
Used
Anonymous
----
Search(Name)
In this example, press [Custom Box].
Search(No.)
1/1
Store File
Custom Box
Job Box
Detail
Removable
Memory
Press [Custom Box], [Job Box] or [Removable
Memory] to select the type of document box you
want to work with.
Add/Edit Box
The box list screen appears.
You can use this screen for tasks such as
registering and editing boxes. For more information
on using the box list, refer to Custom Box List on
page 3-46.
Open
FAX Box
Program
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
NOTE: For more information on registering boxes,
refer to Creating a New Custom Box (Add/Edit Box) on
page 7-2.
You cannot access boxes if you forget your password.
In this event, access the machine using administrator
privileges and overwrite your box password.
Refer to Adding a User (Local User List) on page 10-5
for the default login user name and password.
3
No.
0001
Name
Owner
SALES
Select the box containing the document you want
to work with and press [Open].
Used
Anonymous
----
The document list screen appears.
Search(Name)
Search(No.)
1/1
Store File
Custom Box
Status
Job Box
Detail
Removable
Memory
You can use this screen for tasks such as printing
and sending documents. For more information on
using the document list, refer to Document List on
page 3-47.
Add/Edit Box
Open
FAX Box
Program
10/10/2010 10:10
NOTE: If a custom box is protected by a password,
enter the correct password.
3-45
Basic Operation
Custom Box List
The box list shows the registered custom boxes. The custom boxes can be listed by box number or by box name.
You can manipulate the list in a range of ways, as shown below.
Listing the boxes by name in
alphabetical order.
Listing the boxes by number in
ascending/descending order.
Listing the boxes by owner in
alphabetical order.
A box can be searched for
by Box Name.
No.
0001
Name
Owner
SALES
Used
Anonymous
----
Search(Name)
Search(No.)
1/1
Saves the document
in the selected box.
Store File
Custom Box
Job Box
Detail
Removable
Memory
Add/Edit Box
Program
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
3-46
Registers new boxes and
checks, modifies or
deletes box information.
Opens the selected box.
Open
FAX Box
A box can be searched for
by Box No.
Displays the details for
the selected box.
Basic Operation
Document List
The document list is a list of the documents stored in the custom box. Documents can be listed either by name
or as thumbnails. The list can be used as shown below.
List
Listing the documents by name
in alphabetical order.
Selecting more than one
document at a time.
Listing the documents by time of update in
ascending/descending order.
Box:
File Name
Selecting documents by
checking checkboxes.
Listing the documents by size in
ascending/descending order.
Date and Time
Size
0001
2008101010574501
2010/10/10 09:40
21 MB
0002
2008101010574511
2010/10/10 09:50
21 MB
0003
2008101010574521
2010/10/10 10:00
21 MB
Search(Name)
Highlighting a document to
display its details with [Detail].
1/1
Detail
Preview
Print
Send
Join
Move/Copy
Delete
Store File
Previews the selected
document.
Close
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
Thumbnail
Selecting more than one
document at a time.
Switches between list display
and thumbnail display.
Box:
SALES
Search(Name)
Highlighting a document
to display its details with
[Detail].
2008101010575...
2008101010575...
Prints, sends, joins, moves,
copies or deletes the
selected documents.
2008101010575...
1/1
Detail
Preview
Selecting documents by
checking checkboxes.
Print
Send
Join
Move/Copy
Delete
Store File
Close
Saves the document in the
open box.
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
NOTE: You can select multiple documents by pressing the respective document checkboxes. However, note
that you cannot select multiple documents when you are sending documents.
3-47
3
Basic Operation
Viewing/Editing Box Details
You can check and modify box information.
Use the procedure below.
Document Box/Removable Memory - Add/Edit Box
No.
Name
0001
SALES
1
Press [Add/Edit Box] in the box list screen.
2
Highlight the box whose details you wish to check
or edit and press [Detail/Edit].
Used
Owner
Anonymous
----
Search(Name)
Search(No.)
1/1
Detail/Edit
Add
NOTE: If a custom box is protected by a password,
enter the correct password.
Delete
Close
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
Box:
3
123456
Box No.:
Change
To edit details, press [Change] of the detail you
wish to edit. Edit the detail as desired and press
[OK].
0001
Box Name:
Change
SALES
Box Password:
Usage Restriction:
Check the box details.
Change
200 MB
Change
********
Auto File Deletion:
30 day(s)
Free Space:
30 GB
Change
Overwrite Setting:
Delete after Printed:
Change
Off
Cancel
Status
Change
Permit
Save
10/10/2010 10:10
4
If you have changed the details, press [Save] and
then press [Yes] in the confirmation screen.
If you did not change the details, press [No].
5
3-48
Press [Close]. The display returns to the default
Document Box screen.
Basic Operation
Previewing Documents/Checking Document Details
You can use this function to preview the documents stored in a document box or display the document details
for checking.
Use the procedure below.
1
Select (highlight) a document to preview and then
press [Preview] or [Detail].
2
Preview the document or check the document
details.
The operations available in the preview screen are
shown below.
When you have zoomed in, you can use these keys to move
the displayed area.
Preview:
2007040410574501
No.
Size
: A4
Resol.
: 300x300dpi
Color
: Full Color
1/6
In multiple-page documents,
you can change pages by
entering the desired page
number.
In multiple-page documents,
you can use these buttons to
change pages.
Close
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
Zoom out.
3
3-49
Zoom in.
When you have finished previewing documents or
checking document details, press [Close].
3
Basic Operation
User Privileges
When user login administration is enabled, accessibility to the Document Box components will vary depending
on the given user privilege.
Accessibilities vary depending on user privilege as follows:
Access level
Administrator
User
Creating a box
Yes
No
Changing box owner
Yes
No
Others
Yes
No
Owner
Yes
Yes
Changing box
number
Others
Yes
No
Owner
Yes
No
Renaming a box
Others
Yes
No
Owner
Yes
Yes
Changing the
password to a box
Others
Yes
No
Owner
Yes
Yes
Adjusting the box
capacity
Others
Yes
No
Owner
Yes
No
Changing the owner
Others
Yes
No
Owner
Yes
No
Changing the
permission
Others
Yes
No
Owner
Yes
Yes
Changing the
period of using a
box
Others
Yes
No
Owner
Yes
Yes
Accessibility
Operation
Box information
Deleting a box
Restricting the Accessibility to a Box
The accessibility to a Custom Box differs depending on the level of privileges as follows:
Administrator: An administrator can gain access and manipulate all boxes.
User:
A user can gain access and manipulate his/her own boxes and the shared boxes.
3-50
Basic Operation
Password Entry Requirement
When user login administration is enabled, requirement of a password differs depending on the level of
privileges as follows:
Administrator:
The administrator is not required to enter a password to gain access
to any box.
The user is required to enter a password to gain access to a box
which is protected by a password. The user is not required to enter a
password to gain access to his/her own boxes.
User:
Creating new Custom Boxes when user login administration is enabled
Box:
Box No.:
Change
0001
Box Name:
Change
30
Change
Change
Permission:
Change
Private
Change
Overwrite Setting:
Change
Permit
day(s)
Free Space:
30
Usage Restriction:
200 MB
**********
Auto File Deletion:
Change
DCBA9876
SALES
Box Password:
Owner:
Delete after Printed:
Change
Off
MB
If you create a new Custom Box when user login
administration is enabled, the screen appears and you
can change the owner and permission settings. Only
administrators and machine administrators can create
new Custom Boxes.
Cancel
Save
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
Changing the owner:
Press [Change] of Owner and
select the new owner for the
box from the displayed list.
Then press [OK].
Changing the permission:Press [Change] of
Permission and select either
[Private] or [Shared]. Then
press [OK].
NOTE: For information on specifying other settings,
refer to Creating a New Custom Box (Add/Edit Box) on
page 7-2.
Working With User Privileges When User Login Administration is Enabled
When user login administration is enabled, the owner of
a box with user privileges set can change the following
box information: the box name, the box password, the
permission, the auto file deletion and the overwrite
setting.
Box:
Box No.:
Owner:
0001
Box Name:
DCBA9876
Change
Usage Restriction:
Change
Permission:
200 MB
SALES
Box Password:
Auto File Deletion:
30 day(s)
Free Space:
30 MB
Change
Private
********
Change
Overwrite Setting:
Delete after Printed:
Change
Off
Cancel
Status
Change
Permit
Save
10/10/2010 10:10
3-51
3
Basic Operation
Canceling Jobs
Follow the steps below to cancel any print or send job being executed.
Canceling Jobs
You can also cancel jobs by pressing the Stop key.
Printing jobs
1
Press the Stop key with the copy screen or send
screen displayed.
Cancelling job screen appears.
The current print job is temporarily interrupted.
2
Select the job you wish to cancel and press
[Cancel]. And then press [Yes] in the confirmation
screen.
1
Press the Stop key with the copy screen or send
screen displayed.
Sending jobs
Job Cancel appears.
NOTE: Pressing the Stop key will not temporarily stop
a job that you have already started sending.
2
Copies
Job No.: 000021
Scanner Setting
Job Name: doc20081010101034
User Name: ----Printer Setting
Scanned Pages
Copies
A4
A4
100%
2-sided
2-sided
Collate
Plain
NOTE:
If Reserve Next Priority (refer to page 9-45) is set to
[Off]
The Copying screen appears in the touch panel during
printing.
1
Top Edge on Top
To cancel printing, select [Cancel], and then press
[Yes] in the confirmation screen.
Press the Stop key or [Cancel].
Tray A
Cancel
Status
The current print job is canceled.
Reserve Next
10/10/2010 10:10
Canceling printing from a computer
To cancel a print job executed using the printer driver before the printer begins printing, do the following:
1
Double-click the printer icon (
) displayed on
the taskbar at the bottom right of the Windows
desktop to display a dialog box for the printer.
2
Click the file for which you wish to cancel printing
and select Cancel from the Document menu.
3-52
Basic Operation
Quick Setup Screen
In the initial screen for copying and sending (the screen which appears immediately after the Copy or Send key
is first pressed after power-on), important and generally often used functions are registered from among the
versatile functions of this machine. This initial screen is called Quick Setup Screen. Registration of functions in
the Quick Setup Screen can be adjusted to suit your work environment for better efficiency.
Functions Available for Registration in the Quick Setup Screen
Default registrations and the functions available for registration are as follows.
For details on Quick Setup Screen for FAX, refer to the Fax System (V) Operation Guide.
Function
Functions Available for
Registration
Default Registration
Copying
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
Paper Selection
Zoom
Density
Duplex
Combine
Staple/Punch
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Paper Selection
Zoom
Density
Duplex
Combine
Staple/Punch
Original Orientation
Collate/Offset
Color Selection
Original Image
Original Size
Continuous Scan
Background Density Adj.
Sending
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
Color Selection
Scan Resolution
Density
2-sided/Book Original
Continuous Scan
File Format
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Zoom
Scan Resolution
FAX TX Resolution
Density
2-sided/Book Original
File Format
Original Size
Sending Size
Original Orientation
Original Image
Color Selection
Continuous Scan
Background Density Adj.
3-53
3
Basic Operation
Function
Document
Box
Functions Available for
Registration
Default Registration
Document
Storage
1: Color Selection
2: Resolution
3: Density
4: 2-sided/Book Original
5: Original Orientation
6: Original Image
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Color Selection
Resolution
Density
2-sided/Book Original
Original Orientation
Original Image
Original Size
Zoom
Continuous Scan
Storing Size
Background Density Adj.
Sending
From Box
1: File Format
2: Delete after Transmitted
3: FAX TX Resolution
4: Sending Size
•
•
•
•
File Format
Delete after Transmitted
FAX TX Resolution
Sending Size
Printing
From Box
1: Paper Selection
2: Delete after Printed
3: Collate/Offset
4: Duplex
5: Combine
6: Staple/Punch
•
•
•
•
•
•
Paper Selection
Delete after Printed
Collate/Offset
Duplex
Staple/Punch
Combine
Changing Registration
Copies
Copy Image
Shortcut 1
The following procedure is one example for replacing
the registration of Density with Original Image in the
Quick Setup Screen for copying.
Shortcut 2
Place original.
Shortcut 3
Auto
100%
Normal 0
Shortcut 4
Original : A4
: --Original
Zoom
: 100%
Zoom
: 100%
Paper
: --Paper
: A4
Paper
Selection
1-sided
>>1-sided
Preview
Preview
Quick Setup
Status
Zoom
Shortcut 5
Off
Duplex
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Density
Color/
Image Quality
Off
Combine
Layout/Edit
Staple
/Punch
Advanced
Setup
Shortcut 6
Program
10/10/2010 10:10
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Copy], [Next] of Quick Setup Registration,
and then [Change] of Original Image.
3-54
Basic Operation
Copy - Original Image
3
Press [Key 3] here as the key to set replacement
location.
4
Press [OK]. A confirmation screen appears. Press
[Yes]. The Original Image Quality function will be
newly registered.
Add Original Image to the Quick Setup screen.
Off
Key 1
Key 2
Key 3
Key 4
Key 5
Key 6
3
Cancel
Status
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
3-55
Basic Operation
Program
By registering sets of frequently used functions as a single program, you can simply press the program number
as needed to recall those functions. You can also name the programs for easy identification when recalling.
The programs below have been preregistered. The registered contents can be re-registered for easier use in
your environment.
Number
Program name
01
ID Card Copy
02
Eco Copy
03
Confidential Stamp
Default Registration
Copying function
Color: Black & White
Combine: [2 in 1]
Continuous Scan: [On]
Original Size: Statement (A5-R)
Paper Selection: Cassette 1
Zoom: Auto Zoom
Copying function
Color: Black & White
EcoPrint: [On] (Level [5])
Copying function
Color: Black & White
Prevent Bleed-thru: [On]
Stamp: Confidential
Font Size: middle
Font Color: [Black]
Stamp Position: [Center]
Display Pattern: [Transparent]
NOTE: Up to 50 functions combining copying and sending can be registered in the program.
If user login administration is enabled, you can only register functions by logging in with administrator privileges.
Registering Programs
Use the procedure below to register a program.
The following procedure is an example of registering the copying function.
1
Press the Program key while the copy mode is
accessed.
2
Press [Add] and press a number (01 to 50) for the
program number.
If entering Program screen from the Copy screen,
Send screen or Document Box screen, go to step 4.
NOTE: If you select a program number already
registered, the currently registered functions can be
replaced with a new set of functions.
3
Check that [Copy] is selected, and press [Next].
4
Enter the new program name and press [Save] to
register the program.
3-56
Basic Operation
Recalling Programs
Use the procedure below to recall a registered program.
If the Program key is pressed
01 ID Card Copy
02 Eco Copy
03 Confidential Stamp
04 Send 1
05 Send 2
06 FAX 1
07 FAX 2
08 Box 1
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Recall
1
Press the Program key.
2
Press [Recall] and press the key corresponding to
the program number (01 to 50) to recall. Press the
Quick No. Search key or [No.] to enter the
program number directly for recalling.
No.
Edit
Add
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
If [Program] is pressed in the copy function screen
01 ID Card Copy
02 Eco Copy
03 Confidential Stamp
04 Send 1
05 Send 2
06 FAX 1
07 FAX 2
08 Box 1
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Quick Setup
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Color/
Image Quality
Layout/Edit
Advanced
Setup
Status
NOTE: If the program cannot be recalled, the
Document Box or the form overlay specified in the
program might have been deleted. Check the
Document Box.
[Program] can be pressed in each function to call up
the program registered for the function.
No.
3
Program
Place the originals and press the Start key.
Copying is performed according to the registered
program.
10/10/2010 10:10
Editing and Deleting Programs
You can change program number and program name, or delete program.
Use the procedure below to edit or delete a program.
1
Press the Program key.
2
Press [Edit] and press the key(s) corresponding to
the program number (01 to 50) to change or delete.
3
To edit a program, use the procedure for registering
a program and press [Change]. Then change the
program number and program name and press
[Save]. Choose [Yes] in the confirmation screen to
change the program.
To delete the program, press [Delete this Program].
Choose [Yes] in the confirmation screen to finally
delete the program.
3-57
3
Basic Operation
Registering Shortcuts (Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings)
Add shortcuts in the Quick Setup screen for easy access to the frequently used functions. A function name linked
to a registered shortcut can be changed as necessary. You can register up to 6 shortcuts for copying functions,
sending functions, and functions set for document box.
Adding Shortcuts
Shortcut registration is performed in the setup screen of each function. Shortcuts can be registered for all
functions in which [Add Shortcut] appears on the screen.
Use the procedure below to register a shortcut.
Copies
1
After making the desired settings in the setup
screen of each function, press [Add Shortcut].
2
Press the keys corresponding to the shortcut
number (01 to 06) to register.
Memo Page
Layout
Off
Layout A
Top
L to R
Top
R to L
None
Layout B
Border Line
Original
Zoom
Paper
: A4
: 50%
: A4
Top
L to B
Top
R to B
Preview
Add Shortcut
Cancel
Status
Top Edge
on Top
Original
Orientation
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
NOTE: If you select a shortcut number already
registered, the currently registered shortcut can be
replaced with a new one.
3
Enter the shortcut name and press [Save] to add
the shortcut.
Editing and Deleting Shortcuts
Follow the steps shown below to change a shortcut number/name or delete a shortcut.
1
In the setup screen of each function, press [Add
Shortcut] in the bottom of the screen.
2
Press [Edit] and press the keys corresponding to
the shortcut number (01 to 06) to change or delete.
3
To edit a shortcut, press [Change] to change the
shortcut key number and name and press [OK] and
then [Save]. Choose [Yes] in the confirmation
screen to change the shortcut.
To delete the shortcut, press [Delete this Shortcut].
Choose [Yes] in the confirmation screen to delete
the shortcut.
3-58
Basic Operation
Using the Internet Browser
This section explains how to use the Internet browser.
NOTE: To use the internet browser, internet browser must be set to [On] in Internet Browser Setting on page
9-90.
3
Launching and Exiting the Browser
Use the procedure below to launch and exit the Internet browser.
1
Press the Application key.
The application list screen appears.
2
Press [Internet Browser].
The Internet browser starts up.
Weekly Timer
Status
Internet Browser
10/10/2010 10:10
3
Use the browser screen to browse web pages.
For information on how to use the browser screen,
refer to Using the Browser Screen on page 3-60.
4
To exit the browser, press [X] (Close) and then
press [Yes] in the exit confirmation screen.
The application list screen reappears.
NOTE: You can specify preferences such as the way
the Internet browser screen is displayed. For details,
refer to Internet (page 9-90).
3-59
Basic Operation
Using the Browser Screen
The operations available in the Internet browser screen are shown below.
Search box
Pressing the text box displays a keyboard.
You can then perform a search by entering
a keyword and pressing the [Search].
Title bar
Displays the page title.
Close
Closes the Internet browser and returns
you to the application list screen.
UTAX - Home
Scroll bars
These allow you to scroll the
displayed page up, down, left
and right by pressing [
], [
],
[
] or [
] or by moving one of
the slide bars with your finger.
Security lock icon
Displayed when you are viewing
a protected page.
Enter URL
Search
Menu
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
Loader/Progress bar
Shows the status of page
loading. When the browser is
loading a web page, the loader
changes to an animated display.
Menu
Displays the browser setup menu. You can use
this menu to specify the browser's display
magnification, set the text encoding scheme
and check the server certificate.
Enter URL
Use this display a desired web
page by entering the URL for
that page.
Home page
Displays your specified home page.
You can set your home page in the
Browser Preferences on page 9-90.
Search (Search Internet/Retrieval in page)
Displays a search menu in which you can select [Retrieval
in page] or an Internet search site.
Search Internet:
Use the selected search site to search
with the entered keyword.
Retrieval in page: Search from the entered keyword in
the currently displayed page. You can
continue your search by pressing
[SearchUp] or [SearchDown].
Reload
Updates the page.
Back/Forward
Displays the previous
page or the next page.
NOTE: Pressing the Reset key while the Internet browser is displayed will exit the browser and return you to
the application list screen without displaying the browser exit.
3-60
Basic Operation
Using Weekly Timer
"Weekly Timer" is installed on the machine as a standard application. Weekly Timer allows you to store machine
on/off times for each day of the week and set the machine to automatically turn on and off at those times.
IMPORTANT: On/off using Weekly Timer puts the machine in the same state (sleep) as when the power key is
pressed on the operation panel. When using Weekly Timer, do not turn off the main power switch.
NOTE: When user management is enabled, you must log in with administrator authority to use this feature.
Be sure to set the time before using Weekly Timer. For details, see Setting Date and Time on page 2-12
Setting Weekly Timer
1
Press the Application key.
The application list screen appears.
2
Press [Weekly Timer].
Weekly Timer starts up.
3
Press the [Enable the Application] checkbox so that
a checkmark appears.
4
Select the day you want to set and press [Edit].
5
Press the [Enable] checkboxes for power ON/OFF
so that checkmarks appear, press [+] or [-] to enter
the times, and press [OK].
[# Keys] can be pressed to enter the time with the
numeric keys on the operation panel.
6
If you need to change the number of retries made
when the power is not successfully turned off,
press [Retry Times].
7
Set the Retry Times and the Retry Interval, and
press [OK].
To have retries made continuously until the
machine power turns off, press the [Continue to
Retry] checkbox so that a checkmark appears.
8
To close, press [End].
You will return to the application list screen.
3-61
3
Basic Operation
Checking Counter
Press the Counter key to check the number of sheets
printed and scanned.
For details, refer to Checking and Printing Counter on
page 10-33.
Counter
Printed Pages
Copy
FAX
Printer
Total
Black&White:
300
600
100
1000
Full Color:
200
500
100
800
SingleColor:
100
100
0
200
Total:
600
1200
200
2000
Scanned Pages
Copy
FAX
600
Originals:
Print
Status Page
Others
200
Total
1000
1800
Printed Pages
by Paper Size
Close
Status
10/10/2010 10:10
Help Screen
If you have difficulty operating the machine, you can check how to operate it using the touch panel.
To show the Help screen, press the Help key on the
operation panel. The Help screen shows explanations
of functions and how to use them.
Help Screen Display
Help titles
Displays information
about functions and
machine operation.
Selecting Paper Source
Scrolls up and down by
pressing [ ] or [ ] when
the help text cannot be
displayed in its entirety on a
single screen.
Select paper source by choosing a
Cassette or MP Tray.
Setting Procedure
1. Press [Org./Paper/Finishing].
2. Press [Paper Selection].
Show the screen of the tab
that includes the function
explained in Help. (In the
case of this screen, the
screen that appears after
step 1 of Setting Procedure
is performed will appear.)
1/2
Try It
Display List
End
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
Displays the Help list.
3-62
Closes the Help screen and
returns to the original
screen.
4 Copying Functions
This chapter explains the functions available for copying.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Original Size........................................................................................4-2
Paper Selection...................................................................................4-3
Mixed Size Originals ...........................................................................4-6
Original Orientation .............................................................................4-9
Fold ...................................................................................................4-11
Paper Output.....................................................................................4-13
Combine............................................................................................4-14
Margin/Centering ..............................................................................4-16
Border Erase.....................................................................................4-18
Booklet ..............................................................................................4-20
Cover ................................................................................................4-22
Form Overlay ....................................................................................4-23
Page #...............................................................................................4-24
Memo Page.......................................................................................4-26
Poster................................................................................................4-28
Image Repeat ...................................................................................4-29
Text Stamp ........................................................................................4-31
Bates Stamp......................................................................................4-32
EcoPrint ............................................................................................4-34
Single Color ......................................................................................4-34
Color Balance ...................................................................................4-35
Hue Adjustment ................................................................................4-36
One-touch Image Adjust ...................................................................4-37
Sharpness.........................................................................................4-39
Background Density Adj....................................................................4-40
Saturation..........................................................................................4-41
Prevent Bleed-thru ............................................................................4-42
Continuous Scan...............................................................................4-43
Auto Image Rotation .........................................................................4-44
Negative Image.................................................................................4-44
Mirror Image......................................................................................4-45
Job Finish Notice ..............................................................................4-46
File Name Entry ................................................................................4-48
Priority Override ................................................................................4-48
Repeat Copy .....................................................................................4-49
OHP Backing Sheet ..........................................................................4-51
4-1
Copying Functions
Original Size
Specify the size of originals being scanned. Be sure to specify the original size when copying non-standard
sizes.
The following options are available.
Item
How to Select
Standard
Sizes 1
Standard
Sizes 2
Sizes
Have the size of original
detected automatically, or
select from the standard
sizes.
Inch models: Auto, Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R,
Statement, Statement-R, Oficio II and 11×15"
Select from the standard
sizes not included in the
Standard Sizes 1.
Inch models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5, A5-R,
B6, B6-R, A6-R, Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R and
216×340mm
Metric models: Auto, A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5,
A5-R, B6, B6-R, A6-R, Folio and 216×340mm
Metric models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R,
Statement, Statement-R, Oficio II, 11×15", 8K, 16K and
16K-R
Others
Select from envelope,
postcard or the custom sized
originals*.
Hagaki, Oufuku hagaki, Custom 1 to 4
Size Entry
Enter the size not included in
the standard sizes 1 and 2**.
Inch models
Horizontal: 2.00 to 17.00" (in 0.01" increments),
Vertical: 2.00 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments)
Metric models
Horizontal: 50 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments),
Vertical: 50 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments)
*
**
For instructions on how to specify the custom original sizes (Custom 1 to 4), refer to
Custom Original Size on page 9-4.
The input units can be changed in the System menu.
Refer to Measurement on page 9-12.
Use the procedure below to select the original size.
Copies
1
2
3
Press the Copy key.
4
Press [Standard Sizes 1 ], [Standard Sizes 2 ],
[Others] or [Size Entry] to select the original size.
Original Size
Standard
Sizes 1
Standard
Sizes 2
Auto
A3
A4
A4
A5
A5
A6
B4
B5
B5
B6
B6
Others
Original
Zoom
Paper
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Size Entry
216x340mm
Preview
Add Shortcut
Status
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
4-2
Place the originals on the platen.
Press [Org./Paper/Finishing] and then [Original
Size].
Copying Functions
If [Size Entry] is selected, press [+] or [-] to specify
the horizontal size (X) and the vertical size (Y).
Press [# Keys] to enter the size directly using the
numeric keys.
Copies
Original Size
Standard
Sizes 1
X
(50 - 432)
297
mm
Standard
Sizes 2
# Keys
Others
(50 - 297)
Y
Original
Zoom
Paper
210x297m
:
m
: 100%
: A4
210
Size Entry
mm
5
Press [OK].
6
Press the Start key to start copying.
# Keys
Preview
Add Shortcut
Cancel
4
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
Paper Selection
Select the paper source that contains the required paper size.
NOTE: Specify in advance the size and type of the paper loaded in the cassette (refer to Original/Paper
Settings on page 9-4).
Selecting the Cassette
Use the procedure below to select the paper supply cassette.
Copies
1
Press the Copy key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Org./Paper/Finishing] and then [Paper
Selection].
4
Press the key of the paper source corresponding to
the required paper size. The cassette in which the
paper is loaded is selected.
Paper Selection
Auto
If [Auto] is selected, the paper matching the size of
the original is selected automatically.
Cassette
A4
Plain
Original
Zoom
Paper
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Preview
Add Shortcut
Status
MP Tray
A3
Plain
A4
Plain
A4
Plain
A4
Plain
MP Tray
A4
Plain
A4
Plain
Paper Set.
Cancel
5
Press [OK].
6
Press the Start key to start copying.
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
4-3
Copying Functions
Selecting the Multi Purpose Tray
Change the paper size and media type.
The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below.
Category
Paper
Size
Item
Standard
Sizes 1
Standard
Sizes 2
Media
Type
*
**
***
How to
Select
Sizes
Choose from
the standard
size.
Inch models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R,
Statement, Oficio II and Executive
Choose from
the standard
sizes not
included in
the Standard
Sizes 1.
Inch models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R,
B6-R, A6-R, Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R and
216×340mm
Metric models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R,
A5-R, B6, B6-R, A6-R, Folio and 216×340mm
Metric models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R,
Statement-R, Oficio II, Executive, 8K, 16K and
16K-R
Others
Choose from
non-standard
sizes and
custom
sizes.
ISO B5, Envelope #10 (Commercial #10),
Envelope #9 (Commercial #9), Envelope #6
(Commercial #6 3/4), Envelope Monarch,
Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C4,
Hagaki, Oufuku hagaki, Youkei 4, Youkei 2 and
Custom 1 to 4*
Size
Entry
Enter the
size not
included in
the standard
sizes 1 and
2**.
Inch models
Horizontal: 5.83 to 17" (in 0.01" increments),
Vertical: 3.86 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments)
Metric models
Vertical: 98 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments),
Horizontal: 148 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Plain (105 g/m2 or less), Transparency, Rough,
Vellum (60 to 105 g/m2 or less), Labels, Recycled, Preprinted***, Bond,
Cardstock, Color, Prepunched***, Letterhead***,
Thick (106 g/m2 or more), Envelope, Coated, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8***
For instructions on how to specify the custom paper sizes (Custom 1 to 4), refer to
Custom Paper Size on page 9-5.
The input units can be changed in the System menu.
Refer to Measurement on page 9-12.
For instructions on how to specify the custom paper types 1 to 8, refer to Media Type
Setting on page 9-8.
To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to Special Paper
Action on page 9-11.
NOTE: You can conveniently select in advance the size and type of paper that will be used often and set them
as default (refer to Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Multi Purpose Tray (MP Tray Setting) on page 9-7).
4-4
Copying Functions
Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type.
Copies
1
Press the Copy key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Org./Paper/Finishing], [Paper Selection]
and then [Media Type].
4
Press [Standard Sizes 1 ], [Standard Sizes 2 ],
[Others] or [Size Entry] to select the paper size.
Paper Selection - Paper Settings
Standard
Sizes 1
A3
A4
A4
A5
A6
B4
B5
B5
B6
Standard
Sizes 2
Others
216x340mm
Size Entry
Plain
Media Type
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
If you select [Size Entry], press [+] or [–] to specify
X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) sizes. You can enter
the size directly using the numeric keys after
pressing [# Keys].
Copies
Paper Selection - Paper Settings
Standard
Sizes 1
X
(148 - 432)
297
mm
Standard
Sizes 2
# Keys
5
Press [Media Type].
6
Select paper type, and press [OK].
7
Press [OK].
8
Press [OK].
9
Press the Start key to start scanning the originals.
Others
Y
(98 - 297)
210
Size Entry
mm
Plain
Media Type
# Keys
Cancel
Status
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
10 If the specified size of paper is not loaded in the
paper source cassette or multi purpose tray, a
confirmation screen appears. When [Auto] is used
and the same size of paper as the detected original
size is not loaded, a paper confirmation screen
appears.
Load the required paper in the multi purpose tray
and press [Continue] to start copying.
4-5
4
Copying Functions
Mixed Size Originals
Using the optional document processor, the originals of different sizes can be loaded in a batch and copied. In
this operation, up to 30 originals of different sizes can be placed in the document processor at the same time.
Supported Combinations of Originals
Originals of the Same Width
The supported combinations of originals are as follows.
Ledger and Letter (A3 and A4)
Ledger
(A3)
Letter
(A4)
Letter
(A4)
Ledger
(A3)
Ledger and Letter-R (Folio and A4-R)
Legal
(Folio)
Letter-R
(A4-R)
B4 and B5
4-6
Letter-R
Legal
(A4-R)
(Folio)
Copying Functions
Originals of Different Widths (Available for metric models only)
Place all originals of different widths. The supported combinations of originals are as follows.
NOTE: When mixing the original sizes as using the following combination: A4-R, B5-R, and Folio, make sure
to set the System Menu key -> Common Settings -> Original / Paper Settings -> Original Auto Detect to [On]
for [Folio].
For more information, refer to Original Auto Detect (Available for metric models only) on page 9-10.
4
A3, B4, A4 and B5
B4, A4-R and B5
B4
A4-R
B5
B5
A4-R
B4
A4-R, B5-R and Folio
A4-R
B5-R
4-7
B5-R
A4-R
Copying Functions
Selecting How to Copy Originals
Select whether you wish to create individual copies on different size paper matching the original sizes or to
produce all copies on the same size paper.
NOTE: This function is available regardless of whether originals have the same width or not.
The table below shows the finished document sizes for the different original size options.
Option
Description
Mixed Size Copies
Originals are detected individually for size and
copied to the same size paper as originals.
Same Size Copies
Originals are all copied to the same size paper.
Use the procedure below to copy mixed size originals.
1
Press the Copy key.
2
Place originals on the document processor.
IMPORTANT: When placing originals of different width,
arrange the originals so that their left sides and top
sides are aligned, and place the originals in alignment
with the far width guide. If the originals are not aligned
in this way, they may not be scanned correctly, and
skewing or original jams may result.
Copies
3
Press [Org./Paper/Finishing] and then [Mixed Size
Originals].
4
Select [Mixed Size Copies] or [Same Size Copies]
as finish size.
5
Select the combination of originals from [Same
Width] and [Different Width].
When [Same Size Copies] is selected, select [Long
Edge Left] or [Short Edge Left] as the first original
orientation.
6
Press [OK].
7
Press the Start key to start copying.
Mixed Size Originals
Original Width
Off
Mixed Size
Copies
Same Size
Copies
Original
Zoom
Paper
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Same Width
Different
Width
Top Page Direction
Long Edge
Left
Short Edge
Left
Preview
Add Shortcut
Status
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
4-8
Copying Functions
Original Orientation
Select the original orientation to use the following functions.
•
Zoom (XY Zoom)
•
Duplex
•
Margin/Centering originals
•
Border erase
•
Combine mode
•
Memo mode
•
Page numbering
•
Booklets
•
Stapling/Punch (optional feature)
•
2-sided/Book Original
•
Text Stamp
•
Bates Stamp
4
NOTE: If [On] is selected as the Orientation Confirmation on page 9-16 setting in the System Menu, the
selection screen for original orientation appears when you select any of the above functions.
When placing originals on the platen
Original
[Top Edge on Top]
[Top Edge on Left]
When placing originals on the optional document processor
Original
[Top Edge on Top]
[Top Edge on Left]
NOTE: To change the default setting for the original orientation, refer to Original Orientation on page 9-17.
4-9
Copying Functions
Use the procedure below to select the orientation when placing the originals on the platen.
Copies
1
Press the Copy key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Org./Paper/Finishing] and then [Original
Orientation].
4
Select [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left] as
the way the original is oriented.
5
Press [OK].
6
Press the Start key to start copying.
Original Orientation
Select the orientation of the
original document's top edge.
Original
Zoom
Paper
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Top Edge
on Top
Top Edge
on Left
Preview
Add Shortcut
Status
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
4-10
Copying Functions
Fold
You can fold finished copies.
NOTE: Folding requires the optional 4,000 sheet document finisher and the folding unit.
For details on paper sizes and numbers of sheets that can be folded, refer to Center-Folding Unit (Option) on
page Appendix-31.
The following folding options and orientations are available.
Orientation: Landscape
Bi-Fold
R to L / B to T
Inside
L to R / T to B
Tri-Fold
R to L / B to T
Outside
L to R / T to B
4-11
4
Orientation: Portrait
Copying Functions
The procedure for using fold copying is explained below.
Copies
1
Press the Copy key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Org./Paper/Finishing] and then [Fold].
4
Select the fold method.
Fold
NOTE: To use saddle stitching, press [Bi-Fold] and
then [Saddle Stitch]. For more information on saddle
stitching, refer to Booklet on page 4-20.
Staple
Off
Bi-Fold
Tri-Fold
Original
Zoom
Paper
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Saddle Stitch
Off
Preview
Add Shortcut
Status
Cancel
5
Press [OK].
6
Press the Start key to start copying.
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
4-12
Copying Functions
Paper Output
You can use the procedure below to select an output destination such as the optional document finisher for your
copies.
NOTE: Optional output destinations include the job separator, 1,000 sheet document finisher, 4,000 sheet
document finisher, and mailbox.
The table below shows the available output destinations.
Destination
4
Description
Inner tray*
Inner tray of the machine (where copies are stored)
Finisher Left Tray
Finisher Top Tray
Tray of the optional 1,000 sheet document finisher
Tray A, Tray B, Tray C
Trays A to C in the optional 4,000 sheet document finisher
Right Tray
Optional right job separator
Job Separator Tray*
Optional Inner job separator
Tray 1 to 7
Trays 1 to 7 in the optional mailbox (tray 1 is the top tray)
*
This cannot be selected when the optional document finisher is installed.
NOTE: To change the default destination for copies, refer to Paper Output on page 9-15 for details.
When [Heavy 3] (164 g/m2 - ) or higher is set in Paper Weight and Mailbox (Option) is set for the output
destination, the output destination is automatically changed to a tray that can be used.
Use the procedure below to select the output destination.
Copies
Paper Output
Face Up
Original
Zoom
Paper
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Preview
Add Shortcut
Status
Tray A
Tray B
Tray C
Right Tray
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
Tray 5
Tray 6
Tray 7
Cancel
1
Press the Copy key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Org./Paper/Finishing] and then [Paper
Output].
4
Select the output destination for finished copies.
5
Press [OK].
6
Press the Start key to start copying.
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
4-13
Copying Functions
Combine
This mode allows you to copy 2 or 4 originals combined onto a single page. 2-in-1 mode or 4-in-1 mode. The
page boundary of each original can be indicated.
NOTE: Combine mode is available for the copy paper sizes of A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, Folio,
Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, 216×340mm Letter, Letter-R, Statement-R, 8K, 16K and 16K-R.
2-in-1 Mode
For copying two originals onto a single sheet. This mode can be used with Duplex mode to copy four originals
onto one sheet.
The following 2-in-1 options and output orientations are available.
Original
Copy
Orientation of Original
Platen
Document processor
NOTE: When placing the original on the platen, be sure to copy the originals in page order.
4-14
Copying Functions
4-in-1 Mode
For copying four originals onto a single sheet. This mode can be used with Duplex mode to copy eight originals
onto one sheet.
The following 4-in-1 options and output orientations are available.
Original
Copy
Orientation of Original
Platen
Document processor
4
NOTE: When placing the original on the platen, be sure to copy the originals in page order.
Types of Page Boundary Lines
The following types of the boundary lines are available.
None
Solid
Dotted
4-15
Borders
(Cropmark)
Copying Functions
The procedure for using Combine mode copying is explained below.
Copies
1
Press the Copy key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Combine].
4
Press [2 in 1] or [4 in 1], and choose the page layout
of Layout.
5
Press [Border Line] to choose the type of the lines
to indicate page boundaries. Press [OK].
6
Press [Original Orientation] to choose the
orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top]
or [Top Edge on Left]. Then press [OK].
7
Press [OK].
8
Press the Start key. Copying begins.
Combine
Layout
Off
2 in 1
Right then
Down
Left then
Down
None
4 in 1
Border Line
Original
Zoom
Paper
: A4
: 50%
: A4
Down then
Right
Down then
Left
Top Edge
on Top
Original
Orientation
Preview
Add Shortcut
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
If the original is placed on the platen, replace the
original and press the Start key.
After scanning all originals, press [Finish Scan] to
start copying.
Margin/Centering
Shift the original image to make space on the copy for binding on the left (right) or top (bottom) side.
When you copy onto paper different from the original size, you can center the original image on the paper.
The following margin widths are available.
Input units
Margin Width
Inch Models
-0.75 to 0.75" (in 0.01" increments)
Metric Models
-18 mm to 18 mm (in 1-mm increments)
Margin on the Back Side
When duplex copying, you can also specify the margin on the back side.
Auto
When [Auto] is selected, an appropriate margin is applied automatically on the rear page depending on a margin
specified for the front page and a binding orientation.
Separate Front/Back Margins
Enables you to specify the front and back settings separately.
NOTE: You can set the default margin width. Refer to Margin Default on page 9-24 for details.
4-16
Copying Functions
Use the procedure below to make copies with margins.
Copies
1
Press the Copy key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Margin/Centering].
4
Press [Margin] to select the copy with margin.
Use [+] or [–] to enter the margins for Left/Right and
Top/Bottom. Press [# Keys] to use the numeric
keys for entry.
Margin/Centering
Left/Right
Off
(-18 - +18)
0
mm
Margin
Top/Bottom
Original
Zoom
Paper
Auto
# Keys
Centering
0
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Preview
mm
Top Edge
on Top
Original
Orientation
# Keys
Add Shortcut
For duplex copying, press [Back Page] and select
[Auto] or [Manual].
Back Page
(-18 - +18)
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
If you selected [Auto], press [OK]. If you pressed
[Manual], enter the margins in the displayed screen
and then press [OK].
Copies
Margin/Centering - Back Page
Auto
Left/Right
(-18 - +18)
+6
mm
Manual
# Keys
Top/Bottom
Original
Zoom
Paper
(-18 - +18)
+6
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Preview
mm
# Keys
Add Shortcut
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
Press [Centering] to center the original image on
the paper.
Copies
Margin/Centering
Off
5
Press [Original Orientation] to choose the
orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top]
or [Top Edge on Left]. Then press [OK].
6
Press [OK].
7
Press the Start key to start copying.
Margin
Centering
Original
Zoom
Paper
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Top Edge
on Top
Original
Orientation
Preview
Add Shortcut
Status
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
4-17
4
Copying Functions
Border Erase
Use Border Erase to remove black shadows that appear around the outside of the original when making copies.
The following options can be selected.
Border Erase Sheet
Erases black borders around the single sheet original.
Original
Copy
Border Erase Book
Erases black borders around the edges and in the
middle of the original such as a thick book. You can
specify the widths individually to erase the borders
around the edges and in the center of the book.
Original
Copy
Individual Border Erase
Specify border erase widths individually for all edges.
Original
Copy
In each option, the available ranges are as shown below.
Input units
Border Erase Range
Inch Models
0 to 2"(in 0.01" increments)
Metric Models
0 mm to 50 mm (in 1-mm increments)
NOTE: To specify the default width value of Border Erase, refer to Border Erase Default on page 9-23 for
details.
4-18
Copying Functions
Border Erase to Back Page
When scanning a 2-sided original, this allows you to erase the borders on the back of the original. The table
below shows the available settings.
Item
Detail
Same as Front
Page
Border Erase performed using the same setting
as the front page
Do Not Erase
No Border Erase performed on the back page
NOTE: You can change the default setting for Border Erase to Back Page. For details, refer to Paper
Selection on page 9-43.
Use the procedure below to erase borders when copying.
Copies
1
Press the Copy key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Border Erase].
4
Select [Border Erase Sheet] to erase borders for an
individual sheet or [Border Erase Book] to erase
borders for a book.
Border Erase
(0 - 50)
Border
Off
6
mm
Use [+] or [–] to enter the width in Border or Gutter.
Press [# Keys] to use the numeric keys for entry.
Border Erase
Sheet
Border Erase
Book
Original
Zoom
Paper
# Keys
Back Page
(0 - 50)
Gutter
6
Individual
Border Erase
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Same as
Front Page
Preview
mm
# Keys
Add Shortcut
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
Press [Individual Border Erase] to select the
individual border erase.
Copies
Border Erase
Original
Zoom
Paper
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Preview
Add Shortcut
Status
Use [+] or [–] to enter the width in Top, Bottom, Left
or Right. Press [# Keys] to use the numeric keys for
entry.
(0 - 50)
Off
Top
6
Border Erase
Sheet
Bottom
6
mm
Border Erase
Book
Left
6
mm
Individual
Border Erase
Right
6
mm
mm
Same as
Front Page
Back Page
Press [Original Orientation] to select the original
orientation from either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top
Edge on Left]. Then press [OK].
Top Edge
on Top
# Keys
Cancel
Original
Orientation
OK
For 2-sided originals, press [Back Page] and then
press [Same as Front Page] or [Do Not Erase].
10/10/2010 10:10
5
Press [OK].
6
Press the Start key to start copying.
4-19
4
Copying Functions
Booklet
The Booklet copying option allows you to copy sheet originals and produce booklets such as small brochures
or pamphlets. A booklet, such as a magazine, is made by folding at the center.
You can copy the cover page onto colored paper or thick paper. Paper for the cover is supplied from the multi
purpose tray. To feed the cover paper from the cassette, refer to Paper Source for Cover on page 9-11.
NOTE: Using the optional 4,000 sheet document finisher and the folding unit enables you to saddle stitch your
copies (fold them in two with staples in the center). This is limited to the A3, B4, A4-R, Ledger, Legal, Letter-R, 8K.
The supported original and paper sizes are as follows.
Type of Original
Original Size
Paper Size
One-sided original,
Two-sided original*
All**
Book original
A3, B4, A4-R, B5-R, A5-R,
Ledger, Letter-R and 8K
*
**
A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, Ledger,
Legal, Letter and Letter-R
The optional document processor is required.
Except for custom sized originals.
For binding on the left side
The folded copies can be read from left to right.
Original
Copy
For binding on the right side
The folded copies can be read from right to left.
Original
Copy
For top binding
The folded copies can be read from top to bottom.
Original
Copy
4-20
Copying Functions
The procedure for using Booklet copying is explained below.
Copies
1
Press the Copy key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Booklet].
4
Press [1-sided>>Booklet] to produce a booklet
from single-sided originals.
Booklet
Off
Original
1-sided
>>Booklet
2-sided
>>Booklet
Original
Zoom
Paper
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Preview
Add Shortcut
Status
Book
>>Booklet
Press [2-sided>>Booklet] to produce a booklet
from two-sided originals.
Off
Binding
Left/Right
Binding
Top
Cover
Press [Book>>Booklet] to produce a booklet from
an open book original.
Off
Finishing
Binding
Left
Binding
Right
Binding
Top
Cancel
Staple
/Fold
Top Edge
on Top
5
Original
Orientation
OK
If you selected [2-sided>>Booklet] or
[Book>>Booklet], choose the binding orientation in
Finishing.
If you selected [1-sided>>Booklet], choose the
binding orientation in Finishing.
10/10/2010 10:10
6
If you choose [1-sided>>Booklet],
[2-sided>>Booklet], or [Book>>Booklet] you can
add the cover. Press [Cover], select [Cover] and
press [OK].
7
Press [Original Orientation] to choose the
orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top]
or [Top Edge on Left]. Then press [OK].
8
If the optional 4,000 sheet document finisher and
folding unit are installed, the [Staple/Fold] option is
displayed.
To fold finished copies in half, press [Staple/Fold]
and then press [Fold Only].
To use saddle stitching, press [Staple/Fold] and
then press [Saddle Stitch].
NOTE: The number of sheets that can be folded or
Saddle Stitch stapled varies by paper weight. For
details, refer to Center-Folding Unit (Option) on page
Appendix-31.
9
Press [OK].
10 Press the Start key. Copying begins.
NOTE: When using the platen, be sure to place the
originals in page order.
If the originals are placed on the platen,
consecutively replace each original after pressing
the Start key.
After scanning all originals, press [Finish Scan] to
start copying.
4-21
4
Copying Functions
Cover
Add a cover to the finished copies. You can copy the first page and/or the last page onto colored paper or thick
paper fed from the different paper source than the regular one. The following two options are available. Paper
for the cover is supplied from the multi purpose tray.
To feed the cover paper from the cassette, refer to Paper Source for Cover on page 9-11.
Type of Cover
Description
Front Cover
First page of the originals is copied on a different
paper.
Front and Back
Covers
First page and last page of the originals are
copied on different paper.
The procedure for using Cover mode copying is explained below.
Copies
Cover
1
Press the Copy key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Cover].
4
Press [Front Cover] or [Front and Back Covers].
5
Press [OK].
6
Press the Start key. Copying begins.
Print the cover pages using an other paper source.
Select either [Front Cover] or [Front and Back Covers].
* Set paper source for cover in System Menu.
Original
Zoom
Paper
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Off
Front Cover
Front and Back
Covers
Preview
Add Shortcut
Status
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
If the originals are placed on the platen,
consecutively replace each original after pressing
the Start key.
After scanning all originals, press [Finish Scan] to
start copying.
4-22
Copying Functions
Form Overlay
Density
:30%
Forms
Original
Copy
Copy the original images onto the form. Once you scan
and register the form, the form is overlaid onto the
original. You can also use a form that is already
registered in the machine's memory.
NOTE: To register a form in advance, refer to Form for
Form Overlay on page 7-20 for details.
4
Density
:100%
Follow the steps shown below for form overlay.
Copies
1
Press the Copy key.
2
Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Form Overlay].
3
Press [Scan New Form] to use the first page of
originals as a form.
Form Overlay
Off
Density
(10 - 30, 100)
%
NOTE: You can select the form density setting through
Select
Stored Form
4 levels from 10%, 20%, 30% or 100%. Press the [+] or
[-] buttons in Density.
Scan
New Form
Original
Zoom
Paper
: A4
: 100%
: A4
None
Select
Form
Preview
Add Shortcut
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
To use the forms already registered, press [Select
Stored Form]. Press [Select Form] to display the
document boxes that store documents which can
be used as a form. Select the desired form from the
list and press [OK].
Copies
Form Overlay - Select Form
Document Box
Box Name
Up
Form for Form Overlay
Custom Box
Detail
1/1
NOTE: To return to a higher level folder, press [Up].
Preview
Open
Cancel
Status
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
4
Press [OK].
5
Place the originals.
Place the original for the form on top of the other
originals. When using the optional document
processor, the first page of the originals should be
placed on the top.
6
4-23
Press the Start key to start copying.
Copying Functions
Page #
Number multiple pages of originals in sequential order. The formats for numbering are [-1-], [P.1] or [1/n]. The
format [1/n] prints the total number of pages in the place of n.
Select Top Left, Top Middle, Top Right, Bottom Left, Bottom Middle or Bottom Right as the page numbering
position.
Original
[ – 1 –]
[P.1]
[1/n]
Items that can be set for the page number font are indicated below.
Item
Font
*
Detail
Size
Set the font size of the printed page number.*
Style
Set the font style of the printed page number. [Bold] or [Italic]
can be set.
Font
Set the font of the printed page number. [Courier] or [Letter
Gothic] can be set.
Color
Set the color of the printed page number. [Black], [Cyan],
[Magenta], [Yellow], [Red], [Green], or [Blue] can be set.
Density
Set the density of the color of the printed page number.
Display
Pattern
Set the display method of the printed page number.
[Transparent], [Clipping], or [Overwrite] can be selected.
Registered font sizes are displayed. For details on registering font sizes, refer to System Stamp on
page 9-30.
Use the procedure below to insert page numbers on your copies.
1
Press the Copy key.
2
Place the originals in the document processor or on
the platen.
3
Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Page #].
4-24
Copying Functions
Copies
4
Select the numbering format from [-1-], [P.1] or
[1/n].
5
Select the page numbering position.
6
To start page numbering from a page other than the
first page, press [+] or [–] of 1st Page and select the
starting page. You can also enter the number with
the numeric keys after pressing [# Keys].
7
To start the numbering with a number other than 1,
press [+] or [–] of Start Number and enter the
starting number. You can also enter the number
with the numeric keys after pressing [# Keys].
8
Press [Font] and select font and display settings for
the page numbering.
9
If you do not want page numbering through to the
last page, press [Last Page]. Select Manual and
use [+] or [-] to enter the final page to be numbered
(a negative number of pages counting backwards
from the last page). Then press [OK]. You can set a
value up to -10. You can also enter the number with
the numeric keys after pressing [# Keys].
Page #
Position
Off
Auto
Top
Left
-1-
Bottom
Left
P.1
1st Page
(1 - 10)
Top
Middle
Top
Right
Bottom
Middle
Bottom
Right
Start #
(1 - 999)
2
1/n
Add Shortcut
Status
Auto
Denominator
#
2
9 pt
Black
Font
# Keys
Last Page
# Keys
Cancel
Top Edge
on Top
Original
Orientation
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
10 The total number of pages n in the format [1/n] can
be changed manually. Press [Denominator #] and
select [Manual]. Press [+] or [–] to enter the total
number of pages and press [OK]. You can also
enter the number with the numeric keys after
pressing [# Keys].
11 Press [Original Orientation] to choose the
orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top]
or [Top Edge on Left]. Press [OK].
12 Press [OK].
13 Press the Start key to start copying.
4-25
4
Copying Functions
Memo Page
Delivers copies with a space for adding notes. You can also copy two originals onto the same sheet with a space
or add lines to indicate page boundaries.
NOTE: Memo mode is available for the copy paper sizes of A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, Ledger, Legal,
Oficio II, 216×340mm, Letter, Letter-R, Statement-R, Folio, 8K, 16K and 16K-R.
Layout A
Reduces images of each original page for printing onto
half of a page, leaving the other half blank for notes.
Original
Copy
Layout B
Reduces images of two original pages for copying onto
half of a single page, leaving the other half blank for
notes.
Original
Copy
4-26
Copying Functions
Types of Page Boundary Lines
The following boundary lines are available.
4
None
Solid
Dotted
Borders
(Cropmark)
Use the procedures below to insert page boundary lines on your copies.
Copies
1
Press the Copy key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Memo Page].
4
Press [Layout A] or [Layout B]. Select the page
layout from Layout.
5
Press [Border Line] to select the page boundary
line. Press [OK].
6
Press [Original Orientation] to select orientation of
the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge
on Left]. Press [OK].
7
Press [OK].
8
Press the Start key to start copying.
Memo Page
Layout
Off
Layout A
Top
L to R
Top
R to L
None
Layout B
Border Line
Original
Zoom
Paper
: A4
: 50%
: A4
Top
L to B
Top
R to B
Preview
Add Shortcut
Status
Cancel
Top Edge
on Top
Original
Orientation
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
4-27
Copying Functions
Poster
To use this device to make copies larger than the
maximum paper size, use Poster mode to separate and
copy an enlarged image onto multiple pages.
The completed copies have overlapping areas. A single
large page can be created by pasting those areas
together.
Original
Choose one of the following 3 enlargement settings:
Copy
•
Copy size – The output paper size is chosen from
the following sizes. Copy is enlarged according to
the selected paper size.
Model Type
Paper size
Inch models
34 × 44", 22 × 34", 17 × 22"
Metric models
A0, A1, A2
•
Zoom priority – Specify the output zoom size from
100 to 400%. Image will be output on the necessary
number of copies for the specified zoom size.
•
Number of sheets – Select number of sheets to
split the image from 2, 4, or 8 sheets. Copy is
enlarged according to the selected number.
NOTE: The available original sizes are A3 and A4-R.
The available paper size is A3 only.
Follow the steps shown below to use poster enlargement.
Copies
1
Press the Copy key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Layout/Edit] and then press [Poster].
4
Select an enlargement method.
If [Copy Size] is selected, set the output paper size.
Poster
Off
Separate and copy an image suitable for
the selected copy size.
If [Zoom Priority] is selected, set the output zoom
size.
Copy Size
Zoom
Priority
Original
Zoom
Paper
: A4
: 100%
: A4
If [Number of Sheets] is selected, set the number of
split pages.
Number of
Sheets
A0
A1
A2
Preview
Add Shortcut
Status
Cancel
5
Press [OK].
6
Press the Start key. Copying begins.
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
4-28
Copying Functions
Image Repeat
Tiles the 1 copied sheet with an original image. You can
also specify the area of the original to repeat.
Image Repeat
Copies the original image multiple times onto 1 sheet at
a specified magnification.
You can also specify how much of the original is
repeatedly copied.
Original
Copy
Double Copy
Makes 2 copies of the same original on a single sheet.
For example, you can double-copy an A4 original onto
an A3 sheet which you then cut in half to make 2 copies
that are identical to the original.
Original
Copy
Follow the steps shown below to use Image Repeat.
Copies
1
Press the Copy key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Layout/Edit] and then press [Image Repeat].
4
Press [Zoom Priority].
To make double copies, press [Double Copy] and
proceed to step 8.
Image Repeat
(25 - 400)
Off
100
%
Zoom
Priority
Double
Copy
Original
Zoom
Paper
Add Shortcut
Press [+] or [–] to set the zoom size.
Press [# Keys] to enter with numeric keys.
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Off
Specify
Repeat Area
Preview
Status
5
# Keys
Cancel
6
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
4-29
To set the area of the original to be repeated, press
[On] for Specify Repeat Area.
4
Copying Functions
7
Press [+] or [–] to input the area of the original to be
repeated.
With metric models, you can enter the border width
directly using the numeric keys after pressing [#Keys].
Y1: Length from top left of platen to top edge of
repeat area
X1: Length from Height from top left of platen to left
edge of repeat area
Y2: Height of repeat area
X2: Width of repeat area
8
Press [OK].
9
Press the Start key. Copying begins.
4-30
Copying Functions
Text Stamp
When making copies, you can print a text stamp on copy output.
NOTE: This cannot be set when Text Stamp is set in the system settings. For details, see Printing Jobs on
page 9-31.
The items that may be configured are as follows.
Item
Stamp
Method
Detail
Each Print
Page
Stamp on each printed page.
Each Original
Page
Stamp each page of the document.
Position
Selectable positions are [Top Left], [Top Middle], [Top Right],
[Middle Left], [Center], [Middle Right], [Bottom Left], [Bottom
Middle], and [Bottom Right].
Font
*
Size
Set the font size of the printed text stamp.*
Style
Set the font style of the printed text stamp. [Bold] or [Italic] can
be set.
Font
Set the font of the printed text stamp. [Courier] or [Letter Gothic]
can be set.
Color
Set the color of the printed text stamp. [Black], [Cyan],
[Magenta], [Yellow], [Red], [Green], or [Blue] can be set.
Density
Set the density of the color of the printed text stamp.
Display
Pattern
Set the display method of the printed text stamp. [Transparent],
[Clipping], or [Overwrite] can be selected.
Registered font sizes are displayed. For details on registering font sizes, refer to System Stamp on
page 9-30.
Use the procedures below to specify the Text Stamp settings.
Copies
Text Stamp
1
Press the Copy key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Layout/Edit] and then press [Text Stamp].
4
Press [On].
5
Press [Keyboard] and enter the text string to be
printed, or select a text stamp from the displayed
templates.
Stamp
Off
Keyboard
On
URGENT
Each
Print Page
Stamp
Method
Add Shortcut
Status
COPY
Top
Left
Position
9 pt
Black
Font
Cancel
Top Edge
on Top
Original
Orientation
NOTE: Templates that have been set will appear. For
details on registering templates, refer to System
Stamp on page 9-30.
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
4-31
4
Copying Functions
6
Press [Stamp Method] and set the stamp method
for the text stamp.
7
Press [Position] and select the position of the text
stamp.
8
Press [Font] and select font and display settings for
the text stamp.
9
Press [Original Orientation] to choose the
orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top]
or [Top Edge on Left]. Then press [OK].
10 Press [OK].
11 Press the Start key. Copying begins.
Bates Stamp
When making copies, you can print a bates stamp on the originals.
NOTE: This cannot be set when Bates Stamp is set in the system settings. For details, see Printing Jobs on
page 9-31.
The items that may be configured are as follows.
Item
Position
Font
*
Detail
Selectable positions are [Top Left], [Top Middle], [Top Right],
[Middle Left], [Center], [Middle Right], [Bottom Left], [Bottom
Middle], and [Bottom Right].
Size
Set the font size of the printed bates stamp.*
Style
Set the font style of the printed bates stamp. [Bold] or [Italic] can
be set.
Font
Set the font of the printed bates stamp. [Courier] or [Letter
Gothic] can be set.
Color
Set the color of the printed bates stamp. [Black], [Cyan],
[Magenta], [Yellow], [Red], [Green], or [Blue] can be set.
Density
Set the density of the color of the printed bates stamp.
Display
Pattern
Set the display method of the printed bates stamp.
[Transparent], [Clipping], or [Overwrite] can be selected.
Registered font sizes are displayed. For details on registering font sizes, refer to System Stamp on
page 9-30.
Use the procedure below to specify the Bates Stamp settings.
1
Press the Copy key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
4-32
Copying Functions
Copies
Bates Stamp
Stamp
Off
[Date]
On
Date
User Name
Serial Number
Numbering
Text 1
Text 2
Change
Text 2
Top Left
1
Numbering
Default
Status
Press [Layout/Edit] and then press [Bates Stamp].
4
Press [On].
5
Press [Date], [User Name], [Serial Number],
[Numbering], [Text 1], or [Text 2], and set additional
information to be printed in the stamp.
1/6
Text 1
Add Shortcut
3
Position
Delete
Change
If you selected [Text 1] or [Text 2], press [Change]
below it and enter the text string to be printed.
Date Format
9 pt
Black
Font
Top Edge
on Top
Cancel
OK
If you selected [Date], press [Date Format] and
select [MM/DD/YYYY], [DD/MM/YYYY], or [YYYY/
MM/DD] to set the date format.
Original
Orientation
10/10/2010 10:10
If you selected [Numbering], press [Numbering
Default] and set the starting sequence number (1 to
9999999).
6
Press [Position] and select the position of the bates
stamp.
7
Press [Font] and select font and display settings for
the bates stamp.
8
Press [Original Orientation] to choose the
orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top]
or [Top Edge on Left]. Then press [OK].
9
Press [OK].
10 Press the Start key. Copying begins.
4-33
4
Copying Functions
EcoPrint
Use EcoPrint to save toner when printing. Use this function for test copies or any other occasion where high
quality print is unnecessary.
The procedure for making copies using EcoPrint is explained below.
Copies
EcoPrint
Press the Copy key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Color/Image Quality] and then [EcoPrint].
4
Press [On].
5
Press [1] to [5] (Low - High) to adjust the Toner
Save Level.
6
Press [OK].
7
Press the Start key to start copying.
Toner Save Level
Off
Low
High
On
1
Original
Zoom
Paper
1
2
3
4
5
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Preview
Add Shortcut
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
Single Color
Specify one of Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Red, Green, or Blue, and produce copies with that color regardless of
original type.
Follow the steps shown below for Single Color Copy.
Copies
1
Press the Copy key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Color/Image Quality], [Color Selection] and
then press [Single Color].
4
Select color for copying from [Cyan], [Magenta],
[Yellow], [Red], [Green] or [Blue].
5
Press [OK].
6
Press the Start key. Copying begins.
Color Selection
Auto Color
Single Color
Full Color
Cyan
Magenta
Yellow
Red
Green
Blue
Black &
White
Original
Zoom
Paper
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Single Color
Preview
Add Shortcut
Status
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
4-34
Copying Functions
Color Balance
Adjust the strength of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black to make fine hue adjustments.
NOTE: This feature can be used with full color copying and auto color copying.
Follow the steps below to adjust color balance.
Copies
Color Balance
1
Press the Copy key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Color/Image Quality] and then press [Color
Balance].
4
Press [On].
5
Press [ ] or [ ] on each side of the color to be
adjusted (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black) to adjust
each color.
6
Press [OK].
7
Press the Start key. Copying begins.
Off
-5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0
1
2
3
4
5
Magenta -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0
1
2
3
4
5
Yellow
-5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0
1
2
3
4
5
Black
-5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0
1
2
3
4
5
Cyan
On
Original
Zoom
Paper
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Preview
Add Shortcut
Status
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
4-35
4
Copying Functions
Hue Adjustment
Adjust the color (hue) of images. Make adjustments such as adjusting red to a strong yellow-red or yellow to a
strong green-yellow to make more creative copies.
The items that may be configured are as follows.
Yellow
Red
•
All: Adjust hue for all colors.
•
Individual: Colors can be selected individually to
adjust the hue.
Green
Magenta
NOTE: This feature can be used with full color copying
Cyan
and auto color copying.
These adjustments are especially useful on rich color
images.
Blue
Follow the steps below to use image hue adjustment.
Copies
1
Press the Copy key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Color/Image Quality] and then press [Hue
Adjustment].
4
Press [All] or [Individual].
5
When [All] is selected, press [
the hue.
] or [
] to adjust
Hue Adjustment
Off
All
When [Individual] is selected, select [Red],
[Magenta], [Blue], [Yellow], [Green] or [Cyan] and
then press [ ] or [ ] to adjust the hue.
Adjust hue for all colors.
Red
Yellow
Magenta
Green
Blue
Cyan
Individual
Original
Zoom
Paper
: A4
: 100%
: A4
6
Press [OK].
7
Press the Start key. Copying begins.
Preview
Add Shortcut
Status
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
4-36
Copying Functions
One-touch Image Adjust
Adjust images as desired to more vivid or more muted images.
NOTE: This feature can be used with full color copying and auto color copying.
The items that may be configured are as follows.
Item
Portrait Photo
Landscape
Photo (Blue)
Landscape
Photo (Green)
Detail
Portrait 1
Gives skin color a warm, rosy look.
Portrait 2
Gives skin color a tanned look.
Portrait 3
Gives skin color a whiter look.
Blue 1
Makes blue more vivid.
Blue 2
Makes blue a true blue without any green.
Blue 3
Gives blue a greenish (emerald green) tint.
Green 1
Makes green more vivid.
Green 2
Gives green a yellowish-green tint.
Green 3
Gives green a slightly bluish tint.
Vivid
Increases saturation for a more vivid effect.
Muted
Reduces saturation for a calmer effect.
4-37
Before
After
4
Copying Functions
Item
Detail
Before
Sharp
Increases contrast for a more pronounced
image.
Smooth
Reduces contrast for a softer image.
Light
Makes overall color lighter and less vivid for a
bright and light feel.
Dark
Makes overall color darker for a heavier feel.
After
NOTE: Select from one of the 9 available One Touch Image Adjust types. Multiple selections are not possible.
Follow the steps below to use One-touch Image Adjust.
Copies
1
Press the Copy key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Color/Image Quality] and then press [Onetouch Image Adjust].
4
Select the image.
After selecting [Portrait Photo], [Landscape Photo
(Blue)], or [Landscape Photo (Green)], press [Color
Shade], select from the 3 colors, and press [OK].
One-touch Image Adjust
Select desired image quality.
Off
Before
Place original.
Portrait
Photo
Landscape
Photo (Blue)
Vivid
Muted
Sharp
Smooth
Light
Dark
Landscape
Photo (Green)
5
Press [OK].
6
Press the Start key. Copying begins.
After
Original
Zoom
Paper
: --: 100%
: ---
Add Shortcut
Status
Blue 1
Color Shade
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
4-38
Copying Functions
Sharpness
Adjust the sharpness of image outlines. When copying penciled originals with rough or broken lines, clear copies
can be taken by adjusting sharpness toward [Sharpen]. When copying images made up of patterned dots such
as magazine photos, in which moire* patterns appear, edge softening and weakening of the moire effect can be
obtained by setting the sharpness toward [Blur].
The table below shows the available settings.
Item
All
Text/Fine Line
Detail
Sharpen
Emphasize the image outline.
Blur
Blur the image outline. Can weaken a Moire*
effect.
Normal
Make letters and lines appear sharper.
Only text and fine lines are emphasized.
Sharpen
* Patterns that are created by irregular distribution of halftone dots.
Follow the steps below to adjust sharpness.
Copies
1
Press the Copy key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Color/Image Quality] and then Press
[Sharpness].
4
Press [All] or [Text/Fine Line].
5
When [All] is selected, press [-3] to [3] (Blur Sharpen) to adjust the sharpness.
Sharpness
When [Text/Fine Line] is selected, press [0] to [3]
(Normal - Sharpen) to adjust the sharpness.
All
Text/Fine Line
Blur
-3
Original
Zoom
Paper
Sharpen
-2
-1
0
1
2
3
6
Press [OK].
7
Press the Start key. Copying begins.
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Preview
Add Shortcut
Status
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
4-39
4
Copying Functions
Background Density Adj.
Original
Copy
Remove dark background from originals, such as
newspapers. The smaller the number becomes lighter
the background becomes. If the ground color is
obtrusive, select [Auto]. If [Auto] does not remove the
ground color, select [Manual] and adjust the density of
the ground color.
Follow the steps below to use background density adjust.
Copies
1
Press the Copy key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Color/Image Quality] and then press
[Background Density Adj.].
4
Press [Auto] or [Manual].
5
When [Manual] is selected, press [1] to [5] (Lighter
- Darker) to adjust the background density.
6
Press [OK].
7
Press the Start key. Copying begins.
Background Density Adj.
Off
Background
Lighter
Darker
Auto
Manual
Original
Zoom
Paper
1
2
3
4
5
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Preview
Add Shortcut
Status
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
4-40
Copying Functions
Saturation
The brightness of colored parts of copies can be adjusted in 7 levels.
NOTE: This feature is used with full color and auto color copying. Saturation is disabled during auto color
copying when the black & white original has been detected.
The procedure for adjusting the saturation is explained below.
Copies
1
Press the Copy key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Color/Image Quality] and then press
[Saturation].
4
Press [-3] to [3] (Grayish - Vivid) to adjust the
saturation.
5
Press [OK].
6
Press the Start key. Copying begins.
Saturation
Place original.
Grayish
-3
Original
Original
Zoom
Zoom
Paper
Paper
:
:
:
Vivid
-2
-1
0
1
2
3
--A4
100%
100%
--A4
Preview
Add Shortcut
Status
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
4-41
4
Copying Functions
Prevent Bleed-thru
Hide background colors and image bleed-through when scanning thin originals.
The procedure for using prevent bleed-thru copying is explained below.
Copies
Prevent Bleed-thru
1
Press the Copy key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Color/Image Quality] and then press
[Prevent Bleed-thru].
4
Press [On]. Prevent Bleed-thru is selected.
5
Press [OK].
6
Press the Start key. Copying begins.
Hide background colors and image bleed-through
when scanning thin original.
Original
Zoom
Paper
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Off
On
Preview
Add Shortcut
Status
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
4-42
Copying Functions
Continuous Scan
When a large number of originals cannot be placed in the document processor at one time, the originals can be
scanned in separate batches and then copied as one job. With this function, originals are scanned until you
press [Finish Scan].
Any of the following settings can be changed during scanning.
•
Original size
•
Zoom
•
Original orientation
•
Border erase
•
Original Image
•
Density
•
Duplex
•
Color Selection
•
Background Density Adj.
•
Prevent Bleed-thru
•
Paper Selection
If you use Job Build, you can insert a blank paper during scanning or a blank page during duplex copying.
The procedure for making copies using Continuous Scan is explained below.
Scan next original(s).
Place the originals and press Start key.
Copies
1
Press the Copy key.
2
Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Continuous
Scan].
3
If Continuous Scan is selected, press [On].
If Job Build is selected, press [Job Build] and select
the desired binding orientation.
Continuous Scan
Off
Place original.
Select desired binding orientation.
On
4
Press [OK].
5
Place the originals in the document processor or on
the platen and press the Start key.
Job Build
Original
Zoom
Paper
: --: 100%
: A4
Binding
Left
Preview
Add Shortcut
Binding
Right
Binding
Top
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
Scan next original(s).
Place the originals and press Start key.
Press [Finish Scan] to start copying.
Job No.: 000021
Job Name: doc20080505113414
Copies
User Name: -----
Scanner Setting
If [Job Build] is selected, the next page can be
changed. Press [Sheet Insertion] to insert a blank
paper. Press [Next Copy: On Back] in duplex
copying to print the next page on back page.
Finishing
pages
Original
Size
Original
Orientation
Original
Image
2-sided/Book
Original
Zoom
Border Erase
Density
Next Copy:
On Back
Sheet
Insertion
1/2
Cancel
Status
Finish Scan
10/10/2010 10:10
6
Place the next original and press the Start key.
Repeat these steps to scan the remaining originals.
After scanning all originals, press [Finish Scan] to
start copying.
4-43
4
Copying Functions
Auto Image Rotation
Automatically rotates the image when the sizes of the original and the loaded paper matches but the orientations
are different. The images will be rotated 90° counter-clockwise prior to copying.
NOTE: To set Auto Image Rotation as the default mode, refer to Auto Image Rotation on page 9-24.
The procedure for making copies using Auto Image Rotation is explained below.
1
Press the Copy key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Auto Image
Rotation].
4
Press [On] to select Auto Image Rotation.
5
Press [OK].
6
Press the Start key to start copying.
Negative Image
Inverts black and white portions of the image for printing.
NOTE: This function is only available for black and white copy mode.
Use the procedure below to make negative image copies.
1
Press the Copy key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Negative
Image].
4
Press [On] to select Negative Image.
5
Press [OK].
6
Press the Start key to start copying.
4-44
Copying Functions
Mirror Image
Copies the mirrored image of the original.
Use the procedure below to make mirror image copies.
1
Press the Copy key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Mirror Image].
4
Press [On] to select Mirror Image.
5
Press [OK].
6
Press the Start key to start copying.
4-45
4
Copying Functions
Job Finish Notice
Sends a notice by e-mail when a job is completed. Users can be notified of the completion of a job while working
at a remote desk, saving the time spent waiting beside the machine to finish.
NOTE: The user’s PC should be configured in advance so that E-mail can be used. For details, refer to
Embedded Web Server RX (Settings for E-mail) on page 2-24.
E-mail can be sent to a single destination.
Example of Job Finish Notice
To:
h_pttr@owl-net.net
Subject:
1234 Job end report mail
Job No.:
000002
Result:
OK
End Time:
Sun 10 Oct 2010 10:10:10
File Name:
doc27042005145608
Job Type:
Copy
-----------------------------------------------1234
Use the procedure below to enable job finish notification when making copies.
1 Press the Copy key.
Copies
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Job Finish Notice].
4
To select the destination from the address book,
press [Address Book] on the left of the screen and
then press [Address Book] in the next screen. Select
the destination to be notified on the address book
screen, then press [OK].
Job Finish Notice
Off
Destination
Address
Book
User A
Detail
abc@def.com
Address
Entry
Detail
Add Shortcut
Status
NOTE: For the procedure to select the destination
from the Address Book, refer Specifying Destination on
page 3-40.
Address Book
Cancel
OK
You can view information on the notification
destination by pressing [Detail].
10/10/2010 10:10
4-46
Copying Functions
To directly enter the E-mail address, press
[Address Entry]. Press [E-mail Address], enter the
address and press [OK].
Copies
Job Finish Notice
Off
Address
Book
E-mail
Address
Address
Entry
Add Shortcut
Status
Cancel
5
Press [OK].
6
Press the Start key to start copying. Upon
completion of the job, an E-mail notice is sent to the
selected destination.
4
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
4-47
Copying Functions
File Name Entry
Names a copy job. Add other information such as date and time or job number as necessary. You can check a
job history or job status using the job name, date and time, or job number specified here.
Use the procedure below to assign a name to your copy job.
Copies
1
Press the Copy key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Advanced Setup] and then [File Name Entry].
4
Press [File Name], enter the name for a copy job,
and press [OK].
File Name Entry
To add date and time, press [Date and Time]. To
add job number, [Job No.]. Added information is
displayed in Additional Info.
Add a file name.
Additional information such as Job No.
and Date and Time can also be set.
File Name
doc
Additional Info
Job No.
5
Press [OK].
6
Press the Start key to start copying.
Date and Time
Add Shortcut
Status
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
Priority Override
Suspends a current job and gives the selected job priority for copying. The suspended job resumes after Priority
Override copying is finished.
NOTE: The current job that is selected as Priority Override cannot be suspended.
The procedure for using Priority Override is explained below.
1
Press the Copy key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Priority
Override].
4
Press [On] to select Priority Override.
5
Press [OK].
6
Press the Start key. The current copy job is
suspended and the copy job selected in Priority
Override starts. The suspended job resumes after
Priority Override copying is finished.
4-48
Copying Functions
Repeat Copy
Enables additional copies in the desired quantity as necessary after a copy job is completed. For confidential
documents, you can set up a pass code for the use of Repeat Copy. In such a case, the correct pass code must
be entered when using Repeat Copy or copies will not be delivered.
IMPORTANT: A Repeat Copy job is cleared when the main power switch is turned off.
Repeat Copy is not available when the machine is equipped with the optional Data Security Kit.
Repeat Copy cannot be used when the maximum number of Repeat Copy jobs to retain in the document box is
set to zero (refer to Maximum Number of Repeat Copy Jobs Retained on page 4-50).
You can select Repeat Copy as the default setting. Refer to Repeat Copy on page 9-29.
Giving a file name to a copy job will facilitate identification of the data when copying (refer to File Name Entry on
page 4-48).
Selecting Repeat Copy
Use the procedure below to select repeat copying.
Copies
1
Press the Copy key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Repeat Copy].
4
Press [On].
To register a password, press [# Keys] and enter a
4-digit password.
Repeat Copy
Off
Password(4digits)
On
IMPORTANT: If you forget the pass code, Repeat Copy
will be unavailable. Make a note of the pass code
beforehand if necessary.
# Keys
Original
Zoom
Paper
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Preview
Add Shortcut
Cancel
Status
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
5
Press [OK].
6
Press the Start key to start copying and register
this job as a Repeat Copy job.
Outputting Repeat Copy Jobs
The Repeat Copy jobs are stored in the Document Box. Refer to Job Box on page 3-43 to print out the Repeat
Copy jobs.
4-49
4
Copying Functions
Maximum Number of Repeat Copy Jobs Retained
You can use the procedure below to change the maximum number of copy jobs that can be retained in the
document box.
Use the procedure below to change the maximum number of copy jobs retained.
Document Box/Removable Memory - Repeat Copy Job Retention
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Document Box/Removable Memory] and
then [Next] of Job Box.
3
Press [Change] of Repeat Copy Job Retention.
4
Use the [+] or [-] key to enter the maximum
retention number.
Set the maximum number of repeat copy jobs to retain.
Use [-]/[+] or the numeric keys to enter a number.
*Set this number to 0 to not retain any jobs.
You can also enter the number from the numeric
keys.
A number between 0 and 50 can be entered as the
number of retained jobs.
(0 - 50)
32
job(s)
NOTE: If you enter a value of 0 (zero), you cannot use
Cancel
Status
OK
the Repeat Copy function.
10/10/2010 10:10
5
4-50
Press [OK].
Copying Functions
OHP Backing Sheet
When two or three OHP transparencies are stacked on top of each other, static electricity may make them
difficult to handle. When using OHP Backing Sheet, a paper sheet is automatically inserted between each
transparency, making them easier to handle. Also, the same original page can be copied to the backing sheet
for multiple page copying.
NOTE: For transparency film that can be used, refer to Transparencies on page Appendix-18.
Never load OHP transparencies into trays or cassettes other than the multi purpose tray.
When OHP Backing Sheet is set, the multi purpose tray paper type is automatically set to Transparency.
If the optional document finisher is installed, you may need to specify the output destination for finished copies.
For further details, refer to Paper Output on page 4-13.
Blank Sheet
Outputs a blank backing sheet after copying to a
transparency. (* denotes OHP film.)
1*
1
2*
2
3
Original
3*
Copy
Copied Sheet
1
1
After copying to a transparency, copies the same
original image to the backing sheet paper. (* denotes
OHP film.)
*1
2*
2
3
Original
2
3
*3
Copy
Follow the steps below for OHP Backing Sheet.
1
Press the Copy key.
2
Place the original.
3
Load the transparencies into the multi purpose tray.
IMPORTANT: Fan through the transparencies before
loading.
Up to 10 transparencies can be loaded at one time.
Be sure that paper of the same size and orientation as
the transparencies is loaded in the cassette.
4-51
4
Copying Functions
Copies
OHP Backing Sheet
Off
Copied
Sheet
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Preview
Add Shortcut
Status
Press [Advanced Setup] and then Press [OHP
Backing Sheet].
5
Press [Blank Sheet] or [Copied Sheet].
6
Select the media to be fed. If you press [Auto], the
machine automatically selects media that matches
the size of the original.
7
Press [OK].
8
Press the Start key. Copying begins.
Select the paper source to feed paper.
Blank Sheet
Original
Zoom
Paper
4
Auto
A4
Plain
A3
Plain
A4
Plain
A4
Plain
A4
Plain
A4
Plain
A4
Plain
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
4-52
5 Printing
This chapter explains the functions available for printing.
For details on Using the Document Box, refer to the Chapter 7 - Document Box.
•
•
•
Printing - Printing from Applications....................................................5-2
Banner printing....................................................................................5-5
Using a Job Box................................................................................5-10
5-1
Printing
Printing - Printing from Applications
Follow the steps below to print documents from applications.
NOTE: To print the document from applications, install the printer driver on your computer from the supplied
DVD (Product Library).
1
Create a document using an application.
2
Click File and select Print in the application. The
Print dialog box appears.
3
Click the  button next to the Name field and select
this machine from the list.
4
Enter the desired print quantity in the Number of
copies box. Enter any number up to 999.
When there is more than one page, select Collate
to print out one by one in the sequence of the page
numbers.
5
Click the Properties button. The Properties dialog
box appears.
6
Select the Basic tab and click the Page Size button
to select the paper size.
To print on the special paper such as thick paper or
transparency, click the Media Type menu and
select the media type.
7
Click Source and select the paper source.
NOTE: If you choose Auto Select, paper is supplied
automatically from the paper source loaded with paper
of optimum size and type. To print on special paper
such as envelope or thick paper, place it on the multi
purpose tray and select MP Tray.
8
Select paper orientation, either Portrait or
Landscape, to match the orientation of the
document.
Selecting Rotate 180° will print the document
rotated 180°.
9
Click the OK button to return to the Print dialog box.
10 Click the OK button to start printing.
5-2
Printing
Printer driver print settings screen
The printer driver print settings screen allows you to configure a variety of print-related settings. For more
information, refer to the Printing System Driver User Guide on the DVD.
1
2
3
No.
Description
1
Quick Print
Provides icons that can be used to easily configure frequently used functions. Each time you click an
icon, it changes to an image resembling the print results and applies the settings.
Basic
This tab groups basic functions that are frequently used. You can use it to configure the paper size,
destination, duplex printing, and color mode.
Layout
This tab lets you configure settings for printing various layouts, including booklet printing, combine
mode, poster printing, and scaling.
Finishing
This tab lets you configure settings related to finishing of printed media, including binding and stapling.
Imaging
This tab lets you configure settings related to the quality and color mode of the print results.
Publishing
This tab lets you create covers and inserts for print jobs and put inserts between sheets of OHP film.
Job
This tab lets you configure settings for saving print data from the computer to the machine. Regularly
used documents and other data can be saved to the machine for easy printing later. Since saved
documents can be printed directly from the machine, this function is also convenient when you wish
to print a document that you don't want others to see.
Advanced
This tab lets you configure settings for adding text pages or watermarks to print data. It also provides
simple color adjustment functionality.
2
Profiles
Printer driver settings can be saved as a profile. Saved profiles can be recalled at any time, so it's a
convenient practice to save frequently used settings.
3
Reset
Click to revert settings to their initial values.
5-3
5
Printing
Printer Driver Help
The printer driver includes Help. To learn about print settings, open the printer driver print settings screen and
display Help as explained below.
1
Click the ? button in the upper right corner of the
screen and then click the item you want to know
about.
2
Click the item you want to know about and press
the [F1] key on your keyboard.
5-4
Printing
Banner printing
When a document length from 470.1 mm (18.51") to a maximum of 1220.0 mm (48") is specified for printing,
the print job is treated as banner printing.
Max. number of sheets
1 sheet (manual feed), 10 sheets (when optional banner tray is attached*)
Paper width
210 (8.26") to 304.8 (12") mm
Paper length
Max. 1220 (48") mm
Paper weight
136 to 163 g/m2
Paper type
Heavy 2
*
When the banner tray (option) is used, up to 10 sheets of banner paper can be fed continuously .
(Refer to Using the Banner Tray (Option) on 5-7.)
Follow the steps below to set banner paper in the printer driver.
1
Click the Basic tab and then click the Page Sizes
button.
2
Click the New button, enter the name, length
(470.1 mm or longer), and width of the custom
paper size being registered, and click the OK
button.
3
Click Print size, select the custom paper size that
you registered, and click the OK button.
NOTE: When KPDL is used for PDL Settings of the printer driver, a length setting of 470.5 mm (18.53") or
longer is handled as banner print.
5-5
5
Printing
When you execute printing in this case, a message appears on the machine's operation panel. Place the paper
in the multipurpose tray, continue to support it so that it does not fall, and press [Continue]. To cancel printing,
press [Cancel].
Job No.:
Job Name:
User Name:
Use MP tray to print on the following paper.
Set paper and press [Continue].
210x800mm
Custom 1
Cancel
Status
Continue
10/10/2010 10:10
IMPORTANT: If an output tray that cannot be used for banner printing such as Mailbox (option) is selected in
the printer driver, the output tray automatically changes to a tray that can be used.
To print on multiple sheets manually (not using the banner tray), place each sheet after the previous sheet is
printed, and press [Continue].
After pressing [Continue], support the paper with both hands so that it
feeds in correctly.
After printing starts, catch the paper when it is output so that it does
not fall.When using the inner tray as the output location, do not stand
up the stopper. Standing up the stopper may cause paper jams.
5-6
Printing
Using the Banner Tray (Option)
When the banner tray (option) is used, up to 10 sheets of banner paper can be fed continuously.
1
Open the Multi Purpose tray until it stops.
Do not extend the multi purpose auxiliary tray.
2
Release the paper width guide lock on the banner
tray and open to the maximum width.
3
Attach the banner tray to the multi purpose tray.
Fit the openings on the sides of the banner tray
onto the tabs on the sides of the multi purpose tray,
and press into place.
5-7
5
Printing
4
Open the paper width guides on the multi purpose
tray to the maximum width.
Make sure that the banner tray is attached so that
the paper width guides on the banner tray are
outside the paper width guides on the multi purpose
tray.
5
Load banner paper so that it passes under the
paper clamp bar.
6
Loop the banner paper back and place the end on
the paper support.
5-8
Printing
7
Adjust the paper width guides to the width of the
paper.
IMPORTANT: If there is a gap between the paper and
the paper width guides, readjust the guides to fit the
paper in order to prevent skewed feeding and paper
jams.
8
Adjust the paper width guides on the banner tray to
the same width as the paper width guides on the
multi purpose tray and lock.
IMPORTANT: Remove the paper when you are not performing banner printing.
NOTE: The print confirmation screen can be set in the system menu to not appear when the banner tray is
attached. This will allow continuous printing on multiple sheets. (Refer to Message Banner Print on 9-42.)
5-9
5
Printing
Using a Job Box
The Job Box stores print data in the machine's Document Box (HDD) for later printing from the operation panel
as needed.
Private Print
Private Print stores the print data which is printed by using the printer driver to send data as a Private Print.
In Private Printing, you can specify that a job is not printed until you release the job at the operation panel. When
sending the job from the application software, specify a 4-digit access code in the printer driver. The job is
released for printing by entering the access code on the operation panel, ensuring confidentiality of the print job.
The data will be deleted upon completion of print job or after the main power switch is turned off.
Refer to the Printing System Driver User Guide on how to print a job as Private Print using the printer driver.
For details of the procedure for Private Print, refer to Private Print/Stored Job on page 7-14.
Proof and Hold Print Box
Proof and Hold box stores the print data which is printed by using the printer driver to send data as a Proof and
Hold Print job.
The Proof and Hold feature produces only a single proof print of multiple-print job and holds printing of the
remaining copies. Printing a multiple-print job in Proof and Hold using the printer driver allows only a single copy
to be printed while maintaining the document data in the Job Box. To continue to print the remaining copies, use
the operation panel. You can change the number of copies to print.
Refer to the Printing System Driver User Guide on how to print a job as Proof and Hold Print job using the printer
driver.
For details of the procedure for Proof and Hold Print Box, refer to Quick Copy/Proof and Hold on page 7-15.
Automatic Delete Setting for Temporary Documents
This setting specifies that documents, such as Private Printing, or Proof and Hold Printing, saved temporarily in
the job box are automatically deleted after they have been saved for a set time.
NOTE: This function is valid for documents saved after the function is set.
Regardless of this function setting, temporary documents are deleted when the main power switch is turned off.
For details of the procedure for Automatic Delete Setting for Temporary Documents, refer to Deletion of Job
Retention on page 7-19.
5-10
Printing
Job Storage
Job storage is a Job storage (e-MPS) option that lets you store a print job permanently on the hard disk for
printing later. You also have the option of protecting the print job from unauthorized printing by using an access
code. This feature is available when a hard disk is installed and selected in the Device Settings tab.
Job storage is useful for jobs that need to be available for printing at any time, even if the printing system has
been turned off and turned on again.
If desired, you can attach a four-digit access code to a Job storage job, so that you can print a job without anyone
else seeing it, or restrict printing to approved users. When the access code is used, the job is not printed until a
user prints it at the printing system’s operation panel.
Refer to the Printing System Driver User Guide on how to print a job as Proof and Hold Print job using the printer
driver.
5-11
5
Printing
5-12
6 Sending Functions
This chapter explains the functions available for sending originals.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Original Size........................................................................................6-2
Sending Size.......................................................................................6-4
Zoom...................................................................................................6-6
Centering ............................................................................................6-7
Mixed Size Originals ...........................................................................6-8
2-sided/Book Original........................................................................6-11
Original Orientation ...........................................................................6-12
File Format........................................................................................6-14
File Separation..................................................................................6-15
PDF Encryption Functions ................................................................6-16
Original Image...................................................................................6-18
Density ..............................................................................................6-19
Scan Resolution................................................................................6-20
Sharpness.........................................................................................6-21
Background Density Adj....................................................................6-22
Color Selection..................................................................................6-23
Continuous Scan...............................................................................6-24
Prevent Bleed-thru ............................................................................6-25
Border Erase.....................................................................................6-26
File Name Entry ................................................................................6-28
E-mail Subject/Body..........................................................................6-29
WSD Scan/DSM Scan ......................................................................6-30
Scanning using TWAIN .....................................................................6-33
Job Finish Notice ..............................................................................6-36
Send and Print ..................................................................................6-37
Send and Store .................................................................................6-37
FTP Encrypted TX ............................................................................6-38
Text Stamp ........................................................................................6-39
Bates Stamp......................................................................................6-40
Color Type.........................................................................................6-42
Scanning with FMU Connection........................................................6-43
6-1
Sending Functions
Original Size
Select the size of originals that will serve as the basis for scanning. Be sure to select the original size when using
originals of nonstandard sizes.
Choose the original size from the following groups of original sizes
Item
Detail
Standard
Sizes 1
Standard
Sizes 2
Size
Select from automatic
detection and standard
sizes.
Inch models: Auto, Ledger, Legal, Letter, LetterR, Statement, Statement-R, Oficio II, 11×15"
Select from standard
sizes except Standard
Sizes 1 .
Inch models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5,
A5-R, B6, B6-R, A6-R, Folio, 8K, 16 K, 16K-R,
216×340mm
Metric models: Auto, A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5R, A5, A5-R, B6, B6-R, A6-R, Folio, 216×340mm
Metric models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R,
Statement, Statement-R, Oficio II, 11×15", 8K,
16K, 16K-R
Others
Select from Hagaki and
Custom Original Size *.
Hagaki, Oufuku hagaki, Custom 1 to 4
Size Entry
Enter the size that is not
indicated in Standard
Sizes 1 and 2**.
Inch models
Horizontal: 2.00 to 17.00" (in 0.01" increments),
Vertical: 2.00 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments)
Metric models
Horizontal: 50 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments),
Vertical: 50 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments)
*
**
Regarding the setting method of Custom Original Size (Custom 1 to 4), refer to Custom
Original Size on page 9-4.
The input units can be changed in the System menu.
Refer to Measurement on page 9-12.
6-2
Sending Functions
Use the procedure below to select the original size when sending scanned images.
Destination
1
Press the Send key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Org./Sending Data Format] and then
[Original Size].
4
Press [Standard Sizes 1], [Standard Sizes 2],
[Others], or [Size Entry] to select the original size.
Original Size
Standard
Sizes 1
Standard
Sizes 2
Auto
A3
A4
A4
A5
A5
A6
B4
B5
B5
B6
B6
Others
Original
Zoom
Send
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Size Entry
216x340mm
6
Preview
Add Shortcut
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
When you have selected [Size Entry], press [+] or
[-] to set the sizes of X (horizontal) and Y (vertical).
By pressing [# Keys], you can use the numeric
keys.
Destination
Original Size
Standard
Sizes 1
X
(50 - 432)
297
mm
Standard
Sizes 2
# Keys
Others
Y
Original
Zoom
Send
: 210x297mm
: 100%
: A4
Preview
Add Shortcut
Status
5
Press [OK].
6
Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
(50 - 297)
210
Size Entry
mm
# Keys
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
6-3
Sending Functions
Sending Size
Select the sending size (the size of image to be sent).
The table below lists the sizes.
Item
Detail
Standard
Sizes 1
Select from Same
as Original Size or
Standard Size.
Inch models: Same as Original Size, Ledger,
Legal, Letter, Statement, Oficio II, 11×15"
Select from
standard size
except Standard
Sizes 1.
Inch models: A3, B4, A4, B5, A5, B6, A6, Folio,
8K, 16K, 216 × 340mm
Select from
Hagaki.
Hagaki, Oufuku hagaki
Standard
Sizes 2
Others
Size
Metric models: Same as Original Size, A3, B4, A4,
B5, A5, B6, A6, Folio, 216 × 340mm
Metric models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Statement,
Oficio II, 11×15", 8K, 16K
Relationship between Original Size, Sending Size, and Zoom
Original Size (page 6-2), Sending Size, and Zoom (page 6-6) are related to each other. Refer to the following
table.
Original Size and the size you
wish to send as are
the same
different
Original Size
Specify as
necessary
Specify as
necessary
Sending Size
Select [Same as
Original]
Select the
required size
Zoom
Select [100%]
(or [Auto])
Select [Auto]
NOTE: When you select Sending Size that is different from Original Size, and select the Zoom [100%], you
can send the image as the actual size (No Zoom).
6-4
Sending Functions
Use the procedure below to select the size for transmission when sending scanned images.
Destination
1
Press the Send Key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Org./Sending Data Format] and then
[Sending Size].
4
Press [Standard Sizes 1], [Standard Sizes 2], or
[Others] to select the sending size.
5
Press [OK].
Sending Size
Standard
Sizes 1
Standard
Sizes 2
Same as
Original Size
A3
A4
A5
A6
B4
B5
B6
216x340mm
Others
Original
Zoom
Send
: A4
: 100%
: A4
6
Preview
Add Shortcut
Status
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
6
6-5
Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
Sending Functions
Zoom
Scans the original by automatically zooming it depending on the sending size.
The table below lists the available options.
Item
Detail
100%
No Zoom (to be scanned at actual size)
Auto
Zoomed automatically according to the specified sending size.
NOTE: When zooming in or out, see Sending Size on page 6-4 when selecting the sending size.
Depending on the combination of original size and sending size, the image is placed at the edge of the paper.
To select the original size vertically and horizontally on the page, use the centering setting described in
Centering on page 6-7.
Use the procedure below to enlarge or reduce the original to match the transmission size.
Destination
Zoom
1
Press the Send key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Select the transmission size.
4
Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Zoom].
5
Press [100%] or [Auto].
6
Press [OK].
7
Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
Enlarge or reduce the original.
[100%]: Produce at actual size.
[Auto]: Enlarge or reduce to match the required size.
Original
Zoom
Send
: A4
: 100%
: A4
100%
Auto
Preview
Add Shortcut
Status
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
6-6
Sending Functions
Centering
When you have scanned the original after specifying the original size and sending size, depending on these
sizes, a margin is created at the bottom, left, or right side of paper. By using the centering, the image is placed
with a margin equally created at each of the page Top/Bottom and Left/Right.
Use the procedure below to center the image when sending a scanned image.
1
Press the Send key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Centering].
4
Press [On]. Centering is performed.
5
Press [OK].
6
Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
6-7
6
Sending Functions
Mixed Size Originals
Using the optional document processor, the originals of different sizes can be placed in a batch and sent. In this
operation, up to 30 originals of different sizes can be placed in the document processor at the same time.
Originals of the Same Width
When the original widths are the same, the combinations of originals that can be placed are as follows.
•
Ledger and Letter (A3 and A4)
Ledger
(A3)
•
Letter
(A4)
Ledger
(A3)
Legal and Letter-R (A4-R and Folio)
Legal
(Folio)
•
Letter
(A4)
Letter-R
(A4-R)
B4 and B5
6-8
Letter-R
Legal
(A4-R)
(Folio)
Sending Functions
Originals of Different Widths (Available for metric models only)
The combinations of originals of different sizes that can be placed together are as follows.
NOTE: When mixing the original sizes as using the following combination: A4-R, B5-R, and Folio, make sure
to set the System Menu key -> Common Settings -> Original / Paper Settings -> Original Auto Detect to [On]
for [Folio]. For more information, refer to Original Auto Detect (Available for metric models only) on page 9-10.
•
A3, B4, A4, B5
6
•
B4, A4-R, B5
B4
•
A4-R
B5
B5
A4-R
B4
A4-R, B5-R, Folio
A4-R
B5-R
6-9
B5-R
A4-R
Sending Functions
Use the procedure below to send mixed size originals as a batch.
1
Press the Send key.
2
Place the original into the document processor.
IMPORTANT: When placing originals of different width,
arrange the originals so that their left sides and top
sides are aligned, and place the originals in alignment
with the far width guide. If the originals are not aligned
in this way, they may not be scanned correctly, and
skewing or original jams may result.
Destination
3
Press [Org./Sending Data Format] and then [Mixed
Size Originals].
4
Select the combination of originals from
[Same Width] and [Different Width].
5
Press [OK].
6
Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
Mixed Size Originals
Scan all sheets in the document processor,
even if differently sized, then send.
*Up to 30 sheets can be placed in
the document processor for mixed
size originals.
Original
Zoom
Send
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Off
Same Width
Different
Width
Preview
Add Shortcut
Status
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
6-10
Sending Functions
2-sided/Book Original
Select the type and binding of the original depending on the original.
The table below lists the binding directions for each original type.
Original
Type
Binding
1-sided Sheet Original
1-sided
—
2-sided Sheet Original
2-sided*
Binding Left/Right,
Binding Top
Open Book Original such
as magazine and book
Book
Binding Left,
Binding Right
*
Only when the optional document processor is used.
Use the procedure below to select the original type and binding direction when sending scanned originals.
Destination
2-sided/Book Original
1-sided
1
Press the Send key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Org./Sending Data Format] and then [2sided/Book Original].
4
Press [1-sided], [2-sided], or [Book].
5
When selecting [2-sided], select the binding
direction and press [Original Orientation] to select
the direction in which the original is set on the
platen.
When selecting [Book], select the binding direction.
6
Press [OK].
7
Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
Binding
2-sided
Left
Right
Book
Original
Zoom
Send
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Top Edge
on Top
Original
Orientation
Preview
Add Shortcut
Status
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
6-11
6
Sending Functions
Original Orientation
To send the document in the orientation that can be read properly, specify the upper orientation of the original .
To use the functions below, select the orientation in which the original is set on the platen.
•
2-sided/Book Original
•
Border Erase
NOTE: If [On] is selected as the Orientation Confirmation (page 9-16) setting in the System Menu, the
selection screen for original orientation appears when you select any of the above functions.
When placing the original on the platen
Original
[Top Edge on Top]
[Top Edge on Left]
When placing the original on the optional document processor
Original
[Top Edge on Top]
6-12
[Top Edge on Left]
Sending Functions
Use the procedure below to select the orientation when placing the originals on the platen for sending.
Destination
1
Press the Send key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Org./Sending Data Format] and then
[Original Orientation].
4
Select original orientation from [Top Edge on Top]
and [Top Edge on Left].
5
Press [OK].
Original Orientation
Select the orientation of the
original document's top edge.
Original
Zoom
Send
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Top Edge
on Top
Top Edge
on Left
6
Preview
Add Shortcut
Status
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
6
6-13
Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
Sending Functions
File Format
Select the file format of the image to send.
The table below lists the file formats and their details.
File Format
Adjustable range of image
quality
Color mode
PDF*
1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to
5 High Quality (Low Comp.)
Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto
Color (Color/Black and White), Full
Color, Grayscale, Black and White
TIFF
1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to
5 High Quality (Low Comp.)
Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto
Color (Color/Black and White), Full
Color, Grayscale, Black and White
JPEG
1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to
5 High Quality (Low Comp.)
Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Full
Color, Grayscale
XPS
1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to
5 High Quality (Low Comp.)
Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto
Color (Color/Black and White), Full
Color, Grayscale, Black and White
High Comp.
PDF*
Compression Ratio Priority to
Quality Priority
Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto
Color (Color/Black and White), Full
Color, Grayscale
*
The file format can be set to [PDF/A-1a] or [PDF/A-1b].
NOTE: When [High Comp. PDF] is specified, you cannot adjust the image quality.
You can use PDF encryption functions. For details, see PDF Encryption Functions on page 6-16
6-14
Sending Functions
Use the procedures below to select the file format for transmission.
Destination
1
Press the Send key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Org./Sending Data Format] and then [File
Format].
4
Select the file format from [PDF], [TIFF], [JPEG],
[XPS], and [High Comp. PDF].
File Format
When the color mode in scanning has been
selected for Grayscale or Full Color, set the image
quality.
Image Quality
PDF
TIFF
Compression
Ratio Priority
Standard
Quality
Priority
Off
Off
JPEG
Original
Zoom
Send
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Preview
If you selected [PDF] or [High Comp. PDF], you can
specify encryption or PDF/A settings.
XPS
PDF/A
High Comp.
PDF
Add Shortcut
Cancel
Encryption
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
NOTE: If encryption is enabled, PDF/A settings
cannot be specified.
5
Press [OK].
6
Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
File Separation
Create several files by dividing scanned original data page by page, and send the files.
Use the procedures below to split scanned original data into separate files when sending scanned originals.
Destination
File Separation
Create and send a file for each page
of the original that was read.
Original
Zoom
Send
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Off
Add Shortcut
Press the Send key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Org./Sending Data Format] and then [File
Separation].
4
Press [Each Page] to set File Separation.
5
Press [OK].
6
Specify the destination, and press the Start key.
The scanned originals are sent after being divided
into files of one page each.
Each Page
Preview
Status
1
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
NOTE: A three-digit serial number such as
abc_001.pdf, abc_002.pdf... is attached to the end of
the file name.
6-15
6
Sending Functions
PDF Encryption Functions
If you have selected PDF or High Comp. PDF for file format, you can restrict the access level for displaying,
printing, and editing PDF's by assigning a secure password.
The items you can restrict the access level with are as follows.
Item
Value
Detail
Compatibility
Acrobat 3.0 or later,
Acrobat 5.0 or later
Select the version that is compatible with the PDF file.
Password to
Open
Document
Off, On
Enter the password to open the PDF file
Password to
Edit/Print
Document
Off, On
Enter the password to edit the PDF file
When you have entered the password to edit/print
document, you can specifically limit the operation.
When you send a PDF file, use the procedures below to encrypt the PDF file for transmission.
File Format - Encryption
Compatibility
1
Press the Send key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Org./Sending Data Format], [File Format],
[PDF] or [High Comp. PDF], and [Encryption].
4
Press [ ] of Compatibility, select Acrobat 3.0 and
later or Acrobat 5.0 and later.
5
When you enter the password to open the PDF file,
select [On] of Password to Open Document.
6
Press [Password], enter a password (up to 256
characters) and then press [OK].
Acrobat 3.0 and later
Encryption Level: Middle(40-bit)
Password to Open
Document
Password
to Edit/Print
Document
Off
Password
On
Confirmation
Off
Password
On
Confirmation
Detail
Cancel
Status
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on page
Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
7
Press [Confirmation] and enter the password again
for confirmation. Then press [OK].
8
When you enter the password to edit the PDF file,
select [On] of Password to Edit/Print Document.
9
In the same way as the entry of Password to Open
Document, enter the password to change the PDF
file.
10 Press [Detail].
6-16
Sending Functions
11 Restrict the access level of the PDF file. Press [
]
of Printing Allowed to select the item (the scope of
limit). The item to be displayed differs according to
the version of Acrobat selected in Compatibility in
step 4.
File Format - Detail
Printing Allowed
Not Allowed
Changes Allowed
Not Allowed
Copying of Text/Images/Others
Disable
Enable
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
The table below shows the available settings.
Item
Detail
Not Allowed
Make the printing of PDF file impossible
Allowed (Low Resolution only)*
Can print the PDF file only in low resolution
Allowed
Can print the PDF file in original resolution
*
Only displayed when [Acrobat 5.0 and later] is selected in Compatibility.
12 Press [
] of Changes Allowed, and select the
item (the scope of limit). The item to be displayed
differs according to the version of Acrobat selected
in Compatibility in step 4.
The table below shows the available settings.
Item
Detail
Not Allowed
Cannot change the PDF file
Inserting/Deleting/Rotating Pages*
Can only insert, delete, and rotate the pages of the
PDF file
Commenting
Can only add commenting
Page Layout except extracting
Pages**
Can change the page layout except extracting the
pages of the PDF file
Any except extracting Pages
Can conduct all operations except extracting the pages
of the PDF file
*
**
Only displayed when [Acrobat 5.0 and later] is selected in Compatibility.
Only displayed when [Acrobat 3.0 and later] is selected in Compatibility.
13 From Copying of Text/Images/Others, select
[Disable] or [Enable].
6-17
6
Sending Functions
The table below shows the available settings.
Item
Detail
Disable
Prohibit the copying of text and objects on the PDF file.
Enable
Can copy text and objects on the PDF file.
14 Press [OK] three times to return to Orig./Sending
Data Format.
15 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
Original Image
Select the image quality suitable to the type of original.
The table below shows the quality options.
Item
Detail
Text+Photo
Text and photos together.
Photo
For photos taken with a camera.
Text*
Only text, no photos.
*
The for OCR setting can be turned on. When [On] is selected, scanning
produces an image that is suitable for OCR. This function is only available
for black and white mode.
Use the procedures below to select the quality when sending scanned originals.
Destination
Original Image
Text+Photo
1
Press the Send key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Color/Image Quality] and then [Original
Image].
4
Select the original image.
5
Press [OK].
6
Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
Select original image type
for best results.
Photo
Text
Original
Zoom
Send
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Preview
Add Shortcut
Status
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
6-18
Sending Functions
Density
Use the procedure below to adjust the density when scanning the originals.
You can adjust density using 13 levels.
The procedures for adjusting the density is explained below.
Destination
1
Press the Send key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Color/Image Quality] and then [Density].
4
Press [-3] to [+3] (Lighter - Darker) to adjust
density.
5
Press [OK].
6
Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
Density
Auto
Lighter
-3
Original
Zoom
Send
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Normal
-2.5
0
-1
-2
-1.5
-0.5
Darker
+1
+0.5
+2
+1.5
+3
+2.5
Preview
Add Shortcut
Status
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
6-19
6
Sending Functions
Scan Resolution
Select the fineness of scanning resolution. The finer the scanning becomes (the larger the number becomes),
the better the image quality becomes. However, better resolution also results in larger file size (file capacity) and
longer scanning and sending times. The selectable resolution is 200x100dpi Normal, 200x200dpi Fine,
200x400dpi Super Fine, 300x300dpi, 400x400dpi Ultra Fine, or 600x600dpi.
The procedures for adjusting the scanning resolution when sending a scanned image is explained below.
Destination
Scan Resolution
1
Press the Send key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Color/Image Quality] and then [Scan
Resolution].
4
Select the resolution.
5
Press [OK].
6
Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
Select fineness of scanning resolution.
The larger the number, the better the
image resolution.
Original
Zoom
Send
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Preview
Add Shortcut
Status
600x600dpi
400x400dpi
Ultra Fine
300x300dpi
200x400dpi
Super Fine
200x200dpi
Fine
200x100dpi
Normal
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
6-20
Sending Functions
Sharpness
Select the sharpness of the image outline.
The table below shows the available settings.
Item
All
Text/Fine Line
Detail
Sharpen
Emphasize the image outline.
Blur
Blur the image outline. Can weaken a Moire
effect (grids appearing as wavelike patterns
when scanning printed photos).
Normal
Make letters and lines appear sharper.
Only text and fine lines are emphasized.
Sharpen
Use the procedure below to set the sharpness when sending scanned images.
Destination
1
Press the Send key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Color/Image Quality] and then [Sharpness].
4
Press [All] or [Text/Fine Line].
5
When [All] is selected, press [-3] to [+3] (Blur Sharpen) to adjust the sharpness.
Sharpness
When [Text/Fine Line] is selected, press [0] to [3]
(Normal - Sharpen) to adjust the sharpness.
All
Sharpness
Text/Fine Line
Blur
-3
Original
Zoom
Send
Sharpen
-2
-1
0
1
2
3
6
Press [OK].
7
Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Preview
Add Shortcut
Status
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
6-21
6
Sending Functions
Background Density Adj.
Remove dark background from originals, such as newspapers. The smaller the number becomes lighter the
background becomes. If the ground color is obtrusive, select [Auto]. If [Auto] does not remove the ground color,
select [Manual] and adjust the density of the ground color.
Use the procedure below to set the background density when sending scanned images.
Destination
1
Press the Send key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Color/Image Quality] and then [Background
Density Adj.].
4
Press [Auto] or [Manual].
5
When [Manual] is selected, press [1] to [5] (Lighter
- Darker) to adjust the background density.
6
Press [OK].
7
Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
Background Density Adj.
Off
Background
Lighter
Darker
Auto
Manual
Original
Zoom
Send
1
2
3
4
5
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Preview
Add Shortcut
Status
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
6-22
Sending Functions
Color Selection
This feature allows you to select the color mode used for scanning when sending images. You can select from
Auto Color (Color/Gray), Auto Color (Color/B & W), Full Color, Grayscale or Black & White.
Use the procedure below to select the color mode when sending scanned images.
Destination
Color Selection
1
Press the Send key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Color/Image Quality] and then [Color
Selection].
4
Select the color mode to be used for scanning.
5
Press [OK].
6
Select scanning color.
Use [Auto Color] to automatically produce color originals
in full color and black & white originals in black & white.
Original
Zoom
Send
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Auto Color
(Color/Gray)
Auto Color
(Color/B & W)
Full Color
Grayscale
Black & White
Preview
Add Shortcut
Status
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
6
6-23
Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
Sending Functions
Continuous Scan
When the multi-page originals cannot be placed in the document processor at one time, the originals can be
scanned in separate batches and then sent as one job. With this function, originals can be scanned one after
another until you press [Finish Scan].
Any of the following settings can be changed during scanning.
•
Original Size
•
Original Orientation
•
2-sided/Book Original
•
Density
•
Original Image
•
Scan Resolution
•
Color Selection
•
Sending Size
•
Zoom
•
Border Erase
•
Prevent Bleed-thru
•
FAX TX Resolution (For details, refer to Fax System (V) Operation Guide.)
The procedure for using continuous scanning when sending scanned images is explained below.
Destination
Continuous Scan
1
Press the Send key.
2
Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Continuous
Scan].
3
Press [On]. Continuous Scan is selected.
4
Press [OK].
5
Specify the destination.
6
Place the original, and press the Start key.
Scan a large number of originals
in separate batches and then produce
as one job.
*Settings can be changed during scanning.
Original
Zoom
Send
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Off
On
Preview
Add Shortcut
Status
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
When the scanning is completed, change the
settings as necessary.
7
Place the next original, and press the Start key. Scan
the remaining originals by the same procedure.
When you have scanned all the originals, press
[Finish Scan] to start sending.
6-24
Sending Functions
Prevent Bleed-thru
Hide background colors and image bleed-through when scanning thin originals.
Use the procedure below to set the prevent bleed-thru when sending scanned images.
Destination
Prevent Bleed-thru
1
Press the Send key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Color/Image Quality] and then press
[Prevent Bleed-thru].
4
Press [On]. Prevent Bleed-thru is selected.
5
Press [OK].
Hide background colors and image bleed-through
when scanning thin original.
Original
Zoom
Send
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Off
6
On
Preview
Add Shortcut
Status
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
6
6-25
Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
Sending Functions
Border Erase
Use Border Erase to remove black shadows that appear around the outside of the original when scanning and
sending originals. The following options can be selected.
Border Erase Sheet
Erases black borders around the single sheet original.
Original
Copy
Border Erase Book
Erases black borders around the edges and in the
middle of the original such as a thick book. You can
specify the widths individually to erase the borders
around the edges and in the center of the book.
Original
Copy
Individual Border Erase
Specify border erase widths individually for all edges.
Original
Copy
In each option, the available ranges are as below.
Input units
Border Erase Range
Inch models
0 to 2" (in 0.01" increments)
Metric models
0 mm to 50 mm (in 1-mm increments)
6-26
Sending Functions
Border Erase to Back Page
When scanning a 2-sided original, this allows you to erase the borders on the back of the original. The table
below shows the available settings.
Item
Detail
Same as Front
Page
Border Erase performed using the same setting as the
front page
Do Not Erase
No Border Erase performed on the back page
Use the procedure below to erase borders when sending scanned originals.
Destination
1
Press the Send key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Border Erase].
4
Press [Border Erase Sheet] to erase borders for an
individual sheet or [Border Erase Book] to erase
borders for a book.
Border Erase
Border
Off
(0 - 50)
6
mm
Use [+] or [-] to enter the width in Border or Gutter.
Press [# Keys] to use the number keys for entry.
Border Erase
Sheet
Border Erase
Book
Original
Zoom
Send
# Keys
Gutter
Back Page
(0 - 50)
6
Individual
Border Erase
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Same as
Front Page
mm
# Keys
Preview
Add Shortcut
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
Press [Individual Border Erase] to select the
individual border erase.
Destination
Border Erase
(0 - 50)
Off
Original
Zoom
Send
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Preview
Add Shortcut
Status
Top
6
Border Erase
Sheet
Bottom
6
Border Erase
Book
Left
6
Individual
Border Erase
Right
6
Use [+] or [-] to enter the border width or press [#
Keys] and enter the width using the numeric keys.
mm
mm
mm
Same as
Front Page
Press [Original Orientation] to select the original
orientation from either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top
Edge on Left], and press [OK].
Back Page
mm
Top Edge
on Top
# Keys
Cancel
Original
Orientation
For 2-sided originals, press [Back Page] and then
press [Same as Front Page] or [Do Not Erase].
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
5
Press [OK].
6
Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
6-27
6
Sending Functions
File Name Entry
This setting allows you to assign a document name to scanned images. A job number and the date and time can
be added. You can specify a default for the document name.
Use the procedure below to assign names to scanned documents that you are sending.
Destination
1
Press the Send key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Advanced Setup] and then [File Name
Entry].
4
Press [File Name].
5
Enter the document name, and press [OK].
File Name Entry
Add a file name.
Additional information such as Job No.
and Date and Time can also be set.
File Name
Additional Info
doc
[ Date and Time ]
Job No.
Add Shortcut
Status
Date and Time
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
NOTE: Up to 32 characters can be entered for the
document name.
6
Press [Job No.] to enter the job No., and [Date and
Time] to enter the date and time.
7
Press [OK].
8
Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
6-28
Sending Functions
E-mail Subject/Body
When sending E-mail, enter the subject and body of the E-mail.
Use the procedure below to enter the subject and body for an E-mail message and then send the E-mail.
Destination
E-mail Subject/Body
1
Press the Send key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Advanced Setup] and then [E-mail Subject/
Body].
4
Press [Subject].
5
Enter the subject, and press [OK].
Subject
Body
NOTE: Up to 60 characters can be entered for the
subject.
Original
Zoom
Send
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Template
Body 1
Body 2
Body 3
6
Press [Body].
7
Enter the body and press [OK].
Preview
Add Shortcut
Status
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
NOTE: Up to 500 characters can be entered for the
body.
8
You can press [Body 1], [Body 2], or [Body 3] to
enter stored text for the body text.
NOTE: For details on registering templates, refer to
E-mail Subject/Body on page 9-29.
9
Press [OK].
10 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
6-29
6
Sending Functions
WSD Scan/DSM Scan
WSD Scan (Windows 7, Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008)
WSD Scan saves images of originals scanned on this machine as files on a WSD-compatible computer.
NOTE: To use WSD Scan, confirm that the computer used for WSD scanning and the machine is networkconnected, and WSD Scan (page 9-102) is set to On in the network settings. For information on operating the
computer, refer to the computer’s help or the operation guide of your software.
Installing Driver Software (for Windows 7)
1
Click Start and then Network in the computer.
2
Right-click the machine’s icon (Brand Name:
XXX:XXX) and then click Install.
NOTE: If the User Account Control window appears,
click Continue.
If the Found New Hardware window appears, click
Cancel.
3
During the installation, double-click the icon shown
on the task bar to display the Driver Software
Installation screen. When Your devices are
ready to use is displayed on the Driver Software
Installation screen, the installation is completed.
1
Press the Send Key.
Procedure Using this machine
Displays the screen for sending.
NOTE: Depending on the settings, the address book
screen may appear. In this event, press [Cancel] to
display the screen for sending.
2
Place the originals in the document processor or on
the platen.
3
Press [WSD Scan/DSM Scan].
4
Press [From Operation Panel] and press [Next].
6-30
Sending Functions
5
WSD Scan - Selecting Computer
Select the destination computer and press [OK].
Select the destination computer and press [OK].
Press [Reload] to reload the computer list.
Reload
Computer Name
You can view information on the selected computer
by pressing [Detail].
pc000101
pc000102
pc000103
1/1
Detail
pc000104
pc000105
Cancel
Status
Back
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
6
Select the type of originals, file format, etc., as
necessary.
7
Press the Start key. Sending begins and the
software installed on the computer is activated.
1
Press the Send Key.
Procedure Using WSD Scan from Your Computer
The send screen appears.
NOTE: Depending on the settings, the address book
screen may appear. In this event, press [Cancel] to
display the screen for sending.
2
Place the originals in the document processor or on
the platen.
3
Press [WSD Scan/DSM Scan].
4
Press [From Computer] and press [Next].
5
Use the software installed on the computer to send
the images.
6-31
6
Sending Functions
DSM Scan (Windows Server 2008 R2 Only)
A scanned document can be automatically saved in any format or sent to any destination by reading a
ScanProcess from Active Directory.
NOTE:
•
•
If you are performing DSM scan, check the items below.
• The machine is connected to an Active Directory on the network that the Scan Process can reference.
• DSM Scan and LDAP are set to [On] in Protocol Detail (page 9-100) in Network.
• SSL is set to [On] in Secure Protocol (page 9-103) in Network.
• [Network Authentication] is set in User Login (page 10-2) in User Login Setting.
If the Active Directory that the Scan Process can reference is not on the network authentication server,
DSM must be set in Embedded Web Server RX. For details, refer to the Embedded Web Server RX
Operation Guide.
1
Press the Send Key.
Displays the screen for sending.
NOTE: Depending on the settings, the address book
screen may appear. In this event, press [Cancel] to
display the screen for sending.
2
Place the originals in the document processor or on
the platen.
3
Press [WSD Scan/DSM Scan].
If WSD Scan (page 9-102) is set to [Off] in the
network settings, press [DSM Scan] and go to step 5
DSM Scan - Selecting Scan Process
4
Press [DSM Scan] and press [Next].
5
Select the ScanProcess to be used and press [OK].
Select the scan process and press [OK].
Press [Reload] to reload the ScanProcess list.
Reload
Scan Process Name
To check the settings, press [Detail].
ScanProcess001
ScanProcess002
ScanProcess003
1/1
Detail
ScanProcess004
ScanProcess005
Cancel
Status
Back
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
6
Change the settings and add destinations as needed.
Only e-mail addresses can be added as destinations.
In the send base screen, press [Detail/Edit],
[Destination], and then [Address Book] or [E-mail
Addr Entry], and add a destination.
In some Scan Processes, it may not be possible to
change settings or add destinations.
7
6-32
Press the Start key. Sending begins.
Sending Functions
Scanning using TWAIN
This section explains how to scan an original using TWAIN. The machine’s TWAIN/WIA can be used for two
types of scanning: scanning a document placed in the machine, and scanning a document that has been stored
in a custom box.
The procedure for scanning using the TWAIN driver is explained as an example. The WIA driver is used in the
same way.
Scanning a document placed in the machine
1
Activate the TWAIN compatible application.
2
Select the machine using the application and
display the TWAIN dialog box.
NOTE: For selecting the machine, see the Operation
Guide or Help for each application software.
3
Select scanning settings in the TWAIN dialog box
that opens.
The settings that appear in the TWAIN dialog box are as follows.
Item
Original
Configurations
Detail
Original Size
Select the scan size of the original.
Original
Orientation
Specify the type of binding.
Send
Configurations
Duplex Setting
Specify whether the original is one-sided or two-sided.
Image Quality
Configurations
Color Setting
Select the color mode.
Resolution
Select the resolution.
Image Quality
Select the image quality according to the type of original.
Density
Select the exposure.
Prevent Bleed-thru
Hide background colors and image bleed-through when
scanning thin originals.
Image Quality
Settings
6-33
6
Sending Functions
Item
Configuration
Detail
This is used to check current settings and store frequently used
settings. When the Configuration button is clicked, a setting
screen opens with buttons for Details, Add current
configuration, and Delete selected configuration.
Details
Current settings can be checked.
Add current
configuration
Save current settings with a name and comment.
Delete selected
configuration
Delete saved settings.
4
Place the originals on the platen or in the document
processor.
5
Click the Scan button.
The document data is scanned.
Scanning a document stored in a custom box
NOTE: To scan a document stored in a custom box, select a model name with (Box) from Model in the TWAIN
driver settings screen.
1
Activate the TWAIN compatible application.
2
Select the machine using the application and
display the TWAIN dialog box.
NOTE: For selecting the machine, see the Operation
Guide or Help for each application software.
3
6-34
Select the Custom Box containing the document
file to be scanned from the Box List. If a password
has been set for the box, the password entry
screen appears. Enter the password and click the
OK button. When you select a box, the document
files in the Custom Box appear in the Document
List.
Sending Functions
4
Item
Set how to display the document data. Click the
Setting button to select each item.
Detail
View
Change the display in the Document List field to List or Thumbnails.
Delete
After scanning the document data, delete the data from the Custom Box.
Invert
Invert the document data color to start scanning.
5
Click the OK button.
6
Select the document data to be scanned from
Document List.
Enter the document data name in the Search
[Name] to find the data having the same document
data name or the document data name with the
same beginning.
7
Click the Detail button to display the selected
document data. When the document data includes
multiple pages, select the checkbox beside the
pages you want to scan. The selected pages will be
scanned.
NOTE: In this case, the scanned page or the selected
document data will not be deleted from the Custom
Box.
8
6-35
Click the Acquire button. The document data is
scanned.
6
Sending Functions
Job Finish Notice
Sends a notice by e-mail when a job is completed. Users can be notified of the completion of a job while working
at a remote desk, saving the time spent waiting beside the machine to finish.
NOTE: The user’s PC should be configured in advance so that E-mail can be used. For details, refer to
Embedded Web Server RX (Settings for E-mail) on page 2-24.
E-mail can be sent to a single destination.
Use the procedure below to specify the Job Finish Notice settings.
1 Press the Send key.
Destination
2
3
Place the originals on the platen.
4
To select the destination from the address book,
press [Address Book] on the left of the screen and
then press [Address Book] in the next screen.
Job Finish Notice
Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Job Finish
Notice].
Off
Destination
Address
Book
Select the destination to be notified, then press
[OK].
Detail
Address
Entry
Detail
Add Shortcut
You can view information on the notification
destination by pressing [Detail].
Address Book
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
5
Specify the destination to send the finish notice,
and press [OK].
NOTE: For the procedure to select the destination
from the Address Book, refer Specifying Destination on
page 3-40.
Destination
6
To directly enter the address, press [Address Entry]
and then [E-mail Address].
7
8
9
Enter the E-mail address, and press [OK].
Job Finish Notice
Off
Address
Book
E-mail
Address
Address
Entry
Add Shortcut
Status
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
Press [OK].
Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
When the sending is completed, the finish notice is
sent to the specified E-mail address.
6-36
Sending Functions
Send and Print
When you send originals, this feature allows you to print a copy of the document being sent.
The procedure for using Send and Print is explained below.
1
Press the Send key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Send and Print].
4
Press [On].
5
Press [OK].
6
Specify the destination and press the Start key.
Transmission begins and a copy of the transmitted
document is printed.
Send and Store
When you send originals, this feature allows you to store a copy of the document being sent in a Custom Box.
The procedure for using Send and Store is explained below.
Destination
Send and Store
1
Press the Send key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Advanced Setup], [
Store].
4
Press [On].
5
Select the Custom Box in which the copy is to be
stored.
Custom Box
Off
No.
Name
0006
Box
6MB
0007
Box
4MB
0008
Box
8MB
0009
Box
4MB
0010
Box
2MB
Used
On
Add Shortcut
Status
], and then [Send and
Cancel
If a password entry screen for the Custom Box
appears, enter the password.
2/2
You can view information on the selected Custom
Box by pressing [Detail].
Detail
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
6
Press [OK].
7
Specify the destination and press the Start key.
Transmission begins and a copy of the transmitted
document is stored in the specified Custom Box.
6-37
6
Sending Functions
FTP Encrypted TX
This allows you to encrypt documents when you send them. If you select [On] in this option, you can then select
the encryption method in the basic send screen.
Use the procedure below to scan and send originals as encrypted files.
1
Press the Send Key.
2
Place the originals in the document processor or on
the platen.
3
Press [Advanced Setup], [
Encrypted TX].
4
Press [On].
5
Press [OK].
], and then [FTP
NOTE: You can only change the settings by logging in
with administrator privileges.
Refer to Adding a User (Local User List) on page 10-5
for the default login user name and password.
Click Settings -> Advanced -> Secure Protocols in the
Embedded Web Server RX. Be sure that SSL of
Secure Protocol Settings is On and one or more
effective encryption are selected in Clientside
Settings. For details, refer to the Embedded Web
Server RX Operation Guide.
6-38
Sending Functions
Text Stamp
When sending, you can display a text stamp on the originals.
NOTE: This cannot be set when Text Stamp is set in the system settings. For details, see Sending Jobs on
page 9-34.
The items that may be configured are as follows.
Item
Detail
Position
Selectable positions are [Top Left], [Top Middle], [Top Right],
[Middle Left], [Center], [Middle Right], [Bottom Left], [Bottom
Middle], and [Bottom Right].
Font
*
Size
Set the font size of the printed text stamp.*
Style
Set the font style of the printed text stamp. [Bold] or [Italic] can
be set.
Font
Set the font of the printed text stamp. [Courier] or [Letter Gothic]
can be set.
Color
Set the color of the printed text stamp. [Black], [Cyan],
[Magenta], [Yellow], [Red], [Green], or [Blue] can be set.
Density
Set the density of the color of the printed text stamp.
Display
Pattern
Set the display method of the printed text stamp. [Transparent],
[Clipping], or [Overwrite] can be selected.
Registered font sizes are displayed. For details on registering font sizes, refer to System Stamp on
page 9-30.
Use the procedure below to specify the Text Stamp settings.
Copies
Text Stamp
1
Press the Send key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Advanced Setup] and then press [Text
Stamp].
4
Press [On].
5
Press [Keyboard] and enter the text string to be
displayed, or select a text stamp from the displayed
templates.
Stamp
Off
Keyboard
On
URGENT
COPY
Top
Left
Position
Add Shortcut
Status
9 pt
Black
Font
Cancel
Top Edge
on Top
Original
Orientation
NOTE: Templates that have been set will appear. For
details on registering templates, refer to System
Stamp on page 9-30.
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
6
6-39
Press [Position] and select the position of the text
stamp.
6
Sending Functions
7
Press [Font] and select font and display settings for
the text stamp.
8
Press [Original Orientation] to choose the
orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top]
or [Top Edge on Left]. Then press [OK].
9
Press [OK].
10 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
Bates Stamp
When sending, you can display a Bates stamp on the originals.
NOTE: This cannot be set when Bates Stamp is set in the system settings. For details, see Sending Jobs on
page 9-34.
The items that may be configured are as follows.
Item
Position
Font
*
Detail
Selectable positions are [Top Left], [Top Middle], [Top Right],
[Middle Left], [Center], [Middle Right], [Bottom Left], [Bottom
Middle], and [Bottom Right].
Size
Set the font size of the printed bates stamp.*
Style
Set the font style of the printed bates stamp. [Bold] or [Italic] can
be set.
Font
Set the font of the printed bates stamp. [Courier] or [Letter
Gothic] can be set.
Color
Set the color of the printed bates stamp. [Black], [Cyan],
[Magenta], [Yellow], [Red], [Green], or [Blue] can be set.
Density
Set the density of the color of the printed bates stamp.
Display
Pattern
Set the display method of the printed bates stamp.
[Transparent], [Clipping], or [Overwrite] can be selected.
Registered font sizes are displayed. For details on registering font sizes, refer to System Stamp on
page 9-30.
6-40
Sending Functions
Use the procedure below to specify the Bates Stamp settings.
Copies
Bates Stamp
Stamp
Off
[Date]
On
Date
User Name
Serial Number
Numbering
Text 1
Text 2
Change
Text 2
Top Left
1
Numbering
Default
Add Shortcut
Press the Send key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Advanced Setup] and then press [Bates
Stamp].
4
Press [On].
5
Press [Date], [User Name], [Serial Number],
[Numbering], [Text 1], or [Text 2], and set additional
information to be displayed with the stamp.
1/6
Text 1
Status
1
Position
Delete
Change
9 pt
Black
Font
Cancel
If you selected [Text 1] or [Text 2], press [Change]
below it and enter the text string to be displayed.
Date Format
Top Edge
on Top
If you selected [Date], press [Date Format] and
select [MM/DD/YYYY], [DD/MM/YYYY], or [YYYY/
MM/DD] to set the date format.
Original
Orientation
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
If you selected [Numbering], press [Numbering
Default] and set the starting sequence number (1 to
9999999).
6
Press [Position] and select the position of the text
stamp.
7
Press [Font] and select font and display settings for
the text stamp.
8
Press [Original Orientation] to choose the
orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top]
or [Top Edge on Left]. Then press [OK].
9
Press [OK].
10 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
6-41
6
Sending Functions
Color Type
This sets the color type when you send color documents. The table below shows the available settings.
Item
Detail
RGB
Send color document in RGB.
sRGB
Match the color reproduction space between sRGB compatible systems.
Selecting RGB displays the color profile values set on the machine.
Send - Color Type
Specify the color type to send color images.
RGB
1
Press System Menu key.
2
Press [Send] and [Change] of Color Type.
3
Select [RGB] or [sRGB].
4
Press [OK].
Profile:
RGB FINE 1
sRGB
Cancel
Status
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
6-42
Sending Functions
Scanning with FMU Connection
"FMU Connection" is installed on the machine as a standard application. FMU Connection can be used to scan an
original according to the settings configured with "File Management Utility" on the provided DVD, and save the
image data and scanning information on a specified server or in a specified folder. Unlike regular transmission
functions, this application lets you use metadata such as the scan date and time and the data format.
NOTE: The first time you use FMU Connection, you must enable it in the system menu. For details, see
Application on page 9-92.
To use FMU Connection, you must install File Management Utility on your computer and configure settings for
the multifunction machine to be used, scanning conditions, and the file save location. To install File Management
Utility, refer to Installing Software on page 2-16.
For information on using File Management Utility, see File Management Utility User Guide on the DVD.
6
Using FMU Connection to scan an original
1
Make sure that File Management Utility is running
on the computer (or server) on which File
Management Utility is installed.
2
Place the original.
3
Press the Application key.
The application list appears.
4
Press [FMU Connection].
FMU Connection starts.
5
Follow the on-screen instructions to enter the
necessary information and press [Next].
6
When the scan settings screen appears, press
each item and configure the necessary settings.
The features that can be set depend on File
Management Utility.
7
Press the Start key.
Transmission starts.
6-43
Sending Functions
6-44
7 Document Box
This chapter explains the typical procedure for utilizing Document Box.
•
•
•
•
•
Using a Custom Box ...........................................................................7-2
Job Box .............................................................................................7-14
Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory..................7-22
Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB) .........................7-24
Removing USB Memory ...................................................................7-26
7-1
Document Box
Using a Custom Box
NOTE: In the following explanation, it is assumed that user login administration is enabled. For details on User
Logon privileges, refer to User Privileges on page 3-50.
Creating a New Custom Box (Add/Edit Box)
Use the procedure below to create a new box in the user box.
No.
0001
Name
Owner
SALES
1
Press the Document Box key.
2
Press [Custom Box] and then [Add/Edit Box].
3
Press [Add].
4
Press [Change] for each item, enter the information
and then press [OK].
Used
Anonymous
----
Search(Name)
Search(No.)
1/1
Store File
Custom Box
Job Box
Detail
Removable
Memory
Add/Edit Box
Open
FAX Box
Program
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
The table below lists the items to be set.
Item
Detail
Box No.
Enter the box number by pressing [-, +] or number keys.
The box number can be from 0001 to 1000. A Custom Box should have a unique
number. If you enter 0000, the smallest number available will be automatically
assigned.
Box Name
Enter a box name consisting of up to 32 characters.
Refer to the Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for details on entering
characters.
Box Password
User access to the box can be restricted by specifying a password to protect the
box. Entering a password is not mandatory.
Enter the same password of up to 16 characters in both [Password] and [Confirm
Password].
Usage Restriction
To preserve the hard disk capacity, the storage capacity for a box can be restricted.
To enable a capacity restriction enter a value for the storage capacity of the Custom
Box in megabytes by pressing [-, +] or number keys.
You can enter a limit between 1 and 30,000. (Changes according to the number of
created custom boxes.)
7-2
Document Box
Item
Detail
Auto File Deletion
Automatically deletes stored documents after a set period of time.
Press [On] to enable automatic deletion and then use [+] and [-] or the numeric keys
to enter the number of days for which documents are stored.
You can enter any number between 1 and 31 day(s). To disable automatic file
deletion, press [Off].
Overwrite Setting
Specifies whether or not old stored documents are overwritten when new
documents are stored.
To overwrite old documents, press [Permit].
To retain old documents, press [Prohibit].
Delete after
Printed
Automatically delete a document from the box once printing is complete. To delete
the document, press [On]. To retain the document, press [Off].
NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, "Owner"
and "Permission" are also displayed. Refer to Creating
new Custom Boxes when user login administration is
enabled on page 3-51.
5
Check the details you have entered and then press
[Add]. The Custom Box is created.
Setting the document deletion time
Sets the time when documents stored in a custom box are deleted.
The procedure for using Auto File Deletion Time is explained below.
Document Box/Removable Memory - Auto File Deletion Time
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Document Box/Removable Memory], [Next]
of Custom Box, [Next] of Default Setting and then
[Change] of Auto File Deletion Time.
3
Set the time at which the document is deleted by
pressing [+], [-]. Press [# Keys] to enter the time
directly using the numeric keys.
4
Press [OK]. The time for document deletion is set.
Set the time to automatically delete stored documents.
Minute
Hour
21
# Keys
30
# Keys
Cancel
Status
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
7-3
7
Document Box
Storing Documents (Store File)
The procedure for storing documents in a custom box is explained below.
No.
0001
Name
Owner
SALES
1
2
Press the Document Box key.
3
Press [Custom Box], select the box where the
document will be stored and then press [Store File].
4
Select the type of originals, scanning density, etc.,
as necessary.
Place the originals in the document processor or on
the platen.
Used
Anonymous
----
Search(Name)
Search(No.)
1/1
Store File
Custom Box
Job Box
Detail
Removable
Memory
Add/Edit Box
Open
FAX Box
Program
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
For the features that can be selected, refer to
Document Store features on page 7-4.
5
Press the Start key. The original is scanned and the
data is stored in the specified Custom Box.
NOTE: Enter up to 64 characters as the file name.
Document Store features
The features below can be selected when saving a document.
• Original Size (page 6-2)
• Density (page 6-19)
• Mixed Size Originals (page 6-8)
• Original Image (page 6-18)
• Zoom (page 6-6)
• Centering (page 6-7)
• 2-sided/Book Original (page 6-11) • Scan Resolution (page 6-20)
• Border Erase (page 6-26)
• Original Orientation (page 6-12)
• Color Selection (page 6-23)
• Continuous Scan (page 6-24)
• Storing Size (page 7-4)
• Sharpness (page 6-21)
• Job Finish Notice (page 6-36)
• Prevent Bleed-thru (page 6-25)
• Background Density Adj.
(page 6-22)
• File Name Entry (page 6-28)
Storing Size
Select size of image to be stored.
Item
Description
Same as Original Size
Store an image the same size as the original.
Metric
Select from A3, A4, A5, A6, B4, B5, B6, Folio or 216 × 340 mm.
inch
Select from Ledger, Letter, Legal, Statement, 11 × 15" or Oficio II.
Others
Select from 8K, 16K, Hagaki or Oufuku hagaki.
7-4
Document Box
Printing Documents (Print)
The procedure for printing documents in a custom box is explained below.
1
Press the Document Box key.
2
Press [Custom Box], select the box containing the
document you want to print and press [Open].
NOTE: If a custom box is protected by a password,
enter the correct password.
3
Box:
File Name
Date and Time
Select the document you wish to print by checking
the checkbox.
Size
0001
2008101010574501
2010/10/10 09:40
21 MB
0002
2008101010574511
2010/10/10 09:50
21 MB
0003
2008101010574521
2010/10/10 10:00
21 MB
The document is marked with a checkmark.
Search(Name)
NOTE: To deselect, press the checkbox again and
1/1
Detail
remove the checkmark.
Preview
Print
Send
Join
Move/Copy
Delete
Store File
4
Press [Print].
5
Set the paper selection, duplex printing, etc., as
desired.
Close
Status
10/10/2010 10:10
For the features that can be selected, refer to
Document print features on page 7-6.
If a document stored from a computer is selected,
the print settings selection screen appears.
•
To use the settings used at the time of printing
(when the document was saved), press [Print
As Is]. Press [Start Print] to start printing.
•
To change the print settings, press [Print after
Change Settings] and change the print settings.
After a document saved in the machine is selected,
the [User File Settings] key may appear in the
setting screen for the feature to be used.
6
7-5
•
To use the settings saved with the document,
press [User File Settings].
•
If you need to change the print settings, change
the print settings.
Press the Start key. Printing of the selected
document begins.
7
Document Box
Document print features
The features below can be selected when printing a document.
• Paper Selection (page 4-3)
• Page # (page 4-24)
• Hue Adjustment (page 4-36)
• Collate/Offset (page 3-15)
• Job Finish Notice (page 4-46)
• One-touch Image Adjust
(page 4-37)
• Staple (page 3-19)
• File Name Entry (page 4-48)
• Saturation (page 4-41)
• Punch (page 3-21)
• Delete after Printed (page 7-2)
• Density (page 3-9)
• Paper Output (page 4-13)
• Priority Override (page 4-48)
• Original Image (page 3-10)
• Combine (page 4-14)
• EcoPrint (page 4-34)
• Color Selection (page 6-23)
• Margin/Centering (page 4-16)
• Zoom (page 6-6)
• Sharpness (page 4-39)
• Booklet (page 4-20)
• Fold (page 4-11)
• Background Density Adj.
(page 4-40)
• Duplex (page 3-13)
• Text Stamp (page 4-31)
• Prevent Bleed-thru (page 4-42)
• Cover (page 4-22)
• Bates Stamp (page 4-32)
• Form Overlay (page 7-9)
• Color Balance (page 4-35)
7-6
Document Box
Sending Documents (Send)
The procedure for sending documents in a custom box is explained below.
1
Press the Document Box key.
2
Press [Custom Box], select the box containing the
document you want to send and press [Open].
NOTE: If a custom box is protected by a password,
enter the correct password.
3
Box:
File Name
Date and Time
Size
0001
2008101010574501
2010/10/10 09:40
21 MB
0002
2008101010574511
2010/10/10 09:50
21 MB
0003
2008101010574521
2010/10/10 10:00
21 MB
NOTE: You cannot select and send multiple documents.
Detail
Preview
Send
Join
Move/Copy
Delete
To deselect, press the checkbox again and remove the
checkmark.
Store File
Close
Status
The document is marked with a checkmark.
Search(Name)
1/1
Print
Select the document you wish to send by checking
the checkbox.
4
Press [Send].
10/10/2010 10:10
The screen for sending appears.
NOTE: Depending on the settings, the address book
screen may appear.
5
Set the destination.
NOTE: For more information on selecting destinations,
refer to Specifying Destination on page 3-40.
6
Set the sending size, original image, etc., as
desired.
For the features that can be selected, refer to
Document send features on page 7-8.
7
7-7
Press the Start key. Sending of the selected
document begins.
7
Document Box
Document send features
The features below can be selected when sending a document.
• Sending Size (page 6-4)
• i-FAX Subject/Body
(refer to Fax Operation Guide)
• Original Image (page 6-18)
• File Format (page 6-14)
• FTP Encrypted TX (page 6-38)
• Resolution (page 6-18)
• FAX TX Resolution
(refer to Fax Operation Guide)
• Delete after Transmitted
(page 7-8)
• Color Selection (page 6-23)
• Centering (page 6-7)
• Zoom (page 6-6)
• Sharpness (page 6-21)
• FAX Delayed Transmission
(refer to Fax Operation Guide)
• File Separation (page 6-15)
• Background Density Adj.
(page 6-22)
• Job Finish Notice (page 6-36)
• Text Stamp (page 6-39)
• Prevent Bleed-thru
(page 6-25)
• File Name Entry (page 6-28)
• Bates Stamp (page 6-40)
• E-mail Subject/Body (page 6-29) • Density (page 6-19)
Delete after Transmitted
After the document is sent, the document is deleted from the document box.
7-8
Document Box
Form Overlay from Custom Boxes (Form Overlay)
This function allows you to retrieve images (image files), overlay them into documents stored in custom boxes
and then print the results.
Use the procedure below.
1
Press the Document Box key.
2
Press [Custom Box], select the box containing the
document you want to overlay the image into and
print, and then press [Open].
NOTE: If a custom box is protected by a password,
enter the correct password.
3
Box:
File Name
Date and Time
Select the document you wish to print by checking
the checkbox.
Size
0001
2008101010574501
2010/10/10 09:40
21 MB
0002
2008101010574511
2010/10/10 09:50
21 MB
0003
2008101010574521
2010/10/10 10:00
21 MB
The document is marked with a checkmark.
Search(Name)
NOTE: To deselect, press the checkbox again and
1/1
Detail
remove the checkmark.
Preview
Print
Send
Join
Move/Copy
Delete
Store File
4
Press [Print].
5
Press [Functions], [Form Overlay], [Select Stored
Form], and then [Select Form].
Close
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
Copies
Form Overlay
Off
Density
(10 - 30, 100)
30
%
NOTE: You can select the form density setting through
Select
Stored Form
Original
Zoom
Paper
4 levels from 10%, 20%, 30% or 100%. Press the [+] or
[-] buttons in Density.
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Form 1
Select
Form
Preview
Add Shortcut
Status
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
6
In Form Overlay - Select Form, select the image file
to be overlaid onto the document from the
displayed document boxes.
You can only select one image file.
7
Press [OK].
8
Press [OK] again to return to the Functions screen.
9
Press the Start key. Printing begins.
7-9
7
Document Box
Editing Documents
This function allows you to move or copy documents stored in custom boxes into other boxes or to join multiple
documents together. You can also copy documents to USB memory connected to this machine.
Moving a Document / Copying a Document (Move/Copy)
The procedure for moving or copying documents is explained below.
1
Press the Document Box key.
2
Press [Custom Box], select the box containing the
document you want to move or copy and press
[Open].
NOTE: If a custom box is protected by a password,
enter the correct password.
3
Box:
File Name
Date and Time
Select the document in the list that you want to
move or copy by pressing the checkbox.
Size
0001
2008101010574501
2010/10/10 09:40
21 MB
0002
2008101010574511
2010/10/10 09:50
21 MB
0003
2008101010574521
2010/10/10 10:00
21 MB
The document is marked with a checkmark.
Search(Name)
NOTE: To deselect, press the checkbox again and
1/1
Detail
remove the checkmark.
Preview
Print
Send
Join
Move/Copy
Delete
Store File
4
Press [Move/Copy].
5
To move the document, press [Move to Custom
Box].
Close
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
Move/Copy
To copy the document, press [Copy to Custom Box]
or [Copy to Memory].
Select the required operation and press [Next].
6
Copy to
Custom Box
Move to
Custom Box
Cancel
Status
Copy to
Memory
Back
Next
10/10/2010 10:10
7-10
Press [Next].
Document Box
7
To copy or move the document to a custom box,
select the destination box.
Move to Custom Box
To copy the document to USB memory, select the
destination folder and press [Next]. If necessary,
set the saved file size and the file format, etc.
Select the destination box and press [Move].
Document
No.
Name
Owner
Used
0001
Document1
Administrator
2 MB
0002
Document2
Administrator
3 MB
0003
Document3
Administrator
3 MB
0004
Document4
Administrator
5 MB
Cancel
Back
Up
8
Open
Press [Move] or [Copy] and then press [Yes] in the
confirmation screen. The selected document is
moved or copied.
Move
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
NOTE: If the box to which the document is to be
moved or copied is protected by a password, enter the
correct password.
Joining Documents (Join)
The procedure for joining documents in a custom box is explained below.
NOTE: You can only join a document to other documents in the same custom box. If necessary, move the
documents to be joined beforehand.
1
Press the Document Box key.
2
Press [Custom Box], select the box containing the
documents you want to join and press [Open].
NOTE: If a custom box is protected by a password,
enter the correct password.
3
Box:
File Name
Date and Time
Select the documents in the list that you wish to join
by pressing the checkbox.
Size
0001
2008101010574501
2010/10/10 09:40
21 MB
0002
2008101010574511
2010/10/10 09:50
21 MB
0003
2008101010574521
2010/10/10 10:00
21 MB
The document is marked with a checkmark.
Search(Name)
You can join up to 10 documents.
1/1
Detail
Print
Send
Join
Move/Copy
Delete
Preview
NOTE: To deselect, press the checkbox again and
Store File
remove the checkmark.
Close
Status
10/10/2010 10:10
4
7-11
Press [Join].
7
Document Box
5
Join
Confirm the order of documents to combine.
File Name
Date and Time
Highlight the document you want to rearrange and
press [Up] or [Down] to move it to the correct place
in the sequence.
Size
2008101010574501
2010/10/10 09:40
21 MB
2008101010574511
2010/10/10 09:50
21 MB
2008101010574521
2010/10/10 10:10
21 MB
Arrange the documents into the order in which they
are to be joined.
1/1
Up
6
Press [Next].
7
Press [File Name], enter the file name for the joined
document and press [OK].
Down
Cancel
Status
Next
10/10/2010 10:10
NOTE: Enter up to 64 characters as the file name.
8
Press [Join] and then press [Yes] in the
confirmation screen. The documents are joined.
NOTE: After joining, the original documents are left
unchanged. Delete the documents if they are no longer
needed.
7-12
Document Box
Deleting Documents
The procedure for deleting documents in a custom box is explained below.
1
Press the Document Box key.
2
Press [Custom Box], select the box containing the
document you want to delete and press [Open].
NOTE: If a custom box is protected by a password,
enter the correct password.
3
Box:
File Name
Date and Time
Size
0001
2008101010574501
2010/10/10 09:40
21 MB
0002
2008101010574511
2010/10/10 09:50
21 MB
0003
2008101010574521
2010/10/10 10:00
21 MB
Detail
Preview
Send
Join
Move/Copy
Delete
The document is marked with a checkmark.
Search(Name)
1/1
Print
Select the document you wish to delete by
checking the checkbox.
Store File
NOTE: [Delete] is disabled until a document is
selected.
To deselect, press the checkbox again and remove the
checkmark.
Close
Status
10/10/2010 10:10
4
Press [Delete]. The delete confirmation screen
appears.
5
Press [Yes]. The document is deleted.
7-13
7
Document Box
Job Box
Private Print/Stored Job
Private Print/Stored Job Box stores the print data which is printed by using the printer driver as a Private Print/
Stored Job.
Refer to the Printing System Driver User Guide on how to print a job as Private Print or Stored Job using the
printer driver.
Printing a Document in Private Print/Stored Job Box
You can print documents stored in a Private Print/Stored Job box.
Use the procedure below to print a document.
1
Press the Document Box key.
2
Press [Job Box].
3
Select [Private Print/Stored Job] and press [Open].
4
Select the creator of the document to print and
press [Open].
5
Select the document and press [Print].
6
If the document is protected by a password, enter
the password using the numeric keys.
7
8
Specify the number of copies to print as desired.
Private Print/Stored Job
User Name
Files
1 User
5
2 User
2
3 User
1
4 User
1
5 User
1
1/2
Open
Close
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
User:
File Name
Print
Date and Time
Size
1File
2010/10/10 09:40
21 MB
2File
2010/10/10 09:45
30 MB
3File
2010/10/10 09:50
36 MB
4File
2010/10/10 09:55
21 MB
5File
2010/10/10 10:00
30 MB
1/1
Detail
Delete
Close
Status
10/10/2010 10:10
Press [Start Print] to start printing.
Upon completion of printing, the Private Print job is
automatically deleted.
7-14
Document Box
Deleting a Document
You can delete documents stored in a Private Print/Stored Job box.
Use the procedure below to delete a document.
1
Press the Document Box key.
2
Press [Job Box].
3
Select [Private Print/Stored Job] and press [Open].
4
Select the creator of the document and press
[Open].
Private Print/Stored Job
User Name
Files
1 User
5
2 User
2
3 User
1
4 User
1
5 User
1
1/2
7
Open
Close
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
5
To delete the document, select the document and
press [Delete].
User:
File Name
Date and Time
2010/10/10 09:40
21 MB
2File
2010/10/10 09:45
30 MB
3File
2010/10/10 09:50
36 MB
4File
2010/10/10 09:55
21 MB
5File
2010/10/10 10:00
30 MB
Print
When the delete confirmation screen appears,
press [Yes].
Size
1File
If the document is protected by a password, enter
the password using the numeric keys and the
document is deleted.
1/1
Detail
Delete
Close
Status
10/10/2010 10:10
Quick Copy/Proof and Hold
Quick Copy/Proof and Hold box stores the print data which is printed by using the printer driver as a Quick Copy
or Proof and Hold Print job.
Refer to the Printing System Driver User Guide on how to print a job as Quick Copy or Proof and Hold Print job
using the printer driver.
Quick Copy Job Retention
To maintain free space on the hard disk, you can set the maximum number of stored jobs.
Use the procedure below to set the number of stored jobs.
1
7-15
Press the System Menu key.
Document Box
Document Box/Removable Memory - Quick Copy Job Retention
2
Press [Document Box/Removable Memory], [Next]
of Job Box, then [Change] of Quick Copy Job
Retention.
3
Press [+] or [–] to enter the maximum number of
stored jobs. You can enter any number between 0
and 50.
Set the maximum number of quick copy/proof print jobs to retain.
Use [-]/[+] or the numeric keys to enter a number.
*Set this number to 0 to not retain any jobs.
You can also enter the number using the numeric
keys.
(0 - 50)
32
job(s)
NOTE: If you enter a value of 0 (zero), you cannot use
the Repeat Copy function.
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
4
Press [OK]. The maximum number of stored jobs is
set.
Printing a Document
You can print documents stored in the Quick Copy/Proof and Hold box.
Use the procedure below to print a document.
1
Press the Document Box key.
2
Press [Job Box].
3
Select [Quick Copy/Proof and Hold] and press
[Open].
4
Select the creator of the document and press
[Open].
5
Select the document to print, and press [Print].
Quick Copy/Proof and Hold
User Name
Files
1 User
5
2 User
2
3 User
1
4 User
1
5 User
1
1/2
Open
Close
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
User:
File Name
Print
Date and Time
Size
1File
2010/10/10 09:40
21 MB
2File
2010/10/10 09:45
30 MB
3File
2010/10/10 09:50
36 MB
4File
2010/10/10 09:55
21 MB
5File
2010/10/10 10:00
30 MB
1/1
Detail
Delete
Close
Status
10/10/2010 10:10
7-16
Document Box
6
Specify the number of prints as desired.
7
Press [Start Print] to start printing.
Deleting a Document
You can delete documents stored in the Quick Copy/Proof and Hold box.
Use the procedure below to delete a document.
1
Press the Document Box key.
2
Press [Job Box], [Quick Copy/Proof and Hold], then
[Open].
3
Select the creator of the document and press
[Open].
Quick Copy/Proof and Hold
User Name
Files
1 User
5
2 User
2
3 User
1
4 User
1
5 User
1
7
1/2
Open
Close
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
4
The delete confirmation screen appears.
User:
File Name
Print
Select the document to delete and press [Delete].
Date and Time
Size
1File
2010/10/10 09:40
21 MB
2File
2010/10/10 09:45
30 MB
3File
2010/10/10 09:50
36 MB
4File
2010/10/10 09:55
21 MB
5File
2010/10/10 10:00
30 MB
1/1
Detail
Delete
Close
Status
10/10/2010 10:10
5
7-17
Press [Yes]. The document is deleted.
Document Box
Repeat Copy
Repeat Copy Job Retention
To maintain free space on the hard disk, you can set the maximum number of stored jobs.
Use the procedure below to specify the maximum number of stored jobs.
Document Box/Removable Memory - Repeat Copy Job Retention
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Document Box/Removable Memory], [Next]
of Job Box, [Change] of Repeat Copy Job
Retention.
3
Use the [+] and [–] keys or the numeric keys to
enter the maximum number of stored jobs.
Set the maximum number of repeat copy jobs to retain.
Use [-]/[+] or the numeric keys to enter a number.
*Set this number to 0 to not retain any jobs.
You can enter any number between 0 and 50.
(0 - 50)
32
NOTE: If you enter a value of 0 (zero), no jobs are
job(s)
stored.
4
Cancel
OK
Press [OK]. The maximum number of stored jobs is
set.
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
Printing a Document
You can print the documents stored in the Repeat Copy box.
Use the procedure below to print a document.
1
Press the Document Box key.
2
Press [Job Box].
3
Select [Repeat Copy] box, and press [Open].
4
Select the document to print and press [Print].
5
If the document is protected by a password, enter
the password using the numeric keys.
6
Press [Start Print] to start printing.
Repeat Copy
Name
2008101000101002
Date and Time
10/10/2010 10:10
Size
21 MB
001/001
Detail
Print
Delete
Close
Status
10/10/2010 10:10
The Repeat Copy box job will be deleted when the
main power switch is turned off.
7-18
Document Box
Deletion of Job Retention
This setting specifies that documents, such as Private Printing, Quick Copying, or Proof and Hold Printing, saved
temporarily in the job box are automatically deleted after they have been saved for a set time.
The table below shows the available settings.
Item
Detail
Off
Temporary documents are not automatically
deleted.
1 hour
Documents are deleted after 1 hour.
4 hours
Documents are deleted after 4 hours.
1 day
Documents are deleted after 1 day.
1 week
Documents are deleted after 1 week.
Use the procedure below to set automatic deletion for temporary documents.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Document Box/Removable Memory], [Next]
of Job Box, then [Change] of Deletion of Job
Retention.
3
Select the time for automatic deletion.
To deactivate automatic deletion, press [Off].
4
Press [OK].
NOTE: This function is valid for documents saved
after the function is set. Regardless of this function
setting, temporary documents are deleted when the
main power switch is turned off.
7-19
7
Document Box
Form for Form Overlay
Storing a Form
You can store forms to be used for the form overlay in the Form for Form Overlay box. One page can be
registered in one form.
Use the procedure below to store a form.
Name
1
Press the Document Box key.
2
Place the original in the document processor or on
the platen.
3
Press [Job Box].
4
Select [Form for Form Overlay] and press [Open].
5
Press [Store File].
6
If necessary, select the image quality of original,
scanning density, etc. before the original is
scanned.
7
Press the Start key. The original is scanned and
stored in the Form for Form Overlay box.
Files
Private Print/Stored Job
21
Quick Copy/Proof and Hold
21
Repeat Copy
21
Form for Form Overlay
21
1/1
Open
Custom Box
Job Box
Removable
Memory
Program
FAX Box
Status
10/10/2010 10:10
Form for Form Overlay
Name
2008101009530900
Date and Time
Size
2010/10/10 09:00
21 MB
2008101000530910
2010/10/10 09:10
30 MB
2008101000530920
2010/10/10 09:20
30 MB
1/1
Detail
Print
Delete
Store File
Close
Status
10/10/2010 10:10
NOTE: For information on using image overlays with a
stored form, see Form Overlay on page 4-23 and Form
Overlay from Custom Boxes (Form Overlay) on page
7-9.
7-20
Document Box
Deleting a Form Stored
You can delete the form stored in the Form for Form Overlay box.
Use the procedure below to delete a form.
Form for Form Overlay
Name
2008101009530900
Date and Time
1
Press the Document Box key.
2
Press [Job Box].
3
Select [Form for Form Overlay] and press [Open].
4
Select the form to delete and press [Delete].
The delete confirmation screen appears.
Size
2010/10/10 09:00
21 MB
2008101000530910
2010/10/10 09:10
30 MB
2008101000530920
2010/10/10 09:20
30 MB
1/1
Detail
Print
Delete
7
Store File
Close
Status
10/10/2010 10:10
5
7-21
Press [Yes]. The form is deleted.
Document Box
Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory
Plugging USB memory directly into the machine enables you to quickly and easily print the files stored in the
USB memory without having to use a computer.
Limitations
•
The following file types can be printed:
• PDF file (Version 1.7 or older)
• TIFF file (TIFF V6/TTN2 format)
• JPEG file
• XPS file
• Encrypted PDF file
•
PDF files you wish to print should have an extension (.pdf).
•
Files to be printed should be saved no further down than the top 3 folder levels, including the root folder.
•
Use USB memory properly formatted by this machine.
•
Plug the USB memory directly into the USB Port (A1). We do not guarantee that USB memory printing is
error free if a USB hub is used.
Printing (Print)
Print documents stored in the removable USB memory.
1
Plug the USB memory into the USB Port (A1).
IMPORTANT: Use USB memory formatted by this
machine. If a USB memory formatted by any other
device is used, The removable memory is not
formatted. may appear. To format a USB memory,
press [Format] and follow the instructions on the screen.
2
When the machine reads the USB memory,
Removable Memory is recognized. Displaying files.
may appear. Press [Yes] to display the removable
memory screen.
NOTE: If the message does not appear, press the
Document Box key and then [Removable Memory].
3
Select the folder containing the file to be printed
and press [Open].
The machine will display documents in the top 3
folder levels, including the root folder.
NOTE: 1000 documents can be displayed.
To return to a higher level folder, press [Up].
7-22
Document Box
4
Select the file to be printed and press [Print].
5
Change the number of copies, duplex printing, etc.
as desired.
Removable Memory
Name
Date and Time
Size
1 Document
2010/10/10 09:30
1 MB
2 Document
2010/10/10 09:40
3 MB
3 Document
2010/10/10 09:50
4 MB
4 Document
2010/10/10 10:00
1 MB
Memory
Information
2 MB
Remove
Memory
Up
5 Document
2010/10/10 10:05
Delete
Print
Custom Box
Job Box
Detail
Removable
Memory
001/999
Open
Store File
FAX Box
Program
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
For the features that can be selected, refer to
Document print features on page 7-23.
After a document saved in the machine is selected,
the [User File Settings] key may appear in the
setting screen for the feature to be used.
6
•
To use the settings saved with the document,
press [User File Settings].
•
If you need to change the print settings, change
the print settings.
Press the Start key. Printing of the selected file
begins.
Document print features
The features below can be selected when printing a document.
• Paper Selection (page 4-3)
• Duplex (page 3-13)
• Bates Stamp (page 4-32)
• Collate/Offset (page 3-15)
• Job Finish Notice (page 4-46)
• Encrypted PDF Password
(page 7-23)
• Staple (page 3-19)
• Priority Override (page 4-48)
• JPEG/TIFF Print (page 7-23)
• Punch (page 3-21)
• Fold (page 4-11)
• XPS Fit to Page(page 7-23)
• Paper Output (page 4-13)
• Text Stamp (page 4-31)
• Color Selection (page 6-23)
Encrypted PDF Password
To print a PDF that is protected by a password, enter the password before printing.
JPEG/TIFF Print
Select the image size when printing JPEG or TIFF files.
Item
Description
Paper Size
Fit the image size to the selected paper size.
Image Resolution
Print at resolution of the actual image.
Print Resolution
Fit the image size to the print resolution.
XPS Fit to Page
Reduces or enlarges the image size to fit to the selected paper size when printing XPS files.
7-23
7
Document Box
Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB)
This function allows you to store scanned image files in USB memory connected to the machine. You can store
files in PDF, TIFF, JPEG, XPS or high-compression PDF format.
NOTE: The maximum number of the storable files is 100.
Storing Documents (Store File)
The procedure for storing documents in removable USB memory is explained below.
1
Plug the USB memory into the USB Port (A1).
IMPORTANT: Use only USB memory that has been
formatted on this machine. If USB memory formatted on
another device is used, The removable memory is not
formatted message may appear. To format the USB
memory, press [Format].
CAUTION: When [Format] is pressed, all data in the
external media is erased.
2
When the machine reads the USB memory,
Removable Memory is recognized. Displaying files.
may appear. Press [Yes] to display the removable
memory screen.
NOTE: If the message does not appear, press the
Document Box key and then [Removable Memory].
7-24
Document Box
3
Select the folder where the file will be stored and
press [Open].
The machine will display the top 3 folder levels,
including the root folder.
4
Press [Store File].
5
Set the type of original, file format, etc., as desired.
Removable Memory
Name
Date and Time
Size
1 Document
2010/10/10 09:30
1 MB
2 Document
2010/10/10 09:40
3 MB
3 Document
2010/10/10 09:50
4 MB
4 Document
2010/10/10 10:00
1 MB
Memory
Information
2 MB
Remove
Memory
Up
5 Document
2010/10/10 10:05
Delete
Print
Custom Box
Job Box
Detail
Removable
Memory
Open
FAX Box
Status
001/999
Store File
Program
10/10/2010 10:10
For the features that can be selected, refer to
Document Store features on page 7-25.
6
Press the Start key. The original is scanned and the
data is stored in the USB memory.
Document Store features
The features below can be selected when saving a document.
• Original Size (page 6-2)
• Original Image (page 6-18)
• Border Erase (page 6-26)
• Mixed Size Originals (page 6-8)
• Scan Resolution (page 6-20)
• Continuous Scan (page 6-24)
• 2-sided/Book Original
(page 6-11)
• Color Selection (page 6-23)
• Job Finish Notice (page 6-36)
• Original Orientation (page 6-12)
• Sharpness (page 6-21)
• File Name Entry (page 6-28)
• Storing Size (page 7-4)
• Background Density Adj.
(page 6-22)
• File Format (page 6-14)
• Prevent Bleed-thru (page 6-25)
• Zoom (page 6-6)
• Text Stamp (page 6-39)
• Density (page 6-19)
• Centering (page 6-7)
• Bates Stamp (page 6-40)
7-25
7
Document Box
Removing USB Memory
Remove the USB memory.
IMPORTANT: Be sure to follow the proper procedure to avoid damaging the data or USB memory.
1
Press the Document Box key.
2
Press [Removable Memory].
3
Press [Remove Memory].
4
Press [OK], and remove the USB memory after
Removable Memory can be safely removed. is
displayed.
Removable Memory
Name
Date and Time
Size
1 Document
2010/10/10 09:30
1 MB
2 Document
2010/10/10 09:40
3 MB
3 Document
2010/10/10 09:50
4 MB
4 Document
2010/10/10 10:00
1 MB
Memory
Information
5 Document
2010/10/10 10:05
2 MB
Remove
Memory
Up
Delete
Print
Custom Box
Status
Job Box
Detail
Removable
Memory
Open
FAX Box
001/999
Store File
Program
10/10/2010 10:10
NOTE: USB memory can also be removed after
checking the status of the device.
For details, refer to Check of Device Status, on page 814.
7-26
8 Status / Job Cancel
This chapter explains how to check the status and history of jobs and cancel the jobs being
processed or waiting to be printed.
This chapter also explains how to check the remaining amount of toner and paper and the
status of devices, and how to cancel the fax communication.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Checking Job Status ...........................................................................8-2
Checking Job History ..........................................................................8-9
Pause and Resumption of Jobs ........................................................8-11
Canceling of Jobs .............................................................................8-11
Priority Override for Waiting Jobs .....................................................8-12
Reordering Print Jobs .......................................................................8-12
Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper (Paper/Supplies) .....8-13
Device/Communication .....................................................................8-14
8-1
Status / Job Cancel
Checking Job Status
Check the status of jobs being processed or waiting to be printed.
Available Status Screens
The processing and waiting status of jobs are displayed as a list on the touch panel in three different screens Printing Jobs, Sending Jobs, and Storing Jobs. The following job status are available.
Screen
Job status to be displayed
Printing Jobs
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Copy
Printer
FAX reception
i-FAX reception
E-mail reception
Printing from Document Box
Printing data from removable memory
Application
Job Report /List
Sending Jobs
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
FAX transmission
i-FAX transmission
E-mail
Folder
Application
Multiple destination
Sending Job FAX using Delayed transmission
Storing Jobs
•
•
•
•
•
•
Scan
FAX
i-FAX
Printer
Join Box Document
Copy Box Document
Displaying Status Screens
Use the procedure below to display the Status screen.
Status
Job Type
Job No.
438
Press the Status/Job Cancel key.
2
The Status screen appears. Press either [Printing
Jobs], [Sending Jobs], or [Storing Jobs] to check
the status.
Log
Scheduled Job
Status
1
All
Accepted Time Type
14:47
Job Name
User Name
Status
abc@def.com
InProcess
To check the scheduled transmission job, press
[Sending Jobs] and then [Scheduled Job].
1/1
For an explanation of the screen, refer to Details of
the Status Screens on page 8-3.
Cancel
Printing Jobs
Status
Detail
Priority
Override
Sending Jobs
Storing Jobs
Device/
Communication
Paper/Supplies
10/10/2010 10:10
8-2
Status / Job Cancel
Details of the Status Screens
The items and keys displayed on the status screens are as follows.
For information on how to display the Status screen, see Displaying Status Screens on page 8-2.
Printing Jobs
Status
Status
Job Type
Job No.
Log
7
All
Accepted Time Type
Job Name
doc20081010091015
000001 10/10 09:10
User Name
Status
AAAAA
InProcess
000002 10/10 09:15
doc20081010091510
AAAAA
Waiting
000003 10/10 09:20
doc20081010092015
BBBBB
Waiting
1
2
8
Pause All
Print Jobs
Printing Jobs
3
4
9
5
10
Priority
Override
Cancel
Sending Jobs
Storing Jobs
11
Move Up
1/1
6
12
Detail
Device/
Communication
Paper/Supplies
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
The table below lists the items displayed in the Printing Jobs Status screen.
No.
Item / Key
Detail
1
Job No.
Acceptance No. of job
2
Accepted Time
Accepted Time of job
3
Type
Icons that indicate the job type
Copy job
Printer job
Job from Document Box
FAX reception
i-FAX reception
E-mail reception
Data from Removable Memory
Application job
Report / List
4
Job Name
Job Name or file name
5
User Name
User Name for the executed job
6
Status
Status of job
InProcess:
Printing:
Waiting:
Pause:
Canceling:
The status before starting to print.
Printing
Print Waiting
Pausing print job or error
Canceling the job
8-3
8
Status / Job Cancel
No.
Item / Key
] of Job Type
Detail
7
[
Sorts by specific type of job
8
[Pause All Print Jobs]
Pauses all the printing jobs. By pressing this key again, the printing
jobs will be resumed.
9
[Cancel]
Select the job to be canceled from the list, and press this key.
10
[Priority Override]
Select the job to be overridden, and press this key.
(Refer to Priority Override for Waiting Jobs on page 8-12)
11
[Move Up]
In the list, select the job that you want to move up the job queue and
press this key.
(Refer to Reordering Print Jobs on page 8-12)
12
[Detail]
Select the job for displaying detailed information from the list, and
press this key. (Refer to Checking the Detailed Information of
Histories on page 8-10)
8-4
Status / Job Cancel
Sending Jobs
Status
Job No.
7
All
Accepted Time Type
438
14:47
1
2
Log
Scheduled Job
Status
Job Type
Job Name
User Name
Status
abc@def.com
3
InProcess
4
5
6
1/1
9
8
Cancel
10
Detail
Priority
Override
Printing Jobs
Sending Jobs
Storing Jobs
Status
Device/
Communication
Paper/Supplies
10/10/2010 10:10
The table below lists the items displayed in the Sending Jobs Status screen.
No.
Item / Key
Detail
1
Job No.
Acceptance No. of job
2
Accepted Time
Accepted Time of job
3
Type
Icons that indicate the job type
Sending Job FAX
Sending Job i-FAX
Sending Job E-mail
Sending Job Folder
Sending Job Application
Sending Job Multiple
4
Destination
Destination (Either destination name, FAX number, E-mail address,
or server name)
5
User Name
User Name for the executed job
6
Status
Status of job
InProcess: The status before starting sending such as during
scanning originals
Sending:
Sending
Waiting:
Sending Waiting
Canceling: Canceling the job
Pause:
Pausing the job
7
[
Only selected type of jobs is displayed.
8
[Cancel]
Select the job you want to cancel from the list, and press this key.
9
[Priority Override]
Select the job to be overridden, and press this key.
* Only displayed when the optional fax kit is installed.
10
[Detail]
Select the job whose detailed information you want to display from
the list, and press this key. (Refer to Checking the Detailed
Information of Histories on page 8-10)
] of Job Type
8-5
8
Status / Job Cancel
Storing Jobs
Status
Status
Job No.
Log
7
All
Job Type
Accepted Time Type
438
14:47
1
2
Job Name
User Name
Status
doc20070225144758
3
4
InProcess
5
6
1/1
8
9
Detail
Cancel
Printing Jobs
Sending Jobs
Storing Jobs
Device/
Communication
Paper/Supplies
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
The table below lists the items displayed in the Storing Jobs Status screen.
No.
Display / Key
Details
1
Job No.
Acceptance No. of job
2
Accepted Time
Accepted Time of job
3
Type
Icons that indicate the job type
Storing Job Scan
Storing Job Printer
Storing Job FAX
Storing Job i-FAX
Join Box Document
Copy Box Document
4
Job Name
Job name or file name is displayed.
5
User Name
User Name for the executed job
6
Status
Status of job
InProcess: The status before starting to save such as during
scanning originals
Storing:
Storing Data
Canceling: Canceling the job
Pause:
Pausing the job
7
[
Only selected type of jobs is displayed.
8
[Cancel]
Select the job you want to cancel from the list, and press this key.
9
[Detail]
Select the job whose detailed information you want to display from
the list, and press this key. (Refer to Checking the Detailed
Information of Histories on page 8-10)
] of Job Type
8-6
Status / Job Cancel
Checking the Detailed Information of Jobs
Check the detailed information of each job.
Use the procedure below to check a job's information.
1
Press the Status/Job Cancel key.
2
Press [Printing Jobs], [Sending Jobs], or [Storing
Jobs].
To check the scheduled transmission, press
[Sending Jobs] and then [Scheduled Job].
3
Status
Job Type
Job No.
Select the job whose details you wish to check from
the list, and press [Detail].
All
Accepted Time Type
438
Log
Scheduled Job
Status
14:47
Job Name
User Name
Detailed information of the selected job is
displayed.
Status
abc@def.com
InProcess
1/1
Cancel
Printing Jobs
Detail
Priority
Override
Sending Jobs
Storing Jobs
Device/
Communication
Detail Job No.:
8
Paper/Supplies
Status
10/10/2010 10:10
Use [ ] or [
information.
000080
Job No.:
Status/Destination:
000080
Detail
] to see the next or previous page of
Processing
Job Type:
Sending Job - E-mail
Destination:
1
User Name:
User1
Job Name:
doc20070404115151
Accepted Time:
1/2
10:10:10
Close
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
Detail Job No.:
In Sending Jobs, you can check the destination by
pressing [Detail] in Status/Destination.
000080
Job No.:
000080
Job Type:
Sending Job - E-mail
Status/Destination:
Detail
Processing
Destination:
1
User Name:
User1
Job Name:
doc20070404115151
Accepted Time:
10:10:10
1/2
Close
Status
10/10/2010 10:10
8-7
Status / Job Cancel
Status/Destination is displayed when address is
selected. Press [Detail] to display the list.
Press [ ] or [ ], select a destination and press
[Detail]. Information on the selected job is displayed for
checking.
000081
Detail Job No.:
Job Type
All
Type
Destination
Status
doc20070404131415
Sending
User01
Waiting
1/2
4
Detail
Close
Status
10/10/2010 10:10
8-8
To exit from the detailed information, press [Close].
Status / Job Cancel
Checking Job History
Check the history of completed jobs.
NOTE: Job history is also available by Embedded Web Server RX or Network Print Monitor from the
computer.
If Hide All is selected in Display Jobs Log on page 9-41, users without administrator privileges cannot view the
job log (except for the fax log).
Available Job History Screens
The job histories are displayed separately in three screens - Printing Jobs, Sending Jobs, and Storing Jobs. The
following job histories are available.
Screen
Job histories to be displayed
Printing Jobs
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Copy
Printer
FAX reception
i-FAX reception
E-mail reception
Printing from Document Box
Job Report / List
Printing data from removable memory
Sending Jobs
•
•
•
•
•
•
FAX
i-FAX
E-mail
Folder
Application
Multiple destination
Storing Jobs
•
•
•
•
•
•
Scan
FAX
i-FAX
Printer
Join Box Document
Copy Box Document
Displaying Job History Screen
The procedure for displaying Job History Screen is explained below.
Status
Status
Job Type
Job No.
Press the Status/Job Cancel key.
2
Press either [Printing Jobs], [Sending Jobs], or
[Storing Jobs] to check the log, and press [Log].
Log
All
End Date
Type
Job Name
User Name
Result
000080 01/25 14:14
doc20070225141427
Completed
000081 01/25 14:22
doc20070225142253
Completed
000082 01/25 14:23
doc20070225142310
Completed
000083 01/25 14:24
doc20070225142458
Error
000084 01/25 14:30
doc20070225143034
Completed
1/1
Detail
Printing Jobs
Status
1
Sending Jobs
Storing Jobs
Device/
Communication
NOTE: If the user authentication screen appears,
enter your login user name and password and then
press [Login]. For this, you need to login with
administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User (Local
User List) on page 10-5 for the default login user name
and password.
Paper/Supplies
10/10/2010 10:10
8-9
8
Status / Job Cancel
Checking the Detailed Information of Histories
Check the detailed information of each history.
Display of the detailed information of Job Finish history
Use the procedure below to check the job finish history.
1
Press the Status/Job Cancel key.
2
Press [Printing Jobs], [Sending Jobs] or [Storing
Jobs] and then [Log].
NOTE: If the user authentication screen appears,
enter your login user name and password and then
press [Login]. For this, you need to login with
administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User (Local
User List) on page 10-5 for the default login user name
and password.
3
Status
Status
Job Type
Job No.
Log
Select the job to check details from the list, and
press [Detail].
All
End Date
000080 01/25 14:14
Type
Job Name
User Name
Detailed information of the selected job is
displayed.
Result
doc20070225141427
Completed
000081 01/25 14:22
doc20070225142253
Completed
000082 01/25 14:23
doc20070225142310
Completed
000083 01/25 14:24
doc20070225142458
Error
NOTE: To check the information of the next/previous
000084 01/25 14:30
doc20070225143034
Completed
page, press [
1/1
] or [
].
Detail
Printing Jobs
Status
Sending Jobs
Storing Jobs
Device/
Communication
Paper/Supplies
10/10/2010 10:10
4
8-10
To exit from the detailed information, press [Close].
Status / Job Cancel
Pause and Resumption of Jobs
Pause /resume all printing jobs in printing/waiting.
The procedure for pausing and resuming jobs is explained below.
Status
Status
Job Type
Job No.
2
Press [Pause All Print Jobs] on the Printing Jobs
Status screen. Printing is paused.
3
When resuming the printing of jobs that have been
paused, press [Resume All Print Jobs].
All
Job Name
User Name
Status
AAAAA
InProcess
doc20081010091510
AAAAA
Waiting
doc20081010092015
BBBBB
Waiting
000001 10/10 09:10
doc20081010091015
000002 10/10 09:15
000003 10/10 09:20
Printing Jobs
Press the Status/Job Cancel key.
Log
Accepted Time Type
Pause All
Print Jobs
1
Cancel
Sending Jobs
Priority
Override
Storing Jobs
Status
Move Up
1/1
Detail
Device/
Communication
Paper/Supplies
10/10/2010 10:10
8
Canceling of Jobs
For more information on canceling jobs, refer to the Canceling Jobs on page 3-52.
8-11
Status / Job Cancel
Priority Override for Waiting Jobs
Priority Override function suspends the current job and prints the job in waiting first.
The procedure for using Priority Override is explained below.
Status
Status
Job Type
Job No.
1
Press the Status/Job Cancel key.
2
Press [Printing Jobs].
3
Select the job to be given priority, and press
[Priority Override].
4
Press [Yes] in the confirmation screen. The current
job in printing is suspended, and the job for
override printing starts.
5
When the Priority Override is completed, the
printing job that has been suspended will be
resumed.
Log
All
Accepted Time Type
Job Name
doc20081010091510
AAAAA
Waiting
doc20081010092015
BBBBB
Waiting
000002 10/10 09:15
000003 10/10 09:20
Priority
Override
Cancel
Printing Jobs
Status
InProcess
doc20081010091015
Pause All
Print Jobs
User Name
AAAAA
000001 10/10 09:10
Sending Jobs
Move Up
Storing Jobs
1/1
Detail
Device/
Communication
Paper/Supplies
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
Reordering Print Jobs
This function allows you to select a queued print job and raise its output priority.
The procedure for reordering print jobs is explained below.
Status
Status
Job Type
Job No.
Job Name
User Name
Press the [Printing Jobs].
3
Select the job to be assigned a higher priority and
press [Move Up].
The priority of the selected job is increased by 1 .
Status
doc20081010091015
AAAAA
InProcess
000002 10/10 09:15
doc20081010091510
AAAAA
Waiting
000003 10/10 09:20
doc20081010092015
BBBBB
Waiting
Printing Jobs
2
All
000001 10/10 09:10
Status
Press the Status/Cancel key.
Log
Accepted Time Type
Pause All
Print Jobs
1
Cancel
Sending Jobs
Priority
Override
Storing Jobs
Move Up
To further raise the job's priority, press [Move Up]
again. Each time you press [Move Up], the priority
increases by 1.
1/1
Detail
Device/
Communication
Paper/Supplies
10/10/2010 10:10
8-12
Status / Job Cancel
Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper (Paper/Supplies)
Check the remaining amount of toner, paper, and staples on the touch panel.
Use the procedure below to check the remaining amounts.
Status
Toner Information
Toner
Black (K)
Cyan (C)
Magenta (M)
Yellow (Y)
Waste Toner OK
Printing Jobs
Paper
Status
100%
100%
100%
Sending Jobs
A3
A3
A4
A4
A4
A4
A4
A4
Press the Status/Job Cancel key.
2
Press [Paper/Supplies]. Check the remaining
amount of toner and the status of the waste toner
box in Toner Information, and the remaining
amount of paper in each paper source in Paper.
Others
Size
100%
1
Type
Plain
Plain
Plain
Plain
Plain
Plain
Plain
Plain
Storing Jobs
Status
Status
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
Type
Staple A
Device/
Communication
Status
OK
Paper/Supplies
10/10/2010 10:10
The items you can check are described below.
Remaining amount of toner
8
You can check the remaining amount of each color toner levels from 100 to 0% (1% increments).
Status of the waste toner box
You can check the status of waste toner box.
Paper
You can check the size, orientation, type, and remaining amount of paper in each paper source. The remaining
amount of paper is shown by 5 levels as 100, 80, 50, 30, and 0%, however, the paper in the multi purpose tray
is shown by 2 levels as 100% and 0%.
Others
You can check the status of staples and punch waste box.
NOTE: If the optional document finisher and punch unit are installed, the Others section provides the status of
the punch waste box and whether or not staples are available.
8-13
Status / Job Cancel
Device/Communication
Configure the devices/lines installed or connected to this machine or check their status. You can also control
devices depending on their status.
Displaying Device/Communication Screen
The procedure for using the Device/Communication screen is explained below.
1
Press the Status/Job Cancel key.
2
Press [Device/Communication].
The screen to check the status or configure the
devices is displayed.
Check of Device Status
Status
Scanner
Hard Disk
Ready.
Overwriting...
Printer
Ready.
Removable Memory
Not connected.
Format
Remove
FAX Port 2
FAX Port 1
Dialing...
Line Off
FAX
Receiving...
Manual RX
Line Off
i-FAX
Log
Printing Jobs
Status
Sending Jobs
Storing Jobs
Device/
Communication
Check New FAX
Paper/Supplies
10/10/2010 10:10
The items you can check are described below.
Scanner
The status of an original scanning in the document processor (optional) or the error information (paper jam,
opened cover, etc.) is displayed.
Printer
Error information such as paper jam, out of toner, or out of paper, and status such as waiting or printing are
displayed.
Hard Disk
The information such as formatting, overwriting for erasure, and error occurrence is displayed.
8-14
Status / Job Cancel
Configuring the Devices
Status
Scanner
Hard Disk
Ready.
Overwriting...
Printer
Ready.
Removable Memory
Not connected.
Format
Remove
FAX Port 2
FAX Port 1
Dialing...
Line Off
FAX
Printing Jobs
Receiving...
Manual RX
Line Off
i-FAX
Log
Sending Jobs
Storing Jobs
Device/
Communication
Status
Check New FAX
Paper/Supplies
10/10/2010 10:10
Detailed information on controlling devices is given below.
Removable Memory (USB Memory)
•
The usage and capacity of the external media connected to this machine are displayed.
•
Press [Format] to format external media.
CAUTION: When [Format] is pressed, all data in the external media is erased.
•
Press [Remove] to safely remove the external media. For details, refer to Removing the USB Memory in the
next section.
FAX Port 1, FAX Port 2
•
The information such as sending/receiving and dialing is displayed.
•
Press [Line Off] to cancel a fax in sending/receiving. For details, refer to Canceling FAX Communication on
page 8-16 in the section afterwards.
•
Press [Manual RX] to start a fax. Use this function when you want to talk to the sender before receiving the
fax originals. For details, refer to the Operation Guide of FAX kit.
•
Press [Log] to display the fax transmission history. For details, refer to the Operation Guide of FAX kit.
8-15
8
Status / Job Cancel
Removing the USB Memory
There is a way to remove the USB memory safely.
Use the procedure below to remove the USB memory.
Status
Scanner
1
Press the Status/Job Cancel key.
2
Press [Device/Communication] > [Remove] in
Removable Memory.
3
When Removable memory can be safely removed.
is displayed, remove the USB memory.
Hard Disk
Ready.
Overwriting...
Printer
Ready.
Removable Memory
Not connected.
Format
Remove
FAX Port 2
FAX Port 1
Dialing...
Line Off
FAX
Printing Jobs
Receiving...
Manual RX
Line Off
i-FAX
Log
Sending Jobs
Storing Jobs
Device/
Communication
Status
Check New FAX
Paper/Supplies
10/10/2010 10:10
Canceling FAX Communication
Cancel fax communication.
Use the procedure below to cancel the fax communication.
Status
Scanner
1
Press the Status/Job Cancel key.
2
Press [Device/Communication] > [Line Off] in FAX
Port 1 or FAX Port 2.
3
Press [Yes] in the confirmation screen. The line is
disconnected, and the fax communication is
canceled.
Hard Disk
Ready.
Overwriting...
Printer
Ready.
Removable Memory
Not connected.
Format
Remove
FAX Port 2
FAX Port 1
Dialing...
Line Off
FAX
Printing Jobs
Status
Receiving...
Manual RX
Line Off
i-FAX
Log
Sending Jobs
Storing Jobs
Device/
Communication
Check New FAX
Paper/Supplies
10/10/2010 10:10
8-16
9 Default Setting (System Menu)
This chapter explains how to configure various settings of the machine using the menus on
the operation panel.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Common Settings ...............................................................................9-2
Copy..................................................................................................9-43
Send..................................................................................................9-47
Document Box/Removable Memory .................................................9-56
Printer ...............................................................................................9-58
Report ...............................................................................................9-65
Adjustment/Maintenance ..................................................................9-69
Date/Timer ........................................................................................9-77
Edit Destination (Address Book/Adding One Touch Keys) ...............9-83
Internet..............................................................................................9-90
Application ........................................................................................9-92
System Initialization ..........................................................................9-95
Restart Entire Device ........................................................................9-95
Network.............................................................................................9-96
Interface Block Setting ....................................................................9-109
Security Level .................................................................................9-110
Document Guard.............................................................................9-110
Data Security ..................................................................................9-112
Optional Function............................................................................9-114
Accessibility Display (Enlarged Touch Panel Display) ....................9-115
9-1
Default Setting (System Menu)
Common Settings
Common settings include;
•
Language …9-2
•
Default Screen …9-3
•
Sound …9-4
•
Original/Paper Settings …9-4
•
Measurement …9-12
•
Error Handling …9-13
•
Paper Output …9-15
•
Orientation Confirmation …9-16
•
Color Toner Empty Action …9-16
•
Function Defaults …9-16
•
USB Keyboard Type …9-30
•
System Stamp …9-30
•
Manual Staple …9-39
•
Customize Status Display …9-40
•
Low Toner Alert Level …9-40
•
Offset One Page Documents …9-41
•
Display Jobs Log …9-41
•
Message Banner Print …9-42
NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with
administrator privileges.
Language
Select the language displayed on the touch panel.
Use the procedure below to select the language.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings] and then [Change] of Language.
3
Press the key for the language you want to use.
4
Press [OK].
The touch panel language will be changed.
9-2
Default Setting (System Menu)
Default Screen
Select the screen appearing right after start-up (default screen). The options are as follows.
The table below lists the available screens.
Item
Description
Copy
The Copy screen (the screen shown when the Copy key is pressed)
appears.
Send
The Send screen (the screen shown when the Send key is pressed)
appears.
FAX*
The Fax screen (the screen shown when the Fax key is pressed)
appears.
Status
The Status/Job Cancel screen (the screen shown when the Status/
Job Cancel key is pressed) appears.
Document Box
The Document Box screen (the screen shown when the Document
Box key is pressed) appears.
Program
The Program screen (the screen shown when the Program key is
pressed) appears.
Application
The Application selecting screen (the screen shown when the
Application key is pressed) appears.
Accessibility Copy
The Accessibility Copy screen (the screen shown when the
Accessibility Display key is pressed in the Copy screen) appears.
Accessibility Send
The Accessibility Send screen (the screen shown when the
Accessibility Display key is pressed in the Send screen) appears.
Accessibility FAX*
The Accessibility Fax screen (the screen shown when the
Accessibility Display key is pressed in the Fax screen) appears.
Application name
(Maximum 5 applications)
For example, Internet Browser
Each application is activated and the initial screen appears.
*
This is displayed when the optional fax kit is installed.
Use the procedure below to select the default startup screen.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings] and then [Change] of Default Screen.
3
Select the screen to be displayed as the default screen.
NOTE: The application names appear if the applications are installed and officially licensed on.
4
Press [OK].
9-3
9
Default Setting (System Menu)
Sound
Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations.
The table below lists the buzzer types and their settings and details.
Item
Value
Description
Volume
0 (Mute), 1 (Minimum) to
5 (Maximum)
Set the buzzer volume level.
Key Confirmation
Off, On
Emit a sound when the control panel
and touch panel keys are pressed.
Job Finish
Off, On,
FAX Reception Only*
Emit a sound when a print job is
normally completed.
Ready
Off, On
Emit a sound when the warm-up is
completed.
Warning
Off, On
Emit a sound when errors occur.
USB Keyboard
Off, On
Emit a sound when a USB keyboard is
operated.
*
This is displayed when the optional fax kit is installed.
Use the procedure below to set the sound options.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Sound and then [Next] of Buzzer.
3
Press [Change] of Volume, Key Confirmation, Job Finish, Ready, Warning, or USB Keyboard.
4
Select the buzzer volume level, or other sound options.
Original/Paper Settings
Register additional types and sizes of originals and paper.
Custom Original Size
Set up frequently-used custom original sizes. The custom size options are displayed on the screen to select
original size. The dimensions available are as follows.
The table below lists the sizes that can be registered.
Input units
Dimensions
Inch models
X: 2.00 to 17.00" (in 0.01" increments)
Y: 2.00 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments)
Metric models
X: 50 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Y: 50 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments)
9-4
Default Setting (System Menu)
Up to four custom original sizes can be added. Use the procedure below to set a custom original size.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings and then [Next] of Custom Original Size.
3
Press [Change] of any one of Custom 1 to Custom 4, on which you wish to register the size.
4
Press [On], and then press [+],[–] or numeric keys to enter X(horizontal) and Y (vertical) dimensions.
5
Press [OK].
6
Move to the copy, send, or document box screen and press the Reset key.
Custom Paper Size
Set up a maximum of four frequently-used custom paper sizes. The custom size options are displayed on the
screen to select paper set in the multi purpose tray.
The table below lists the sizes that can be registered.
Input units
Dimensions
Inch models
H: 5.83 to 17.00" (in 0.01" increments)
V: 3.86 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments)
Metric models
H: 148 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments)
V: 98 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments)
9
Up to four custom paper sizes can be added.
Select media type for each paper size.
Media type: Plain, Transparency, Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Color,
Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick, Envelope, Coated, High Quality, Custom 1-8
NOTE: Refer to Media Type Setting on page 9-8 for Custom 1-8 for the media type.
Use the procedure below to select a custom paper size and media type.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings and then [Next] of Custom Paper Size.
3
Press [Change] of any one of Custom 1 to Custom 4, on which you want to register the size.
4
Press [On], and then press [+],[–] or numeric keys to enter X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) dimensions.
5
Press [Media Type] to select the type of paper and press [OK] if necessary.
6
Press [OK].
7
Move to the copy or document box screen and press the Reset key.
9-5
Default Setting (System Menu)
Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Cassettes (Cassette Setting)
Select paper sizes and media types for Cassette 1, 2 and optional paper feeders (Cassette 3 to 7).
The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below.
Item
Paper
Size
Auto
Automatically detect the paper size. Select Metric or Inch for paper size.
Standard
Sizes 1*
Available options are as follows:
Inch models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R, Statement-R, 12×18", Oficio II
Metric models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, Folio, 216×340 mm
Standard
Sizes 2*
Select a standard size except that selected in Standard Sizes 1.
Inch models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B5, B5-R, Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R,
216×340 mm
Metric models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R, Statement-R, 12×18", Oficio II,
8K, 16K, 16K-R
Media Type
*
**
***
Description
Plain (105 g/m2 or less), Rough**, Vellum** (60 to 105 g/m2 or less),
Recycled, Preprint***, Bond**, Color**, Prepunched***, Letterhead***,
Thick (106 g/m2 and more)**, High Quality, Custom 1-8**
Only A4, Letter, and B5 can be specified when the optional Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet x 2) and
the optional Large Capacity Side Feeder (500, 1,500-sheet x 2) are used.
To change to a media type other than Plain, refer to Media Type Setting on page 9-8. When the paper
weight settings shown below are selected, the media indicated for each setting cannot be selected.
• Rough: Heavy 5
• Vellum: Heavy 5
• Preprinted: Heavy 5
• Color: Heavy 5
• Letterhead: Heavy 5
• Thick: Heavy 5
• Custom 1 to 8: Heavy 5, or Extra Heavy
On the 30/30 ppm model and 35/35 ppm model, the paper of each also cannot be selected when
Heavy 4 is set.
To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to Special Paper Action on page 9-11.
Use the procedure below to select the paper sizes and media types for each cassette.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings, [Next] of Cassette Setting, [Next] of Cassette
1 to Cassette 7, on which you want to register the size, and then [Change] of Paper Size.
3
To detect the paper size automatically, press [Auto] and select Metric or Inch for Paper Size.
To select the paper size, press [Standard Sizes 1] or [Standard Sizes 2] for Paper Size.
4
Press [OK]. The previous screen reappears.
5
Press [Change] of Media Type to select media type and press [OK].
9-6
Default Setting (System Menu)
Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Multi Purpose Tray (MP Tray Setting)
Select the sizes and media types for the multi purpose tray. Set up frequently-used sizes and media types before
use.
The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below.
Item
Paper
Size
Auto
Automatically detect the paper size. Select Metric or Inch for paper size.
Standard
Sizes 1
Available options are as follows:
Inch models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R, Statement-R, 12×18", Oficio II,
Executive
Metric models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, B6-R, A6-R, Folio, 216×340 mm
Standard
Sizes 2
Select a standard size except that selected in Standard Sizes 1.
Inch models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, B6-R, A6-R, Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R
Metric models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R, Statement-R, 12×18", Oficio II,
Executive, 8K, 16K, 16K-R
Others
Select special standard sizes or custom sizes*.
ISO B5, Envelope #10 (Commercial #10), Envelope #9 (Commercial #9), Envelope
#6 (Commercial #6 3/4), Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope
C4, Hagaki, Oufuku hagaki, Youkei 4, Youkei 2
Size
Entry
Enter a size not displayed in the standard sizes.
Inch models:
H: 5.83 to 17.00" (in 0.01" increments)
V: 3.86 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments)
Metric models:
H: 148 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments)
V: 98 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Media Type
*
**
Description
Plain (105 g/m2 or less), Transparency, Rough, Vellum (60 to 105 g/m2 or less),
Labels, Recycled, Preprint**, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched**, Letterhead**,
Envelope, Thick (106 g/m2 and more), Coated, High Quality, Custom 1-8**
Refer to Custom Paper Size on page 9-5 for selecting Custom 1- 4 for Custom Paper Size.
Refer to Media Type Setting on page 9-8 for selecting Custom 1- 8 from Media Type.
To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to Special Paper Action on page 9-11.
NOTE: To change to a media type other than Plain, refer to Media Type Setting on page 9-8
Use the procedure below to select the paper sizes and media types for manual paper feed.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings, [Next] of MP Tray Setting and then [Change]
of Paper Size.
3
To detect the paper size automatically, press [Auto] and select Metric or Inch for Paper Size.
To select the paper size, press [Standard Sizes 1], [Standard Sizes 2], [Others] or [Size Entry] for Paper Size.
If you select [Size Entry], press [+], [–] to enter X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) dimensions.
Press [# Keys] to enter the paper size using the numeric keys.
4
Press [OK]. The previous screen reappears.
9-7
9
Default Setting (System Menu)
5
Press [Change] of Media Type to select the media type and press [OK].
Media Type Setting
Select the weight for each media type. The options for the media type and weight of paper are as follows.
Paper types and weights
Y: Available N: Not available
Extra
Heavy
Light*
Normal
1*
Normal
2*
Normal
3*
Heavy
1*
Heavy 2
Heavy 3
Heavy 4
Heavy 5
52 g/m2
to
59 g/m2
60 g/m2
to
74 g/m2
75 g/m2
to
90 g/m2
91 g/m2
to
105 g/m2
106 g/m2
to
135 g/m2
136 g/m2
to
163 g/m2
164 g/m2
to
220 g/m2
221 g/m2
to
256 g/m2
257 g/m2
to
300 g/m2
Plain
N
Y
Y
(default)
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
Rough
N
Y
Y
Y
(default)
Y
Y
Y
Y***
Y**
N
Vellum
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
(default)
Y
Y
Y***
Y**
N
Labels
N
Y**
Y**
Y**
Y**
Y
(default)
Y**
Y**
Y**
N
Recycled
N
Y
Y
(default)
Y
N
N
N
N
N***
N
Preprinted
N
Y
Y
(default)
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y***
Y**
N
Bond
N
Y
Y
Y
(default)
Y
Y
Y
Y***
N
N
Cardstock
N
N
N
N
Y**
Y**
Y**
Y **
(default)
Y**
N
Color
N
Y
Y
Y
(default)
Y
Y
Y
Y***
Y**
N
Prepunched
N
Y
Y
(default)
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
Letterhead
N
Y
Y
(default)
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y***
Y**
N
Thick
N
N
N
N
Y
(default)
Y
Y
Y***
Y**
N
Envelope
N
N
N
N
Y**
Y**
(default)
Y**
Y**
Y**
N
Coated
N
Y**
Y **
Y**
Y**
(default)
Y**
Y**
Y**
Y**
N
High Quality
N
Y
Y
(default)
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
Transparenci
es
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y**
(default)
Custom 1-8
Y
Y
Y
(default)
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y***
Y**
N
Paper
Weight
Weight (g/m2),
Media type
*
Transparencies
**
The maximum number of sheets that can be stapled varies depending on the paper weight. For details, refer to 1,000-sheet
Finisher (Option) on page Appendix-29, and 4,000-sheet Finisher (Option) on page Appendix-30.
The media type cannot be selected for the cassettes.
***
On the 30/30 ppm model and the 35/35 ppm model, the paper type cannot be selected for the cassette.
9-8
Default Setting (System Menu)
For Custom 1-8, settings for duplex printing and media type name can be changed.
Item
Duplex
Description
Prohibit
Duplex printing not allowed.
Permit
Duplex printing allowed.
Name
Change names for Custom 1-8. Names should be not more
than 15 characters. Selecting media type at multi purpose
tray, the name after change will be displayed.
Use the procedure below to set the paper weight.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings and then [Next] of Media Type Setting.
3
Press [Next] for the media type whose weight you want to change.
4
Press [Change] of Paper Weight.
5
Select the weight and press [OK].
The previous screen reappears.
6
Press [Close].
7
To change the duplex printing settings for Custom 1 (-8), press [Next] of Custom 1(-8) and then [Change]
of Duplex. Select [Prohibit] or [Permit] and press [OK].
The previous screen reappears.
8
Press [Close].
9
To change the name for Custom 1(-8), press [Next] of Custom 1(-8) and then [Change] of Name. Enter the
name and press [OK].
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
Default Paper Source
Select the default paper source from Cassette 1-7 and Multi Purpose Tray.
NOTE: [Cassette 3] to [Cassette 7] are displayed when the following options are installed.
[Cassette 3]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet x 2) or large capacity paper feeder (1500-sheet x 2) is installed
[Cassette 4]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet x 2) or large capacity paper feeder (1,500-sheet x 2) is installed
[Cassette 5]: When a side feeder (3,000-sheet), side feeder (500-sheet x 3), or large capacity side feeder (500,
1,500-sheet x 2) is installed
[Cassette 6]: When a side feeder (500-sheet x 3) or large capacity side feeder (500, 1,500-sheet x 2) is
installed
[Cassette 7]: When a side feeder (500-sheet x 3) or large capacity side feeder (500, 1,500-sheet x 2) is installed
9-9
9
Default Setting (System Menu)
Use the procedure below to select the default paper source.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings and then [Change] of Default Paper Source.
3
Select a paper cassette for the default setting.
4
Press [OK].
5
Move to the copy or document box screen and press the Reset key.
Original Auto Detect (Available for metric models only)
Automatically detect originals of special or non-standard size.
The table below lists the special or non-standard original sizes.
Item
Description
A6/Hagaki
As A6 and Hagaki are similar in size, select either one of them for
automatic detection.
Folio
Select Folio for automatic detection.
11x15"
Select the 11×15" size for automatic detection.
Use the procedure below to set automatic detection of originals.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings and then [Change] of Original Auto Detect.
3
Select [A6] or [Hagaki] of A6/Hagaki.
Select [Off] to disable automatic detection or [On] to enable automatic detection of Folio and 11x15"
respectively.
4
Press [OK].
Media for Auto (Color/B&W)
Select a default media type for auto paper selection when [Auto] is selected of Paper Selection. If Plain is
selected, the paper source with plain paper loaded in the specific size is selected. Select [All Media Types] for
the paper source with any kind of paper loaded in the specific size.
NOTE: Default media types can be set for both Color and Black and White.
Use the procedure below to select the paper sizes and media types used by Auto Selection.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings and then [Change] of Media for Auto (Color)
or Media for Auto (B & W).
3
Select [All Media Types] or any media type for paper selection.
4
Press [OK].
9-10
Default Setting (System Menu)
Paper Source for Cover
Select the paper source for cover paper from Cassette 1-7 or Multi Purpose Tray. Covers are used for Booklet
(see page 4-20) and Cover (see page 4-22) modes.
NOTE: [Cassette 3] to [Cassette 7] are displayed when the following options are installed.
[Cassette 3]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet x 2) or large capacity paper feeder (1500-sheet x 2) is installed
[Cassette 4]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet x 2) or large capacity paper feeder (1,500-sheet x 2) is installed
[Cassette 5]: When a side feeder (3,000-sheet), side feeder (500-sheet x 3), or large capacity side feeder (500,
1,500-sheet x 2) is installed
[Cassette 6]: When a side feeder (500-sheet x 3) or large capacity side feeder (500, 1,500-sheet x 2) is
installed
[Cassette 7]: When a side feeder (500-sheet x 3) or large capacity side feeder (500, 1,500-sheet x 2) is installed
Use the procedure below to select the paper source for the cover.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings, [
Cover.
3
Select the paper source to load cover paper.
4
Press [OK].
] and then [Change] of Paper Source for
Special Paper Action
When printing on Prepunched, Preprint, and Letterhead, punch-holes might not be aligned or the print direction
might be upside-down depending on how originals are set and the combination of copying functions. In such a
case, select [Adjust Print Direction] to adjust the print direction. When paper orientation is not important, select
[Speed Priority].
The table below lists the available settings and their details.
Item
Description
Adjust Print Direction
Adjust print direction. Print speed is a little slower. Select this item to
print on Prepunched, Preprint and Letterhead.
Speed Priority
Give the job speed top priority and disregard the paper orientation.
Select this item when paper orientation is not important.
9-11
9
Default Setting (System Menu)
If you select [Adjust Print Direction], load paper according to the steps below.
Example: copying on Letterhead
Original
Paper
Finished
Cassette
Multi Purpose Tray
Original
Paper
Finished
Cassette
Multi Purpose Tray
NOTE: When loading cover paper in a cassette or multi purpose tray, load the face, on which printing is
supposed to be done, upward.
Use the procedure below to specify the actions performed for special paper types.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings, [
Action.
3
Select [Adjust Print Direction] or [Speed Priority].
4
Press [OK].
Measurement
Select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions.
Use the procedure below to change the input units.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings] and then [Change] of Measurement.
3
Select [mm] for metric or [inch] for inch.
4
Press [OK].
9-12
] and then [Change] of Special Paper
Default Setting (System Menu)
Error Handling
Select whether to cancel or continue the job when an error has occurred. The possible errors and what to do for
the errors are as follows.
Duplexing Error
Select what to do when duplex printing is not possible for the selected paper sizes and media types.
Item
Description
1-sided
Printed in 1-sided
Display Error
Error message to cancel printing is displayed.
Finishing Error
Select alternative actions when finishing (stapling or offsetting) is not available for the selected paper size or
media type.
Item
Description
Ignore
The setting is ignored and the job is printed.
Display Error
Error message to cancel printing is displayed.
9
No Staple Error
Select what to do when staples run out during printing.
Item
Description
Ignore
Printing continues without stapling.
Display Error
Error message to cancel printing is displayed.
NOTE: This setting is displayed when an optional 1,000-sheet finisher or 4,000-sheet finisher is installed.
Finished Pages Exceeded
Select what to do when finishing (stapling or offsetting) capacity is exceeded during printing.
Item
Description
Ignore
Printing continues without finishing.
Display Error
Error message to cancel printing is displayed
NOTE: This setting is displayed when an optional 1,000-sheet finisher or 4,000-sheet finisher is installed.
9-13
Default Setting (System Menu)
Punch Waste Full Error
Select what to do when the punch waste box becomes full during printing.
Item
Description
Ignore
Printing continues without punching.
Display Error
Error message to cancel printing is displayed.
NOTE: This setting is displayed when an optional 4,000-sheet finisher and a hole punch unit are installed.
Paper Mismatch Error
Select what to do when the selected paper size or type does not match paper size or type loaded in the specified
paper source while printing from the computer by specifying the cassette or multi-purpose tray.
Item
Description
Ignore
The setting is ignored and the job is printed.
Display Error
Error message to cancel printing is displayed.
Inserted Paper Mismatch
Select what to do when it is detected that the cassette paper size setting does not match the actual paper size
that is fed.
Item
Description
Ignore
Detection does not take place and the job is printed.
Display Error
Error message to cancel printing is displayed.
Paper Jam before Staple
The page from which printing is resumed when a paper jam occurs during a job with stapling can be selected.
Item
Description
Resume at Top of
Page
Resume printing from the first page of the document.
Resume at Jammed
Page
Resume printing from the page where the jam occurred.
NOTE: This setting is displayed when an optional 1,000-sheet finisher or 4,000-sheet finisher is installed.
Skewed originals
When skewed originals while scanning, select whether to scan by ignoring the error or display an error.
Item
Description
Ignore
Detection does not take place and the job is scanned.
Display Error
Error message to cancel scanning is displayed.
NOTE: This setting is displayed when an optional document processor (dual scan DP) is installed.
9-14
Default Setting (System Menu)
Use the procedure below to specify the settings for error handling.
1
2
3
4
5
Press the System Menu key.
Press [Common Settings] and then [Next] of Error Handling.
Press [Change] at the error for which you wish to change the handling.
Select the error handling method in the selection screen for each of the errors and then press [OK].
The previous screen appears. To set the handling for a different error, repeat steps 3 and 4.
Paper Output
Select the output tray respectively for copy jobs, print jobs from Custom Box, computers, and FAX RX data. The
options are as follows.
Output Tray
Descriptions
Inner Tray*
Delivery on the Inner Tray of the machine.
Tray A, Tray B, Tray C
Delivery to trays A - C of the optional 4,000-sheet finisher.
Finisher Left Tray
Finisher TOP Tray
Delivery to the left tray or top tray of the optional 1,000-sheet finisher.
Right Tray
Delivery to the optional right job separator.
Job Separator Tray*
Delivery to the optional inner job separator.
Tray 1 to 7
Delivery to trays 1 to 7 in the optional mailbox (tray 1 is the top tray).
*
This cannot be selected when the optional document finisher is installed.
NOTE: The optional inner job separator, right job separator, 1,000-sheet finisher, and 4,000-sheet finisher are
required.
When [Heavy 3] (164 g/m2 - ) or higher is set in Paper Weight and Mailbox (Option) is set for the output
destination, the output destination is automatically changed to a tray that can be used.
FAX RX data output can be specified when the optional fax kit is installed.
IMPORTANT: If you want to enable the changed defaults immediately, move to the function screen and press
the Reset key.
Use the procedure below to select the output tray.
1
2
3
Press the System Menu key.
Press [Common Settings] and then [Next] of Paper Output.
Press [Change] of Copy/Custom Box, Printer, or FAX Port 1 or FAX Port 2.
NOTE: FAX Port 1 appears when the optional fax kit is installed.
If you have 2 optional fax kits installed, Fax Port 2 appears. You can specify the output tray for the second kit
(Dual FAX).
4
Select the Output Tray.
9-15
9
Default Setting (System Menu)
Orientation Confirmation
Select whether to display a screen for selecting the orientation of the originals to be placed on the platen when
using the following functions. (For more information, refer to page 4-9 for Original Orientation.)
•
Zoom (XY Zoom)
•
Page numbering
•
Duplex
•
Booklets
•
Margin/Centering originals
•
Staple/Punch (optional feature)
•
Border erase
•
2-sided/Book Original
•
Combine mode
•
Text Stamp
•
Memo mode
•
Bates Stamp
Use the procedure below to select the default Orientation Confirmation setting.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings] and [Change] of Orientation Confirmation.
3
Select the default for [Off] or [On].
4
Press [OK].
Color Toner Empty Action
Select whether printing is prohibited or the Print in Black and White setting is used for printing once the color
toner runs out.
Use the procedure below to specify the action performed when there is no color toner.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings], [
3
Select [Stop Printing] or [Print in Black & White].
4
Press [OK].
] and then [Change] of Color Toner Empty Action.
IMPORTANT: You cannot change the setting to black and white printing by selecting [Print in Black & White]
once the color toner runs out. If you want to use [Print in Black & White], specify the action before the color toner
runs out.
Once the color toner runs out, the machine continues printing in black and white up to 2,000 pages for 30/30
ppm and 35/35 ppm models, and 4,000 pages for 45/45 ppm and 55/50 ppm models in A4/Letter size.
Function Defaults
Defaults are the values automatically set after the warm-up is completed or the Reset key is pressed.
Set the defaults for available settings such as copying and sending. Setting the frequently-used values as
defaults makes subsequent jobs easier.
IMPORTANT: If you want to enable the changed defaults immediately, move to the function screen and press
the Reset key.
9-16
Default Setting (System Menu)
Original Orientation
Set the original orientation defaults. The available default settings are shown below.
Item
Description
Top Edge on Top
Select the original's top edge at the top.
Top Edge on Left
Select the original's top edge at the left.
Refer to page 4-9 for Original Orientation.
Use the procedure below to select the default orientation when originals are placed on the platen.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings], [
3
Select [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left] for the default.
4
Press [OK].
], [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change] of Original Orientation.
Original Image (Copy)
Select the default original document type for copying. The available default settings are shown below.
Item
Description
Text+Photo (Printer)
For mixed text and photo documents printed on this machine
originally.
Text+Photo (Magazine)
For mixed text and photos printed in a magazine, etc.
Photo (Printer)
For photos printed on this machine originally.
Photo (Magazine)
For photos printed in a magazine, etc.
Photo (Photo Paper)
For photos taken with a camera.
Text
Text (Fine Line)
Sharply renders pencil text and fine lines.
Graphic/Map (Printer)
For maps and diagrams printed on this machine originally.
Graphic/Map (Magazine)
For maps and diagrams printed in a magazine.
9-17
9
Default Setting (System Menu)
Use the procedure below to select the default quality setting for originals.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings], [
3
Select the default original document type.
4
Press [OK].
], [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change] of Original Image (Copy).
Org. Image (Send/Store)
Select the default original document type for sending and storing in a document box. The available default
settings are shown below.
Item
Description
Text+Photo
Text and photos together.
Photo
For photos taken with a camera.
Text
Sharply renders pencil text and fine lines.
Text (for OCR)
Image quality suitable for OCR software.
Use the procedure below to select the default quality setting for originals.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings], [
3
Select [Text+Photo], [Photo], [Text] or [Text (for OCR)] for the default.
4
Press [OK].
], [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change] of Org. Image (Send/Store).
Scan Resolution
Select the default scanning resolution. The options are 600x600dpi, 400x400dpi Ultra Fine, 300x300dpi,
200x400dpi Super Fine, 200x200dpi Fine, 200x100dpi Normal.
Use the procedure below to select the default resolution setting.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings], [
3
Select the default resolution.
4
Press [OK].
], [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change] of Scan Resolution.
9-18
Default Setting (System Menu)
Color Selection (Copy)
Select the default copying color mode setting. The available default settings are shown below.
Color mode
Description
Auto Color
Automatically recognize whether documents are color or black
and white.
Full Color
Scan document in full color.
Black & White
Scan document in black and white.
Use the procedure below to select the default color mode setting.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings], [
3
Select the default color setting.
4
Press [OK].
], [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change] of Color Selection(Copy).
Color Selection (Send/Store)
Select the default color mode for scanning documents. The available default settings are shown below.
Color mode
Description
Auto Color (Color/Gray)
Automatically recognize whether the document is color or black
and white, and scan color documents in Full Color and black and
white documents in Grayscale.
Auto Color (Color/B & W)
Automatically recognize whether the document is color or black
and white, and scan color documents in Full Color and black and
white documents in Black and White.
Full Color
Scan document in full color.
Grayscale
Scan document in grayscale for smoother and finer finish.
Black & White
Scan document in black and white. File size is smaller than Full
Color or Grayscale.
Use the procedure below to select the default color mode.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings], [
3
Select the default color mode.
4
Press [OK].
], [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change] of Color Select.(Send/Store).
9-19
9
Default Setting (System Menu)
File Format
Select the default file type to send the scanned originals. The available default settings are shown below.
Item
Description
PDF
Send files in PDF format.
TIFF
Send files in TIFF format.
JPEG
Send files in JPEG format.
XPS
Send files in XPS format.
High Comp. PDF
Send files in High Comp. PDF format (refer to page 6-16).
NOTE: Refer to page 6-14 for file formats.
Use the procedure below to select the default file format.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings], [
3
Select the default file format.
4
Press [OK].
], [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change] of File Format.
File Separation
Select the default file separation setting. The available default settings are shown below.
Item
Description
Off
No file separation performed (all the pages are compiled in one file).
Each Page
Each scanned page is created into a separate file.
NOTE: Refer to page 6-15 for file separation.
Use the procedure below to select the default file separation.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings], [
3
Select the default for [Off] or [Each Page].
4
Press [OK].
], [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change] of File Separation.
9-20
Default Setting (System Menu)
Backgrnd Density (Copy)
Set the default Backgrnd Density (Copy). The available default settings are shown below.
Item
Description
Off
Do not adjust background density.
Auto
Set to auto adjustment.
Manual (Darker 5)
Set to (Darker 5) in manual adjustment.
Use the procedure below to select the default Backgrnd Density (Copy).
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings], [
(Copy).
3
Select the default Backgrnd Density (Copy).
4
Press [OK].
], [Next] of Function Defaults, [
] and then [Change] of Backgrnd Density
BackgrndDens.(Send/Store)
Select the default background density for sending and storing in a document box. The available default settings
are shown below.
Item
Description
Off
Do not adjust background density.
Auto
Set to auto adjustment.
Manual (Darker 5)
Set to (Darker 5) in manual adjustment.
Use the procedure below to select the default BackgrndDens.(Send/Store).
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults, [
BackgrndDens.(Send/Store).
3
Select the default BackgrndDens.(Send/Store).
4
Press [OK].
] and then [Change] of
Prevent Bleed-thru (Copy)
Set the default Prevent Bleed-thru (Copy).
Item
Description
Off
Do not reduce show-through.
On
Reduce show-through.
9-21
9
Default Setting (System Menu)
Use the procedure below to select the default Prevent Bleed-thru (Copy).
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings], [
(Copy).
3
Set the default Prevent Bleed-thru (Copy).
4
Press [OK].
], [Next] of Function Defaults, [
] and then [Change] of Prevent Bleed-thru
Prevent Bleed(Send/Store)
Set the default Prevent Bleed(Send/Store).
Item
Description
Off
Do not reduce show-through.
On
Reduce show-through.
Use the procedure below to select the default Prevent Bleed(Send/Store).
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings], [
Store).
3
Set the default Prevent Bleed(Send/Store).
4
Press [OK].
], [Next] of Function Defaults, [
] and then [Change] of Prevent Bleed(Send/
Zoom
Select the enlarged/reduced default settings when paper size/sending size is changed after the originals are set.
The available default settings are shown below.
Item
Description
100%
Copy (send/save) at actual size (100%).
Auto
Automatically reduce or enlarge the originals to match the paper
size/ sending size.
Use the procedure below to select the default zoom setting.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings], [
3
Select the default zoom setting.
4
Press [OK].
], [Next] of Function Defaults, [
9-22
] three times and then [Change] of Zoom.
Default Setting (System Menu)
Border Erase Default
Set the default width to be erased as a border. The table below shows the measurement ranges that can be set.
Input units
Range
Inch
0 to 2" (in 0.01" increments)
Metric
0 mm to 50 mm (in 1 mm increments)
NOTE: Refer to page 4-18 and page 6-26 for Border Erase.
Use the procedure below to set the default border erase width.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings], [
3
Press [+] or [–] for the Border and Gutter width to erase.
], [Next] of Function Defaults, [
] and then [Change] of Border Erase Default.
You can use the numeric keys to enter the number directly.
4
Press [OK].
Border Erase to Back Page
Select the Border Erase Method for Back Page of a sheet. The table below shows the available settings.
Item
Description
Same as Front Page
Border Erase performed in the same setting as the front page
Do Not Erase
No Border Erase performed on the back page
NOTE: Refer to page 4-18 and page 6-26 for Border Erase.
Use the procedure below to specify the border erase setting for the back side of the original page.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings], [
Page.
3
Press [Same as Front Page] or [Do Not Erase].
4
Press [OK].
], [Next] of Function Defaults, [
9-23
] and then [Change] of Border Erase to Back
9
Default Setting (System Menu)
Margin Default
Set the default margin. The table below shows the measurement ranges that can be set.
Input units
Range
Inch
-0.75 to 0.75" (in 0.01" increments)
Metric
-18 mm to 18 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Use the procedure below to set the default margin width.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings], [
3
Use the [+] or [-] to enter the margin widths for Left/Right and Top/Bottom.
], [Next] of Function Defaults, [
] and then [Change] of Margin Default.
You can use the numeric keys to enter the number directly.
4
Press [OK].
Auto Image Rotation
Select the default Auto Image Rotation setting. The table below shows the available settings.
Item
Description
Off
No Auto Image Rotation performed.
On
Auto Image Rotation performed.
NOTE: Refer to page 4-44 for Auto Image Rotation.
Use the procedure below to set the default Auto Image Rotation settings.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings], [
3
Select the default for [Off] or [On].
4
Press [OK].
], [Next] of Function Defaults, [
] and then [Change] of Auto Image Rotation.
EcoPrint
Select the EcoPrint default. The table below shows the available settings.
Item
Description
Off
No EcoPrint performed.
On
EcoPrint performed.
NOTE: Refer to page 4-14 for EcoPrint.
9-24
Default Setting (System Menu)
Use the procedure below to set the default EcoPrint setting.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings], [
3
Select [Off] or [On] for the default.
4
Press [OK].
], [Next] of Function Defaults, [
] twice, and then [Change] of EcoPrint.
Toner SaveLevel(EcoPrint)
Select the default Toner SaveLevel(EcoPrint). One of five levels [1] - [5] can be set.
NOTE: Raising the level reduces toner consumption, but image quality falls.
IMPORTANT: If you want to enable the changed defaults immediately, move to the function screen and press
the Reset key.
Use the procedure below to select the default Toner SaveLevel(EcoPrint).
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings], [
SaveLevel(EcoPrint).
3
Select from [1] to [5] for the default Toner SaveLevel(EcoPrint).
4
Press [OK].
], [Next] of Function Defaults, [
] twice, and then [Change] of Toner
9
High Comp. PDF Image
Select the default quality setting for high compressed PDF files.
The table below shows the available settings.
Item
Description
Compression Ratio Priority
Compression Ratio is given priority with smaller file size.
Standard
Standard quality
Quality Priority
Image quality is given priority with larger file size.
Use the procedure below to select the default quality setting for high compression PDF files.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings], [
Comp. PDF Image.
3
Select the default for [Compression Ratio Priority], [Standard], or [Quality Priority].
4
Press [OK].
] and [Next] of Function Defaults. Press [
9-25
] twice and [Change] of High
Default Setting (System Menu)
Color TIFF Compression
Select the compression method for TIFF images handled on this machine. Use the procedure below to set the
default Color TIFF Compression setting.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings], [
TIFF Compression.
3
Select [TIFF V6] or [TTN2].
4
Press [OK].
] and [Next] of Function Defaults. Press [
] twice and then [Change] of Color
Image Quality (File Format)
Select the default PDF/TIFF/JPEG/XPS file quality. Five options are available from 1 Low Quality (High Comp.)
to 5 High Quality (Low Comp.).
NOTE: Higher quality will make the stored files larger.
Refer to page 6-14 for file formats.
Use the procedure below to select the default file quality setting.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings], [ ] and [Next] of Function Defaults. Press [
Image Quality (File Format).
3
Select the default image quality from [1] (Low Quality) to [5] (High Quality).
4
Press [OK].
] twice and then [Change] of
Collate/Offset
Set the defaults for Collate/Offset. The table below shows the available settings.
Item
Collate
Offset
Description
Off
Collate not performed.
On
Collate performed.
Off
Offset not performed.
Each Set
(Each Page)
Offset performed. (If [Off] is selected of Collate, it is
performed [Each Page].)
NOTE: Refer to page 3-15 for Collate/Offset.
9-26
Default Setting (System Menu)
Use the procedure below to set the default Collate/Offset settings.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings], [
3
Select the defaults for Collate and Offset respectively.
4
Press [OK].
], [Next] of Function Defaults. Press [
] twice and [Change] of Collate/Offset.
JPEG/TIFF Print
Select the image size (resolution) when printing JPEG or TIFF file. The table below shows the available settings.
Item
Description
Fit to Paper Size
Fit the image size to the selected paper size.
Image Resolution
Print at resolution of the actual image.
Fit to Print Resolution
Fit the image size to the print resolution.
Use the procedure below to set the default JPEG/TIFF Print settings.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings], [
Print.
3
Select the default for [Fit to Paper Size], [Image Resolution], or [Fit to Print Resolution].
4
Press [OK].
], [Next] of Function Defaults. Press [
] twice and [Change] of JPEG/TIFF
XPS Fit to Page
Reduces or enlarges the image size to fit to the selected paper size when printing XPS file.
Use the procedure below to set the default XPS Fit to Page settings.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings], [
Page.
3
Select [Off] or [On] for the default.
4
Press [OK].
], [Next] of Function Defaults. Press [
] twice and [Change] of XPS Fit to
Continuous Scan
Set the continuous scan defaults. The available default settings are shown below.
Item
Description
Off
Continuous scan not performed
On
Continuous scan performed
Refer to page 4-43 for Continuous Scan.
9-27
9
Default Setting (System Menu)
Use the procedure below to select the default settings for continuous scanning.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings], [
Scan.
3
Select [Off] or [On] for the default.
4
Press [OK].
], [Next] of Function Defaults, [
] twice and then [Change] of Continuous
PDF/A
Set the PDF file format used on the machine.
Use the procedure below to select the default PDF/A.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings], [
of PDF/A.
3
Select [Off], [PDF/A-1a] or [PDF/A-1b].
4
Press [OK].
] and [Next] of Function Defaults. Press [
] three times and then [Change]
File Name Entry
Set an automatically entered name (default) for jobs. Additional information such as Date and Time and Job No.
can also be set.
NOTE: Refer to page 4-48 and page 6-28 for name entry.
Use the procedure below to set the default file name.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings], [
Name Entry.
3
Press [File Name] to enter the file name in not more than 32 characters.
], [Next] of Function Defaults, [
] three times and then [Change] of File
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
4
Press [OK].
5
Press [Date and Time] to add the date/time to the job, or press [Job No.] to add the job number to the job.
The added information will be displayed in Additional Info.
6
Press [OK].
9-28
Default Setting (System Menu)
E-mail Subject/Body
Set the subject and body automatically entered (default subject and body) when sending the scanned originals
by E-mail. In addition, set the template for entering the body text. One of three templates can be set.
NOTE: Refer to Send as E-mail (E-mail Addr Entry) on page 3-24.
Use the procedure below to set the default e-mail subject and message body.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings], [
Subject/Body.
3
Press [Subject] to enter an E-mail subject not more than 60 characters.
], [Next] of Function Defaults, [
] three times, and then [Change] of E-mail
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
4
Press [OK].
5
Press [Body 1] and enter a maximum of 500 characters for the e-mail body template.
6
To register another template, press [Body 2] or [Body 3] and enter a maximum of 500 characters for the
e-mail body template.
7
Select the default body text from [Body 1] to [Body 3] in Default Template.
8
Press [OK].
9
Check that the entries are correct and press [OK].
9
Repeat Copy
Select the Repeat Copy default. The options are as follows. The table below shows the available settings.
Item
Description
Off
No Repeat Copy is performed.
On
Repeat Copy is performed.
NOTE: This setting is not displayed when the optional Data Security Kit is installed or the Repeat Copy job is
set to 0.
Refer to page 4-49 for Repeat Copy.
Use the procedure below to set the default Repeat Copy setting.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings], [
Repeat Copy.
3
Select the default for [Off] or [On].
4
Press [OK].
] and [Next] of Function Defaults. Press [
9-29
] three times and [Change] of
Default Setting (System Menu)
USB Keyboard Type
Set the type of USB keyboard that is connected.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings], [
3
Select [US-English], [US-English with Euro], [French] or [German].
4
Press [OK].
] and [Change] of USB Keyboard Type.
System Stamp
The following header, footer, and stamp settings can be selected in System Stamp Settings.
•
Basic
•
Printing Jobs
•
Sending Jobs
•
Storing Jobs
Basic
Select displayed stamp settings.
Text (Text Stamp)
Set a Text (Text Stamp). The text set here can be selected as a stamp template during sending.
Use the procedure below to set a Text (Text Stamp).
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings] > [
Stamp).
3
Select the key in which the print text will be registered, press [Add/Edit], and enter a maximum of 32
characters for the text string.
4
Press [OK].
] > [Next] in System Stamp > [Next] in Basic > [Add/Edit] in Text (Text
Font (Page #)
When page numbers are used, set the font sizes that can be set.
Use the procedure below to set a Font (Page #).
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings] > [
3
Press [Change] in Size 1 - Size 3, and set the font size.
4
Press [OK].
] > [Next] in System Stamp > [Next] in Basic > [Next] in Font (Page #).
9-30
Default Setting (System Menu)
Font (Bates Stamp)
When a bates stamp is used, set the font sizes that can be set.
Use the procedure below to set a Font (Bates Stamp).
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings] > [
3
Press [Change] in Size 1 - Size 3, and set the font size.
4
Press [OK].
] > [Next] in System Stamp > [Next] in Basic > [Next] in Font (Bates Stamp).
Font (Text Stamp)
When a text stamp is used, set the font sizes that can be set.
Use the procedure below to set a Font (Text Stamp).
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings] > [
Stamp).
3
Press [Change] in Size 1 - Size 3, and set the font size.
4
Press [OK].
] > [Next] in System Stamp > [Next] in Basic > [Change] in Font (Text
Printing Jobs
Configure settings for stamps when a document is printed.
After configuring the setting, return to the Copying Functions or Document Box (Printing a Document) screen
from the system menu, and press the Reset key.
Text Stamp
Select whether or not a text stamp is used.
Use the procedure below to set a Text Stamp.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings] > [
Stamp.
3
Select [Off] or [On].
4
Press [OK].
] > [Next] in System Stamp > [Next] in Printing Jobs > [Change] in Text
NOTE: When [On] is selected, the Text Stamp settings cannot be changed when printing.
Edit Text Stamp
Set the default text stamp.
Use the procedure below to Edit a Text Stamp.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings] > [
Stamp.
3
Press [Stamp] and enter a maximum of 32 characters for the text string, or select the text stamp to be
printed from the displayed templates.
] > [Next] in System Stamp > [Next] in Printing Jobs > [Change] in Edit Text
9-31
9
Default Setting (System Menu)
4
Press [Stamp Method] and set the stamp method for the text stamp.
The following settings can be selected.
Item
5
Description
Each Print Page
Stamp on each printed page.
Each Original Page
Stamp each page of the document.
Press [Position] and set the position of the printed text stamp.
Positions that can be selected are [Top Left], [Top Middle], [Top Right], [Middle Left], [Center], [Middle
Right], [Bottom Left], [Bottom Middle], and [Bottom Right].
6
Press [Font] and set font and display settings for the printed text stamp.
The following settings can be selected.
Item
7
Description
Size
Set the font size of the printed text stamp.
Style
Set the font style of the printed text stamp. [Bold] or [Italic] can be
set.
Font
Set the font of the printed text stamp. [Courier] or [Letter Gothic] can
be set.
Color
Set the color of the printed text stamp. [Black], [Cyan], [Magenta],
[Yellow], [Red], [Green], or [Blue] can be set.
Density
Set the density of the color of the printed text stamp.
Display Pattern
Set the display method of the printed text stamp. [Transparent],
[Clipping], or [Overwrite] can be selected.
Press [OK].
Bates Stamp
Select whether or not to set a Bates Stamp.
Use the procedure below to set a Bates Stamp.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings] > [
Stamp.
3
Select [Off] or [On].
4
Press [OK].
] > [Next] in System Stamp > [Next] in Printing Jobs > [Change] in Bates
NOTE: When [On] is selected, the Bates Stamp settings cannot be changed when printing.
9-32
Default Setting (System Menu)
Edit Bates Stamp
Set the default Bates Stamp.
Use the procedure below to set an Edit Bates Stamp
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings] > [
Stamp
3
Set the bates stamp to print.
Items that can be set are [Date], [User Name], [Serial Number], [Numbering], [Text 1], and [Text 2].
If you selected [Text 1] or [Text 2], press [Change] below and enter a maximum of 32 characters for the text
string.
4
If you selected [Date] for the bates stamp to be printed, press [Date Format] and set the date display format.
] > [Next] in System Stamp > [Next] in Printing Jobs > [Change] in Edit Bates
Items that can be set are [MM/DD/YYYY], [DD/MM/YYYY], and [YYYY/MM/DD]
5
If you set [Numbering] for the bates stamp to be printed, press [Numbering Default] and set the starting
sequence number (1 - 9999999).
6
Press [Position] and set the position of the printed bates stamp.
Positions that can be selected are [Top Left], [Top Middle], [Top Right], [Middle Left], [Center], [Middle
Right], [Bottom Left], [Bottom Middle], and [Bottom Right].
7
Press [Font] and select font and display settings for the Bates Stamp to be printed.
9
The following settings can be selected.
Item
8
Description
Size
Set the font size of the Bates Stamp to be printed.
Style
Set the font style of the Bates Stamp to be printed. [Bold] or [Italic]
can be set.
Font
Set the font of the Bates Stamp to be printed. [Courier] or [Letter
Gothic] can be set.
Color
Set the color of the Bates Stamp to be printed. [Black], [Cyan],
[Magenta], [Yellow], [Red], [Green], or [Blue] can be set.
Density
Set the density of the color of the Bates Stamp to be printed.
Display Pattern
Set the display method of the Bates Stamp to be printed.
[Transparent], [Clipping], or [Overwrite] can be selected.
Press [OK].
9-33
Default Setting (System Menu)
Sending Jobs
Configure stamp settings for sending documents.
After configuring the setting, return to the Sending Functions or Document Box (Sending Documents) screen
from the system menu, and press the Reset key.
Text Stamp
Select whether or not a text stamp is used.
Use the procedure below to set a Text Stamp.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings] > [
Stamp.
3
Select [Off] or [On].
4
Press [OK].
] > [Next] in System Stamp > [Next] in Sending Jobs > [Change] in Text
NOTE: When [On] is selected, the Text Stamp settings cannot be changed when sending.
Edit Text Stamp
Set the default text stamp.
Use the procedure below to Edit a Text Stamp.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings] > [
Stamp.
3
Press [Stamp] and enter a maximum of 32 characters for the text string, or select the text stamp to be
printed from the displayed templates.
4
Press [Position] and set the position of the printed text stamp.
] > [Next] in System Stamp > [Next] in Sending Jobs > [Change] in Edit Text
Positions that can be selected are [Top Left], [Top Middle], [Top Right], [Middle Left], [Center], [Middle
Right], [Bottom Left], [Bottom Middle], and [Bottom Right].
5
Press [Font] and set font and display settings for the printed text stamp.
The following settings can be selected.
Item
6
Description
Size
Set the font size of the printed text stamp.
Style
Set the font style of the printed text stamp. [Bold] or [Italic] can be set.
Font
Set the font of the printed text stamp. [Courier] or [Letter Gothic] can
be set.
Color
Set the color of the printed text stamp. [Black], [Cyan], [Magenta],
[Yellow], [Red], [Green], or [Blue] can be set.
Density
Set the density of the color of the printed text stamp.
Display Pattern
Set the display method of the printed text stamp. [Transparent],
[Clipping], or [Overwrite] can be selected.
Press [OK].
9-34
Default Setting (System Menu)
Bates Stamp
Select whether or not to set a Bates Stamp.
Use the procedure below to set a Bates Stamp.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings] > [
Stamp.
3
Select [Off] or [On].
4
Press [OK].
] > [Next] in System Stamp > [Next] in Sending Jobs > [Change] in Bates
NOTE: When [On] is selected, the Bates Stamp settings cannot be changed when sending.
Edit Bates Stamp
Set the default Bates Stamp.
Use the procedure below to set an Edit Bates Stamp
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings] > [
Stamp
3
Set the bates stamp to print.
] > [Next] in System Stamp > [Next] in Sending Jobs > [Change] in Edit Bates
Items that can be set are [Date], [User Name], [Serial Number], [Numbering], [Text 1], and [Text 2].
If you selected [Text 1] or [Text 2], press [Change] below and enter a maximum of 32 characters for the text
string.
4
If you selected [Date] for the bates stamp to be printed, press [Date Format] and set the date display format.
Items that can be set are [MM/DD/YYYY], [DD/MM/YYYY], and [YYYY/MM/DD]
5
If you set [Numbering] for the bates stamp to be printed, press [Numbering Default] and set the starting
sequence number (1 - 9999999).
6
Press [Position] and set the position of the printed bates stamp stamp.
Positions that can be selected are [Top Left], [Top Middle], [Top Right], [Middle Left], [Center], [Middle Right],
[Bottom Left], [Bottom Middle], and [Bottom Right].
9-35
9
Default Setting (System Menu)
7
Press [Font] and select font and display settings for the Bates Stamp to be printed.
The following settings can be selected.
Item
8
Description
Size
Set the font size of the Bates Stamp to be printed.
Style
Set the font style of the Bates Stamp to be printed. [Bold] or [Italic]
can be set.
Font
Set the font of the Bates Stamp to be printed. [Courier] or [Letter
Gothic] can be set.
Color
Set the color of the Bates Stamp to be printed. [Black], [Cyan],
[Magenta], [Yellow], [Red], [Green], or [Blue] can be set.
Density
Set the density of the color of the Bates Stamp to be printed.
Display Pattern
Set the display method of the Bates Stamp to be printed.
[Transparent], [Clipping], or [Overwrite] can be selected.
Press [OK].
Storing Jobs
Configure stamp settings for storing documents in removable memory.
After configuring the setting, return to the Document Box (Storing Documents) screen from the system menu,
and press the Reset key.
Text Stamp
Select whether or not a text stamp is used.
Use the procedure below to set a Text Stamp.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings] > [
Stamp.
3
Select [Off] or [On].
4
Press [OK].
] > [Next] in System Stamp > [Next] in Storing Jobs > [Change] in Text
NOTE: When [On] is selected, the Text Stamp settings cannot be changed when storing.
9-36
Default Setting (System Menu)
Edit Text Stamp
Set the default text stamp.
Use the procedure below to Edit a Text Stamp.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings] > [
Stamp.
3
Press [Stamp] and enter a maximum of 32 characters for the text string, or select the text stamp to be printed
from the displayed templates.
4
Press [Position] and set the position of the printed text stamp.
] > [Next] in System Stamp > [Next] in Storing Jobs > [Change] in Edit Text
Positions that can be selected are [Top Left], [Top Middle], [Top Right], [Middle Left], [Center], [Middle Right],
[Bottom Left], [Bottom Middle], and [Bottom Right].
5
Press [Font] and set font and display settings for the printed text stamp.
The following settings can be selected.
Item
6
Description
Size
Set the font size of the printed text stamp.
Style
Set the font style of the printed text stamp. [Bold] or [Italic] can be
set.
Font
Set the font of the printed text stamp. [Courier] or [Letter Gothic] can
be set.
Color
Set the color of the printed text stamp. [Black], [Cyan], [Magenta],
[Yellow], [Red], [Green], or [Blue] can be set.
Density
Set the density of the color of the printed text stamp.
Display Pattern
Set the display method of the printed text stamp. [Transparent],
[Clipping], or [Overwrite] can be selected.
Press [OK].
Bates Stamp
Select whether or not to set a Bates Stamp.
Use the procedure below to set a Bates Stamp.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings] > [
Stamp.
3
Select [Off] or [On].
4
Press [OK].
] > [Next] in System Stamp > [Next] in Storing Jobs > [Change] in Bates
NOTE: When [On] is selected, the Bates Stamp settings cannot be changed when storing.
9-37
9
Default Setting (System Menu)
Edit Bates Stamp
Set the default Bates Stamp.
Use the procedure below to set an Edit Bates Stamp
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings] > [
Stamp
3
Set the bates stamp to print.
] > [Next] in System Stamp > [Next] in Storing Jobs > [Change] in Edit Bates
Items that can be set are [Date], [User Name], [Serial Number], [Numbering], [Text 1], and [Text 2].
If you selected [Text 1] or [Text 2], press [Change] below and enter a maximum of 32 characters for the text
string.
4
If you selected [Date] for the bates stamp to be printed, press [Date Format] and set the date display format.
Items that can be set are [MM/DD/YYYY], [DD/MM/YYYY], and [YYYY/MM/DD]
5
If you set [Numbering] for the bates stamp to be printed, press [Numbering Default] and set the starting
sequence number (1 - 9999999).
6
Press [Position] and set the position of the printed bates stamp.
Positions that can be selected are [Top Left], [Top Middle], [Top Right], [Middle Left], [Center], [Middle Right],
[Bottom Left], [Bottom Middle], and [Bottom Right].
7
Press [Font] and select font and display settings for the Bates Stamp to be printed.
The following settings can be selected.
Item
8
Description
Size
Set the font size of the Bates Stamp to be printed.
Style
Set the font style of the Bates Stamp to be printed. [Bold] or [Italic]
can be set.
Font
Set the font of the Bates Stamp to be printed. [Courier] or [Letter
Gothic] can be set.
Color
Set the color of the Bates Stamp to be printed. [Black], [Cyan],
[Magenta], [Yellow], [Red], [Green], or [Blue] can be set.
Density
Set the density of the color of the Bates Stamp to be printed.
Display Pattern
Set the display method of the Bates Stamp to be printed.
[Transparent], [Clipping], or [Overwrite] can be selected.
Press [OK].
9-38
Default Setting (System Menu)
Manual Staple
The following settings can be configured in the manual staple settings.
•
Manual Staple
•
Staple Position
NOTE: When a 4,000-sheet finisher is not installed, these settings cannot be configured.
Manual Staple
Select whether or not to set the setting for Manual Staple. The table below shows the available settings.
Item
Description
Off
Manual stapling cannot be used.
On
Manual stapling can be used.
Use the procedure below to select the default setting for Manual Staple.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings] > [
3
Select the default setting for Manual Staple.
4
If you selected [On] in 3, set the time until manual stapling mode is automatically cancelled. The setting
range is 5 to 60 seconds (5-second increments).
5
Press [OK].
] > [Next] in Manual Staple > [Change] in Manual Staple.
Staple Position
Set the default Staple Position. The table below shows the available settings.
Item
Description
A4 Long Edge
Staple on the long side of A4 size.
Letter Long Edge
Staple on the long side of letter size.
Use the procedure below to select the default Staple Position.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings] > [
3
Select [A4 Long Edge] or [Letter Long Edge].
4
Press [OK].
] > [Next] in Manual Staple > [Change] in Staple Position.
9-39
9
Default Setting (System Menu)
Customize Status Display
Set the items that appear in the print job status screen. The table below shows the available settings.
Item
Description
Job Name
Display the job name.
User Name
Display the user name.
Printed Pages x
Copies
Display the number of pages of the print job and number of copies.
Use the procedure below to select the default Customize Status Display.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings] > [
3
Select [Change] in Printing Job Column 1 or Printing Job Column 2.
4
Select [Job Name], [User Name], or [Printed Pages x Copies].
5
Press [OK].
] > [Next] in Customize Status Display.
Low Toner Alert Level
Set the amount of remaining toner to alert low toner. The setting range is 5 to 100% (increments of 1%).
Selecting [Off] alerts you low toner when the amount of remaining toner becomes 5%.
The procedure for setting the Low Toner Alert Level is explained below.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings] > [
] > [Change] in Low Toner Alert Level.
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and password and then press [Login].
For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User (Local User List) on page
10-5 for the default login user name and password.
3
Press [Off] or [On].
4
If you selected [On], set the toner level at which notification takes place with [+], [-] or the numeric keys.
5
Press [OK].
9-40
Default Setting (System Menu)
Offset One Page Documents
Set whether one-page documents are sorted.
NOTE: This setting is displayed when an optional 1,000-sheet finisher or 4,000-sheet finisher is installed.
The table below shows the available settings.
Item
Description
Off
Does not sort one-page documents.
On
Sorts one-page documents.
The procedure is as follows.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings] > [
3
Press [Off] or [On].
4
Press [OK].
] > [Next] in Offset One Page Documents.
Display Jobs Log
9
Set Display Jobs Log.
The table below shows the available settings.
Item
Description
Show All
All users can view the job log.
Hide All
Only users with administrator privileges can view the job log.
NOTE: The fax log can be viewed regardless of the setting for this function.
The procedure is as follows.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings] > [
] twice > [Next] in Display Jobs Log.
NOTE: If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User (Local User List) on
page 10-5 for the default login user name and password.
3
Press [Show All] or [Hide All].
4
Press [OK].
9-41
Default Setting (System Menu)
Message Banner Print
This sets whether or not the confirmation screen appears before each sheet is printed when printing multiple
banner sheets.
NOTE: Select this setting when the optional banner tray is attached.
The table below shows the available settings.
Item
Description
Off
The confirmation screen is not displayed. (Paper is fed continuously.)
On
The confirmation screen is displayed before each sheet is printed.
The procedure is as follows.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings] > [
3
Press [Off] or [On].
4
Press [OK].
] twice > [Change] in Message Banner Print.
9-42
Default Setting (System Menu)
Copy
The following settings are available for copying functions.
•
Paper Selection …9-43
•
Auto Image Rotation Action …9-44
•
Auto Paper Selection …9-44
•
Auto % Priority …9-45
•
Reserve Next Priority …9-45
•
Paper Size for Small Original …9-45
•
Preset Limit …9-46
•
Quick Setup Registration …9-46
NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with
administrator privileges.
Paper Selection
Set the default paper selection. The table below shows the available settings.
Item
Description
Auto
Automatically select the cassette containing paper in the same size as
originals.
Default Paper Source
Select the paper source set by Default Paper Source (refer to page 99).
Use the procedure below to set the default paper selection.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Copy] and [Change] of Paper Selection.
3
Press [Auto] or [Default Paper Source].
4
Press [OK].
5
Move to the copy screen and press the Reset key.
9-43
9
Default Setting (System Menu)
Auto Image Rotation Action
Set whether the image is rotated when the orientation of the document to be printed is different from the
orientation of the paper.
NOTE: This function is only enabled when Auto Image Rotation for the copy function (page 4-44) is set to
[On].
The table below shows the available settings.
Item
Description
Unrotated
Manual Copy
If a paper source or zoom ratio is specified, the image is not rotated.
Apply All
Rotates all images.
Follow Image
Size
The image is rotated if the rotated image fits on the paper.
The procedure is as follows.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Copy] and [Change] of Auto Image Rotation Action.
3
Select [Unrotated Manual Copy], [Apply All], or [Follow Image Size].
4
Press [OK].
Auto Paper Selection
If [Auto] is selected for Paper Selection, set the paper size selection method when the zoom changes. The table
below shows the available settings.
Item
Description
Most Suitable Size
Select paper based on the current zoom and the size of the original.
Same as Original Size
Select paper that matches the size of the original, regardless the zoom.
IMPORTANT: If you want to enable the changed defaults immediately, move to the function screen and press
the Reset key.
Use the procedure below to specify the action performed for Auto Paper Selection.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Copy] and [Change] of Auto Paper Selection.
3
Press [Most Suitable Size] or [Same as Original Size].
4
Press [OK].
9-44
Default Setting (System Menu)
Auto % Priority
When a paper source of different size from the original is selected, select whether automatic zoom (reduce/
zoom) is performed. The table below shows the available settings.
Item
Description
Off
No zoom performed (copied in original size).
On
Automatic zoom performed as appropriate.
IMPORTANT: If you want to enable the changed defaults immediately, move to the function screen and press
the Reset key.
Use the procedure below to specify the automatic zoom priority.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Copy] and [Change] of Auto % Priority.
3
Select the default for [Off] or [On].
4
Press [OK].
Reserve Next Priority
Select the operation of the reserve copy and interrupt copy functions and for canceling jobs.
Use the procedure below to select the default Reserve Next Priority setting.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Copy] and [Change] of Reserve Next Priority.
3
Select the default for [Off] or [On].
4
Press [OK].
Paper Size for Small Original
Specify the paper size to be used for a case where the original is too small to be detected in the Auto Paper
Selection mode.
The procedure is as follows.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Copy] and [Change] of Paper Size for Small Original.
3
Select the paper size.
The following paper sizes can be selected:
Default Paper Source, A4, A4-R, A5-R, A6-R, B5, B5-R, B6-R, Letter, Letter-R, Statement-R
4
Press [OK].
5
Move to the copy screen and press the Reset key.
9-45
9
Default Setting (System Menu)
Preset Limit
Restrict the number of copies that can be made at one time. Options are 1-999 copies.
Use the procedure below to set the limit on the number of copies.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Copy] and [Change] of Preset Limit.
3
Press [+] or [–] or use the numeric keys to enter the limit for the number of copies.
4
Press [OK].
Quick Setup Registration
Select the copying functions to be registered for Quick Setup. Six keys of the Quick Setup screen are allocated
to typical functions but can be changed as necessary. Six items from the following options are available.
Paper Selection, Zoom, Staple/Punch, Density, Duplex, Combine, Collate/Offset, Original Image,
Original Size, Original Orientation, Continuous Scan, Color Selection, Background Density Adj.
NOTE:
Refer to Quick Setup Screen on page 3-53 for the Quick Setup steps.
Use the procedure below to register the Quick Setup functions.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Copy] and [Next] of Quick Setup Registration.
3
Press [Change] of the function to be registered in Quick Setup.
4
Select a key (1-6) allocated on the Quick Setup Registration screen. Press [Off] to delete a key from the
Quick Setup.
5
Press [OK]. If you overwrite the setting, a confirmation screen appears. Press [Yes].
9-46
Default Setting (System Menu)
Send
The sending settings allow you to specify the following sending function options.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Quick Setup Registration …9-47
Dest. Check before Send …9-47
Color Type …9-48
Entry Check for New Dest. …9-48
Default Screen …9-49
Send and Forward …9-49
NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with
administrator privileges.
Quick Setup Registration
Select the sending functions to be registered for Quick Setup. Six keys of the Quick Setup screen are allocated
to typical functions but can be changed as necessary.
Six items in the following options are available.
Original Size, 2-sided/Book Original, Sending Size, Original Orientation, File Format, Density, Original Image,
Scan Resolution, FAX TX Resolution, Color Selection, Zoom, Continuous Scan, Background Density Adj.
Use the procedure below to register the Quick Setup functions.
1
2
3
4
Press the System Menu key.
5
Press [OK]. If you overwrite the setting, a confirmation screen appears. Press [Yes].
9
Press [Send] and [Next] of Quick Setup Registration.
Press [Change] of the function to be registered in Quick Setup.
Select a key (1-6) allocated on the Quick Setup Registration screen. Press [Off] to delete a key from the
Quick Setup.
Dest. Check before Send
When performing sending jobs, display the confirmation screen of destinations after pressing the Start key.
The table below shows the available settings.
Item
Description
Off
Do not display the confirmation screen of destinations.
On
Display the confirmation screen of destinations.
NOTE: Refer to Confirmation Screen of Destinations on page 3-29 for the Quick Setup steps.
Use the procedure below to set the destination check before send.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Send] and then [Change] of Dest. Check before Send.
3
Select [Off] or [On].
4
Press [OK].
9-47
Default Setting (System Menu)
Color Type
Set the color type when you send color documents. The table below shows the available settings.
Item
Description
RGB
Send color documents in RGB.
sRGB
Allows you to match the color space for machines that support sRGB.
Selecting RGB displays the color profile values set on the machine.
Use the procedure below to set the color type.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Send] and then [Change] of Color Type.
3
Select [RGB] or [sRGB].
4
Press [OK].
Entry Check for New Dest.
When adding new destination, display the entry check screen to check the entered destination. The table below
shows the available settings.
Item
Description
Off
Do not display the entry check screen.
On
Display the entry check screen.
Use the procedure below to set entry check for new destination.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Send] and then [Change] of Entry Check for New Dest..
3
Select [Off] or [On].
4
Press [OK].
9-48
Default Setting (System Menu)
Default Screen
Use this procedure to set the default screen displayed when you press the Send key.
The table below shows the available settings.
Item
Detail
Destination
Displays the destination screen when the Send key is pressed
(screen for sending).
Address Book
Displays the address book when the Send key is pressed
Use the procedure below to set the default send screen.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Send] and then [Change] of Default Screen.
3
Press [Destination] or [Address Book].
4
Press [OK].
Send and Forward
You can set whether transmission copies are forwarded to a specified address when documents are sent. The
table below shows the available settings.
•
Forward
•
File Format
•
Destination
•
File Separation
•
Color Setting
•
E-mail Subject
•
Scan Resolution
•
FTP Encrypted TX
Forward
Set whether or not transmission copies are forwarded. The table below shows the available settings.
Item
Detail
Off
Do not forward transmission copies.
On
Forward transmission copies.
Use the procedure below to set the settings for Forward.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Send] > [Next] of Send and Forward > [Change] of Forward.
3
Select [Off] or [On].
4
Select the type of address to be specified as a forwarding destination and press [OK].
9-49
9
Default Setting (System Menu)
Destination
Set the address to which transmission copies are to be forwarded.
Use the procedure below to set the default Destination.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Send] > [Next] of Send and Forward > [Change] of Destination.
3
To specify the forwarding destination from the address book, press [Address Book]. To specify by entering
an e-mail address, press [E-mail Addr Entry]. To specify a folder, press [Folder Path Entry].
The procedure differs depending on the transmission method selected.
Specifying an address from the address book
Select the address to be specified as a forwarding destination.
NOTE: Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number. Refer to Specifying
Destination on page 3-40 for Address List.
Specifying by entering an e-mail address
Press [E-mail Address], enter the e-mail address, and press [OK].
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
Specifying a folder
Select [FTP] or [SMB], press [Host Name], [Path], [Login User Name], and [Login Password], enter each
item, and press [OK].
The table below explains the items to be entered.
Item
Description
Max. No. of
Characters
Host Name*
Host name or IP address of server or computer to be sent to.
64
Path
Path for the file to be stored (e.g., "User\ScanData")
128
Login User Name
User name server login
Domain Name\User Name (e.g., "abcdnet\james.smith")
64
Login Password
Password for server login
64
*
If you specify a port number other than the default (FTP: 21, SMB: 139), use the "Host name: port
number" format.
(e.g., FTPhostname:140)
To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ].
(e.g., [3ae3:9a0:cd05:b1d2:28a:1fc0:a1:10ae]:140)
9-50
Default Setting (System Menu)
To search for and register a folder on a PC on the network, press [Search SMB Host] or [Windows Network].
If you pressed [Search SMB Host], enter the "Domain/Workgroup" and "Host Name" to search the PCs on
the network.
If you pressed [Windows Network], all PCs on the network are searched. A maximum of 500 addresses can
be displayed. Select the host name (PC name) that you want to specify in the screen that appears, and
press [Next]. The login user name and login password entry screen appears. After you enter the login user
name and login password name, the shared folders appear. Select the folder that you want to specify and
press [Next]. The address of the selected shared folder is set.
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
Press [Connection Test] to check the connection to the server you chose. If the connection fails, check the
entries you made.
4
Check if the destination entry is correct and press [OK]. The destination is added to the Address Book.
Color Setting
Color settings for forwarded transmission copies can be set.
The settings are described below.
Item
Detail
Auto Color
(Color/Gray)
Automatically select full color or grayscale.
Auto Color
(Color/B & W)
Automatically select full color or black & white.
Full Color
Forward in full color.
Grayscale
Forward in grayscale.
Black & White
Forward in black & white.
NOTE: All jobs sent by Network FAX are forwarded in black & white.
Use the procedure below to set the default Color setting.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Send] > [Next] of Send and Forward > [Change] of Color setting.
3
Select the scanning color mode.
4
Press [OK].
9-51
9
Default Setting (System Menu)
Scan Resolution
The resolution of forwarded copies can be set. The options are 200x100dpi Normal, 200x200dpi Fine,
200x400dpi Super Fine, 300x300dpi, 400x400dpi Ultra Fine, 600x600dpi.
NOTE: Jobs sent by Network FAX are sent in the same resolution as the resolution for fax transmission.
Use the procedure below to set the default Scan Resolution.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Send] > [Next] of Send and Forward > [Change] of Scan Resolution.
3
Select the resolution.
4
Press [OK].
File Format
Select the file format of forwarded transmission copies. The table below lists the file formats and their details.
File Format
Adjustable range of image
quality
Color Setting
PDF*
1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to
5 High Quality (Low Comp.)
Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto
Color (Color/Black and White), Full
Color, Grayscale, Black and White
TIFF
1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to
5 High Quality (Low Comp.)
Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto
Color (Color/Black and White), Full
Color, Grayscale, Black and White
JPEG
1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to
5 High Quality (Low Comp.)
Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Full
Color, Grayscale
XPS
1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to
5 High Quality (Low Comp.)
Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto
Color (Color/Black and White), Full
Color, Grayscale, Black and White
High Comp.
PDF*
1 Compression Ratio Priority
to 3 Quality Priority
Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto
Color (Color/Black and White), Full
Color, Grayscale
*
The file format can be set to [PDF/A-1a] or [PDF/A-1b].
NOTE: When [High Comp. PDF] is specified, you cannot adjust the image quality.
You can use PDF encryption functions. For details, refer to the following PDF Encryption Functions.
9-52
Default Setting (System Menu)
Use the procedure below to set the default File Format.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Send] > [Next] of Send and Forward > [Change] of File Format.
3
Select the file format from [PDF], [TIFF], [JPEG], [XPS], and [High Comp. PDF].
When the color mode in scanning has been selected for Grayscale or Full Color, set the image quality.
If you selected [PDF] or [High Comp. PDF], you can specify encryption and PDF/A settings.
NOTE: If encryption is enabled, PDF/A settings cannot be specified.
4
Press [OK].
PDF Encryption Functions
If you have selected PDF or High Comp. PDF for file format, you can restrict the access level for displaying,
printing, and editing PDF's by assigning a secure password.
The items you can restrict the access level with are as follows.
Item
Value
Detail
Compatibility
Acrobat 3.0 or later,
Acrobat 5.0 or later
Select the version that is compatible with the PDF file.
Password to
Open
Document
Off, On
Enter the password to open the PDF file
Password to
Edit/Print
Document
Off, On
Enter the password to edit the PDF file
When you have entered the password to edit/print
document, you can specifically limit the operation.
When you send a PDF file, use the procedure below to encrypt the PDF file for transmission.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Send] > [Next] of Send and Forward > [Change] of File Format.
3
Press [PDF] or [High Comp. PDF], and [Encryption].
4
Press [
5
When you enter the password to open the PDF file, select [On] of Password to Open Document.
6
Press [Password], enter a password (up to 256 characters) and then press [OK].
] of Compatibility, select Acrobat 3.0 and later or Acrobat 5.0 and later.
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
7
Press [Confirmation] and enter the password again for confirmation. Then press [OK].
8
When you enter the password to edit the PDF file, select [On] of Password to Edit/Print Document.
9
In the same way as the entry of Password to Open Document, enter the password to change the PDF file.
9-53
9
Default Setting (System Menu)
10 Press [Detail].
11 Restrict the access level of the PDF file. Press [
] of Printing Allowed to select the item (the scope of limit).
The item to be displayed differs according to the version of Acrobat selected in Compatibility in step 4.
The table below shows the available settings.
Item
Detail
Not Allowed
Make the printing of PDF file impossible
Allowed (Low Resolution
only)*
Can print the PDF file only in low resolution
Allowed
Can print the PDF file in original resolution
*
Only displayed when [Acrobat 5.0 and later] is selected in Compatibility.
12 Press [
] of Changes Allowed, and select the item (the scope of limit). The item to be displayed differs
according to the version of Acrobat selected in Compatibility in step 4.
The table below shows the available settings.
Item
Detail
Not Allowed
Cannot change the PDF file
Inserting/Deleting/
Rotating Pages*
Can only insert, delete, and rotate the pages of the
PDF file
Commenting
Can only add commenting
Layout except extracting
Pages**
Can change the page layout except extracting the
pages of the PDF file
Any except extracting
Pages
Can conduct all operations except extracting the pages
of the PDF file
*
**
Only displayed when [Acrobat 5.0 and later] is selected in Compatibility.
Only displayed when [Acrobat 3.0 and later] is selected in Compatibility.
13 From Copying of Text/Images/Others, select [Disable] or [Enable].
The table below shows the available settings.
Item
Detail
Disable
Prohibit the copying of text and objects on the PDF file.
Enable
Can copy text and objects on the PDF file.
14 Press [OK].
File Separation
Set whether transmission copies are divided into multiple files before being forwarded.
9-54
Default Setting (System Menu)
Use the procedure below to set the default for File Separation.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Send] > [Next] of Send and Forward > [Change] of File Separation.
3
Press [Off] or [Each Page] to set File Separation.
4
Press [OK].
NOTE: A three-digit serial number such as abc_001.pdf, abc_002.pdf... is attached to the end of the file
name.
E-mail Subject
Set the subject of forwarded e-mails.
Use the procedure below to set the default E-mail Subject.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Send] > [Next] of Send and Forward > [Change] of E-mail Subject.
3
Enter a maximum of 60 characters for the e-mail subject and press [OK].
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
FTP Encrypted TX
Set whether transmission copies are encrypted before being forwarded.
Use the procedure below to set the default FTP Encrypted TX
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Send] > [Next] of Send and Forward > [Change] of FTP Encrypted TX.
3
Select [Off] or [On].
4
Press [OK].
NOTE: When the SSL setting is not enabled, FTP encryption transmission cannot be enabled.
9-55
9
Default Setting (System Menu)
Document Box/Removable Memory
The following settings are available for Document Box.
•
Custom Box …9-56
•
Default Setting …9-56
•
Job Box …9-56
•
Quick Setup Registration …9-57
Custom Box
Creates a new box, edits a box, or checks details of a box in the custom box, or deletes a box from the custom
box. For details, refer to Using a Custom Box on page 7-2.
Default Setting
Sets the time at which documents in the custom box are automatically deleted.
For details, refer to Setting the document deletion time on page 7-3.
Job Box
The following three operations can be done. For details, refer to each page shown below.
•
Quick Copy/Proof and Hold (page 7-15)
•
Repeat Copy (page 7-18)
•
Deleting a Form Stored (page 7-21)
9-56
Default Setting (System Menu)
Quick Setup Registration
Select the Storing in Box, Sending from Box, Printing from Box functions to be registered for Quick Setup. Six
keys of the Quick Setup screen are allocated to typical functions but can be changed as necessary.
The options are as follows.
Store File Quick Setup
Color Selection, Storing Size, Density, 2-sided/Book Original, Resolution, Zoom,
Original Orientation, Original Size, Original Image, Continuous Scan, Background Density Adj.
Print Quick Setup
Paper Selection, Collate/Offset, Staple/Punch, Duplex, Combine, Delete after Printed
Send Quick Setup
Sending Size, FAX TX Resolution, File Format, Delete after Transmitted
Use the procedure below to register the Quick Setup functions.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Document Box/Removable Memory] and [Next] of Quick Setup Registration.
3
Press [Next] of Store File, Print, or Send.
4
Press [Change] of the function to be registered in Quick Setup.
5
Select a key (1-6) allocated on the Quick Setup screen. Press [Off] to delete a key from the Quick Setup.
6
Press [OK]. If you overwrite the setting, a confirmation screen appears. Press [Yes].
9-57
9
Default Setting (System Menu)
Printer
Printing from computers, settings are generally made on the application software screen. However, the following
settings are available for configuring the defaults to customize the machine.
•
Emulation …9-58
•
Color Setting …9-59
•
Gloss Mode …9-59
•
EcoPrint …9-60
•
Toner SaveLevel(EcoPrint) …9-60
•
Override A4/Letter …9-60
•
Duplex …9-61
•
Copies …9-61
•
Orientation …9-62
•
Form Feed Timeout …9-62
•
LF Action …9-63
•
CR Action …9-63
•
Job Name …9-63
•
User Name …9-64
•
Paper Feed Mode …9-64
NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with
administrator privileges.
Emulation
Select the emulation for operating this machine by commands oriented to other types of printers.
Selection of emulation
The printer can emulate PCL 6, KPDL and KPDL(Auto).
Use the procedure below to select the emulation.
1
Press the System Menu Key.
2
Press [Printer] > [Change] of Emulation.
3
Select the desired emulation.
NOTE: If you selected [KPDL(Auto)], set Alternative Emulation, too. (Refer to page 9-59)
When you have selected [KPDL] or [KPDL(Auto)], set KPDL Error Report, too. (Refer to page 9-59)
4
Press [OK].
9-58
Default Setting (System Menu)
Setting of Alternative Emulation
When you have selected [KPDL(Auto)] as emulation mode, you can switch between KPDL and another
emulation mode (alternative emulation) automatically according to the data to print. The alternative emulation
you can set is [PCL6].
Use the procedure below to select the alternative emulation.
1
Press the System Menu Key.
2
Press [Printer] > [Change] of Emulation > [KPDL(Auto)] > [Alt Emulation].
3
Select the desired alternative emulation and then press [OK].
4
Press [OK].
Setting of KPDL error report
When an error has occurred during printing in KPDL emulation mode, set whether or not the error report is
output. The default setting is Off (not output).
Use the procedure below to specify the KPDL error report setting.
1
Press the System Menu Key.
2
Press [Printer] > [Change] of Emulation > [KPDL] or [KPDL(Auto)] > [KPDL Error Report].
3
Press [On] or [Off] and then press [OK].
4
Press [OK].
9
Color Setting
You can choose whether status reports are printed in color or black and white.
Use the procedure below to select the color setting.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Printer] and then [Change] of Color Setting.
3
Select [Color] or [Black & White].
4
Press [OK].
Gloss Mode
This feature can be used to set the glossiness of printed matter.
Use the procedure below to set the Gloss Mode.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Printer] and then [Change] of Gloss Mode.
3
Select [Off] or [On].
4
Press [OK].
9-59
Default Setting (System Menu)
EcoPrint
EcoPrint conserves toner when printing. This is recommended for test copies where lighter printing is not a
problem.
Use the procedure below to specify the EcoPrint setting.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Printer] and [Change] of EcoPrint.
3
Press [Off] or [On].
4
Press [OK].
Toner SaveLevel(EcoPrint)
Select the default Toner SaveLevel(EcoPrint). One of five levels [1] - [5] can be set.
NOTE: Raising the level reduces toner consumption, but image quality falls.
Use the procedure below to select the default Toner SaveLevel(EcoPrint).
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Printer] and [Change] of Toner SaveLevel(EcoPrint).
3
Select from [1] to [5] for the default Toner SaveLevel(EcoPrint).
4
Press [OK].
Override A4/Letter
Select whether to treat A4 size and Letter, which are similar in size, as the same size when printing. The table
below shows the available settings.
Item
Description
On
A4 and Letter are regarded as the same in size. The machine will
use whichever size is in the paper source.
Off
A4 and Letter are not regarded as the same in size.
Use the procedure below to specify the override A4/Letter setting.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Printer] and [Change] of Override A4/Letter.
3
Press [Off] or [On].
4
Press [OK].
9-60
Default Setting (System Menu)
Duplex
Select the binding orientation for duplex mode. The table below shows the available settings.
Item
Description
1-sided
No duplex mode
2-sided Bind
LongEdge
Longer edge bound
2-sided Bind
ShortEdge
Shorter edge bound
Finish
Use the procedure below to select a duplex setting.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Printer] and [Change] of Duplex.
3
Press [1-sided], [2-sided Bind LongEdge], or [2-sided Bind ShortEdge].
4
Press [OK].
9
Copies
Set the default number of copies, from 1 to 999.
Use the procedure below to specify the default number of copies.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Printer] and [Change] of Copies.
3
Press [+],[–] or the numeric keys to set the default number of copies.
4
Press [OK].
9-61
Default Setting (System Menu)
Orientation
Set the default orientation, Portrait or Landscape.
Portrait
Landscape
Printer
Printer
Use the procedure below to set the default orientation for printing.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Printer] and [Change] of Orientation.
3
Press [Portrait] or [Landscape].
4
Press [OK].
Form Feed Timeout
Receiving print data from the computer, the machine may sometimes wait if there is no information signaling
that the last page does not have any more data to be printed. When the preset timeout passes, the machine
automatically prints the document. The options are between 5 and 495 seconds.
Use the procedure below to set the form feed timeout.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Printer], [
3
Press [+] or [–] to set the Form Feed Timeout.
] and [Change] of Form Feed Timeout.
You can set the timeout delay in seconds.
You cannot use the numeric keys to enter this value.
4
Press [OK].
9-62
Default Setting (System Menu)
LF Action
Set the line feed action when the machine receives the line feed code (character code 0AH).
The table below shows the available settings.
Item
Description
LF Only
Only line feed performed.
LF and CR
Line feed and character return performed.
Ignore LF
No line feed performed.
Use the procedure below to specify an LF action.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Printer], [
3
Press [LF Only], [LF and CR] or [Ignore LF].
4
Press [OK].
] and [Change] of LF Action.
CR Action
Set the character return action when the machine receives the character return code (character code 0DH). The
table below shows the available settings.
Item
Description
CR Only
Only character return performed.
LF and CR
Character return and line feed performed.
Ignore CR
No character return performed.
Use the procedure below to specify a CR action.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Printer], [
3
Press [CR Only], [LF and CR] or [Ignore CR].
4
Press [OK].
] and [Change] of CR Action.
Job Name
Set whether the job name set in the printer driver is displayed.
Use the procedure below to set the Job Name.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Printer], [
3
Select [Off] or [On].
4
Press [OK].
] and [Change] of Job Name.
9-63
9
Default Setting (System Menu)
User Name
Set whether the user name set in the printer driver is displayed.
Use the procedure below to set the User Name.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Printer], [
3
Select [Off] or [On].
4
Press [OK].
] and [Change] of User Name.
Paper Feed Mode
While printing from the computer, select how to feed paper when the paper source and type are specified. The
table below shows the available settings.
Item
Description
Auto
Search the paper source that matches the selected paper size and type.
Fixed
Print on paper loaded in the specified paper source.
Use the procedure below to select the paper feed mode.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Printer], [
3
Press [Auto] or [Fixed].
4
Press [OK].
] and [Change] of Paper Feed Mode.
9-64
Default Setting (System Menu)
Report
Print reports to check the machine settings and status. Default settings for printing the result reports can also
be configured.
NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only print by logging in with administrator privileges.
Print Report
Printable reports are as follows.
Status Page
Check the information including current settings, memory installed, and optional equipment installed.
Status Page
Firmware Version
9
Font List
Check the font samples installed in the machine.
9-65
Default Setting (System Menu)
Network Status
Check the information including firmware version, network address and protocol.
Network Status Page
Firmware Version
Service Status
More detailed information is available than on the Status Page. Service personnel usually print the service status
pages for maintenance purpose.
Use the procedure below to print a report.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Report] and [Next] of Print Report.
3
Press [Print] for the report you want to print. A confirmation screen appears. Press [Yes]. Printing starts.
Send Result Report
Automatically print a report of transmission result when a transmission is complete. The table below shows the
available settings.
Item
Description
Off
No result report printed.
On
Result report automatically printed.
Transmitted images can also be attached to the FAX result report.
Error Only
Result report printed only when a transmission ends in an error. If two or more
destinations are registered, the reports are printed only for the destinations with
the errors. Transmitted images can also be attached to the FAX result report.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Report], [Next] of Result Report Setting, [Next] of Send Result Report and then [Change] of E-mail/
Folder.
3
Press [Off], [On], or [Error Only].
4
Press [OK].
9-66
Default Setting (System Menu)
Report for Job Canceled before Sending
Print a send result report when the job is canceled before being sent.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Report], [Next] of Result Report Setting, [Next] of Send Result Report and then [Change] of
Canceled before Sending.
3
Press [Off], [On].
4
Press [OK].
Sending Log History
You can send the log history by e-mail. You can either send it manually as needed or have it sent automatically
whenever a set number of jobs is reached.
NOTE: If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User (Local User List) on
page 10-5 for the default login user name and password.
Destination
Set the destination to which log histories are sent.
9
Use the procedure below to set the destination.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Report], [Next] of Sending Log History and then [Change] of Destination.
3
To enter a new e-mail address, press [E-mail Address Entry].
Press [E-mail Address], enter the destination e-mail address and then press [OK].
4
To set an address from the address book, press [E-mail Address Book].
5
Press [Address Book]. Select the destination from the address book and press [OK].
The selected e-mail addresses is displayed.
NOTE: For information on specifying destinations, refer to Specifying Destination on page 3-40.
You can view information on the selected destinations by pressing [Detail].
6
Press [OK].
9-67
Default Setting (System Menu)
Auto Sending
This function automatically sends the log history to the specified destinations whenever a set number of jobs
has been logged.
Use the procedure below to set automatic log history transmission.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Report], [Next] of Sending Log History and then [Change] of Auto Sending.
3
Press [On] and enter the number of jobs in the log history print by using [+]/[-] or the numeric keys. You can
enter any number between 1 and 1500.
4
Press [OK].
Send Log History
You can also send the log history to the specified destinations manually.
Use the procedure below to send the log history manually.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Report], [Next] of Sending Log History and then [Start] of Send Log History.
When the confirmation screen appears, press [Yes]. The log history is sent.
Job Log Subject
Set the subject automatically entered when sending log histories by e-mail.
Use the procedure below to set the subject.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Report], [Next] of Sending Log History and then [Change] of Job Log Subject.
3
Enter an e-mail subject not more than 60 characters.
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
4
Check that the entry is correct and press [OK].
9-68
Default Setting (System Menu)
Adjustment/Maintenance
Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance.
•
Density Adjustment …9-69
•
Background Density Adj. …9-70
•
Drum Refresh …9-70
•
Correcting Black Lines …9-71
•
System Initialization …9-71
•
Display Brightness …9-72
•
Silent Mode …9-72
•
Auto Color Correction...9-72
•
Color Registration...9-72
•
Calibration Cycle...9-74
•
Tone Curve Adjustment...9-75
•
Calibration...9-75
•
Developer Refresh...9-76
•
Laser Scanner Cleaning...9-76
•
First Print Position...9-76
NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with
administrator privileges.
9
Density Adjustment
The density for all copying and the density for all sending and storing in document boxes can be made darker
or lighter.
Use the procedures below to adjust the density.
Copy
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [
3
Press [Next] of Copy.
4
Press [-3] - [+3] (Lighter-Darker) to adjust density.
5
Press [OK].
], [Adjustment/Maintenance] and then [Next] of Density Adjustment.
Send/Box
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [
3
Press [Next] of Send/Box.
4
Press [-3] - [+3] (Lighter-Darker) to adjust density.
5
Press [OK].
], [Adjustment/Maintenance] and then [Next] of Density Adjustment.
9-69
Default Setting (System Menu)
Background Density Adj.
Adjust the density used when the background of documents is automatically adjusted.
Use the procedure below to set the Background Density Adj..
Copy (Auto)
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [
3
Press [Change] of Copy (Auto).
4
Press [-3] - [+3] (Lighter-Darker) to adjust background density.
5
Press [OK].
], [Adjustment/Maintenance] and then [Next] of Background Density Adj..
Send/Box (Auto)
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [
3
Press [Change] of Send/Box (Auto).
4
Press [-3] - [+3] (Lighter-Darker) to adjust background density.
5
Press [OK].
], [Adjustment/Maintenance] and then [Next] of Background Density Adj..
Drum Refresh
Refresh the drum when image blur or white spots appear on images in copies.
NOTE: Drum Refresh cannot be performed while printing. Execute Drum Refresh after the printing is done.
Use the procedure below to refresh the drum.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [
3
Press [Next] of Drum Refresh.
4
Press [Start] to perform Drum Refresh.
5
After Drum Refresh is completed, press [OK] to return to the Adjustment/Maintenance screen.
], [Adjustment/Maintenance].
9-70
Default Setting (System Menu)
Correcting Black Lines
Correct fine lines (streaks caused by contamination), which may appear on the image, when the optional
document processor is used.
Paper feed
direction
(streaks caused
by contamination)
The table below shows the available settings.
Item
Description
Off
No correction performed.
On(Low)
Correction performed.
On(High)
Select this item if a streak remains after using [On (Low)]. The reproduction of
fine lines on the original may becomes lighter than when using [On (Low)].
Use the procedure below to specify the setting for correcting fine black lines.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [
3
Press [Off], [On(Low)] or [On(High)].
4
Press [OK].
], [Adjustment/Maintenance] and then [Change] of Correcting Black Line.
System Initialization
Initialize the hard disk installed on the machine to return it to the factory defaults..
Refer to System Initialization on page 9-95 about the initialization procedures.
9-71
9
Default Setting (System Menu)
Display Brightness
Set the brightness of the touch panel.
Use the procedure below to adjust the display brightness.
1
2
3
4
Press the System Menu key.
Press [
], [Adjustment/Maintenance] and then [Change] of Display Brightness.
Press [1] - [4] (Darker- Lighter) to adjust brightness.
Press [OK].
Silent Mode
Make the machine run more quietly. Select this mode when the running noise is uncomfortable.
Use the procedure below to set Silent mode.
1
2
3
Press the System Menu key.
4
Press [OK].
Press [
], [Adjustment/Maintenance] and then [Change] of Silent Mode.
Press [Off] or [On].
NOTE: When [On] is selected, preparation for the next printing may take longer.
Auto Color Correction
This setting allows you to adjust the detection level used by the machine to determine whether the original is
color or black and white in Auto Color Selection Mode. Setting a lower value will result in more originals being
identified as color, while a larger value will tend to increase the number of originals being identified as black and
white.
Use the procedure below to set the Auto Color Detection Level.
1
2
3
4
Press the System Menu key.
Press [
], [Adjustment/Maintenance], [
] and then [Change] of Auto Color Correction.
Press one of keys [1] to [5] (Color - B & W) to set the detection level.
Press [OK].
Color Registration
When first installing the machine or moving it to a new location, color drift during printing may occur. Use this
function to correct the color position of each of cyan, magenta and yellow to resolve color drift.
Auto registration and manual registration are available for Color Registration. Color drift can be largely corrected
through auto registration. However, if it is not resolved or to perform more detailed settings, use the manual
registration.
NOTE: To perform color registration, verify that either Letter or A4 paper is loaded into a cassette.
IMPORTANT: Before performing color registration, be sure to perform calibration (see page 9-75). If color drift
remains, perform color registration. By performing color registration without performing calibration, the color drift
will be resolved once, however, it may cause the serious color drift later.
9-72
Default Setting (System Menu)
Auto Correction
Follow the steps below to automatically correct color drift.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [
3
Press [Next] in Auto > [Start]. A chart is printed.
4
As shown in the illustration, place the printed side down on the
platen with the edge with the arrows toward the back.
5
Press [Start] to scan the chart.
6
When scanning is finished, color printing position correction starts.
7
When color printing position correction ends, press [OK].
], [Adjustment/Maintenance], [
] and then [Next] of Color Registration.
Manual Correction
To perform more detailed correction, follow the steps below.
1
Display the Color Registration screen as explained in steps 1 and 2 of Auto Correction.
2
Press [Next] in Manual.
3
Press [Print] of Chart. A chart is printed.
On the chart, for each of M (magenta), C (cyan) and Y (yellow), charts for H-1 to 7 and V-1 to 5 are printed.
Chart Example
9-73
9
Default Setting (System Menu)
4
Find the location on each chart where 2 lines most closely match.
If this is the 0 position, registration for that color is not required. For
the illustration, B is the appropriate value.
From charts V-1 to V-5, read only the values from V-3 (center).
5
Press [Next] of Registration.
6
Press [Change] for the chart to be corrected.
7
Press [+] or [-] to enter the values read from the chart and press
[OK].
Press [+] to increase the value from 0 to 9. To decrease, press [-].
By pressing [-], the value changes from 0 to alphabetic letters, going from A to I. To move in the reverse
direction, press [+].
You cannot use the numeric keys to enter these values.
8
Repeat steps 6 and 7 to enter the registration values for each chart.
9
Press [Start] after all values have been entered. Color registration begins.
10 Press [OK] after color registration is complete.
Calibration Cycle
After Auto Clear has been activated, or during printing or while processing Color Registration, Calibration...
Remaining: xx seconds may be displayed. While this message is displayed, the machine makes adjustments to
maintain image quality. Wait until the message disappears.
NOTE: If [Custom] appears in the setting items, the setting cannot be changed.
Set the calibration cycle here. The setting items are as follows.
Item
Description
Auto
Automatically sets the cycle for calibration.
Short
Sets a short calibration cycle and increases the number of times
performed, with priority to image quality.
Standard
Sets a standard calibration cycle, compromising between image
quality and downtime for processing.
Long
Sets a long calibration cycle and decreases the number of times
performed, to ensure minimal downtime.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [
3
Select [Auto], [Short], [Standard] or [Long].
4
Press [OK].
], [Adjustment/Maintenance], [
] and then [Change] of Calibration Cycle.
9-74
Default Setting (System Menu)
Tone Curve Adjustment
After prolonged use, or from the effects of surrounding temperature or humidity, the hue of printed color output
may shift or color drift may occur. Use this function to correct color settings when the color of a finished copy
does not match the original. Perform calibration before using tone curve adjustment. Use tone curve adjustment
when the color is not enhanced even after performing calibration (see page 9-75).
NOTE: To perform tone curve adjustment, verify that either Letter or A4 paper is loaded into a cassette.
A total of 3 pattern pages (No. 1 to 3) are printed during adjustment. The printed patterns are read sequentially
during the adjustment.
Use the procedure below for normal adjustment.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [
3
Press [Start]. A pattern is printed.
], [Adjustment/Maintenance], [
] and then [Next] of Tone Curve Adjustment.
Check that the number "1" is printed at the bottom of the pattern.
4
As shown in the illustration, place the printed side down on the
platen with the edge with the arrows toward the back.
5
Press [Start]. The pattern is read and adjustment begins.
The second pattern is output.
6
Check that the number "2" (to "3") is printed at the bottom of the
pattern and repeat steps 4 to 6 twice to read patterns 2 and 3 in
sequence.
7
Press [OK] in the adjustment end confirmation screen.
Calibration
After prolonged use, or from the effects of surrounding temperature or humidity, the hue of printed color output
may shift or color drift may occur. Using this function enables printing in the most appropriate color by adjusting
hue and color drift in detail. Use tone curve adjustment (see page 9-75) when the color is not enhanced even
after performing calibration. If the hue and color are not enhanced, use color registration (see page 9-72).
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [
3
Press [Start]. Calibration begins.
4
Press [OK] after Calibration is complete.
], [Adjustment/Maintenance], [
] and then [Next] of Calibration.
9-75
9
Default Setting (System Menu)
Developer Refresh
When the printing is too light or incomplete, even though there is enough toner, refresh the developer.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [
3
Press [Start]. Developer Refresh begins.
], [Adjustment/Maintenance], [
] and then [Next] of Developer Refresh.
NOTE: Waiting time may be longer when the toner is refilled during developer refresh.
4
Press [OK] after Developer Refresh is complete.
Laser Scanner Cleaning
If white or color streaks appear on images, perform Laser Scanner Cleaning.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [
3
Press [Start]. Laser Scanner Cleaning begins.
4
Press [OK] after Laser Scanner Cleaning is complete.
], [Adjustment/Maintenance], [
] and then [Next] of Laser Scanner Cleaning.
First Print Position
Using this function speeds up either of the first print time of black and white printing or color printing by changing
the default start position of the first print. In addition, the machine can automatically detect the appropriate
position depending on your usage.
Item
Description
Standard
Default of the first print time.
Black & White Priority
Speed up the first print time of black and white printing.
Color Priority
Speed up the first print time of color printing.
Auto
Automatically detects the appropriate position depending on your usage.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [
3
Select [Standard], [Black & White Priority], [Color Priority] or [Auto].
4
Press [OK].
], [Adjustment/Maintenance], [
] and then [Change] of First Print Position.
9-76
Default Setting (System Menu)
Date/Timer
Date/Timer settings include:
•
Date/Time …9-77
•
Date Format …9-77
•
Time Zone …9-78
•
Auto Panel Reset …9-78
•
Low Power Timer …9-79
•
Auto Sleep …9-79
•
Error Clear Timer …9-80
•
Interrupt Clear Timer …9-81
•
Error Job Skip …9-81
•
Sleep Act. (Job Separator) …9-82
NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with
administrator privileges. If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter
a login user name and password, and press [Login]. Refer to Adding a User (Local User List) on page 10-5 for
the default login user name and password.
Date/Time
Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine. If you perform Send as E-mail, the date and
time set here will be displayed on the header.
NOTE: Be sure to set Time Zone before the Date/Time setup.
Use the procedure below to set the date and time.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [
3
Press [+] or [–] to enter the date and time respectively.
4
Press [OK].
], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Date/Time.
NOTE: If you try to change the date/time when a trial application (page 9-114) is running, the If you change
Date/Time setting, trial functions will be unavailable. Are you sure? message is displayed. To change the date/
time, press [Yes].
Date Format
Select the display format of year, month, and date. The year is displayed in Western notation.
Use the procedure below to select the date format.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [
], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Date Format.
9-77
9
Default Setting (System Menu)
3
Select [MM/DD/YYYY], [DD/MM/YYYY], or [YYYY/MM/DD] and press [OK].
Time Zone
Set the time difference in the location you are from GMT.
Use the procedure below to set the time difference.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [
3
Select the location.
], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Time Zone.
NOTE: Press [
4
] or [
] to select the location.
Press [Off] or [On] of Summer Time and press [OK].
NOTE: If you select a region that does not utilize summer time, the summer time setting screen will not appear.
Auto Panel Reset
If no jobs are run for a certain period of time, automatically reset settings and return to the default setting.
NOTE: Refer to page 9-16 for the default settings.
Auto Panel Reset
Select to use Auto Panel Reset or not.
Use the procedure below to specify the auto panel reset setting.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [
3
Press [Off] or [On].
4
Press [OK].
], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Auto Panel Reset.
9-78
Default Setting (System Menu)
Panel Reset Timer
If you select [On] for Auto Panel Reset, set the amount of time to wait before Auto Panel Reset. Options are
between 5 and 495 seconds (every five seconds).
NOTE: If you select [Off] for Auto Panel Reset, the time display does not appear.
Use the procedure below to set the reset time.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [
3
Press [+] or [–] to enter the time until Auto Panel Reset is turned on.
], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Panel Reset Timer.
You cannot use the numeric keys to enter this value.
4
Press [OK].
Low Power Timer
You can specify the amount of time to wait before Auto Low Power Mode.
Specify a value from 1 - 240 minutes (1 minute increments).
For more information on Low Power Mode, refer to the Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode on page 2-9.
Use the procedure below to set the Low Power Mode.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [
3
Press [+],[–] or the numeric keys to enter the time until Low Power Mode is turned on.
4
Press [OK].
], [Date/Timer] and then [Low Power Timer].
Auto Sleep
If no job runs for a certain period of time, automatically enter Sleep Mode. Refer to Sleep and Auto Sleep on
page 2-10 for Sleep.
Auto Sleep
Select whether to use Auto Sleep or not.
NOTE: Time remaining before Auto Sleep can be modified as necessary.
Use the procedure below to specify the auto sleep setting.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [
3
Press [Off] or [On].
4
Press [OK].
], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Auto Sleep.
9-79
9
Default Setting (System Menu)
Sleep Timer
Set the amount of time to wait before Auto Sleep. Options are between 1 and 240 minutes (every one minute).
NOTE: If you select [Off] for Auto Sleep, the time display does not appear.
Use the procedure below to set the Auto Sleep time.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [
3
Press [+] and [–] or the numeric keys to enter the time until Auto Sleep is turned on.
4
Press [OK].
], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Sleep Timer.
Auto Error Clear
If an error occurs during printing, the print job stops to wait for the next step to be taken by the user. In the Auto
Error Clear mode, automatically clear the error after a set amount of time elapses. For details, refer to
Responding when Error Messages, on page 12-8.
Auto Error Clear
Select whether to use Auto Error Clear or not.
Use the procedure below to specify the auto error clear setting.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [
3
Press [Off] or [On].
4
Press [OK].
], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Auto Error Clear.
Error Clear Timer
If you select [On] for Auto Error Clear, set the amount of time to wait before automatically clearing errors. Options
are between 5 and 495 seconds (every five seconds).
NOTE: If you select [Off] for Auto Error Clear, the time display does not appear.
Use the procedure below to set the automatic error clear delay.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [
3
Press [+] or [–] to enter the time until printing restarts.
], [Date/Timer], [
] and then [Change] of Error Clear Timer.
You cannot use the numeric keys to enter this value.
4
Press [OK].
9-80
Default Setting (System Menu)
Interrupt Clear Timer
Set the period after which the machine reverts to Normal mode when it has been set to Interrupt Copy mode
and then left unused. Any period between 5 and 495 seconds (in five-second increments) can be set.
The procedure for setting the interrupt clear timer is explained below.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [
3
Press [+] or [-] to enter the time for the interrupt clear timer.
4
Press [OK].
], [Date/Timer], [
] and then [Change] of Interrupt Clear Timer.
Error Job Skip
Set whether a job for which a "Add paper in cassette #" or "Add paper in Multi Purpose tray" error occurred when
the job was started is automatically skipped after a set period of time elapses. The period of time can be set
within the range 5 to 90 seconds (increments of 5 seconds).
NOTE: When a job is skipped, it is moved to the end of the job queue.
The procedure for setting the Error Job Skip is explained below.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [
3
Press [Off] or [On].
4
If you selected [On], set the time until the job is skipped with [+] or [-].
5
Press [OK].
], [Date/Timer], [
] and then [Change] of Error Job Skip.
9-81
9
Default Setting (System Menu)
Sleep Act. (Job Separator)
When the optional Inner Job Separator (JS-732) is attached and printed output remains on the job separator
tray, the busy light stays lit until the output is removed. This setting determines whether the machine enters
Sleep Mode after a certain period of time when in this state.
NOTE: This appears when the optional Inner Job Separator (JS-732) is attached and the Auto Sleep setting
(page 9-79) is set to [On].
The table below shows the available settings.
Item
Description
Sleep Priority
Sleep mode is entered after a set period of time and the busy light turns
off.
Indicator Priority
Sleep mode is not entered after the set period of time and the busy light
stays on until the output is removed.
The procedure is as follows.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [
3
Press [Sleep Priority] or [Indicator Priority].
4
Press [OK].
], [Date/Timer], [
] and then [Change] of Sleep Act. (Job Separator).
9-82
Default Setting (System Menu)
Edit Destination (Address Book/Adding One Touch Keys)
Save frequently used destinations to the Address Book or One Touch Keys. The saved destinations can be
changed. The destinations are available for Send as E-mail, Send to Folder, and Fax Transmission (optional).
Adding a Destination (Address Book)
Add a new destination to the Address Book. There are two registering methods, contacts and groups. When
adding a group, enter the group name and select group members from the Address Book.
NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only edit destinations in the Address Book by logging in
with administrator privileges.
Contact
A maximum of 2,000 contact addresses can be registered. Each address can include the information such as
destination name, E-mail address, FTP server folder path, SMB folder path, and FAX No. (optional).
Use the procedure below to register a new individual contact.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Edit Destination], [Add/Edit] of Address Book, [Add], [Contact] and then [Next].
3
To specify the address number, press [Change] in Address Number.
4
Press [+],[–] or numeric keys to enter a particular Address Number (1-2500).
To have the number assigned automatically, enter “0000”.
NOTE: Address Number is an ID for a destination. You can select any available number out of 2,000 numbers
for contacts and 500 numbers for groups.
If you specify an address number that is already in use, an error message appears when you press [Save] and
the number cannot be registered. If you set “0000” as the address number, the address is registered under the
lowest available number.
5
Press [OK]. The screen shown in step 3 reappears.
6
Press [Change] of Name.
7
Enter the destination name (up to 32 characters) to be displayed on the Address Book and press [OK]. The
screen shown in step 3 reappears.
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
8
Press [E-mail] to add an e-mail address, [SMB] to add a folder on the computer, or [FTP] to add an FTP
folder.
The procedure differs depending on the transmission method selected.
9-83
9
Default Setting (System Menu)
E-mail Address
Press [Change] of E-mail Address, enter the E-mail address and press [OK].The table below explains the
items to be entered.
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
The Folder (FTP) Address
Press [Change] of Host Name, Path, Login User Name and Login Password, enter the information for each
item and press [OK].
The table below explains the items to be entered.
Max. No. of
Characters
Item
Description
Host Name*
FTP server host name or IP address
64
Path
Path for the file to be stored (e.g., "User\ScanData")
If no path is entered, the file is stored in the home directory.
128
Login User Name
User name FTP server login
64
Login Password
Password for FTP server login
64
*
If you specify a port number other than the default (21), use the "Host name: port number" format.
(e.g., FTPhostname:140)
To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ].
(e.g., [3ae3:9a0:cd05:b1d2:28a:1fc0:a1:10ae]:140)
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
Press [Connection Test] to check the connection to the FTP server you chose. If the connection fails, check the
entries you made.
9-84
Default Setting (System Menu)
The Folder (SMB) Address
Press [Change] of Host Name, Path, Login User Name and Login Password, enter the information for each
item and press [OK].
The table below explains the items to be entered.
Item
Description
Max. No. of
Characters
Host Name*
Host name or IP address of the sending computer
64
Path
Path to the folder used to save files (e.g., “User\ScanData”)
128
Login User Name
User name for folder access
For example, abcdnet\james.smith
64
Login Password
Password for folder access
64
*
If you specify a port number other than the default (139), use the “Host name: port number” format.
(e.g., SMBhostname:140)
To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ].
(e.g., [3ae3:9a0:cd05:b1d2:28a:1fc0:a1:10ae]:140)
To search for and register a folder on a PC on the network, press [Search SMB Host] or [Windows Network].
If you pressed [Search SMB Host], enter the "Domain/Workgroup" and "Host Name" to search the PCs on
the network.
If you pressed [Windows Network], all PCs on the network are searched. A maximum of 500 addresses can
be displayed. Select the host name (PC name) that you want to specify in the screen that appears, and
press [Next]. The login user name and login password entry screen appears. After you enter the login user
name and login password name, the shared folders appear. Select the folder that you want to specify and
press [Next]. The address of the selected shared folder is set.
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
Press [Connection Test] to check the connection to the computer you chose. If the connection fails, check the
entries you made.
9
Check if the destination entry is correct and press [Save]. The destination is added to the Address Book.
To register the registered address in a one-touch key, press [Yes] in the pop-up screen that appears after [Save]
is pressed.
NOTE: To register a new One Touch Key, refer to Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch
Key) on page 9-87.
9-85
9
Default Setting (System Menu)
Group
Compile two or more contacts into a group. Designations in the group can be added at the same time. When
adding a group, a maximum of 500 groups can be added in the Address Book.
NOTE: Before adding a group in the Address Book, the contacts to be included in the group must be added
first. Up to 100 destinations for the e-mail, 500 destinations for the FAX, and a total of 10 destinations for the
FTP and SMB can be registered per group.
Use the procedure below to register a group.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Edit Destination], [Add/Edit] of Address Book, [Add], [Group] and then [Next].
3
To specify the address number, press [Change] in Address Number.
4
Use [+]/[-] or the numeric keys to enter an address number (1 to 2500).
To have the number assigned automatically, set "0000".
NOTE: Address Number is an ID for a group. You can select any available number out of 2,000 numbers for
contacts and 500 numbers for groups.
If you specify an address number that is already in use, an error message appears when you press [Save] and
the number cannot be registered. If you set "0000" as the address number, the address is registered under the
lowest available number.
5
Press [OK]. The Add Group screen reappears.
6
Press [Change] of Name.
7
Enter the group name displayed on the Address Book not more than 32 characters.
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
8
Press [Member].
9
Press [Add].
10 Select destinations (contacts) to add to the group.
NOTE: Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number. Refer to Specifying
Destination on page 3-40 for Address List.
11 Press [OK].
If you have more destinations to add, repeat Steps 9 to 11.
12 Check if the selected destination was added to the group and press [Save]. Now the group is added to the
Address Book.
To register the registered address in a one-touch key, press [Yes] in the pop-up screen that appears after [Save]
is pressed.
NOTE: To register a new One Touch Key, refer to Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch
Key) on page 9-87.
9-86
Default Setting (System Menu)
Editing a Destination
Edit/delete the destinations (Contacts) you added to the Address Book.
Use the procedure below to edit a destination.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Edit Destination] and then [Add/Edit] of Address Book.
3
Select a destination or group to edit.
NOTE: Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number. Refer to Specifying
Destination on page 3-40 for Address List.
4
Press [Detail].
The procedure differs depending on the details to be edited.
Editing a Contact
1
Change Address Number, Name and destination type and address. Refer to Contact on page 9-83 for
the details.
2
After you have completed the changes, press [Save].
3
Press [Yes] in the change confirmation screen to register the changed destination.
9
Editing a Group
1
Change Address Number and Name. Refer to Group on page 9-86 for the details.
2
Press [Member].
3
To delete any destination from the group, select the destination and press [Delete]. Press [Yes] on the
screen to confirm the deletion.
4
After you have completed the changes, press [Save].
5
Press [Yes] in the change confirmation screen to register the changed group.
Deleting a Contact or Group
Repeat Steps 1 to 3, press [Delete]. Press [Yes] on the screen to confirm the deletion. Deletion is performed.
Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch Key)
Add a new destination (contact or group). A maximum of 1,000 destinations can be registered.
NOTE: Refer to Specifying Destination on page 3-40 for use of One Touch Key.
Use the procedure below to register a new destination under a One Touch key.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Edit Destination] and [Add/Edit] of One Touch Key.
9-87
Default Setting (System Menu)
3
Select a One Touch Key number (0001 to 1000) for the destination, and press [Add/Edit]. Pressing Quick
No. Search key or [No.] enables direct entry of a One Touch Key number.
Select a One Touch Key with no registered destination.
4
Press [Change] of Display Name.
5
Enter the One Touch Key name (up to 32 characters) displayed in the send base screen, and press [OK].
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
6
Press [Change] of Destination. The address book appears.
7
Select a destination (contact or group) to add to the One Touch Key number, and press [OK].
Pressing [Detail] shows the detailed information of the selected destination.
NOTE: Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number. Refer to Specifying
Destination on page 3-40 for Address List.
8
Press [Save]. The destination will be added to the One Touch Key.
Editing One Touch Key
Edit/delete the destinations you added to One Touch Key.
Use the procedure below to edit the One Touch key.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Edit Destination] and then [Add/Edit] of One Touch Key.
3
Select a One Touch Key number (0001 to 1000) for the destination. Pressing Quick No. Search key or [No.]
enables direct entry of a One Touch Key number.
The procedure differs depending on the details to be edited.
Changing the Registered Information
1
Press [Add/Edit].
2
Select a new destination (Contact or group). Pressing [Detail] shows the detailed information of the
selected destination.
NOTE: Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number. Refer to
Specifying Destination on page 3-40 for Address List.
3
Press [OK].
4
Press [Yes] on the screen to add the destination to the One Touch Key.
Deleting the Registered Information
1
Press [Delete].
2
Press [Yes] on the screen to confirm the deletion of the data registered in the One Touch Key.
9-88
Default Setting (System Menu)
Sort
Select the default sort setting of the address for the address book.
The table below shows the available settings.
Item
Detail
No.
Displays the destination list in order of the registered number.
Name
Displays the destination list in order of the registered name.
Use the procedure below to specify the Sort settings.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Edit Destination], [Next] of Address Book Defaults and then [Change] of Sort.
3
Select [No.] or [Name].
4
Press [OK].
Narrow Down
This procedure can be used to filter (narrow down) the types of destination listed when the address book is
displayed.
9
The table below shows the available settings.
Item
Detail
Off
Displays all destination types in the destination list.
E-mail
Displays only e-mail destinations.
Folder
Displays only folder (SMB or FTP) destinations.
FAX
Displays only FAX destinations.
i-FAX
Displays only i-FAX destinations.
Group
Displays only groups.
Use the procedure below to specify the Narrow Down settings.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Edit Destination], [Next] of Address Book Defaults and then [Change] of Narrow Down.
3
Select the type of destination filter.
4
Press [OK].
9-89
Default Setting (System Menu)
Internet
This procedure sets up the Internet browser application. You can specify the following Internet browser settings.
•
Internet Browser Setting
•
Browser Preferences
•
Proxy Settings
Internet Browser Setting
This selects whether or not the Internet browser is used.
Use the procedure below to specify the Internet browser setting.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [
] and then [Internet].
NOTE: If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User (Local User List) on
page 10-5 for the default login user name and password.
3
Press [Change] of Internet Browser.
4
Press [On] or [Off].
5
Press [OK].
Browser Preferences
This specifies Internet browser preferences such as your home page setting and how pages are displayed.
NOTE: This is not displayed if you selected Off in Internet Browser Setting (page 9-90).
Use the procedure below to set your Internet browser preferences.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [
] and then [Internet].
NOTE: If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User (Local User List) on
page 10-5 for the default login user name and password.
3
Press [Next] of Browser Environment.
4
To set your home page, press [Change] of Home Page, press [URL], enter the URL and then press [OK].
Press [OK] again.
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
9-90
Default Setting (System Menu)
5
To set the text size, press [Change] of Text Size, select [Large], [Medium] or [Small] as the text size and
then press [OK].
6
To set the display mode, press [Change] of Display Mode, select [Normal], [Just-Fit Rendering] or [SmartFit Rendering] as the display mode and then press [OK].
7
To specify the settings for accepting cookies, press [Change] of Cookie, select [Accept All], [Reject All] or
[Prompt before Accepting] as your cookie acceptance policy and then press [OK].
Proxy Settings
Use the procedure below to specify the proxy settings.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [
] and then [Internet].
NOTE: If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User (Local User List) on
page 10-5 for the default login user name and password.
3
Press [Change] of Proxy and then press [On].
 To set whether or not the same proxy server is used for all protocols
1
If the same proxy server will not be used, remove the checkmark from [Use the Same Proxy Server for
All Protocols].
 To set a proxy server (HTTP)
1
Press [Keyboard] of Proxy Server (HTTP), enter the proxy address and press [OK].
2
Press [# Keys] and enter the port number.
 To set a proxy server (HTTPS)
1
Press [Keyboard] of Proxy Server (HTTPS), enter the proxy address and press [OK].
2
Press [# Keys] and enter the port number.
 To set domains for which no proxy is used
1
Press [Keyboard] of Do Not Use Proxy for Following Domains, enter the domain name and press [OK].
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
4
Press [OK].
9-91
9
Default Setting (System Menu)
Application
You can install and use applications that will make your day-to-day use of this machine more efficient.
Installing Applications
You can install new applications.
Use the procedure below to install an application.
1
Insert the USB memory containing the application to be installed into the USB Port (A1).
NOTE: If Removable Memory was recognized. Displaying files. appears, press [No].
2
Press the System Menu key.
3
Press [
] and then [Application].
NOTE: If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User (Local User List) on
page 10-5 for the default login user name and password.
4
Press [Add].
5
Select the application to be installed and press [Install].
You can view detailed information on the selected application by pressing [Detail].
6
When the confirmation screen appears, press [Yes].
Installation of the application begins. Depending on the application being installed, the installation may take
some time.
Once the installation ends, the original screen reappears.
7
To install another application, repeat steps 5 to 6.
8
To remove the USB memory, press [Remove Memory] and wait until the Removable Memory can be safely
removed message appears. Then remove the USB memory.
9-92
Default Setting (System Menu)
Activating/Deactivating Application
To use an application, set the application to Activate.
Use the procedure below to start using an application.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [
] and then [Application].
NOTE: If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User (Local User List) on
page 10-5 for the default login user name and password.
3
Select the desired application and press [Activate].
You can view detailed information on the selected application by pressing [Detail].
NOTE: To exit an application, press [Deactivate].
4
Enter the license key and press [Official].
Some applications do not require you to enter a license key. If the license key entry screen does not appear,
go to Step 5.
To use the application as a trial, press [Trial] without entering the license key.
5
When the confirmation screen appears, press [Yes].
CAUTION: If you change the date/time while using an application, you will no longer be able to use the
application.
Launching Applications
You can launch any application for which Activate is set.
Use the procedure below to launch an application.
1
Press the Application key.
A list of available applications appears on the touch panel.
2
Press the key for the application to be launched.
The application starts up.
3
To exit the application, press [✕].
4
When the application exit confirmation screen appears, press [Yes].
CAUTION: The procedure for exiting some applications may differ.
9-93
9
Default Setting (System Menu)
Deleting Applications
Use the procedure below to delete an installed application.
CAUTION: Always exit the application to be deleted before deleting the application. (Refer to Activating/
Deactivating Application on page 9-93.)
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [
] and then [Application].
NOTE: If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User (Local User List) on
page 10-5 for the default login user name and password.
3
Select the application to be deleted and press [Delete].
You can view detailed information on the selected application by pressing [Detail].
4
When the deletion confirmation screen appears, press [Yes]. The application is deleted.
9-94
Default Setting (System Menu)
System Initialization
Initialize the hard disk installed on the machine to return to the default mode.
CAUTION: System initialization will erase Custom Document Boxes, data stored in the Document Box,
addresses in the Address Book, user property, account information, and settings.
NOTE: This item will not be displayed if the optional Data Security Kit is installed. Refer to the Data Security
Kit (E) Operation Guide on the bundled DVD about the functions added when the Data Security Kit is installed
and related procedures.
Using Network Print Monitor allows you to back up addresses in the Address Book.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [
], [Adjustment/Maintenance] and then [Start] of System Initialization.
NOTE: If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User (Local User List) on
page 10-5 for the default login user name and password.
3
When the confirmation screen appears, press [Yes].
9
Initialization starts.
IMPORTANT: The Formatting... Do not turn off the main power switch. message appears during initialization.
Wait until initialization ends.
4
Once the initialization ends, the message Task is completed. Turn the main power switch off and on.
appears. Turn the main power switch off.
Restart Entire Device
Restart the CPU without turning the main power switch off. Use this to deal with any unstable operation by the
machine. (Same as the computer restart.)
Use the procedure below to restart the system.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [System] and [Start] of Restart Entire Device.
NOTE: If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and password, and press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User (Local User List) on
page 10-5 for the default login user name and password.
3
When the confirmation screen appears, press [Yes]. The system is restarted.
9-95
Default Setting (System Menu)
Network
The following network settings are available.
•
Host Name …9-96
•
TCP/IP …9-96
•
TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup …9-97
•
TCP/IP (IPv6) Setup …9-98
•
Protocol Detail …9-100
•
NetWare …9-101
•
AppleTalk …9-101
•
WSD Scan …9-102
•
WSD Print …9-102
•
Enhanced WSD …9-102
•
Enhanced WSD (SSL) …9-103
•
Secure Protocol …9-103
•
IPSec …9-107
•
LAN Interface …9-108
•
Restart Network …9-108
Host Name
Check the host name of the machine. Use the procedure below.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [System], [Next] of Network. Check the host name displayed under Host Name.
TCP/IP
Select whether or not to use TCP/IP. The default setting is Off.
IMPORTANT: After changing the setting, restart the network from the system menu, or turn the machine OFF
and then ON. For detailed information on restarting the network, refer to Restart Network on page 9-108.
Use the procedure below.
1
2
3
4
Press the System Menu key.
Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Next] of TCP/IP Setting.
Press [Change] of TCP/IP.
Press [On] or [Off] and then press [OK].
9-96
Default Setting (System Menu)
TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup
Set up TCP/IP (IPv4) to connect to the Windows network. Set the IP addresses, subnet masks, and gateway
addresses. The default settings are "TCP/IP Protocol: On, DHCP: On, Bonjour: Off, Auto-IP: On".
This section explains the Bonjour Settings procedures. For other TCP/IP (IPv4) settings, refer to the TCP/IP
(IPv4) Setup (by Entering IP Addresses) on page 2-13.
NOTE: Prior to the IP address entries, obtain permission from the network administrator.
IMPORTANT: After changing the setting, restart the network from the system menu, or turn the machine OFF
and then ON. For detailed information on restarting the network, refer to Restart Network on page 9-108.
Use the procedure below.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Press the System Menu key.
Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Next] of TCP/IP Setting.
Press [Change] of TCP/IP.
Press [On] and then press [OK].
Press [Change] of IPv4.
Press [DHCP].
Press [Off] of DHCP and then press [OK].
Press [Bonjour].
9
Press [Off] of Bonjour and then press [OK].
Press [IP Address] and enter the address using the numeric keys.
Press [Subnet Mask] and enter the address using the numeric keys.
Press [Default Gateway] and enter the address using the numeric keys.
Check if all the address entries are correct and press [OK].
Bonjour Settings
Select whether or not to use Bonjour. The default setting is Off.
IMPORTANT: After changing the setting, restart the network from the system menu, or turn the machine OFF
and then ON. For detailed information on restarting the network, refer to Restart Network on page 9-108.
Use the procedure below.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press the System Menu key.
7
Press [On] or [Off] of Bonjour and then press [OK].
Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Next] of TCP/IP Setting.
Press [Change] of TCP/IP.
Press [On] and then press [OK].
Press [Change] of IPv4.
Press [Bonjour].
9-97
Default Setting (System Menu)
TCP/IP (IPv6) Setup
Set up TCP/IP (IPv6) to connect to the network. The default settings are "TCP/IP Protocol: On, TCP/IP (IPv6):
Off.
IMPORTANT: After changing the setting, restart the network from the system menu, or turn the machine OFF
and then ON. For detailed information on restarting the network, refer to Restart Network on page 9-108.
Use the procedure below.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Next] of TCP/IP Setting.
3
Press [Change] of TCP/IP.
4
Press [On] and then press [OK].
5
Press [Next] of IPv6.
6
Press [Change] of IPv6.
7
Press [On]. Press [On]. IP Address (Link Local) appears.
8
Press [OK].
Manual Setting (IPv6)
Manually specify the IP address, prefix length, and gateway address of TCP/IP (IPv6). The manual setting is
available when selecting [On] for TCP/IP (IPv6).
IMPORTANT: After changing the setting, restart the network from the system menu, or turn the machine OFF
and then ON. For detailed information on restarting the network, refer to Restart Network on page 9-108.
Use the procedure below.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Next] of TCP/IP Setting.
3
Press [Next] of IPv6.
4
Press [Next] of Manual Setting.
5
Press [IP Address (Manual)] to enter IP address. The format of the IPv6 address is a sequence of numbers
(128 bit in total) separated by colons, e.g. 2001:db8:3c4d:15::1a2c:1a1f.
6
Press [OK].
Press [# Keys] of Prefix Length (0 - 128) to enter the prefix length using the numeric keys.
7
Press [Default Gateway] to enter the default gateway.
8
Check that all the entries are correct and Press [OK].
9-98
Default Setting (System Menu)
RA (Stateless) Settings
Select whether or not to use RA (Stateless). The RA (Stateless) settings are available when selecting [On] for
TCP/IP (IPv6). The default setting is On.
IMPORTANT: After changing the setting, restart the network from the system menu, or turn the machine OFF
and then ON. For detailed information on restarting the network, refer to Restart Network on page 9-108.
Use the procedure below.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Next] of TCP/IP Setting.
3
Press [Next] of IPv6.
4
Press [Change] of RA(Stateless).
5
Press [On] or [Off] of RA (Stateless). When selecting [On], IP Address 1 to 5 (Stateless) appears.
6
Press [OK].
DHCP (IPv6) Settings
Select whether or not to use the DHCP (IPv6) server. The DHCP (IPv6) Settings are available when selecting
[On] for TCP/IP (IPv6). The default setting is On.
IMPORTANT: After changing the setting, restart the network from the system menu, or turn the machine OFF
and then ON. For detailed information on restarting the network, refer to Restart Network on page 9-108.
Use the procedure below.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Next] of TCP/IP Setting.
3
Press [Next] of IPv6.
4
Press [Change] of DHCP.
5
Press [On] or [Off] of DHCP. When selecting [On], IP Address (Stateful) appears.
6
Press [OK].
9-99
9
Default Setting (System Menu)
Protocol Detail
The table below lists the network related function settings. The network related functions are available when
TCP/IP is On.
Item
Description
Default
Setting
Restarting
the System*
NetBEUI
Selects whether or not to receive documents using
NetBEUI.
On
Y
LPD
Select whether or not to receive documents using LPD as
the network protocol.
On
Y
SMTP
(E-mail TX)
Select whether or not to send e-mail using SMTP.
Off
N
POP3
(E-mail RX)
Select whether or not to receive e-mail using POP3.
Off
N
FTP Client
(Transmission)
Select whether or not to send documents using FTP.
When selecting [On], set the FTP Port Number. Use the
FTP default port 21.
On
N
FTP Server
(Reception)
Select whether or not to receive documents using FTP.
On
Y
SMB Client
(Transmission)
Select whether or not to send documents using SMB.
When selecting [On], set the SMB default Port Number.
Use the SMB default port 139. For Windows Vista, use 445.
On
N
i-FAX
Select whether or not to use i-FAX.
On
N
LDAP
Select whether or not to use LDAP.
Off
N
SNMP
Select whether or not to communicate using SNMP.
On
Y
SNMPv3
Select whether or not to communicate using SNMPv3.
Off
Y
HTTP
Select whether or not to communicate using HTTP.
On
Y
HTTPS
Select whether or not to communicate using HTTPS.
SSL must be set to [On] in SSL on page 9-103.
On
Y
IPP
Select whether or not to communicate using IPP. When
selecting [On], set the IPP default Port Number. Use the
IPP default port 631.
Off
Y
IPP over SSL
Select whether or not to use IPP over SSL.
SSL must be set to [On] in SSL on page 9-103.
Off
Y
Raw Port
Select whether or not to communicate using Raw Port.
On
Y
ThinPrint
(UG-31)
Select whether or not to communicate using ThinPrint. If set
to [On], you can set the port number that ThinPrint uses.
Normally 4,000 is used. SSL settings can also be selected.
On
Y
DSM Scan
Select whether or not to use DSM.
Off
N
*
Y: The machine must be restarted after the setting is changed.
N: The machine does not need to be restarted after the setting is changed.
9-100
Port:21
Port:139
Port:631
Default Setting (System Menu)
IMPORTANT: After changing the setting, restart the network from the system menu, or turn the machine OFF
and then ON. For detailed information on restarting the network, refer to Restart Network on page 9-108.
Use the procedure below.
The following procedure is an example for specifying the SMTP (E-mail TX) settings.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [System] ,[Next] of Network, [Next] of TCP/IP Setting and then [Next] of Protocol Detail to display the
network settings screen.
3
Display the item you want to set and press [Change] for that item.
In this example, press [Change] of SMTP (E-mail TX).
4
Press [On] or [Off].
5
Press [OK].
NetWare
Select the NetWare network connection. After that, select frame types for NetWare network from Auto,
Ethernet-II, 802.3, 802.2, or SNAP. The default settings are "On, Frame Type: Auto".
IMPORTANT: After changing the setting, restart the network from the system menu, or turn the machine OFF
and then ON. For detailed information on restarting the network, refer to Restart Network on page 9-108.
9
Use the procedure below.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Change] of NetWare.
3
Press [On].
4
Press the key for the frame type you want to use.
5
Press [OK].
AppleTalk
Select the Apple Talk network connection. The default setting is On.
IMPORTANT: After changing the setting, restart the network from the system menu, or turn the machine OFF
and then ON. For detailed information on restarting the network, refer to Restart Network on page 9-108.
Use the procedure below.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Change] of AppleTalk.
3
Press [On] or [Off].
4
Press [OK].
9-101
Default Setting (System Menu)
WSD Scan
Select whether or not to use WSD Scan. The default setting is On.
IMPORTANT: After changing the setting, restart the network from the system menu, or turn the machine OFF
and then ON. For detailed information on restarting the network, refer to Restart Network on page 9-108.
Use the procedure below.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Change] of WSD Scan.
3
Press [On] or [Off].
4
Press [OK].
WSD Print
Select whether or not to use WSD Print. The default setting is On.
IMPORTANT: After changing the setting, restart the network from the system menu, or turn the machine OFF
and then ON. For detailed information on restarting the network, refer to Restart Network on page 9-108.
Use the procedure below.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Change] of WSD Print.
3
Press [On] or [Off].
4
Press [OK].
Enhanced WSD
Set whether to use our proprietary web services. The WIA driver, TWAIN driver, and Network FAX driver use
this Enhanced WSD Web service. The default setting is On.
IMPORTANT: After changing the setting, restart the network from the system menu, or turn the machine OFF
and then ON. For detailed information on restarting the network, refer to Restart Network on page 9-108.
Use the procedure below.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Change] of Enhanced WSD.
3
Press [On] or [Off].
4
Press [OK].
9-102
Default Setting (System Menu)
Enhanced WSD (SSL)
Set whether to use our proprietary web services over SSL. SSL must be set to "On" in SSL on page 9-103. The
default setting is On.
IMPORTANT: After changing the setting, restart the network from the system menu, or turn the machine OFF
and then ON. For detailed information on restarting the network, refer to Restart Network on page 9-108.
Use the procedure below.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Change] of Enhanced WSD (SSL).
3
Press [On] or [Off].
4
Press [OK].
Secure Protocol
Encrypt the communication between your PC and the machine using the SSL encryption.
IMPORTANT: After changing the setting, restart the network from the system menu, or turn the machine OFF
and then ON. For detailed information on restarting the network, refer to Restart Network on page 9-108.
The following Secure Protocol settings are available.
•
SSL …9-103
•
IPP Security …9-104
•
HTTP Security …9-104
•
LDAP Security …9-105
•
SMTP Security …9-105
•
POP3 Security (User 1) …9-106
•
POP3 Security (User 2) …9-106
•
POP3 Security (User 3) …9-107
SSL
Select whether or not to use SSL. The default setting is On.
IMPORTANT: After changing the setting, restart the network from the system menu, or turn the machine OFF
and then ON. For detailed information on restarting the network, refer to Restart Network on page 9-108.
Use the procedure below.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [System], [Next] of Network, [
3
Press [On] or [Off].
4
Press [OK].
], [Next] of Secure Protocol, and then [Next] of SSL.
9-103
9
Default Setting (System Menu)
IPP Security
Select the IPP security level. This setup is available when SSL is On. The default setting is IPP or IPP over SSL.
NOTE: IPP must be set to [On] in Protocol Detail on page 9-100.
IMPORTANT: After changing the setting, restart the network from the system menu, or turn the machine OFF
and then ON. For detailed information on restarting the network, refer to Restart Network on page 9-108.
Use the procedure below.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [System], [Next] of Network, [
3
Press [IPP over SSL Only] or [IPP or IPP over SSL].
4
Press [OK].
], [Next] of Secure Protocol, and then [Change] of IPP Security.
HTTP Security
Select the HTTP security level. This setup is available when SSL is On. The default setting is HTTP or HTTPS.
NOTE: HTTP or HTTPS must be set to [On] in Protocol Detail on page 9-100.
IMPORTANT: After changing the setting, restart the network from the system menu, or turn the machine OFF
and then ON. For detailed information on restarting the network, refer to Restart Network on page 9-108.
Use the procedure below.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [System], [Next] of Network, [
3
Press [HTTP or HTTPS] or [HTTPS Only].
4
Press [OK].
], [Next] of Secure Protocol, and then [Change] of HTTP Security.
9-104
Default Setting (System Menu)
LDAP Security
Select the communication protocol according to the type of security employed by the LDAP server. The default
setting is Off.
NOTE: LDAP must be set to [On] in Protocol Detail on page 9-100.
The table below shows the available settings.
Item
Description
Off
Do not use security employed by the LDAP server.
SSL/TLS
Encryption is applied any data communication. To enable LDAP security, the
LDAP port may have to be changed according to the server settings.
Typically, 636* for SSL/TLS is well-known LDAP port.
STARTTLS
Encryption is applied any data communication. Typically, 389* for
STARTTLS is well-known LDAP port.
* You can change the port number using Embedded Web Server RX.
Use the procedure below.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [System], [Next] of Network, [
3
Press [Off], [SSL/TLS] or [STARTTLS].
4
Press [OK].
], [Next] of Secure Protocol, and then [Change] of LDAP Security.
SMTP Security
Select the communication protocol according to the type of security employed by the SMTP server. The default
setting is Off.
NOTE: SMTP must be set to On in Protocol Detail on page 9-100.
The table below shows the available settings.
Item
Description
Off
Do not use security employed by the SMTP server.
SSL/TLS
Encryption is applied any data communication. To enable SMTP security,
the SMTP port may have to be changed according to the server settings.
Typically, 465* for SSL/TLS is well-known SMTP port.
STARTTLS
Encryption is applied any data communication. Typically, 25* or 587* for
STARTTLS is well-known SMTP port.
* You can change the port number using Embedded Web Server RX.
9-105
9
Default Setting (System Menu)
Use the procedure below.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [System], [Next] of Network, [
3
Press [Off], [SSL/TLS] or [STARTTLS].
4
Press [OK].
], [Next] of Secure Protocol, and then [Change] of SMTP Security.
POP3 Security (User 1)
Select the communication protocol according to the type of security employed by the POP3 server. The default
setting is Off.
The table below shows the available settings.
Item
Description
Off
Do not use security employed by the POP3 server.
SSL/TLS
Encryption is applied any data communication. To enable POP3 security, the
POP3 port may have to be changed according to the server settings.
Typically, 995* for SSL/TLS is well-known POP3 port.
STARTTLS
Encryption is applied any data communication. Typically, 110* for
STARTTLS is well-known POP3 port.
* You can change the port number using Embedded Web Server RX.
Use the procedure below.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [System], [Next] of Network, [
(User 1).
3
Press [Off], [SSL/TLS] or [STARTTLS].
4
Press [OK].
], [Next] of Secure Protocol, and then [Change] of POP3 Security
POP3 Security (User 2)
Set the protocol that can be used on the POP3 port. This setup is available when SSL is On. The default setting
is Off.
For the procedure for selecting the POP3 Security (User 2) Setting, see POP3 Security (User 1).
9-106
Default Setting (System Menu)
POP3 Security (User 3)
Set the protocol that can be used on the POP3 port. This setup is available when SSL is On. The default setting
is Off.
For the procedure for selecting the POP3 Security (User 3) Setting, see POP3 Security (User 1).
IPSec
Sets up IPSec. The default setting is Off.
IMPORTANT: After changing the setting, restart the network from the system menu, or turn the machine OFF
and then ON. For detailed information on restarting the network, refer to Restart Network on page 9-108.
Use the procedure below.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [System], [Next] of Network, [
] and then [Change] of IPSec.
NOTE: If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User (Local User List) on
page 10-5 for the default login user name and password.
3
Press [On].
4
Press [OK].
9
9-107
Default Setting (System Menu)
LAN Interface
Specify the settings for the LAN interface to be used. The default setting is Auto.
IMPORTANT: After changing the setting, restart the network from the system menu, or turn the machine OFF
and then ON. For detailed information on restarting the network, refer to Restart Network on page 9-108.
Use the procedure below.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [System], [Next] of Network, [
3
Select [Auto], [10BASE-T Half], [10BASE-T Full], [100BASE-TX Half], [100BASE-TX Full] or [1000BASET] as the LAN interface.
4
Press [OK].
] and then [Change] of LAN Interface.
Restart Network
To restart the network card of the device, follow the steps below.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [System], [Next] of Network, [
] and then [Start] of Restart Network.
9-108
Default Setting (System Menu)
Interface Block Setting
This allows you to protect this machine by blocking the interface with external devices such as USB hosts or
optional interfaces.
The following interface block settings are available:
•
USB Host
•
USB Device
•
Optional interface
USB Host
This locks and protects the USB Port (A1) or USB port (A2) (USB host). The default setting is Unblock.
Use the procedure below to specify the USB Host setting.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [System], [Next] of Interface Block Setting and then [Change] of USB Host.
NOTE: If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User (Local User List) on
page 10-5 for the default login user name and password.
3
Press [Block].
4
Press [OK].
9
USB Device
This locks and protects the USB interface connector (B1) (USB Device). The default setting is Unblock.
Use the procedure below to specify the USB Device setting.
1
2
3
4
Press the System Menu key.
Press [System], [Next] of Interface Block Setting and then [Change] of USB Device.
Press [Block].
Press [OK].
Optional interface
This locks and protects the optional interface slots (OPT1 or OPT2). The default setting is Unblock.
Use the procedure below to specify the optional interface setting.
1
2
Press the System Menu key.
3
Press [Block].
4
Press [OK].
Press [System], [Next] of Interface Block Setting and then [Change] of Optional Interface 1 or Optional
Interface 2.
9-109
Default Setting (System Menu)
Security Level
The Security Level setting is primarily a menu option used by service personnel for maintenance work. There is
no need for customers to use this menu.
Document Guard
When the optional Printed Document Guard Kit is installed, the machine prevents the unauthorized copying and/
or transmission of documents that contain important confidential or personal information.
Use the Security Watermark of Advanced in Printing System Driver to embed the guard pattern in a document.
(Refer to the Printing System Driver User Guide for details.)
We suggest you confirm how the machine performs this function in your environment.
Canceled.
copy
send
or fax
Print the guard
pattern using
Printing System
Driver.
Machine Operation after Detecting the Document Guard Pattern
Item
Description
Common operation
Displays the message that indicates the machine detected the document
guard pattern and stops scanning the remaining documents.
Copy functions
Prints the documents in blank when the machine detected the document
guard pattern.
Send functions
Cancels the job.*
Document Box functions
Does not store the documents in the hard disk
FAX functions
Does not send the documents.
*
Sends the documents that are scanned before the document guard pattern is detected if you have
selected File Separation. If not, every Document will not to be sent.
9-110
Default Setting (System Menu)
Limitations:
- Scanning speed will be limited to the speed of scanning 600 dpi image. (Printing speed will not
be limited.)
- FAX transmission will be limited to the memory transmission.
Note:
- The Printed Document Guard Kit can not fully prevent a leak of information. We do not guarantee
any loss incurred while using this feature or if a malfunction occurs with this feature.
- The guard pattern printed on the colored paper or paper that is decorated with special design
may not be detected.
- We do not guarantee the integrity of the detection. If a malfunction occurs, contact your service
representative.
Use the procedure below to specify the Document Guard setting.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [System] and then [Change] of Document Guard.
NOTE: If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User (Local User List) on
page 10-5 for the default login user name and password.
3
Press [On].
4
Press [OK].
9
9-111
Default Setting (System Menu)
Data Security
Settings related to data stored in the machine's hard disk and memory can be configured.
Data Sanitization
All address information registered in the machine and image data saved in the machine will be erased.
NOTE: About 8 hours are required to complete this processing, depending on the amount of data. Once
started, the processing cannot be canceled.
Before performing this task, disconnect the modular cable, network cable, and any other cables.
Do not turn off the main power during sanitization. If the main power is turned off, sanitization will automatically
resume when the power is turned on, but complete sanitization cannot be guaranteed.
The data erased by initialization is shown below.
Category
Devices/jobs
Data erased
•
•
•
Job settings set by user
Network settings
Image data saved in document boxes, etc.
Data registered in one-touch keys
Job logs
User information
(user lists, address books, document boxes registered by user, etc.)
Account information for account tracking
Network certificates
Startup screen of machine changed by service technician
Fax*
•
•
•
•
•
•
Fax settings set by user
Transmission restriction settings
Encryption key settings
Communication logs
Reserved jobs
Settings for condition-based reception/forwarding
Applications/programs
•
•
Applications/programs registered by the user or service technician
Sample programs
*
•
•
•
•
•
•
Only when the optional fax kit is installed
9-112
Default Setting (System Menu)
The procedure is as follows.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [System], [Next] of Data Security and then [Next] of Data Sanitization.
NOTE: If the user authentication screen is displayed, enter your login user name and password, and press
[Login]. You must log in with administrator authority. Refer to Adding a User (Local User List) on page 10-5 for
the default login user name and password.
3
Press [Start].
Initialization starts. When initialization is completed, the sanitization results will appear on the screen.
Hard Disk Initialization
When the optional Data Security kit is installed, [Hard Disk Initialization] is added to the Data Security settings.
For details, refer to the Data Security Kit (E) Operation Guide on the bundled DVD.
9
9-113
Default Setting (System Menu)
Optional Function
You can use the optional applications installed on this machine.
Application
The applications listed below are installed on this machine.
You can use these applications for a limited period on a trial basis.
•
Printed Document Guard Kit
This prevents the unauthorized copying and/or transmission of documents that contain important confidential or
personal information. When a document is printed from a computer, this feature imprints a special pattern on
the document. When anyone attempts to copy or send that document on this machine, the machine detects the
pattern and protects the information by printing the document in blank, or prohibiting transmission.
NOTE: Restrictions such as the number of times the application can be used during the trial period differ
depending on the application.
Starting Application Use
Use the procedure below to start using an application.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [System] and then [Next] of Optional Function.
NOTE: If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User (Local User List) on
page 10-5 for the default login user name and password.
3
Select the desired application and press [Activate].
You can view detailed information on the selected application by pressing [Detail].
4
In the license key entry screen, press [Official].
Some applications do not require you to enter a license key. If the license key entry screen does not appear,
go to Step 5.
To use the application as a trial, press [Trial] without entering the license key.
5
When the confirmation screen appears, press [Yes].
IMPORTANT: If you change the date/time while using an application, you will no longer be able to use the
application.
9-114
Default Setting (System Menu)
Checking Application Details
Use the procedure below to check the details of an application.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [System] and then [Next] of Optional Function.
NOTE: If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User (Local User List) on
page 10-5 for the default login user name and password.
3
Select the application you want to check the details of and press [Detail].
You can now view detailed information on the selected application.
Accessibility Display (Enlarged Touch Panel Display)
Touch panel characters and key displays can be enlarged. Use the numeric keys to select items and proceed
to the next screen.
NOTE: Accessibility can be used only with Copying and Sending registered on the Quick Setup screen.
To set functions other than those displayed in the accessibility screens, you must return to the original display.
Press the Accessibility Display key again.
Press the Accessibility Display key when in the Copy
or Send (i.e. the Copy or Send key indicator is On).
Copies
Enlarged keys or characters appear on the touch panel.
Operation can also be made by pressing any numeric
key corresponding to the number displayed. (e.g. Press
the 2 key to adjust zoom.)
Follow the instructions on the screen for subsequent
operations.
Status
10/10/2010 10:10
9-115
9
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-116
10 Management
This chapter explains the following operations.
•
•
User Login Setting ............................................................................10-2
Job Accounting Setting ...................................................................10-20
10-1
Management
User Login Setting
User login administration specifies how the user access is administered on this machine. Enter a correct login
user name and password for user authentication to login.
Access are in three levels - User, Administrator, and Machine Administrator. The security levels can be modified
only by the machine administrator.
Users that are not able to log in to the machine can be allowed to use the functions of the machine on a restricted
basis. The users can use the machine without performing authentication, and thus this feature is convenient
when the majority of users are managed with the same authority. This can also be used to reduce operating
costs, for example by prohibiting color copy in "Guest Authorization Set." so that only users who log in can use
color copying.
If To use this function, press Authentication key and login appears while operating the machine, you must press
the Authentication/Logout key and log in as a user for whom the function is not prohibited.
First User Login Administration
Follow these steps for the first user login administration.
Enable user login administration. (page 10-2)

Add a user.(page 10-5)

Log out.(page 10-4)

The registered user logs in for operations.(page 10-3)
User Login
This enables user login administration. Select one of the following authentication methods:
Item
Description
Local Authentication
User authentication based on user properties on the local
user list stored in the machine.
Network Authentication
User authentication based on Authentication Server. Use a
user property stored in an Authentication Server to access the
network authentication login page.
Use the procedure below to enable user login administration.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [User Login/Job Accounting].
3
If the user authentication screen appears, enter
your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with
administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User
(Local User List) on page 10-5 for the default login
user name and password.
4
Press [Next] of User Login Setting and then
[Change] of User Login.
10-2
Management
5
User Login/Job Accounting - User Login
User login administration.
Select authentication method.
Server Type
Off
Domain
If you select [Network Authentication], enter the
host name (62 characters or less) and domain
name (256 characters or less) for the
Authentication Server. Select [NTLM], [Kerberos]
or [Ext.] as the server type.
Default Domain
NTLM
Local
Authentication
Add/Edit
Kerberos
Network
Authentication
Ext.
Expansion
Authentication
Select [Local Authentication] or [Network
Authentication]. Select [Off] to disable user login
administration.
Host
Host Name
Cancel
If you selected [Ext.] for the server type, enter the
port number.
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
NOTE: If the login user name and password are
rejected, check the following settings.
•
•
•
Network Authentication setting of the machine
User property of the Authentication Server
Date and time setting of the machine and the
Authentication Server
If you cannot login because of the setting of the
machine, login with any administrator registered in the
local user list and correct the settings.
Up to 10 domains can be registered for network
authentication.
6
Press [OK].
Login/Logout
Once you enable user login administration, a login user name and password entry screen appears each time
you use this machine.
NOTE: If the guest authentication setting is enabled, the authentication/logout key must be pressed when
logging in.
Login
Use the procedure below to login.
1
Enter login user name and password.
Login to:
Login
User Name
Local
Press [# Keys] to enter the login data using the
numeric keys.
abcdef
# Keys
Login
Password
********
2
# Keys
ID Card
Login
Check Counter
Status
Cancel
When the machine is operated and the next screen
appears, select the authentication destination from
the "Login to:" pull-down menu and press [Login
User Name].
Login
10/10/2010 10:10
Enter the login user name and press [OK].
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on
Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
Authentication is possible without selecting an
authentication destination by entering "Login User
Name@domain name" in "Login User Name".
10-3
10
Management
3
Press [Login Password].
Press [# keys] to enter the login data using the
numeric keys.
4
Enter the login password and press [OK].
NOTE: If Job Accounting is enabled, you can browse
the number of pages printed and the number of pages
scanned by pressing [Check Counter].
If Network Authentication is selected as the user
authentication method, either Local or Network can be
selected as the authentication destination.
5
Check the login user name and password are
correct, and press [Login].
Logout
To log out the machine, press the Authentication/
Logout key to return to the login user name/login
password entry screen.
Auto Logout
Logout is automatically executed in the following
cases:
10-4
•
When the Power key is pressed to enter the
sleep mode
•
When auto sleep is activated
•
When auto panel reset is activated
•
When auto low power mode is activated
•
When low power mode is activated by pressing
the Energy Saver key.
Management
Adding a User (Local User List)
This adds a new user. You can add Up to 1,000 users (including the default login user name).
The table below explains the user information to be registered.
Item
Description
User Name*
Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters).
Login User Name*
Enter the login user name to login (up to 64 characters). The
same login user name cannot be registered.
Login Password
Enter the password to login (up to 64 characters).
Access Level*
Select Administrator or User for user access privileges.
Account Name
Add an account where the user belongs. The user, who
registered his/her account name, can login without entering the
account ID. Refer to Job Accounting Setting on page 10-20.
E-mail Address
The user can register his/her E-mail address. The registered
address will be automatically selected for subsequent operations
that need any E-mail function.
Local Authorization
Set usage authority for each user. Local Authorization must be
enabled. (Refer to page 10-9.)
Use of the following items can be restricted.
Print Restriction: Select whether or not use of the print function
of the printer is prohibited.
Print Restriction (Color): Select whether or not use of the print
function (color) of the printer is prohibited.
Copy Restriction: Select whether or not use of the copy print
function is prohibited.
Copy Restriction (Color): Select whether or not use of the
copy print function (color) is prohibited.
Copy Restriction (Full Color): Select whether or not use of the
copy print function (full color) is prohibited.
Send Restriction: Select whether or not use of the send function
is prohibited.
Fax TX Restriction: Select whether or not use of the fax send
function is prohibited.
Storing Restr. in Box: Select whether or not use of the box
store function is prohibited.
Storing Restr. in Memory: Select whether or not use of the
external memory store function is prohibited.
*
Mandatory at user registration.
10-5
10
Management
NOTE: By default, one of each default user with machine administrator rights and administrator privileges is
already stored.
Each user's properties are:
Machine Administrator
User Name:
DeviceAdmin
Login User Name: 30/30 ppm model : 3000, 35/35 ppm model : 3500, 45/45 ppm model : 4500,
55/50 ppm model : 5500
Login Password: 30/30 ppm model : 3000, 35/35 ppm model : 3500, 45/45 ppm model : 4500,
55/50 ppm model : 5500
Access Level:
Machine Administrator
Administrator
User Name:
Login User Name:
Login Password:
Access Level:
Admin
Admin
Admin
Administrator
* Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).
It is recommended to periodically change the user name, login user name and login password regularly for your
security.
Use the procedure below to register a new user.
User:
User Name:
Change
01 User
Login User Name:
Change
Login Password:
Change
Account Name:
0099
Access Level:
Change
ID Card Information:
Change
Press the System Menu key.
3
Press [User Login/Job Accounting].
4
If the user authentication screen appears, enter
your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with
administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User
(Local User List) on page 10-5 for the default login
user name and password.
5
Press [Next] of User Login Setting, [Add/Edit] of
Local User List, and then [Add].
6
Press [Change] of User Name.
7
Enter the user name and press [OK].
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on
Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
Change
Empty
Next
Cancel
Status
2
Change
02 Account
abcd@efg.com
Local Authorization:
Login as a user with administrator rights.
**********
User
E-mail Address:
1
8
Enter the login user name and E-mail address
following 6 and 7 above.
9
Press [Change] of Login Password and then
[Password].
Save
10/10/2010 10:10
10-6
Management
10 Enter the login password and press [OK].
11 Press [Confirm Password].
12 Enter the same login password to confirm and
press [OK].
13 Press [OK].
14 Press [Change] of Access Level.
15 Select the user access privilege and press [OK].
16 Press [Change] of Account Name.
17 Select the account and press [OK].
User: - Account Name
Select account to which this user will be attached.
Sort
Account Name
Name
NOTE: Select [Name] and [ID] from the Sort pull-down
Account ID
01 Account
00001000
02 Account
00002000
Search(Name)
Search(ID)
03 Account
00003000
04 Account
00004000
1/2
Other Account
05 Account
menu to sort the account list.
Press [Search(Name)] or [Search(ID)] to search by
account name or account ID.
00005000
Detail
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
18 Press [Next] of Local Authorization.
19 Press [Change] of Print Restriction.
User: - Local Authorization
Print Restriction:
Change
Off
Copy Restriction:
Change
Change
Copy Restriction (Color):
Change
Send Restriction:
21 Repeat steps 19 and 20 to set Print Restriction
Change
Storing Restr. in Box:
Change
Off
Change
Off
Close
Status
(Color), Copy Restriction, Copy Restriction (Color),
Copy Restriction (Full Color), Send Restriction, Fax
TX Restriction, Storing Restr. in Box, and Storing
Restr. in Memory.
Change
Off
Off
Storing Restr. in Memory:
20 Select [Reject Usage] or [Off] and press [OK].
Off
Off
FAX TX Restriction:
Change
Off
Off
Copy Restr. (Full Color):
Print Restriction (Color):
10/10/2010 10:10
22 Press [Close].
23 Press [Save] to add a new user on the local user
list.
NOTE: If simple login is enabled, a confirmation
screen appears when new registration is finished
asking if you will configure simple login settings. To
configure simple login settings, press [Yes]. For the
procedure for configuring simple login settings, refer to
Simple Login Settings on page 10-17. If you select
[No], you will return to the user list screen.
10-7
10
Management
Changing User Properties
User properties can be changed. Types of user properties that could be changed may be different depending
on user access privilege.
NOTE: To change the user information of the machine administrator, you must log in with machine
administrator authority. You can only view user information if you log in as a regular user. Refer to Adding a
User (Local User List) on page 10-5 for the default login user name and password.
For a user with administrator rights who logs in
User properties can be changed and users can be deleted. The items, which can be added, are all able to be
changed.
Use the procedure below to change the user properties.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [User Login/Job Accounting].
3
If the user authentication screen appears, enter
your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with
administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User
(Local User List) on page 10-5 for the default login
user name and password.
4
Press [Next] of User Login Setting and [Add/Edit] of
Local User List.
5
Select the user whose properties you wish to
change.
NOTE: Select [Name] and [Login Name] from the Sort
pull-down menu to sort the user list.
Press [Search(Name)] or [Search(Login)] to search by
name or login user name.
The procedure differs depending on the details to
be edited.
Changing user information
User:
User Name:
Change
0099
Access Level:
Change
Account Name:
Change
ID Card Information:
Change
Change
Empty
Next
Cancel
Status
Change
02 Account
abcd@efg.com
Local Authorization:
Login Password:
**********
User
E-mail Address:
Press [Detail].
2
Refer to steps 6 to 19 of Adding a User (Local
User List) to change a user property.
3
Press [Save].
4
Press [Yes] in the registration confirmation
screen. The user information is changed.
Change
01 User
Login User Name:
1
Save
10/10/2010 10:10
10-8
Management
Deleting a user
1
Press [Delete].
2
Press [Yes] on the screen to confirm deletion.
The selected user will be deleted.
NOTE: The default user with administrator rights
cannot be deleted.
For a user without administrator rights who logs in (User Property)
These users can partially change their own user properties including user name, login password, and E-mail
address.
Although login user name, access level, or account name cannot be changed, the users can check the present
status.
Use the procedure below to change user properties.
User:
User Name:
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [User Property].
3
Refer to steps 6 to 19 of Adding a User (Local User
List) to change user properties.
Change
01 User
Login User Name:
Detail
0099
Press [Detail] of Login User Name or Account
Name to check the present status.
Change
**********
Access Level:
Account Name:
User
E-mail Address:
Login Password:
Detail
4
02 Account
Change
abcd@efg.com
10
Empty
Cancel
Status
Press [Save] to finalize changed user properties.
ID Card Information:
Save
10/10/2010 10:10
Local Authorization
Select whether or not to use Local Authorization.
Use the procedure below.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [User Login/Job Accounting].
3
If the user authentication screen appears, enter
your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with
administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User
(Local User List) on page 10-5 for the default login
user name and password.
4
Press [Next] of User Login Setting and [Change] of
Local Authorization.
5
Select [Off] or [On].
6
Press [OK].
10-9
Management
Unknown ID Job
This specifies the behavior for handling the jobs sent with unknown login user names or User ID (i.e. unsent
IDs). If the User Login is set to invalid and Job Accounting is set to valid, follow the procedure when the Account
ID is unknown.
The table below shows the available settings.
Item
Description
Reject
The job is rejected (not printed).
Permit
The job is permitted to be printed.
Use the procedure below to process jobs sent from unknown users.
1
2
3
Press the System Menu key.
4
5
6
Press [Change] of Unknown ID Job.
Press [User Login/Job Accounting].
If the user authentication screen appears, enter
your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with
administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User
(Local User List) on page 10-5 for the default login
user name and password.
Press [Reject] or [Permit].
Press [OK].
Group Authorization Set.
Set restrictions of the machine usage by each individual group registered in the authentication server.
NOTE: To use the group authorization settings, [Network Authentication] must be selected for the
authentication method in User Login on page 10-2. Select [On] for LDAP in Protocol Detail on page 9-100.
Group Authorization
Use the group authorization.
Use the procedure below.
1
2
3
Press the System Menu key.
4
Press [Next] of User Login Setting, [Next] of Group
Authorization Set., and then [Change] of Group
Authorization.
5
6
Press [On].
10-10
Press [User Login/Job Accounting].
If the user authentication screen appears, enter
your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with
administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User
(Local User List) on page 10-5 for the default login
user name and password.
Press [OK].
Management
Group List
Register the groups that are restricted the machine usage. Up to 20 groups can be individually registered. Other
users and groups belong to Others.
The table below explains the group information to be registered.
Item
Description
Group ID*
Enter the ID displayed on the group list (between 1 and 4294967295).
Group Name
Enter the name displayed on the group list (up to 32 characters).
Access Level
Select Administrator or User for group access privileges.
Print Restriction
Select whether or not to reject usage of print functions for the printer.
Print Restriction (Color)
Select whether or not to reject usage of the color print functions for the printer.
Copy Restriction
Select whether or not to reject usage of copy functions.
Copy Restriction (Color)
Select whether or not to reject usage of the color copy functions.
Copy Restr. (Full Color)
Select whether or not to reject usage of only the full color copy functions.
Send Restriction
Select whether or not to reject usage of the send functions.
FAX TX Restriction
Select whether or not to reject usage of the FAX transmissions.
Storing Restr. in Box
Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the document boxes.
Storing Restr. in Memory
Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the removable memory.
*
For Group ID, specify PrimaryGroupID assigned by ActiveDirectory of Windows.
If you are using Windows Server 2008, check Attribute Editor tab of user properties. If you are using
Windows Server 2000/2003, check ADSIEdit. ADSIEdit is a support tool included on the installation DVD for
Windows Server OS (under \SUPPORT\TOOLS).
Use the procedure below.
User Login/Job Accounting - Group List
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [User Login/Job Accounting].
3
If the user authentication screen appears, enter
your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with
administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User
(Local User List) on page 10-5 for the default login
user name and password.
4
Press [Next] of User Login Setting, [Next] of Group
Authorization Set., [Add/Edit] of Group List, and
then [Add].
Add or edit the groups. (Maximum: 20)
Group ID
Group Name
Others
Add
Detail
Delete
Cancel
Status
Save
10/10/2010 10:10
10-11
10
Management
Group:
5
Press [Change] of Group ID.
Group ID:
Change
Group Name:
Change
6
Enter the group ID and press [OK].
Access Level:
Change
Print Restriction:
Change
7
Press [Change] of Group Name.
Print Restriction (Color):
Change
Copy Restriction:
Change
8
Enter the group name and press [OK].
Copy Restriction (Color):
Change
Copy Restr. (Full Color):
Change
Send Restriction:
Change
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on
1/2
Cancel
Status
Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
Save
10/10/2010 10:10
9
Press [Change] of Access Level.
10 Select the user access privilege and press [OK].
11 Press [Change] of Print Restriction.
12 Select [Reject Usage] or [Off] and press [OK].
13 Follow steps 11 and 12 above to set Print
Restriction (Color), Copy Restriction, Copy
Restriction (Color), Copy Restr. (Full Color), Send
Restriction, FAX TX Restriction, Storing Restr. in
Box, and Storing Restr. in Memory.
14 Press [Save] to add a new group on the group list.
Guest Authorization Set.
When User Login Administration is enabled, set the functions that guest users who cannot log in to the machine
are allowed to use.
NOTE: To use Guest Authorization Set., User Login Administration must be enabled in User Login on page
10-2.
Cannot be used when the Key Counter option is used.
Guest Authorization
Set guest approval.
Use the procedure below.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [User Login/Job Accounting].
3
If the user authentication screen appears, enter
your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with
administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User
(Local User List) on page 10-5 for the default login
user name and password.
4
Press [Next] of User Login Setting, [Next] of Guest
Authorization Set., and then [Change] of Guest
Authorization.
10-12
Management
User Login/Job Accounting - Guest Authorization
Use the guest authorization.
Off
5
Select [On] or [Off].
6
Press [OK].
On
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
NOTE: If the guest authentication setting is enabled, the authentication/logout key must be pressed when
logging in.
In the guest user default settings, only monochrome copying can be used. If you wish to use a different
function, log in as a user who can use that function, or change the settings in the guest properties.
Guest Property
Register guest user information and functions that are restricted.
The table below explains the guest property to be registered.
Item
Description
User Name
Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters).
Access Level
The authority of the user appears. This cannot be changed.
Account Name
Add an account where the user belongs.
Authorization Rules
Set usage authority for each user.
Use of the following items can be restricted.
Print Restriction: Select whether or not use of the print function
of the printer is prohibited.
Print Restriction (Color): Select whether or not use of the print
function (color) of the printer is prohibited.
Copy Restriction: Select whether or not use of the copy print
function is prohibited.
Copy Restriction (Color): Select whether or not use of the copy
print function (color) is prohibited.
Copy Restriction (Full Color): Select whether or not use of the
copy print function (full color) is prohibited.
Send Restriction: Select whether or not use of the send function
is prohibited.
Fax TX Restriction: Select whether or not use of the fax send
function is prohibited.
Storing Restr. in Box: Select whether or not use of the box store
function is prohibited.
Storing Restr. in Memory: Select whether or not use of the
external memory store function is prohibited.
10-13
10
Management
Use the procedure below.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [User Login/Job Accounting].
3
If the user authentication screen appears, enter
your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with
administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User
(Local User List) on page 10-5 for the default login
user name and password.
4
Press [Next] of User Login Setting, [Next] of Guest
Authorization Set., and then [Change] of Guest
Property.
5
Press [Change] of User Name.
6
Enter the user name and press [OK].
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on
Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
User Login/Job Accounting - Guest Property
User Name:
Change
Guest
Access Level:
Account Name:
User
Authorization Rules:
Press [Change] of Account Name.
8
Select the account and press [OK].
Change
NOTE: Select [Name] and [ID] from the Sort pull-down
02Account
menu to sort the account list.
Press [Search(Name)] or [Search(ID)] to search by
account name or account ID.
Next
Close
Status
7
10/10/2010 10:10
9
Press [Next] of Authorization Rules.
10 Press [Change] of Print Restriction.
11 Select [Reject Usage] or [Off] and press [OK].
12 Repeat steps 11 and 12 to set Print Restriction
(Color), Copy Restriction, Copy Restriction (Color),
Copy Restriction (Full Color), Send Restriction, Fax
TX Restriction, Storing Restr. in Box, and Storing
Restr. in Memory.
13 Press [Close].
14 Press [Save].
10-14
Management
Obtain NW User Property
Set the required information to obtain the network user property from the LDAP server. The user name and
e-mail address obtained with this setting is shown in the user information, the status confirmation screen, and
the header of e-mail.
NOTE: To obtain the network user property from the LDAP server, [Network Authentication] must be selected
for the authentication method in User Login on page 10-2. Select [On] for LDAP in Protocol Detail on page 9100.
The table below explains the required information to be registered.
Item
Server Name*
Description
1
Port
Enter the LDAP server name or the IP address (up to 64 characters). If a server
name is not entered, user information will be acquired from the server set for
Network Authentication.
Set the LDAP port number or use the default port 389.
1*2
Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the user name to be displayed from the
LDAP server (up to 32 characters).
Name 2*3
Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the user name to be displayed from the
LDAP server (up to 32 characters).
E-mail Address*4
Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the e-mail address from the LDAP server (up
to 32 characters).
Authenticat Type*5
Set the authentication method. Select [Simple] or [SASL]. After changing the
setting, restart the system or turn the power off and then on.
Search Timeout
Set the amount of time to wait before time-out in seconds (from 5 to 255
seconds).
LDAP Security
Select the type of encryption according to the type of security employed by the
LDAP server. The default setting is OFF.
Name
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
If using Active Directory of Windows, the server name may be the same as the server name entered in the
network authentication.
If using Active Directory of Windows, displayName of Attribute may be used as Name 1.
Name 2 can be left out. When you assign displayName in Name 1 and department in Name 2, and if the
value of displayName is "Mike Smith" and the value of department is "Sales" in Active Directory of Windows,
the user name appears as Mike Smith Sales.
If using Active Directory of Windows, mail of Attribute may be used as E-mail Address.
Appears when the server type is set to "Kerberos" in "Network Authentication".
Use the procedure below.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [User Login/Job Accounting].
3
If the user authentication screen appears, enter
your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with
administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User
(Local User List) on page 10-5 for the default login
user name and password.
10-15
10
Management
User Login/Job Accounting - Obtain NW User Property
Get the network user information.
Off
LDAP Server Information:
Server Name
On
Port:
Press [Next] of User Login Setting, [Change] of
Obtain NW User Property.
5
Press [On].
6
Press [Server Name].
7
Enter the LDAP server name or the IP address and
press [OK].
8
Press [# keys] to enter the LDAP port number using
the numeric keys.
9
Press [Name 1].
Simple
192.181.11.11
389
4
Authenticat
Type
# Keys
30 sec.
Acquisition of User Information:
Name 1
Search
Timeout
displayName
Name 2
E-mail
Address
Off
LDAP
Security
mail
Cancel
Status
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
10 Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the user name to
be displayed and press [OK].
11 Follow steps 9 and 10 above to set [Name 2].
12 Press [E-mail Address].
13 Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the e-mail
address and press [OK].
14 If you set the server type to [Kerberos], press
[Authentication Type] and set the authentication
method.
15 Press [Search Timeout] to set the amount of time to
wait before time-out.
16 Press [+], [-] or the numeric keys to enter the time
and press [OK].
17 Press [LDAP Security] to select the type of
encryption according to the type of security
employed by the LDAP server.
18 Select [Off], [SSL/TLS], or [STARTTLS] and press
[OK].
10-16
Management
Simple Login Settings
Simple login makes it possible to log in by simply selecting a user. The user must be previously registered.
NOTE: For user registration, refer to Adding a User (Local User List) on page 10-5.
To use Simple Login, User Login Administration must be enabled in User Login on page 10-2.
If the guest authentication setting is enabled, Simple login cannot be enabled.
Simple Login
Select whether or not simple login is enabled.
Use the procedure below.
User Login/Job Accounting - Simple Login
Use the Simple Login.
Off
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [User Login/Job Accounting].
3
If the user authentication screen appears, enter
your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with
administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User
(Local User List) on page 10-5 for the default login
user name and password.
4
Press [Next] of User Login Setting, [Next] of Simple
Login Settings, and then [Change] of Simple Login.
5
Select [On] or [Off].
6
Press [OK].
On
Cancel
Status
1
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
Simple Login Key
Register a user for simple login. You can add Up to 20 users.
Use the procedure below.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [User Login/Job Accounting].
3
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your
login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator
privileges. Refer to Adding a User (Local User
List) on page 10-5 for the default login user name
and password.
10-17
10
Management
User Login/Job Accounting - Simple Login Key
4
Press [Next] of User Login Setting, [Next] of Simple
Login Settings, and then [Next] of Simple Login
Key.
5
Press [Add/Edit].
6
Press [Change] in Display Name, enter the user
name to be displayed, and press [OK].
Add or edit the Simple Login key.
01
02
03
A
B
C
No.
Add/Edit
Delete
1/2
Detail
Close
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
Simple Login Key:
Display Name:
Password Login:
Change
User:
Change
Change
Icon:
Change
Off
Male 1
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on
Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
Cancel
Back
7
Press [Change] of User.
8
To specify the user from local users, select [Local
User]. To specify from network users, select
[Network User]. Press [Next].
The next step varies depending on which
specification method you selected.
Save
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
Simple Login Key: - User
Assing the user to the Simple Login key.
Select the user type.
Local User
Network User
Cancel
Next
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
Specifying the user from local users
9 Select the user to be set for simple login.
Simple Login Key: - User
Select the user.
Name
Sort
User Name
Login User Name
A
A
B
B
C
C
Search(Name)
Search(Login)
NOTE: Destinations can be sorted or searched by
destination name or address number. Refer to
Specifying Destination on page 3-40 for Address List.
1/1
Detail
Cancel
Status
Back
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
10-18
Management
Specifying the user from network users
9 Press [Login User Name] and [Login
Simple Login Key: - User
Password], enter the information of the user
to be registered, and press [OK]. If you are
specifying a user for whom a domain is set
in network authentication, press the Domain
pull-down menu and select the domain
where the user is registered.
Enter login user name and password.
Domain:
User Name
domain 1
Login
User Name
0099
# Keys
Login
Password
**********
# Keys
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on
Cancel
Back
OK
Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
10 Press [Change] of Password Login.
11 Press [On] or [Off] and then press [OK].
12 Press [Change] of Icon.
13 Select the user icon to be displayed and press
Simple Login Key: - Icon
[OK].
Set the icon to use for the Simple Login key.
14 Press [Save].
Male 1
Male 2
Female 1
Female 2
Soccer
Tennis
Basketball
Piano
Guitar
Trumpet
Car
Bicycle
Train
Dog
Cat
Parakeet
Sunflower
Tulips
Earth
Moon
Cancel
Status
10
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
10-19
Management
Job Accounting Setting
Job accounting Manages the copy/print count accumulated by individual accounts by assigning an ID to each account.
Job accounting helps the following activities in business organizations.
•
Manageability of up to 1,000 individual accounts.
•
Availability for account IDs with as many as eight digits (between 0 and 99999999) for security.
•
Integrated management of printing and scanning statistics through the use of an identical account ID.
•
Tracking the print volume for each account and for all accounts combined.
•
Restricting the print counter in one-page increments up to 9,999,999 copies.
•
Resetting the print counter for each account or for all accounts combined.
First Job Accounting Setup
Follow these steps for the first job accounting setup.
Enable job accounting. (page 10-20)

Add an account. (page 10-22)

Log out. (page 10-21)

Other users login for operations. (page 10-21)
Job Accounting
Enable job accounting. Use the procedure below to specify the job accounting setting.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [User Login/Job Accounting].
3
If the user authentication screen appears, enter
your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with
administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User
(Local User List) on page 10-5 for the default login
user name and password.
4
Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting, and then
[Change] of Job Accounting.
5
Press [On]. To disable job accounting, press [Off].
6
Press [OK].
NOTE: When the display returns to the System Menu
default screen, logout is automatically executed and
the screen to enter the Account ID appears. To
continue the operation, enter the Account ID.
10-20
Management
Login/Logout
If job accounting is enabled, an account ID entry screen appears each time you use this machine.
Use the procedure below to login and logout.
Login
1
In the screen below, enter the account ID using the
numeric keys and press [Login].
NOTE: If you entered a wrong character, press the
Clear key and enter the account ID again.
********
If the entered account ID does not match the registered
ID, a warning beep will sound and login will fail. Enter
the correct account ID.
Check Counter
Status
Login
By pressing [Check Counter], you can refer to the number
of pages printed and the number of pages scanned.
10/10/2010 10:10
When the screen to enter the login user
name and password appears
If user login administration is enabled, the screen to
enter the login user name and password appears.
Enter a login user name and password to login.
(Refer to Login/Logout on page 10-3.) If the user
has already registered the account information, the
account ID entry would be skipped. (Refer to
Adding a User (Local User List) on page 10-5.)
2
Proceed to complete the rest of the steps.
Logout
When the operations are complete, press the
Authentication/Logout key to return to the account ID
entry screen.
10-21
10
Management
Adding an Account (Accounting List)
This section explains how to add a new account. The following entries are required.
Item
Description
Account Name
Enter the account name (up to 32 characters).
Account ID
Enter the account ID as many as eight digits (between 0 and 99999999).
Restriction
This Prohibits printing/scanning or restricts the number of sheets to
load. Refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 10-24.
Use the procedure below to register a new account.
Account: 01 Account
Account Name:
Change
01 Account
Account ID:
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [User Login/Job Accounting].
3
If the user authentication screen appears, enter
your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with
administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User
(Local User List) on page 10-5 for the default login
user name and password.
4
Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting, [Add/Edit]
of Accounting List, and then [Add].
5
Press [Change] of Account Name.
6
Enter the account name and press [OK]. The
Account screen reappears.
Change
00001000
Copy Restriction (Total):
Change
Off
Copy Restr. (Full Color):
Change
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on
Print Restr. (Full Color):
Change
Off
Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
Change
1/2
Off
Cancel
Status
Change
Off
Off
Copy Restr. (SingleColor):
Print Restriction (Total):
Save
10/10/2010 10:10
7
Follow steps 5 and 6 above to enter the Account ID.
NOTE: Any account ID that has already registered
cannot be used. Enter any other account ID.
8
Activate or deactivate restriction. Refer to
Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 10-24.
9
Press [Save] to add a new account on the Account
List.
10-22
Management
Managing Accounts
This changes the registered account information or deletes the account.
Use the procedure below to manage accounts.
User Login/Job Accounting - Accounting List
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [User Login/Job Accounting].
3
If the user authentication screen appears, enter
your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with
administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User
(Local User List) on page 10-5 for the default login
user name and password.
4
Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting and then
[Add/Edit] of Accounting List.
5
Select an account to change or delete.
Register an account that is permitted to use this machine. (Maximum: 1000)
Sort
Account Name
Name
Account ID
01 Account
00001000
02 Account
00002000
03 Account
00003000
Search(Name)
Search(ID)
1/2
Add
04 Account
00004000
05 Account
00005000
Detail
NOTE: Select [Name] or [ID] from the Sort pull-down
menu to sort the account names.
Press [Search(Name)] or [Search(ID)] to search by
account name or account ID.
The procedure differs depending on the details to
be edited.
Delete
Close
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
Changing account information
Account: 01 Account
Account Name:
Change
1
Press [Detail].
2
Refer to steps 5 to 7 of Adding an Account and
steps 2 to 5 of Restricting Using the Machine
to change account information.
3
Press [Save].
4
Press [Yes] in the registration confirmation
screen. The account information is changed.
01 Account
Account ID:
Change
00001000
Copy Restriction (Total):
Change
Off
Copy Restr. (Full Color):
Change
Print Restr. (Full Color):
Change
Off
Change
1/2
Off
Cancel
Status
Change
Off
Off
Copy Restr. (SingleColor):
Print Restriction (Total):
Save
10/10/2010 10:10
Deleting an account
10-23
1
Press [Delete].
2
Press [Yes]. To delete the account.
10
Management
Copy/Printer Count
You can select how the copying and printing page counts are shown - either the total of both or each of copying
and printing individually. The selection may influence restriction on the count and count method. Refer to
Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 10-24, Counting the Number of Pages Printed on page 10-28 and
Print Accounting Report on page 10-32 for details.
Use the procedure below to set the counting methods.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [User Login/Job Accounting].
3
If the user authentication screen appears, enter
your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with
administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User
(Local User List) on page 10-5 for the default login
user name and password.
4
Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting, [Next] of
Default Setting and then [Change] of Copy/Printer
Count.
5
Press [Total] or [Split].
6
Press [OK].
Restricting the Use of the Machine
This section explains how to restrict the use of the machine by account or the number of sheets available.
The items that can be restricted differ depending on whether [Split] or [Total] is selected for Copy/Printer
Count on page 10-24.
Restriction Items
 [Split] selected for Copy/Printer Count
Item
Detail
Copy Restriction (Total)
Limits the total number of sheets used for full-color, singlecolor, and black and white copying.
Copy Restr. (Full Color)
Limits the number of sheets used for full-color copying.
Copy Restr. (SingleColor)
Limits the number of sheets used for single-color copying.
Print Restriction (Total)
Limits the total number of sheets used for color and black and
white printing.
Print Restr. (Full Color)
Limits the number of sheets used for color printing.
Scan Restriction (Others)
Limits the number of sheets scanned (excludes copying).
FAX TX Restriction
Limits the number of sheets sent by fax. This is displayed
when the optional fax kit is installed.
FAX Port Restriction
Restricts the ports used for faxing. This is displayed when two
optional FAX kits are installed.
10-24
Management
 [Total] selected for Copy/Printer Count
Item
Detail
Print Restriction (Total)
Limits the total number of sheets used for copying and printing.
Print Restr. (Full Color)
Limits the number of sheets used for full-color printing.
Print Restr. (SingleColor)
Limits the number of sheets used for single-color printing.
Scan Restriction (Others)
Limits the number of sheets scanned (excludes copying).
FAX TX Restriction
Limits the number of sheets sent by fax. This is displayed
when the optional fax kit is installed.
FAX Port Restriction
Restricts the ports used for faxing. This is displayed when two
optional FAX kits are installed.
Applying Restriction
Restriction can be applied in two modes as follows:
Item
*
Description
Off
No restriction given
Counter Limit
Restricts the print counter in one-page increments up to
9,999,999 copies.
Reject Usage
Restriction is applied.
Select [Off], [Use Port 1 Only] or [Use Port 2 Only] as the FAX Port Restriction setting.
10
Use the procedure below to select a restriction method.
1
Follow steps 1 to 4 of Adding an Account
(Accounting List) on page 10-22.
2
Press [Change] for the item to be restricted.
3
Select the restriction mode.
If [Counter Limit] is selected, press [+],[-] or
numeric keys to select the number of pages.
Account: - Copy Restriction (Total)
Restrict use of the functions.
Off
4
Press [OK].
5
Repeat steps 2 to 4 for other accounts to be
restricted.
6
Press [Save]. The restricted account is added.
Limit
(1 - 9999999)
Counter Limit
99999
page(s)
Reject Usage
Cancel
Status
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
10-25
Management
Apply Limit
This specifies how the machine behaves when the counter has reached the limit of restriction. The table below
describes the action taken.
Item
*
Description
Immediately *
Job stops when the counter reaches its limit.
Subsequently
Printing/scanning of the job continues but the subsequent job
will be rejected.
Alert Only
Job continues while displaying an alert message.
The next job will be prohibited in sending or in storing in the box.
Use the procedure below to apply the restriction limit.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [User Login/Job Accounting].
3
If the user authentication screen appears, enter
your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with
administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User
(Local User List) on page 10-5 for the default login
user name and password.
4
Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting, [Next] of
Default Setting and then [Change] of Apply Limit.
5
Select [Immediately], [Subsequently], or [Alert
Only].
6
Press [OK].
Default Counter Limit
When you add a new account, you can change the default restrictions on the number of sheets used. You can
set any number from 1 to 9,999,999 in 1-sheet increments.
The items that can be set differ depending on whether [Split] or [Total] is selected for Copy/Printer Count on
page 10-24.
10-26
Management
Available Settings
 [Split] selected for Copy/Printer Count
Item
Detail
Copy Restriction (Total)
Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for
color and black and white copying.
Copy Restr. (Full Color)
Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for
full-color copying.
Copy Restr. (SingleColor)
Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for
single-color copying.
Print Restriction (Total)
Sets the default restriction on the total number of sheets used
for color and black and white printing.
Print Restr. (Full Color)
Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for
color printing.
Scan Restriction (Others)
Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for
scanning (excludes copying).
FAX TX Restriction
Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for sending
faxes. This is displayed when the optional fax kit is installed.
 [Total] selected for Copy/Printer Count
Item
Detail
Print Restriction (Total)
Sets the default restriction on the total number of sheets used
for copying and printing.
Print Restr. (Full Color)
Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for
full-color printing.
Print Restr. (SingleColor)
Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for
single-color printing.
Scan Restriction (Others)
Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for
scanning (excludes copying).
FAX TX Restriction
Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for sending
faxes. This is displayed when the optional fax kit is installed.
Use the procedure below to specify the counter limits.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [User Login/Job Accounting].
3
If user login administration is disabled, the user
authentication screen appears. Enter a login user
name and password, and press [Login]. For this,
you need to login with administrator privileges.
Refer to Adding a User (Local User List) on page
10-5 for the default login user name and password.
4
Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting, [Next] of Default
Setting and then [Next] of Default Counter Limit.
10-27
10
Management
User Login/Job Accounting - Copy Restriction (Total)
5
Press [Change] for the item you want to modify and
then press [+] or [-] or use the numeric keys to enter
the default restriction on the number of sheets.
6
Press [OK].
7
To set another default restriction, repeat steps 5 to 6.
Set the default limit value for restricting use of the functions for each account
by counter.
Use [-]/[+] or the numeric keys to enter a number.
(1 - 9999999)
99999
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
Counting the Number of Pages Printed
This counts the number of pages printed. Counts are classified into Total Job Accounting and Each Job Accounting.
A new count can also be started after resetting the count data which was stored for a certain period of time.
Types of the counts are as follows.
Item
Printed Pages
Detail
Displays the number of pages copied and printed, and the total
number of pages used. You can also use [Count by Paper Size] and
[Count by Duplex/Combine] to check the number of pages used.
•
For copying, you can check the pages used for black and white,
full-color and single-color copying as well as the total pages
used.
•
For printing, you can check the pages used for black and white
and full-color printing as well as the total pages used.
•
You can use [Count by Paper Size] to check the number of
pages used in the paper size set in Count by Paper Size on page
10-30 as well as the number of pages used in other paper sizes.
•
You can use the [Count by Duplex/Combine] to check the
number of pages used in Duplex (1-sided) mode, Duplex (2sided) mode and the total for both, as well as the pages used in
Combine (None) mode, Combine (2in1) mode, Combine (4in1)
mode and the total for all three.
Scanned Pages
Displays the number of pages scanned for copying, faxing* and
other functions, as well as the total number of pages scanned.
FAX Transmission Pages*
Displays the number of pages faxed.
FAX Transmission Time*
Displays the total duration of fax transmissions.
*
Only displayed when the optional fax kit is installed.
10-28
Management
Total Job Accounting
This counts the number of pages for all accounts and resets the counts for those accounts together at the same time.
Use the procedure below to check and reset the counter.
User Login/Job Accounting - Total Job Accounting
Printed Pages:
Check
2
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [User Login/Job Accounting].
3
If the user authentication screen appears, enter
your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with
administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User
(Local User List) on page 10-5 for the default login
user name and password.
4
Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting and then
[Next] of Total Job Accounting.
5
Press [Check] at the function to check the count.
The results will be displayed.
6
Confirm the count and press [Close].
7
Press [Start] of Counter Reset to reset the counter.
8
Press [Yes] on the screen to confirm the reset. The
counter is reset.
Check
FAX Transmission Time:
FAX Transmission Pages:
Counter Reset:
Scanned Pages:
1
0:00:10
Start
10
Close
Status
10/10/2010 10:10
Each Job Accounting
This counts the number of pages for each account and resets the counts by account.
Use the procedure below to display and reset the counter.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [User Login/Job Accounting].
3
If the user authentication screen appears, enter
your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with
administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User
(Local User List) on page 10-5 for the default login
user name and password.
4
Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting and [Check]
of Each Job Accounting.
10-29
Management
5
User Login/Job Accounting - Each Job Accounting
Select the account to check the count.
Maintain a separate counter for each account (department).
Sort
Account Name
Name
Account ID
00006000
06 Account
Search(Name)
Search(ID)
2/2
Other Account
NOTE: Select [Name] or [ID] from the Sort pull-down
menu to sort the account names.
Press [Search(Name)] or [Search(ID)] to search by
account name or account ID.
To display an account other than your own account,
press [Other Account].
Detail
Close
Status
10/10/2010 10:10
Account: 06 Account
Printed Pages:
Check
FAX Transmission Pages:
Scanned Pages:
Press [Detail].
7
Press [Check] at the function to check the count.
The results will be displayed.
8
Confirm the count and press [Close].
9
Press [Start] of Counter Reset to reset the counter.
Check
FAX Transmission Time:
2(20)
6
0:00:10
10 Press [Yes] on the screen to confirm the reset. The
Counter Reset:
counter will be reset.
Start
Close
Status
10/10/2010 10:10
Count by Paper Size
This counts the number of pages by paper size (e.g. Letter).
NOTE: Paper size is available in five types, - 1 to 5. These types are specified in accounting reports. Refer to
Print Accounting Report on page 10-32.
In addition to paper size, media type can also be specified (e.g. count the letter-size color paper used). If no
media type is specified, usage is counted for all media types of that size.
Use the procedure below to count the number of pages.
1
Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [User Login/Job Accounting].
3
If the user authentication screen appears, enter
your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with
administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User
(Local User List) on page 10-5 for the default login
user name and password.
4
Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting, [Next] of
Default Setting, [Next] of Count by Paper Size,
[Change] of Paper Size 1 to 5 and then [On].
10-30
Management
User Login/Job Accounting - Paper Size 1
Select the paper sizes and types to count.
Off
On
A3
A4
A5
B4
B5
Folio
Ledger
Legal
Letter
Statement
5
Select the paper size.
6
Press [Media Type] to specify media type.
7
Select the media type and press [OK].
8
Press [OK].
Plain
Media Type
Cancel
Status
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
10
10-31
Management
Print Accounting Report
The total pages counted of all relevant accounts can be printed as an accounting report.
Reports have different formats depending on how the count of copiers and printers is administered.
When Split is selected for Managing the Copy/Printer Count
ACCOUNT.REPORT
Firmware Version
For the count by paper size, the report will be printed by size.
Use the procedure below to print a job accounting report.
1
Check that Letter or A4 paper is loaded in the
cassette.
2
Press the System Menu key.
3
Press [User Login/Job Accounting].
4
If the user authentication screen appears, enter
your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with
administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User
(Local User List) on page 10-5 for the default login
user name and password.
5
Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting and then
[Print] of Print Accounting Report.
6
Press [Yes] on the screen to confirm the printing.
10-32
Management
Unknown ID Job
The behavior of the machine when it receives a job from an unknown account ID (i.e. unsent ID) can be
specified. Refer to Unknown ID Job on page 10-10 for details.
Checking and Printing Counter
Press the Counter key to check the number of sheets
printed and scanned.
Counter
Printed Pages
Copy
Printer
FAX
Total
Black&White:
300
600
100
1000
Full Color:
200
500
100
800
SingleColor:
100
100
0
200
Total:
600
1200
200
2000
You can check the number of pages printed in each
paper size by pressing [Printed Pages by Paper Size].
Scanned Pages
Copy
Originals:
Print
Status Page
Status
FAX
600
Printed Pages
by Paper Size
Total
Others
200
1000
1800
Close
10/10/2010 10:10
10
10-33
Management
10-34
11 Maintenance
This chapter describes cleaning and toner replacement.
•
•
Regular Maintenance........................................................................11-2
Cleaning..........................................................................................11-15
11-1
Maintenance
Regular Maintenance
Toner Container Replacement
When toner runs low, "Toner is running out" appears in the touch panel. Make sure you have a new toner
container available for replacement.
When the touch panel displays Toner is empty., replace the toner.
Every time you replace the toner container, be sure to clean the parts as instructed below. Dirty parts may
deteriorate output quality.
NOTE:
•
For the toner container, always use a genuine toner container. Using a toner container that is not genuine
may cause image defects and product failure.
•
The memory chip in the toner container of this product stores information necessary for improving customer
convenience, operation of the recycling system for used toner containers, and planning and development of
new products. The stored information does not include information that makes it possible to identify
individuals, and is only used anonymously for the above purposes.
CAUTION: Do not attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box. Dangerous sparks
may cause burns.
Installation procedures of the toner container is same for every color. The procedures here represent the yellow
toner container.
1
Open the front cover.
2
Turn the toner container release lever to the vertical
position.
(Y) (C) (M) (K)
11-2
Maintenance
3
Remove the toner container and insert it into the
provided plastic disposal bag.
4
Remove the new toner container from the box.
11
5
11-3
Hold the toner container vertically and hit the upper
part about 3 times. Invert the toner container so that
the other end is up, and hit in the same way.
Maintenance
6
Hold the toner container horizontally and shake
from side to side about 3 times.
7
Hold the toner container with both hands and gently
push it all the way in.
8
After pushing the toner container all the way in, turn
the toner container release lever to the horizontal
position.
9
Close the front cover.
NOTE: Return the exhausted toner container and waste toner box to your dealer or service representative.
The collected toner container and waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant
regulations
11-4
Maintenance
Waste Toner Box Replacement
When "Waste toner box almost full" appears in the touch panel, make sure you have a new waste toner box
available for replacement.
When the touch panel shows “Check waste toner box.”, immediately replace the waste toner box.
CAUTION: Do not attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box. Dangerous sparks
may cause burns.
1
Open the front cover.
2
Press the release key (1) and pull out the waste
toner tray (2).
3
Close the cap and remove the old waste toner box
diagonally upward.
11-5
11
Maintenance
4
Insert into the provided plastic disposal bag.
5
Gently remove the new waste toner box from its
packaging and open the cap.
6
Install a new waste toner box.
11-6
Maintenance
7
Press the specified position to close the waste
toner tray. When the tray reaches the correct
position, it locks in place with a clicking sound.
8
Close the front cover.
NOTE: Return the exhausted toner container and waste toner box to your dealer or service representative.
The collected toner container and waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant
regulations.
11
11-7
Maintenance
Replacing Staples
A staple cartridge is installed in the optional 1,000-sheet finisher, 4,000-sheet finisher, and center-fold unit.
If a message displays indicating that staples have run out, the staple cartridge holder need to be replenished
with staples.
NOTE: If the Staple Unit runs out of staples, contact your service representative or the place of purchase.
Follow the steps below to refill staples.
1,000-sheet Finisher (Option)
1
Open the front cover.
2
Remove the staple cartridge holder.
3
Remove the empty staple cartridge from the staple
cartridge holder.
NOTE: The staple cartridge can only be removed
when it contains no more staples.
11-8
Maintenance
4
Insert the new staple cartridge into the staple
cartridge holder.
5
Re-install the staple cartridge holder. The staple
cartridge holder will click into place when it has
been inserted correctly.
6
Close the front cover.
11
11-9
Maintenance
4,000-sheet Finisher (Option)
The 4,000-sheet finisher contains staple cartridge holder A.
The optional folding unit contains staple cartridge holders B and C. The refill procedure for staple cartridge
holders B and C are the same as for staple cartridge holder A.
Refilling Staple Cartridge Holder A
NOTE: See page 11-11 to refill staple cartridge holder B/C of the optional folding unit.
1
Open the front cover 1.
2
Remove the staple cartridge holder.
3
Remove the empty staple cartridge from the staple
cartridge holder.
NOTE: The staple cartridge can only be removed
when it contains no more staples.
11-10
Maintenance
4
Insert the new staple cartridge into the staple
cartridge holder.
5
Re-install the staple cartridge holder. The staple
cartridge holder will click into place when it has
been inserted correctly.
6
Close the front cover 1.
Refilling Staple Cartridge Holders B/C (Option)
Follow the steps below to refill staples for the optional folding unit. Follow the same procedure to refill staple
cartridge holders B and C.
1
Open the front cover 1 and 2.
11
2
11-11
Remove the staple cartridge holder B or C.
Maintenance
3
Open the stopper and remove the empty staple
cartridge.
NOTE: The staple cartridge can only be removed
when it contains no more staples.
4
Insert the new staple cartridge into the staple
cartridge holder and close the stopper.
5
Re-install the staple cartridge holder.
When re-installing, align the triangle marks on the
staple cartridge holder and the staple unit. The
staple cartridge holder will click into place when it
has been inserted correctly.
6
Close the front cover 1 and 2.
Emptying the Punch Waste Box (Option)
If a message is displayed on the machine operation panel indicating that the waste punch box is full, be sure to
empty the scraps in the punch waste box.
Leave the main power switch on the machine switched ON ( | ) while performing this procedure.
11-12
Maintenance
1,000-sheet Finisher (Option)
1
Open the front cover.
2
Grasp the punch waste box handle and remove the
box from the Document Finisher.
NOTE: Take care not to spill the waste hole punch
scraps when removing the container.
3
Dispose of the hole punch scraps appropriately.
11
4
Re-install the punch waste box. Align it with the
guides in the Document Finisher.
5
Close the front cover.
11-13
Maintenance
4,000-sheet Finisher (Option)
1
Open the front cover 1.
2
Grasp the punch waste box handle and remove the
box from the Document Finisher.
NOTE: Take care not to spill the waste hole punch
scraps when removing the container.
3
Dispose of the hole punch scraps appropriately.
4
Re-install the punch waste box. Align it with the
guides in the Document Finisher.
5
Close the front cover 1.
11-14
Maintenance
Cleaning
Clean the machine regularly to ensure optimum output quality.
CAUTION: For safety, always unplug the power cord before cleaning the machine.
Platen Cover / Glass Platen
Wipe the backside of the platen cover, the inside of the document processor and the glass platen with a soft
cloth dampened with alcohol or mild detergent.
IMPORTANT: Do not use thinner or other organic solvents.
Platen Cover
Glass Platen
11
11-15
Maintenance
Slit Glass/Dual scanning area
If black streaks or dirt appears in copies when using the optional document processor, clean the slit glass with
the supplied cleaning cloth. The message Clean the slit glass. may be displayed if the slit glass requires
cleaning. When using the document processor that features dual scanning, clean the dual scanning unit also.
The slit glass requires cleaning.
1. Open the document processor.
2. Clean the slit glass surface and the white
reading guide on the document processor with
the dry accessory cloth.
3. Close the document processor and press [End].
Note that dirty glass and sheet may cause
black streaks to appear in the output.
02/03
End
Hold
Status
10/10/2010 10:10
NOTE: Wipe the slit glasses with the dry accessory cloth. Do not use water, soap or solvents for cleaning.
1
Remove the cloth from the cleaning cloth
compartment.
2
Open the document processor and wipe the slit
glass (a).
a
11-16
Maintenance
3
Wipe the white guide (b) on the document
processor.
4
If you are using the dual scan document processor,
open the top cover of the document processor and
wipe the glass (scanning unit).
5
Wipe the white roller.
b
11
6
Close the document processor top cover and return
the cleaning cloth to the cleaning cloth
compartment.
7
Press [End] on the touch panel.
11-17
Maintenance
Separator
Clean the separator regularly (at least monthly) to ensure optimum output quality.
1
Open the front cover.
2
Remove the cleaning brush (blue colored).
3
Pull up the lever and open the right cover 1.
4
As shown in the figure, clean dirt from the separator
by moving the brush from side to side along the
separator.
11-18
Maintenance
5
Press the specified position of the right cover 1 to
close.
6
Put away the cleaning brush and close the front
cover.
1
Open the front cover.
2
Remove the cleaning brush (blue colored).
Transfer Roller
11
3
11-19
Pull up the lever and open the right cover 1.
Maintenance
4
As shown in the figure, clean dirt from the transfer
roller by moving the brush from side to side along
the roller while rotating the roller by turning the gear
at the right end of the roller.
5
Press the specified position of the right cover 1 to
close.
6
Put away the cleaning brush and close the front
cover.
11-20
12 Troubleshooting
This chapter explains how to solve problems with the machine.
•
•
•
Solving Malfunctions .........................................................................12-2
Responding when Error Messages...................................................12-8
Clearing Paper Jams ......................................................................12-23
12-1
Troubleshooting
Solving Malfunctions
The table below provides general guidelines for problem solving.
If a problem occurs with your machine, look into the checkpoints and perform procedures indicated on the
following pages. If the problem persists, contact your Service Representative.
Symptom
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
An application does
not start.
Is the Auto Panel Reset time
short?
Set the Auto Panel Reset time to
30 seconds or more.
9-78
The operation panel
does not respond
when the main power
switch is turned on.
Is the machine plugged in?
Plug the power cord into an AC
outlet.
2-6
Pressing the Start key
does not produce
copies.
Is there a message on the
touch panel?
Determine the appropriate
response to the message and
respond accordingly.
12-8
Is the machine in Sleep
mode?
Press the Power key to recover
the machine from Sleep mode. The
machine will be ready to copy
within a minute.
2-10
Are the originals loaded
correctly?
When placing originals on the
platen, place them face-down and
align them with the original size
indicator plates.
2-44
When placing originals in the
optional document processor,
place them face-up.
2-46
—
Check that the application software
is correctly operated.
—
Is the paper damp?
Replace the paper with new paper.
2-27
Have you changed the
density?
Select appropriate density level.
3-10
9-69
Is the toner distributed evenly
within the toner container?
Shake the toner container from
side to side several times.
11-2
Is there a message indicating
the addition of toner?
Replace the toner container.
11-2
Is EcoPrint mode enabled?
Disable EcoPrint mode.
9-60
—
Run [Drum Refresh].
9-70
—
Run [Developer Refresh].
9-76
—
Run [Laser Scanner Cleaning].
9-76
—
Make sure the paper type setting is
correct for the paper being used.
9-4
Blank sheets are
ejected.
Printouts are too
light.
12-2
Troubleshooting
Symptom
Printouts are too dark.
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Have you changed the
density?
Select appropriate density level.
3-10
9-69
—
Run [Calibration].
9-75
—
Run [Developer Refresh].
9-76
Copies have a moire
pattern (dots grouped
together in patterns
and not aligned
uniformly).
Is the original a printed
photograph?
Set the image quality to [Printer
Output] or [Book/Magazine] in
[Photo].
3-10
Printouts are not
clear.
Did you choose appropriate
image quality for the original?
Select appropriate image quality.
3-10
Dirt on the print side
of the paper.
Is the platen or the document
processor dirty?
Clean the platen or the document
processor.
11-15
—
Brush the transfer roller clean.
11-19
—
Run [Drum Refresh].
9-70
—
Run [Developer Refresh].
9-76
—
Run [Laser Scanner Cleaning].
9-76
Is the machine being used in
very humid conditions?
Use in an environment that has
suitable humidity.
—
—
Run [Drum Refresh].
9-70
Are the originals placed
correctly?
When placing originals on the
platen, align them with the original
size indicator plates.
2-46
When placing originals in the
optional document processor, align
the original width guides securely
before placing the originals.
2-46
Check the position of the paper
width guides.
2-29
Printouts are fuzzy.
Images are skewed.
Is the paper loaded
correctly?
12-3
12
Troubleshooting
Symptom
Paper often jams.
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Is the paper loaded
correctly?
Load the paper correctly.
2-29
—
Change the orientation in which the
paper is positioned.
xxxviii
2-29
2-36
Is the paper of the supported
type? Is it in good condition?
Remove the paper, turn it over, and
reload it.
2-29
Is the paper curled, folded or
wrinkled?
Replace the paper with new paper.
2-29
Are there any loose scraps or
jammed paper in the
machine?
Remove any jammed paper.
12-23
Are the slit glass and the
Dual scanning area dirty?
Clean the slit glass and the Dual
scanning area.
11-16
—
Run [Laser Scanner Cleaning].
9-76
Is the paper separator of the
paper feed unit dirty?
Clean the paper separator.
11-18
Is the paper damp?
Replace the paper with new paper.
2-27
—
Change the orientation in which the
paper is positioned.
xxxviii
2-29
2-36
Is the machine plugged in?
Plug the power cord into an AC
outlet.
—
Is the machine powered on?
Turn on the main power switch.
3-2
Are the printer cable and
network cable connected?
Connect the correct printer cable
and network cable securely.
2-3
Was the machine powered
on before the printer cable
was connected?
Power on the machine after
connecting the printer cable.
2-3
Is the print job paused?
Resume printing.
8-3
Documents are
printed improperly.
Are the application software
settings at the PC set
properly?
Check that the printer driver and
application software settings are
set properly.
—
Cannot print with USB
memory.
USB memory not
recognized.
Is the USB host blocked?
Select [Unblock] in the USB host
settings.
9-109
—
Check that the USB memory is
securely plugged into the machine.
—
Printouts have black
lines.
Printouts are wrinkled
or curled.
Cannot print.
12-4
Troubleshooting
Symptom
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
When displaying an
image sent from the
machine on the PC, an
image size is shrunk
vertically or
horizontally.
Have you selected
200×100dpi Normal or
200×400dpi Super Fine for
the scan resolution?
Select a scan resolution other than
200×100dpi Normal or 200×400dpi
Super Fine when sending an
image.
—
Dirt on the top edge
or back of the paper.
Check the paper chute and
the ramp.
Open the right cover and check for
toner on the paper ramp inside the
paper transfer unit. Clean the
paper ramp using a soft, dry, lintfree cloth.
—
Part of the image is
periodically faint or
blurred.
—
Run [Developer Refresh].
9-76
Part of the image is
periodically faint or
shows white lines.
—
Run [Drum Refresh].
9-70
White dots appear on
the image.
—
Run [Drum Refresh].
9-70
Skewed-color
printout.
—
Run [Calibration].
9-75
—
Run [Color Registration].
9-72
Print on the back of
the sheet is visible on
the front.
—
Set [Prevent Bleed-through] to
[On].
4-42
6-25
9-22
The background
density is obtrusive.
—
Run [Background Density Adj.].
4-40
6-22
9-21
12-5
12
Troubleshooting
Symptom
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Perform Tone Curve
Adjustment in the
System Menu. is
displayed.
Over long periods of use, the
effects of the ambient
temperature and humidity
can cause color output hues
to vary slightly.
Run [Tone Curve Adjustment].
9-75
Colors appear
different than you
anticipated.
Did you choose appropriate
image quality for the original?
Select appropriate image quality.
3-10
Have you loaded color copy
paper into the paper tray?
Load color copy paper into the
paper tray.
2-28
—
Run [Calibration].
9-75
—
Run [Tone Curve Adjustment].
9-75
—
When making copies
Adjust the color balance.
4-35
When printing from a computer
Adjust the color using the printer
driver.
5-3
Is the network cable
connected?
Connect the correct network cable
securely.
2-3
Have the network settings for
the equipment been
configured properly?
Configure the TCP/IP settings
properly.
9-96
Have the folder sharing
settings been configured
properly?
Check sharing settings and access
privileges under the folder
properties.
3-25
Has the SMB protocol been
set to [On]?
Set the SMB protocol setting to
[On].
3-25
Has the [Host Name] been
entered properly?
Check the name of the computer to
which data is being sent.*
3-25
Has the [Path] been entered
properly?
Check the share name for the
shared folder.
3-25
Has the [Login User Name]
been entered properly?
Check the domain name and login
user name.**
3-25
Has the same domain name
been used for the [Host
Name] and [Login User
Name]?
Delete the domain name and
backslash ("\") from the [Login
User Name].
3-25
Has the [Login Password]
been entered properly?
Check the login password.
3-25
Have exceptions for
Windows Firewall been
configured properly?
Configure exceptions for Windows
Firewall properly.
3-36
Cannot send via SMB.
12-6
Troubleshooting
Symptom
Cannot send via SMB.
*
**
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Do the time settings for the
equipment, domain server,
and data destination
computer differ?
Set the equipment, domain server,
and data destination computer to
the same time.
—
Is the touch panel displaying
Send error.?
Refer to Responding to Send Error.
12-18
You can also enter a full computer name as the host name (for example, pc001.abcdnet.com).
You can also enter login user names in the following formats:
Domain_name/user_name (for example, abcdnet/james.smith)
User_name@domain_name (for example, james.smith@abcdnet)
12
12-7
Troubleshooting
Responding when Error Messages
If the touch panel displays any of these messages, follow the corresponding procedure.
Alphanumeric
Checkpoints
Acceptable fold count
exceeded.
Is the acceptable number of
sheets exceeded?
Press [Continue] to print using Fold
per acceptable number of sheets.
Press [Cancel] to cancel the job.
4-11
Acceptable staple
count exceeded.*
Is the acceptable number of
sheets exceeded?
Press [Continue] to print without
using Staple. Press [Cancel] to
cancel the job.
—
Activation error.
—
Failed to activate the application.
Contact administrator.
—
—
Expansion Authentication is disabled.
Turn the main power switch off and
on. If the error exists, contact
administrator.
—
Add paper in cassette
#.
Is the indicated cassette out
of paper?
Load paper.
Select the available paper. Press
[Continue] to print.
2-27
Add paper in Multi
Purpose tray.
Is the paper of the selected
size loaded in the multi
purpose tray?
Load paper.
Select the available paper. Press
[Continue] to print.
2-32
Box is not found.
—
The specified box cannot be found.
Job is canceled. Press [End].
—
Box limit exceeded.*
—
Document box is full, and no further
storage is available. Job is canceled.
Press [End].
—
—
Repeat Copy box is full, and no
further repeat copy is available.
Press [Continue] to print scanned
pages.
Press [Cancel] to cancel the job.
—
—
Set machine time to match the
server’s time.
2-12
—
Check the domain name.
10-2
—
Check the host name.
10-2
—
Check the connection status with the
server.
—
Cannot connect to
Authentication
Server.*
*
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Error Message
When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses.
12-8
Troubleshooting
Error Message
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Cannot duplex print
on this paper.*
Did you select a paper size/
type that cannot be duplex
printed?
If the selected paper is not changed
and [Continue] is pressed, duplex is
released.
Select the available paper. Press
[Continue] to print.
3-13
Cannot find the
destination computer.
Check the computer.
Is the machine connected to
the network?
Make sure that the machine is
connected to the network.
2-3
Is the PC to which the
scanned image is to be sent
connected to the network?
Make sure that the destination PC is
connected to the network.
2-3
Has the setting of the
shared folder to which the
scanned image is to be sent
been changed?
Return the setting for the destination
shared folder to the previous setting.
3-30
Is the account information
(user ID, password) used to
access the shared folder to
which the scanned image is
to be sent incorrect?
Enter the correct user ID and
password. For a domain
environment, the domain name must
be specified.
[User ID]@[Domain Name]
Example: sa720XXXX@km
—
Cannot fold this
paper.
Did you select a paper size/
type that cannot be folded?
If the selected paper is not changed
and [Continue] is pressed, fold is
released.
Select the available paper. Press
[Continue] to print.
4-11
Cannot offset this
paper.*
Did you select a paper size/
type that cannot be offset?
If the selected paper is not changed
and [Continue] is pressed, offset is
released.
Select the available paper. Press
[Continue] to print.
3-15
Cannot print the
specified number of
copies.*
—
Only one copy is available.
Press [Continue] to continue printing.
Press [Cancel] to cancel the job.
—
Cannot process this
job.*
—
Restricted by Authorization settings.
The job is canceled. Press [End].
—
—
Restricted by Job Accounting.
The job is canceled. Press [End].
10-20
*
12
When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses.
12-9
Troubleshooting
Error Message
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Cannot punch at the
specified position.
Have you selected a
position that cannot be
punched?
If the selected paper is not changed
and [Continue] is pressed, punch is
released.
Select the available paper. Press
[Continue] to print.
3-21
Cannot punch this
paper.
Did you select a paper size/
type that cannot be
punched?
If the selected paper is not changed
and [Continue] is pressed, punch is
released.
Select the available paper. Press
[Continue] to print.
3-21
Cannot staple at the
specified position.
Have you selected a
position that cannot be
stapled?
If the selected paper is not changed
and [Continue] is pressed, staple is
released.
Select the available paper. Press
[Continue] to print.
—
Cannot staple this
paper.*
Did you select a paper size/
type that cannot be stapled?
If the selected paper is not changed
and [Continue] is pressed, staple is
released.
Select the available paper. Press
[Continue] to print.
—
Cannot use ##### due
to a failure.
—
Call service.
—
Check the document
processor.
Is the document processor
open?
Close the document processor.
—
Is the top cover of the
document processor open?
Close the document processor cover.
—
Is the machine connected to
the network?
Make sure that the machine is
connected to the network.
2-3
Is the PC to which the
scanned image is to be sent
connected to the network?
Make sure that the destination PC is
connected to the network.
2-3
Has the setting of the
shared folder to which the
scanned image is to be sent
been changed?
Return the setting for the destination
shared folder to the previous setting.
3-30
Is the account information
(user ID, password) used to
access the shared folder to
which the scanned image is
to be sent incorrect?
Enter the correct user ID and
password. For a domain
environment, the domain name must
be specified.
[User ID]@[Domain Name]
Example: sa720XXXX@km
—
Check the folder
setting at the PC.
*
When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses.
12-10
Troubleshooting
Error Message
Check the main unit
right tray.
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Is the main unit right tray
closed?
Open the main unit right tray.
—
Is the acceptable storage
capacity exceeded?
Remove the paper. Printing then
resumes.
—
Check the paper in
the multi purpose
tray.
—
The paper size is different. Set
selected size paper and press
[Continue].
2-36
Check the side
feeder.
—
The side feeder is not installed
correctly. Attach the side feeder.
—
Check waste toner
box.
—
The waste toner box is not installed
correctly. Set it correctly.
11-5
Is the waste toner box full?
Replace the waste toner box.
11-5
Confidential
document was
detected.
—
The machine detects the document
guard pattern. Job is canceled. Press
[End].
9-110
Empty the punch
waste box.
Is the punch waste box full?
Follow the instructions on the touch
panel and empty the punch waste
box.
11-12
Error occurred at
cassette #.
—
Open the cassette. Check inside the
machine and remove the paper.
—
Error occurred at the
multi purpose tray.
—
Remove the paper from the multi
purpose tray.
2-36
Failed to specify Job
Accounting.*
—
Failed to specify Job Accounting
when processing the job externally.
The job is canceled. Press [End].
—
Failed to store job
retention data.
—
The job is canceled. Press [End].
—
Finisher left tray is full
of paper.
Is the acceptable storage
capacity exceeded?
Remove the paper. Printing then
resumes.
—
Folding tray is full of
paper.
Is the acceptable storage
capacity exceeded?
Remove the paper. Printing then
resumes.
—
*
When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses.
12-11
12
Troubleshooting
Error Message
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Hard Disk error.
—
An error has occurred on the hard
disk. Job is canceled. Press [End].
The possible error codes and their
descriptions are as follows.
01: The amount of data that can be
saved at once has been
exceeded. Restart the system or
turn the power OFF/ON. If the
error still occurs, divide the file
into smaller files. If the error
occurs after the file is divided, the
hard disk is damaged. Execute
[System Initialization].
04: Insufficient space on the hard
disk to complete this operation.
Move data or delete unneeded
data.
—
Incorrect account ID.
—
The account ID was incorrect when
processing the job externally. The job
is canceled. Press [End].
—
Incorrect box
password.
—
The box password was incorrect
when processing the job externally.
The job is canceled. Press [End].
—
Incorrect Login User
Name or Password.
—
The login user name or password
was incorrect when processing the
job externally. The job is canceled.
Press [End].
—
Incorrect password.
Is an incorrect password
entered?
Enter the correct password.
―
Install the punch
waste box.
—
Follow the instructions on the touch
panel and install the punch waste
box.
—
Job separator tray is
full of paper.
Is the acceptable storage
capacity exceeded?
Remove the paper and press
[Continue]. Printing then resumes.
—
Job Accounting
restriction exceeded.*
Is the acceptable printing
count restricted by Job
Accounting exceeded?
The printing count exceeded the
acceptable count restricted by Job
Accounting. Cannot print any more.
This job is canceled. Press [End].
—
*
When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses.
12-12
Troubleshooting
Error Message
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
KPDL error.*
—
PostScript error has occurred.
The job is canceled. Press [End].
—
Machine failure.
—
Internal error has occurred. Make a
note of the error code displayed on
the touch panel. Call service.
—
Mailbox tray is full of
paper.
Is the acceptable storage
capacity exceeded?
Remove the paper. Printing then
resumes.
—
Main unit inner tray is
full of paper.
Is the acceptable storage
capacity exceeded?
Remove the paper. Printing then
resumes.
—
Main unit upper left
tray is full of paper.
Is the acceptable storage
capacity exceeded?
Remove the paper and press
[Continue]. Printing then resumes.
—
Maximum number of
scanned pages.
Is the acceptable scanning
count exceeded?
Cannot scan pages any more. Follow
the instructions on the touch panel.
—
Memory is full.*
—
The memory is full and the job cannot
be continued. Press [Continue] to
print the scanned pages. The print
job cannot be processed completely.
Press [Cancel] to cancel the job.
—
—
The process cannot be performed
due to insufficient memory. If only
[End] is available, press [End]. The
job will be canceled.
—
No item has been
entered. Please enter
item.
Did you enter an item name
for the created item in the
item create screen?
Enter an item name.
―
Paper left.
—
Remove paper from the document
finisher.
—
Paper jam.
—
If a paper jam occurs, the machine
will stop and the location of the jam
will be indicated on the touch panel.
Leave the machine on and follow the
instructions to remove the jammed
paper.
12-23
Please enter
password.
―
Enter the password.
―
*
When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses.
12-13
12
Troubleshooting
Checkpoints
Please select at least
one item.
Did you select an item in the
item selection screen?
Select an item.
―
Printing System error.
—
An error has occurred on Printing
System.
Refer to Responding to Printing
System Error for the error code and
corrective actions.
12-22
Removable memory
error.*
Is writing to a removable
memory prohibited?
An error occurred in the removable
memory. The job stopped. Press
[End].
Possible error codes are as follows:
01: Connect a removable memory
that can be written to.
—
—
An error occurred in the removable
memory. The job stopped. Press
[End].
Possible error codes are as follows:
01: The amount of data that can be
saved at once has been exceeded.
Restart the system or turn the
power OFF/ON. If the error still
occurs, the removable memory is
not compatible with the machine.
Use the removable memory
formatted by this machine. If the
removable memory cannot be
formatted, it is damaged. Connect
a compatible removable memory.
7-22
*
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Error Message
When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses.
12-14
Troubleshooting
Error Message
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Removable memory
is full.*
—
This job is canceled. Press [End].
Insufficient free space in the
removable memory. Delete unneeded
files.
—
Replace all originals
and press [Continue].
—
Remove originals from the document
processor, put them back in their
original order, and place them again.
Press [Continue] to resume printing.
Press [Cancel] to cancel the job.
2-46
Remove originals in
the document
processor.
Are there any originals left in
the document processor?
Remove originals from the document
processor.
—
Scanner memory is
full.*
—
Scanning cannot be performed due to
insufficient memory of the scanner.
Follow the instructions on the touch
panel.
—
Send error.*
—
An error has occurred during
transmission. The job is canceled.
Press [End]. Refer to Responding to
Send Error for the error code and
corrective actions.
12-18
Staple is empty.*
Has the document finisher
run out of staples?
If the staples are depleted, the
machine will stop and the location of
staple depletion will be indicated on
the touch panel.
Leave the machine on and follow the
instructions to replace the staple case.
Press [Continue] to print without stapling.
Press [Cancel] to cancel the job.
—
12
Staple is empty.
(Manual Staple)
Has staple cartridge holder
A run out of staples?
Add staples to staple cartridge holder
A.
11-10
Staple jam.
—
If a staple jam occurs, the machine
will stop and the location of the jam
will be indicated on the touch panel.
Leave the machine on and follow the
instructions to remove the jammed
staple.
—
System error.
—
System error has occurred. Follow
the instructions on the touch panel.
—
*
When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses.
12-15
Troubleshooting
Error Message
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
The cover is open.
Is there any cover which is
open?
Close the cover indicated on the
touch panel.
—
The folding tray is
open.
—
Set the folding tray.
—
The folding unit is
open.
—
Close the folding unit.
—
The phone receiver is
off the hook.
—
Put down the receiver.
—
The removable
memory is not
formatted.
Is the removable memory
formatted by this machine?
Perform [Format] on this machine.
—
The slit glass requires
cleaning.
—
Clean the slit glass using the cleaning
cloth supplied with the document
processor.
11-16
Toner is empty.
[C][M][Y][K]
—
Replace the toner container to our
specified toner container.
11-2
Toner is running out.
[C][M][Y][K]
—
It is almost time to replace the toner
container. Obtain a new toner
container.
—
Tray # is full of paper.
Is the acceptable storage
capacity exceeded?
Remove the paper. Printing then
resumes.
—
Unknown toner
installed.
Is the installed toner
container our own brand?
We will not be liable for any damage
caused by the use of third party
supplies in this machine.
—
Unknown Toner
Installed. PC
[C][M][Y][K]
Does the installed toner
container's regional
specification match the
machine's?
Install the specified container.
—
12-16
Troubleshooting
Error Message
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Warning for high
temperature. Adjust
the room
temperature.
—
Adjust the temperature and the
humidity of your room.
—
Warning for low
temperature. Adjust
the room
temperature.
—
Adjust the temperature and the
humidity of your room.
—
Warning low memory.
—
Cannot start the job. Try again later.
—
Waste toner box
almost full.
—
It is almost time to replace the waste
toner box. Obtain a new waste toner
box.
—
You cannot use this
system.
Is a workflow registered?
Close FMU Connection and create a
workflow. To create a workflow, File
Management Utility (PC application)
is required.
File
Manageme
nt Utility
User Guide
12
12-17
Troubleshooting
Responding to Send Error
When an error occurs during transmission, Send Error appears. Check the error code and error message below,
and follow the corresponding corrective actions.
Error
Code
1101
1102
Error Message
Corrective Actions
Failed to send the e-mail.
Failed to send i-FAX.
Check the host name of the SMTP
server on the Embedded Web Server
RX.
Failed to send via FTP.
Check the host name of FTP.
Failed to send via SMB.
Check the host name of SMB.
Failed to send via SMB.
Check the SMB settings.
- Login user name and login
password
Reference Page
2-25
3-25
NOTE: If the sender is a domain
user, specify the domain name.
- Host name
- Path
Failed to send the e-mail.
Failed to send i-FAX.
Check the following on the
Embedded Web Server RX.
- SMTP login user name and login
password
- POP3 login user name and login
password
Failed to send via FTP.
Check the FTP settings.
- Login user name and login
password
NOTE: If the sender is a domain
user, specify the domain name.
- Path
- Folder share permissions of the
recipient
1103
Failed to send via SMB.
Check the SMB settings.
- Login user name and login
password
3-25
NOTE: If the sender is a domain
user, specify the domain name.
- Path
- Folder share permissions of the
recipient
Failed to send via FTP.
Check the FTP settings.
- Path
- Folder share permissions of the
recipient
12-18
3-25
Troubleshooting
Error
Code
1104
Error Message
Failed to send the e-mail.
Corrective Actions
Check the e-mail address.
Reference Page
3-24
NOTE: If the address is rejected by
the domain, you cannot send the email.
Failed to send i-FAX.
Check the i-FAX address.
NOTE: If the address is rejected by
the domain, you cannot send i-FAX.
1105
FAX System (V)
Operation Guide
Chapter 8
"Internet Faxing
(i-FAX) (Option)"
Failed to send via SMB.
Select [On] of the SMB settings on
the Embedded Web Server RX.
Failed to send the e-mail.
Select [On] of the SMTP settings on
the Embedded Web Server RX.
Failed to send via FTP.
Select [On] of the FTP settings on the
Embedded Web Server RX.
Failed to send i-FAX.
Select [On] of the i-FAX settings on
the Embedded Web Server RX.
FAX System (V)
Operation Guide
Chapter 8
"Internet Faxing
(i-FAX) (Option)"
1106
Failed to send the e-mail.
Failed to send i-FAX.
Check the sender address of SMTP
on the Embedded Web Server RX.
2-25
1131
Failed to send via FTP.
Select [On] of the secure protocol
settings on the Embedded Web
Server RX.
2-25
1132
Failed to send via FTP.
Check the following of the FTP
server.
- Is FTPS available?
- Is the encryption available?
2-25
12-19
2-25
12
Troubleshooting
Error
Code
2101
2102
2103
Error Message
Corrective Actions
Reference Page
Failed to send via SMB.
Failed to send via FTP.
Check the network and SMB settings. 2-25
Check the network and FTP settings.
- The network cable is connected.
- The hub is not operating properly.
- The server is not operating properly.
- Host name and IP address
- Port number
Failed to send the e-mail.
Failed to send i-FAX.
Check the network and Embedded
Web Server RX.
- The network cable is connected.
- The hub is not operating properly.
- The server is not operating properly.
- POP3 server name of the POP3 user
- SMTP server name
Failed to send via FTP.
Check the following of the FTP
server.
- Is FTP available?
- The server is not operating properly.
—
Check the network.
- The network cable is connected.
- The hub is not operating properly.
- The server is not operating properly
Failed to send the e-mail.
Failed to send i-FAX.
Check the network.
- The network cable is connected.
- The hub is not operating properly.
- The server is not operating properly.
2201
Failed to send the e-mail.
Failed to send via FTP.
Failed to send via SMB.
Failed to send i-FAX.
Check the network.
- The network cable is connected.
- The hub is not operating properly.
- The server is not operating properly.
—
2202
Failed to send the e-mail.
Failed to send via FTP.
Failed to send i-FAX.
2203
Failed to send via FTP.
Failed to send via SMB.
2231
Failed to send via FTP.
2204
Failed to send the e-mail.
Failed to send i-FAX.
Check the e-mail size limit of the
SMTP settings on the Embedded
Web Server RX.
2-25
12-20
Troubleshooting
Error
Code
Error Message
Corrective Actions
Failed to send the e-mail.
Failed to send i-FAX.
Check the authentication methods of
both the sender and the recipient.
Failed to send via FTP.
Check the network.
- The network cable is connected.
- The hub is not operating properly.
- The server is not operating properly.
3201
Failed to send the e-mail.
Failed to send i-FAX.
Check the SMTP user authentication
method of the recipient.
—
0007
4201
4701
5101
5102
5103
5104
7101
7102
7103
720f
—
Turn the main power switch off and
back on. If this error occurs several
times, make a note of the displayed
error code and contact your service
representative.
—
9181
—
The scanned original exceeds the
acceptable number of pages of 999.
Send the excess pages separately.
—
3101
Reference Page
—
12
12-21
Troubleshooting
Responding to Printing System Error
Error
Code
1020
Error Message
Corrective Actions
—
Printing System failure has
occurred. Make a note of
the error code displayed on
the touch panel. Call
service.
Is the power switch of
Printing System turned ON?
Turn the power switch of
Printing System on.
Is the power cable of
Printing System plugged?
Turn the main power switch
of the machine off and
check that the power cable
of Printing System is
correctly plugged.
After checking the power
cable, turn the main power
switch of the machine on.
1031
Is the copier interface cable
connected?
Check that the copier
interface cable is correctly
connected.
If the error still occurs,
Printing System failure has
occurred. Make a note of
the error code displayed on
the touch panel. Call
service.
1040
—
Check the network.
1030
Printing System error.
Checkpoints
- The network cable is
connected.
- The hub is not operating
properly.
- The server is not operating
properly.
If the error still occurs,
Printing System failure has
occurred. Make a note of
the error code displayed on
the touch panel. Call
service.
Others
—
Make a note of the error
code displayed on the touch
panel. Call service.
12-22
Troubleshooting
Clearing Paper Jams
If a paper jam occurs, the touch panel will display Paper
Jam. and the machine will stop. Refer to these
procedures to remove the jammed paper.
Paper jam.
1. Remove the paper from
the paper ejector.
2. Open main unit right cover 1 and
remove the paper.
Remove the paper from
the multi purpose tray.
3. Open fuser cover (A1) and
remove the paper.
4. Close the cover.
JAM
02/04
Hold
Status
10/10/2010 10:10
Jam Location Indicators
If a paper jam occurs, the location of the jam will be displayed as the following figure with a letter corresponding
to the affected component in the machine. Clearing instructions will also be displayed.
Paper jam.
K
1. Remove the paper from
the paper ejector.
2. Open main unit right cover 1 and
remove the paper.
Remove the paper from
the multi purpose tray.
3. Open fuser cover (A1) and
remove the paper.
4. Close the cover.
JAM
H
K
K
K
02/04
I
K
J
G
F
10/10/2010 10:10
D
C
K
Paper Jam
Location Indicator
G
E
K
Hold
Status
I
K
Paper Jam Location
A
E
B
C
E
C
L
M
M M
M
Reference Page
A
Cassette 1
12-24
B
Cassette 2
12-25
C
Cassette 3 or 4 (Option)
12-26
D
Multi Purpose Tray
12-30
E
Inside the right cover 1, 3 or 4
12-31
F
Duplex unit
12-33
G
Fixing unit
12-36
H
Document processor (Option)
12-37
I
Job Sparator (Option)
12-39
J
Bridge Unit
12-41
K
Document finisher (Option)
12-42
12-43
L
Cassette 5 (Option)
12-50
M
Cassette 6,7 (Option)
12-52
12-23
L
L
12
Troubleshooting
After you remove the jam, the machine will warm up again and the error message will be cleared. The machine
resumes with the page that was printing when the jam occurred.
Precautions with Paper Jams
•
Do not reuse jammed papers.
•
If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
•
Discard paper that has jammed in the optional document finisher. A page affected by a paper jam will be
printed again.
CAUTION: The fixing unit is extremely hot. Take sufficient care when working in this area, as there is
a danger of getting burned.
Cassette 1
Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in cassette 1.
1
Pull up right cover 1 lever and open the right cover 1.
2
Remove the jammed paper.
3
Pull out cassette 1.
12-24
Troubleshooting
4
Remove the jammed paper.
If the paper tears, remove every loose scrap from
inside the machine.
5
Push cassette 1 back in place securely.
6
Press the specified position to close right cover 1.
Cassette 2
Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in cassette 2.
1
Open right cover 3.
12
2
12-25
Remove the jammed paper.
Troubleshooting
3
Pull out cassette 2.
4
Remove the jammed paper.
If the paper tears, remove every loose scrap from
inside the machine.
5
Push cassette 2 back in place securely.
6
Close right cover 3.
Optional Cassettes 3 and 4
Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in cassettes 3 or 4 when using the optional paper feeder.
Paper Feeder (500-sheet x 2)
1
12-26
If you are using the optional side feeder, pull up the
release lever and separate the side feeder from the
multifunction machine.
Troubleshooting
2
Open right cover 4.
3
Remove the jammed paper.
If the paper tears, remove every loose scrap from
inside the machine.
4
Pull out the cassette in use.
5
Remove the jammed paper.
6
Push the cassette back in place securely.
7
Close right cover 4.
12-27
12
Troubleshooting
Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet x 2)
1
If you are using the optional side feeder, pull up the
release lever and separate the side feeder from the
multifunction machine.
2
Open right cover 4.
3
Remove the jammed paper.
If the paper tears, remove every loose scrap from
inside the machine.
4
12-28
Pull out cassettes 3 and 4.
Troubleshooting
5
Remove the jammed paper.
6
Pull out the paper feed unit (B1).
7
Open the paper feed unit cover (B2) and remove
the jammed paper.
8
Close the paper feed unit cover (B2) and push the
paper feed unit all the way back in.
9
Push the cassette back in place securely.
10 Close right cover 4.
12-29
12
Troubleshooting
Multi Purpose Tray
Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the multi purpose tray.
1
Remove all sheets of paper from the multi purpose
tray.
2
If paper is jammed inside, pull the paper toward you
to remove.
3
Pull up right cover 1 lever and open the right cover 1.
4
Remove the jammed paper.
If the paper tears, remove every loose scrap from
inside the machine.
12-30
Troubleshooting
5
Press the specified position to close right cover 1.
Inside the Right Covers 1, 3 and 4
Follow the steps below to clear paper jams inside right cover 1, 3 or 4 when using the optional paper feeder.
1
Remove all sheets of paper from the multi purpose
tray.
2
If paper is jammed inside, pull the paper toward you
to remove.
12
3
12-31
Open the right cover where the paper is jammed
inside.
Troubleshooting
4
Remove the jammed paper.
If the paper tears, remove every loose scrap from
inside the machine.
5
If you are using the optional document finisher,
follow step on page 12-41 to remove jammed paper
in the optional bridge unit.
6
Close the right cover.
12-32
Troubleshooting
Duplex unit
Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the duplex unit.
1
Pull up right cover 1 lever and open the right cover 1.
2
Remove the jammed paper.
12
3
12-33
Press the specified position to close right cover 1.
Troubleshooting
Duplex Unit and Cassette 1
Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in duplex unit and cassette 1.
1
Pull up right cover 1 lever and open the right cover 1.
2
Remove the jammed paper.
3
Press the specified position to close right cover 1.
4
Open the right cover 2.
12-34
Troubleshooting
5
Remove the jammed paper.
If the paper tears, remove every loose scrap from
inside the machine.
6
Close the right cover 2.
7
Pull out cassette 1 and remove the jammed paper.
If the paper tears, remove every loose scrap from
inside the machine.
8
Push cassette 1 back in place securely.
12
12-35
Troubleshooting
Fixing unit
Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the fixing unit.
1
Pull up right cover 1 lever and open the right cover 1.
2
Remove the jammed paper.
3
Open the fuser cover.
CAUTION: The fixing unit is extremely hot. Take
sufficient care when working in this area, as there is a
danger of getting burned.
4
Remove the jammed paper.
If the paper tears, remove every loose scrap from
inside the machine.
12-36
Troubleshooting
5
If jammed paper is seen through the paper ejection
slot, pull it toward your side to remove it.
6
Push the fuser cover back in place, and press the
specified position to close right cover 1.
Optional Document Processor
Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the optional document processor or document processor (Dual
scan DP).
1
Remove the original from the original tray.
12
2
12-37
Open the document processor top cover.
Troubleshooting
3
Remove the jammed original.
If the original tears, remove every loose scrap from
inside the machine.
If the original is difficult to remove, turn the dial. The
original will scroll out to a position where it can be
removed easily.
If the original tears, remove every loose scrap from
inside the machine.
If you are using the document processor, go to step
4. If you are using the document processor (Dual
scan DP), go to step 6.
4
Lift up the reverse unit.
5
Remove the jammed original.
If the original tears, remove every loose scrap from
inside the machine.
6
Put the reverse unit back in its original place and
close the document processor top cover.
7
Reload the originals on the document processor
tray.
12-38
Troubleshooting
Optional Job Separator
Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the optional job separator.
Inner Job Separator
1
If jammed paper is seen through the paper ejection
slot of the inner job separator, pull it toward your
side to remove it.
If the paper tears, remove every loose scrap from
inside the machine.
2
Pull up right cover 1 lever and open the right cover 1.
3
Press the lever and open the fuser cover.
CAUTION: The fixing unit is extremely hot. Take
sufficient care when working in this area, as there is a
danger of getting burned.
12
4
Remove the jammed paper.
If the paper tears, remove every loose scrap from
inside the machine.
12-39
Troubleshooting
5
Press the indicated position to close right cover 1.
1
If jammed paper is seen through the paper ejection
slot of the right job separator, pull it toward your
side to remove it.
Right Job Separator
If the paper tears, remove every loose scrap from
inside the machine.
2
12-40
Follow step 2 onward on page 12-39 to remove
jammed paper.
Troubleshooting
Bridge Unit (Option)
If a paper jam occurs in the optional bridge unit, follow the steps below to remove the jam.
1
Pull out the relay unit.
2
Open the relay unit cover and remove the jammed
paper.
3
Remove the jammed paper.
If the paper tears, remove every loose scrap from
inside the machine.
12
4
12-41
Close the relay unit cover and push the bridge unit
all the way back in.
Troubleshooting
1,000-sheet Finisher (Option)
If a paper jam occurs in the optional 1,000-sheet finisher, follow the steps below to remove the jam.
1
If jammed paper is seen through the paper ejection
slot, pull it toward your side to remove it.
2
Open the front cover.
3
Open feed guide D1 and remove the jammed
paper.
4
Open the top tray and then open feed guide D2.
12-42
Troubleshooting
5
Turn the conveyor knob to the left to feed the paper
along to enable easy removal.
6
Close the open feed guides, and close the top and
front covers.
4,000-sheet Finisher (Option)
If a paper jam occurs in the optional 4,000-sheet finisher, follow the steps below to remove the jam.
Coupling Section
1
Open the front cover 1.
2
Open conveyor guide (D1) and remove the jammed
paper.
12
3
12-43
Close the conveyor guide (D1) and front cover 1.
Troubleshooting
Tray A
1
If jammed paper is seen through the paper ejection
slot, pull it toward your side to remove it.
2
Open the front cover 1.
3
Open the conveyor guide (D6) and remove the
jammed paper.
4
Close the conveyor guide (D6).
5
Open the conveyor guide (D4) and remove the
jammed paper.
12-44
Troubleshooting
NOTE: If it is difficult to remove the jammed paper,
turn feed knob D3 until the jammed paper is in a
location where it is easy to remove.
6
Close the conveyor guide (D4) and front cover 1.
1
If jammed paper is seen through the paper ejection
slot, pull it toward your side to remove it.
2
Open the front cover 1.
Tray B
12
3
12-45
Open the conveyor guide (D2).
Troubleshooting
4
Turn the conveyor knob (D3) to the left to feed the
paper along to enable easy removal.
5
Close the conveyor guide (D2) and front cover 1.
1
Open the upper left cover.
2
Remove the jammed paper.
3
Close the upper left cover.
Tray C
12-46
Troubleshooting
Conveyor / Inner Tray
1
Open the front cover 1.
2
Open the conveyor guide (D2).
3
Turn the conveyor knob (D3) to the left to feed the
paper along to enable easy removal.
12
4
Follow step 2 onward on page 12-44 to remove
jammed paper.
1
Open the mailbox cover and remove the jammed
paper.
2
Close the mailbox cover.
Mailbox (Option)
12-47
Troubleshooting
Center-Folding Unit (Option)
Ejection Section
1
Lift up the folding tray and remove any jammed
paper.
2
Push the folding unit release lever and pull out the
folding unit.
3
Press the release lever, open the left cover of the
center fold unit, and remove the jammed paper.
4
Turn feed knob D9 until the jammed paper is in a
location where it is easy to remove.
5
Close the folding unit left cover.
6
Open the folding unit top cover and remove the
paper jam.
7
Turn feed knob D9 until the jammed paper is in a
location where it is easy to remove.
8
Close the folding unit top cover, and return the
folding unit to its original position.
12-48
Troubleshooting
Conveyor Section
1
Open the front cover 1 and 2.
2
Open the conveyor guide (D7) and remove the
jammed paper.
3
Turn feed knob D5 until the jammed paper is in a
location where it is easy to remove.
If there is no paper jam in the conveyor guide (D7),
proceed to the following step.
4
Close the conveyor guide (D7).
5
Open the conveyor guide (D8) and remove the
jammed paper.
12
6
Close the conveyor guide (D8).
7
Remove the paper jammed in the center folding
unit.
8
Close the front cover 1 and 2.
12-49
Troubleshooting
Cassette 5 (Option)
If a paper jam occurs in cassette 5 when you are using the optional side feeder (3,000-sheet), side feeder (500sheet x 3), or large capacity side feeder (500, 1,500-sheet x 2), follow the steps below to remove the jam.
Side Feeder (3,000-sheet)
1
Pull up the release lever and separate the side
feeder from the multifunction machine.
2
Remove the paper from the connection port.
3
Pull out cassette 5.
4
Remove the jammed paper.
5
Push the cassette back in place securely.
6
Connect to the multifunction machine.
12-50
Troubleshooting
Side Feeder (500-sheet x 3) or Large Capacity Side Feeder (500, 1,500-sheet x2)
1
Pull up the release lever and separate the side
feeder from the multifunction machine.
2
Remove the paper from the connection port.
3
Open the top cover and right cover 1.
12
4
12-51
Remove the jammed paper.
Troubleshooting
5
Pull out cassette 5.
6
Remove the jammed paper.
7
Push the cassette back in place securely.
8
Close the top cover and right cover 1.
9
Connect to the multifunction machine.
Cassette 6,7 (Option)
If a paper jam occurs in cassette 6 or 7 when you are using the optional side feeder (500-sheet x 3) or large
capacity side feeder (500, 1,500-sheet x 2), follow the steps below to remove the jam.
Side Feeder (500-sheet x3)
1
Pull up the release lever and separate the side
feeder from the multifunction machine.
2
Follow steps 2 to 5 on page 12-51 to remove the
jammed paper.
12-52
Troubleshooting
3
Open the right cover 2.
4
Remove the jammed paper.
5
Pull out the cassette in use.
6
Remove the jammed paper.
7
Push the cassette back in place securely.
8
Close the right cover 2.
9
Connect to the multifunction machine.
12-53
12
Troubleshooting
Large Capacity Side Feeder (500, 1,500-sheet x2)
1
Pull up the release lever and separate the side
feeder from the multifunction machine.
2
Follow steps 2 to 5 on page 12-51 to remove the
jammed paper.
3
Open the right cover 2.
4
Remove the jammed paper.
5
Pull out cassettes 6 and 7.
12-54
Troubleshooting
6
Remove the jammed paper.
7
Pull out the paper feed unit (B1).
8
Open the paper feed unit cover (B2) and remove
the jammed paper.
9
Close the paper feed unit cover (B2) and push the
paper feed unit all the way back in.
10 Push the cassette back in place securely.
11 Close the right cover 2.
12 Connect to the multifunction machine.
12-55
12
Troubleshooting
Clearing a Staple Jam
If a message indicating a staple jam is displayed on the machine’s operation panel, remove the jammed staples.
Follow the steps below to remove jammed staples.
1,000-sheet Finisher
1
Open the front cover.
2
Remove the staple cartridge holder.
3
Open the cover plate (A) of the staple cartridge
holder and remove any jammed staples.
4
Close the cover (A) plate of the staple cartridge
holder into its original position.
A
12-56
Troubleshooting
5
Re-install the staple cartridge holder. The staple
cartridge holder will click into place when it has
been inserted correctly.
6
Close the front cover.
1
Open the front cover 1.
2
Remove the staple cartridge holder A.
4,000-sheet Finisher
Staple cartridge holder A
12
3
A
12-57
Open the cover plate (A) of the staple cartridge
holder A and remove any jammed staples.
Troubleshooting
4
Close the cover plate (A) of the staple cartridge
holder into its original position.
5
Re-install the staple cartridge holder. The staple
cartridge holder will click into place when it has
been inserted correctly.
6
Close the front cover 1.
Staple cartridge holder B/C
Follow the steps below to remove jammed staples from the optional folding unit.
1
Open the front cover 1 and 2.
2
Remove staple cartridge holder B or C.
12-58
Troubleshooting
3
Open the cover plate (B) of the staple cartridge
holder and remove any jammed staples.
4
Close the cover (B) plate of the staple cartridge
holder into its original position.
5
Re-install the staple cartridge holder.
B
When re-installing, align the triangle marks on the
staple cartridge holder and the staple unit. The
staple cartridge holder will click into place when it
has been inserted correctly.
6
12-59
Close the front cover 1 and 2.
12
Troubleshooting
12-60
Appendix
•
•
•
•
•
Optional Equipment ...............................................................Appendix-2
Character Entry Method.........................................................Appendix-9
Paper ...................................................................................Appendix-12
Specifications .......................................................................Appendix-21
Glossary...............................................................................Appendix-34
Appendix-1
Optional Equipment
Overview of Optional Equipment
The following optional equipment is available for the machine.
Inner Job Separator
Document Processor
Mailbox
Document Processor
(Dual scan DP)
Platen Cover
Inner Job Separator
(JS-732)
Right Job Separator
Banner Tray
4,000-sheet Finisher
Hole Punch Unit
Side Feeder
(3,000-sheet)
1,000-sheet Finisher
Hole Punch Unit
Folding Unit
*
Side Feeder
(500-sheet x 3)
Paper Feeder
(500-sheet x 2)**
Large Capacity Feeder
(1,500-sheet x 2)**
Large Capacity Side Feeder
(500, 1,500-sheet x 2)
The side feeder (500-sheet x 3) or large capacity side feeder (500, 1,500-sheet x 2) can be used on a 45/45 ppm
model or a 55/50 ppm model.
Appendix-2
** If neither a document finisher nor a side feeder is installed on a 30/30 ppm model or a 35/35 ppm model, the
toppling prevention kit must be installed.
Expansion Memory
FAX Kit
Key Counter
Gigabit Ethernet Board
Document Table
Appendix-3
Document Processor
Automatically scans originals. Also you can perform duplex copying and split copying.
For document processor operation, refer to Loading Originals in the Document Processor on page 2-46.
Paper Feeder (500-sheet x2)
Two additional cassettes identical to the printer’s cassette can be installed in the printer. Paper capacity and
loading method are the same as the standard cassettes. Refer to The standard cassettes on page 2-29 for
loading paper.
Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet x 2)
In addition to the printer's cassettes, you can also install an optional large capacity feeder (1,500-sheet x 2)
capable of holding up to 3,000 sheets of A4, B5 or Letter paper. Refer to The Large Capacity Feeder (1,500sheet x 2) (Option) on page 2-32 for loading paper.
Side Feeder (3,000-sheet)
In addition to the printer's cassettes, you can also install an optional side feeder (3,000-sheet) capable of holding
up to 3,000 sheets of A4, B5 or Letter paper. Refer to Side Feeder (3,000-sheet) (Option) on page 2-35 for
loading paper.
Side Feeder (500-sheet x 3)
Three additional cassettes identical to cassette 1 can be installed in the printer. Paper capacity and loading
method are the same as cassette 1.
Large Capacity Side Feeder (500, 1,500-sheet x 2)
In addition to the printer's cassettes, you can also install the additional cassette identical to cassette 1 and an
optional feeder (3,500-sheet) capable of holding up to 3,500 sheets of A4, B5 or Letter paper.
1,000-sheet Finisher
This is a document finisher capable of holding large print runs and of separating and offsetting multiple copies
of a printout into individual copies. It can also staple or hole-punch (optional) the offset printouts.
4,000-sheet Finisher
This is a large-capacity document finisher capable of holding large print runs and of separating and offsetting
multiple copies of a printout into individual copies. It can also staple or hole-punch (optional) the offset printouts.
User can select manual staple by operation button. A mail box and folding unit are also available as options.
Manual staple mode
You can staple copied paper manually without any copying operation. It is useful when you have forgotten to set
the staple sort mode before starting copying, or when you want to staple originals.
NOTE: Manual stapling cannot be executed when the machine is in operation.
If there are no staples when manual stapling is performed, the stapling position lamps and stapling position key
LEDs all blink. Add staples. For details, refer to Replacing Staples on page 11-8
Appendix-4
Maximum number of sheets available for manual stapling
Paper weight
Paper size
- 90 g/m2
( - 24.0 lb. Bond)
91 - 105 g/m2
(24.3 - 28.0 lb. Bond)
A4, A4-R, B5, Letter, 16K
65 sheets
50 sheets
A3, B4, Folio
30 sheets
30 sheets
Use the buttons on the stapling control section of the Finisher (optional) for manual stapling.
Stapling position
lamps
1
2
3
Stapling position
key
Stapling
key / lamp
Press the stapling position key on the stapling control section.
The shutter of the paper exit area is opened and this equipment enters into the manual staple mode.
Press the stapling position key to select the stapling position (Back
/ Front
/ 2 Points ).
Operation is not possible while the stapling position lamps are blinking. Operate after the lamps light solidly.
Straighten the edges of the paper well and place the paper
front side down in the shutter opening of the output unit.
If the near side of the paper ( ) will be stapled, place the
paper against the front guide (A).
If the far side of the paper ( ) will be stapled, place the paper
against the back guide (B).
If the edge of the paper ( ) will be stapled at two points,
place the paper with the center aligned to the center point
between the two side guides (A and B).
B
A
CAUTION: Do not insert your hand inside the open shutter.
NOTE: Press the stapling position key before you place the paper. Once the paper is placed, the stapling
position key cannot be used.
The stapling lamp lights when the paper is properly placed. If it does not light, replace the paper.
4
Let go of the paper, and then press the stapling key.
Stapling starts. Stapling finishes and the output is delivered to tray A.
CAUTION: Be sure that your hands are away from the paper while stapling is in progress.
Finishing the manual staple mode
Press the stapling position button several times until the stapling position lamps turn off. The shutter of the
paper exit area closes. It means that manual stapling is finished. If no operation is performed for approx. 10
seconds, the manual staple mode will be automatically finished.
NOTE: The time after which manual staple mode is automatically exited can be changed. For details, refer to
Manual Staple on page 9-39
Appendix-5
Mailbox
Makes it easy to sort output into separate trays. Installing this option adds 7 output trays. When multiple
computer users share the printer, each user can print to a specified tray. Installs on the 4,000-sheet finisher.
NOTE: To deliver output to the mail box, change the Paper Output selection on the operation panel or in the
printer driver, or change in the default settings. (For details, refer to Paper Output on page 9-15.)
Folding Unit
Folds printed output at the center or in tri-fold to enable the creation of simple booklets. Installs on the 4,000sheet finisher.
Inner Job Separator
Separate paper according to output tray for easier sorting. Specify as the output tray for copy or print jobs. Or,
specify as the default output tray for printing from the copy or Document Box screen, printing from the PC, and
printing of the received fax data.
CAUTION: Note that some paper types have a tendency to curl and may jam in the paper eject unit.
If the ejected paper slips or stacks unevenly, turn the paper in the cassette over and try again.
NOTE:
•
To ensure that paper is delivered to the Inner Job
Separator, select the output destination or change
the default setting. (For details, refer to the Paper
Output on page 9-15.)
•
When removing paper from the Inner Job
Separator, pull it out at an angle.
Appendix-6
Inner Job Separator (JS-732)
Separate paper according to output tray for easier sorting. Specify as the output tray for copy or print jobs. Or,
specify as the default output tray for printing from the copy or Document Box screen, printing from the PC, and
printing of the received fax data.
CAUTION: Note that some paper types have a tendency to curl and may jam in the paper eject unit.
If the ejected paper slips or stacks unevenly, turn the paper in the cassette over and try again.
NOTE:
•
To ensure that paper is delivered to the Inner Job
Separator, select the output destination or change
the default setting. (For details, refer to the Paper
Output on page 9-15.)
•
If the paper is A3, B4, Ledger, or Legal, pull out the
auxiliary tray.
•
The busy light stays on until the output is removed
from the Inner Job Separator. You can set whether
sleep mode is entered after a certain period of time
when in this state in the system menu. (For details,
refer to Sleep Act. (Job Separator) on page 9-82.)
Right Job Separator
Separate paper according to output tray for easier sorting. Specify as the output tray for copy or print jobs. Or,
specify as the default output tray for printing from the copy or Document Box screen, printing from the PC, and
printing of the received fax data.
Banner Tray
This tray enables continuous feeding of banner paper. Up to 10 sheets of banner paper can be loaded. To attach
the tray and load paper, refer to Using the Banner Tray (Option) on page 5-7.
Key Counter
Use the key counter to monitor machine usage. The key counter offers a convenient solution for centralized
management of copy volume for different departments in a large company.
Inserting the Key Counter
Insert the key counter securely into the key counter slot.
NOTE: When the key counter function is activated,
copies can only be made when a key counter is
inserted. If the key counter is not inserted, Insert key
counter. will be displayed.
Appendix-7
FAX Kit
By installing the FAX kit, fax send/receive is enabled. Also, it is possible to use it as a network fax, by using it
with a computer. When two FAX kits are installed, the units can be connected to two different telephone lines
which will enable quicker message transmission to a number of recipients. If one of the lines is dedicated to
receiving, the busy line time can be reduced. For further details, refer to Fax System (V) Operation Guide.
Expansion Memory
Image storage memory (128 MB) that allows the machine to receive more pages of incoming faxed originals.
Expansion memory should only be installed or removed by the service representative.
Gigabit Ethernet Board
The Gigabit Ethernet Board provides a high-speed connection for the Gigabit-per-second interface. Since the
kit was designed to work with TCP/IP, NetWare, NetBEUI, and AppleTalk protocols, in the same way as the main
unit, it fulfills the network printing demands on Windows, Macintosh, and UNIX environments. This expansion
kit is also compatible with ThinPrint.
Internet FAX Kit (A)
Installing the Internet FAX Kit (A) sends and receives faxes via the Internet without using a phone line. It can
only be added when the FAX Kit is installed.
Data Security Kit
The Data Security Kit overwrites all unnecessary data in the storage area of the hard disk so that it cannot be
retrieved. The Data Security Kit encrypts data before storing it in the hard disk. It guarantees higher security
because no data cannot be decoded by ordinary output or operations.
Printed Document Guard Kit
This prevents the unauthorized copying and/or transmission of documents that contain important confidential or
personal information. When a document is printed from a computer, this feature imprints a special pattern on
the document. When anyone attempts to copy or send that document on this machine, the machine detects the
pattern and protects the information by printing the document in blank and prohibiting transmission.
Emulation Option
Enables emulation whereby the machine operates using commands for other printers. Installing this option
enables IBM Proprinter, DIABLO 630, and EPSON LQ-850 emulation.
USB Keyboard
A USB keyboard can be used to enter information into the text fields on the operation panel. A special mount is
also available to install the keyboard on the MFP. Please contact your dealer or service representative for
information on keyboards that are compatible with your MFP before you purchase one.
Document Table
Place original or other documents when using the machine. It has a drawer to accommodate clips.
Appendix-8
Character Entry Method
To enter characters for a name, use the on-display keyboard in the touch panel following the steps as explained
below.
NOTE: Keyboard Layout
QWERTY, QWERTZ and AZERTY are available as keyboard layouts the same as a PC keyboard. Press the
System Menu key, [Common Settings] and then [Change] of Keyboard Layout to choose the desired layout.
QWERTY layout is used here as an example. You may use another layout following the same steps.
Entry Screens
Lower-case Letter Entry Screen
2
1
Use the keyboard to enter.
Limit: 128 characters
Input: 0 characters
Backspace
!
@
Q
W
A
6
#
E
S
Z
Upper-case
$
%
R
D
X
^
T
F
C
Y
G
V
Lower-case
Lower-case
&
U
H
B
*
I
J
N
No./Symbol
(
O
K
M
)
_
P
L
<
{
:
>
+
}
No.
|
"
?
Space
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
Display/Key
8
9
10
11
Description
1
Display
Displays entered characters.
2
Limit Display
Displays maximum number of characters.
3
Cursor Key
Press to move the cursor on the display.
4
[Backspace]
Press to delete a character to the left of the
cursor.
5
Keyboard
Press a character to enter.
6
[Upper-case]
Press to use upper-case letters.
7
[Lower-case]
Press to use lower-case letters.
8
[No./Symbol]
Press to enter numbers and symbols.
9
[Space]
Press to insert a space.
Appendix-9
4
˜
Status
7
3
5
No.
Display/Key
Description
10
[Cancel]
Press to cancel entered characters and return
to the screen before the entry.
11
[OK]
Press to finalize entry and return to the screen
before the entry.
Upper-case Letter Entry Screen
Use the keyboard to enter.
Limit: 128 characters
Input: 0 characters
Backspace
!
@
Q
#
W
A
S
Z
Upper-case
$
E
%
R
D
X
F
C
Lower-case
Lower-case
^
T
G
V
&
Y
H
B
*
U
(
I
J
N
K
M
No./Symbol
)
O
_
P
L
<
:
>
+
{
˜
}
|
"
?
Space
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
Number/Symbol Entry Screen
Use the keyboard to enter.
Limit: 128 characters
Input: 0 characters
Backspace
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
!
"
#
$
%
&
’
(
)
*
+
,
-
.
/
:
;
<
=
>
?
@
[
\
]
^
_
`
{
|
}
˜
12
Upper-case
Lower-case
Lower-case
No./Symbol
Space
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
No.
12
Display/Key
[
]/[
]
Description
To enter a number or symbol not shown in the
keyboard, press the cursor key and scroll the
screen to view other numbers or symbols to
enter.
Appendix-10
Entering Characters
Follow the steps shown below to enter List A-1 for example.
1
Press [Upper-case].
2
Press [L]. The letter L is shown on the display.
3
Press [Lower-case].
4
Press [i], [s], [t] and [Space].
5
Press [Upper-case].
6
Press [A].
7
Press [No./Symbol].
8
Press [ ] or [ ] repeatedly to view the keyboard
containing [-] and [1].
9
Press [-] and [1].
Use the keyboard to enter.
Limit: 128 characters
Input: 1 characters
L
Backspace
!
@
Q
#
W
A
$
E
S
R
D
Z
X
Upper-case
%
^
T
F
C
Y
G
V
Lower-case
Lower-case
&
*
U
H
B
(
I
J
N
)
O
K
M
_
P
L
<
+
{
:
>
˜
}
|
"
?
Space
No./Symbol
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
Use the keyboard to enter.
Limit: 128 characters
Input: 4 characters
List
Backspace
1
2
q
3
w
a
4
e
s
z
r
d
x
Upper-case
5
t
f
c
7
y
g
v
Lower-case
6
u
h
b
8
i
j
n
0
o
k
m
No./Symbol
9
p
l
,
!
[
;
.
=
`
]
\
’
/
@
_
Space
Cancel
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
Use the keyboard to enter.
Limit: 128 characters
Input: 8 characters
List_A-1
Backspace
1
2
3
$
%
&
’
;
<
=
>
|
}
Upper-case
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
(
)
*
+
,
-
.
/
:
?
@
[
\
]
^
_
`
{
"
#
˜
Lower-case
Lower-case
No./Symbol
Space
Cancel
Status
!
OK
10/10/2010 10:10
10 Check that the entry is correct. Press [OK].
Appendix-11
Paper
This section explains the paper sizes and types that can be used in the paper source.
Cassettes 1
Supported types
Supported paper sizes
Plain paper:
60 to 220 g/m2 (for the 30/30 ppm or
35/35ppm)
60 to 256 g/m2 (for the 45/45 ppm or
55/50ppm)
Recycled paper:
60 to 220 g/m2 (for the 30/30 ppm or
35/35ppm)
60 to 256 g/m2 (for the 45/45 ppm or
55/50ppm)
A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, Ledger,
Legal, Oficio II, 12 × 18", Letter, Letter-R,
Statement-R, Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R
216 × 340 mm
No. of sheets
550 (64 g/m2)
500 (80 g/m2)
Cassettes 2 and the optional paper feeder (500-sheet x 2)
Supported types
Supported paper sizes
Plain paper:
60 to 220 g/m2 (for the 30/30 ppm or
35/35ppm)
60 to 256 g/m2 (for the 45/45 ppm or
55/50ppm)
Recycled paper:
60 to 220 g/m2 (for the 30/30 ppm or
35/35ppm)
60 to 256 g/m2 (for the 45/45 ppm or
55/50ppm)
A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, Ledger,
Legal, Oficio II, 12 × 18", Letter, Letter-R,
Statement-R, Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R
216 × 340 mm
No. of sheets
550 (64 g/m2)
500 (80 g/m2)
Optional large capacity feeder (1,500-sheet x 2)
Supported types
Plain paper (60 to 256 g/m2)
Recycled paper (60 to 256 g/m2)
Supported paper sizes
A4, B5, Letter
Appendix-12
No. of sheets
3,500 (64 g/m2)
3,000 (80 g/m2)
Multi Purpose tray (MP tray)
Supported types
Plain paper (60 to 300 g/m2)
Recycled paper (60 to 300 g/m2)
Colored paper (60 to 300 g/m2)
Supported paper sizes
A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, B6-R, A6-R,
Letter, Letter-R, Executive-R, Statement,
Folio, 16K, 16K-R
No. of sheets
165 (64 g/m2)
150 (80 g/m2)
Other sizes:
Portrait - 3 7/8 to 11 5/8" or 98 to 297 mm
Landscape - 5 7/8 to 17" or 148 to 432 mm
Plain paper (60 to 300 g/m2)
Recycled paper (60 to 300 g/m2)
Colored paper (60 to 300 g/m2)
A3, B4, Ledger, Legal, Oficio II,
12 × 18", 8K
55 (64 g/m2)
50 (80 g/m2)
Postcards
Oufuku hagaki (return postcard)
Postcards (100 × 148 mm)
Return postcard (148 × 200 mm)
30
Envelopes
Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C4,
Envelope #10 (Commercial #10),
Envelope #9 (Commercial #9),
Envelope #6 (Commercial #6 3/4),
Monarch, ISO B5, Youkei 2, Youkei 4
Other sizes:
Portrait - 3 7/8 to 11 5/8" or 98 to 297 mm
Landscape - 5 7/8 to 17" or 148 to 432 mm
10
Transparency (OHP film)
A4, A4-R, Letter, Letter-R
10
Basic Paper Specifications
This machine is designed to print on standard copy paper as used in regular ('dry') copiers and page printers
such as laser printers. It also supports a variety of other types of paper that conform to the specifications given
in this appendix.
Be careful when choosing paper. Paper unsuitable for the machine may cause jams or may be wrinkled.
Supported Paper
Use standard copy paper for regular copiers or laser printers. The printing quality will be affected by the quality
of paper. Poor quality paper may result in unsatisfactory output.
Appendix-13
Basic Paper Specifications
The following table lists the specifications of paper that is supported with this machine. Refer to the subsequent
sections for further details.
Criteria
Weight
Specifications
Cassettes:
60 to 220 g/m2 (for the 30/30 ppm or 35/35ppm)
60 to 256 g/m2 (for the 45/45 ppm or 55/50ppm)
Multi purpose tray: 60 to 300 g/m2
Thickness
0.086 to 0.110 mm
Dimensional accuracy
±0.7 mm
Squareness of corners
90° ±0.2°
Moisture content
4 to 6%
Pulp content
80% or more
NOTE: Some recycled paper does not meet requirements for use with this machine as listed in the Basic
Paper Specifications shown below, such as moisture or pulp content. For this reason, we recommend
purchasing a small amount of recycled paper as a sample for testing prior to use. Choose recycled paper that
gives the best printing results and contains low levels of paper dust.
We are not responsible for the problems occurred from the use of paper that does not conform to our
specifications.
Choosing the Appropriate Paper
This section describes guidelines for choosing paper.
Condition
Avoid using paper with bent corners or that is curled, dirty, or torn. Do not use paper that has a rough surface or
paper fiber lint, or that is especially delicate. Use of paper in any of these conditions will not only deliver poor
copies but may also cause jams and shorten the useful life of the machine. Choose paper with a smooth and even
surface; however, avoid coated paper or paper with a treated surface as it may damage the drum or fusing unit.
Ingredients
Do not use paper such as paper that has been coated or surface-treated or paper that contains plastic or carbon.
Those types of paper may produce harmful fumes from the heat of printing and may damage the drum.
Be sure to use the standard paper that contains at least 80% pulp, i.e., not more than 20% of the total paper
content consists of cotton or other fibers.
Supported Paper Sizes
Paper of the following sizes is supported by the machine.
Appendix-14
Measurements in the table take into account a ±0.7 mm dimensional accuracy for length and width. Corner
angles must be 90° ± 0.2°.
Multi Purpose Tray
Cassette or Multi Purpose Tray
A6-R (105 × 148 mm)
A3 (297 × 420 mm)
B6-R (128 × 182 mm)
B4 (257 × 364 mm)
Hagaki (100×148mm)
A4 (297 × 210 mm)
Oufuku hagaki (148 × 200 mm)
A4-R (210 × 297 mm)
Executive (7 1/4 ×10 1/2")
B5 (257 × 182 mm)
Envelope DL (110 × 220 mm)
B5-R (182 × 257 mm)
Envelope C5 (162 × 229mm)
A5-R (148 × 210 mm)
Envelope C4 (229 × 324mm)
Folio (210 × 330 mm)
ISO B5 (176 × 250 mm)
Ledger
Envelope #10 (Commercial #10) (4 1/8 × 9 1/2")
Legal
Envelope #9 (Commercial #9) (3 7/8 × 8 7/8")
Letter
Envelope #6 (Commercial #6 3/4) (3 5/8 × 6 1/2")
Letter-R
Envelope Monarch (3 7/8 ×7 1/2")
Statement-R
Youkei 2 (114 × 162 mm)
Oficio II
Youkei 4 (105 × 235 mm)
12 × 18"
Size Entry (98 × 148 to 297 × 432 mm)
8K (273 × 394 mm)
16K (273 × 197 mm)
16K-R (197 × 273 mm)
216 × 340 mm
Smoothness
The paper surface should be smooth, but it must be uncoated. With paper that is too smooth and slippery,
several sheets may accidentally be supplied at once, causing jams.
Basis Weight
In countries that use the metric system, basis weight is the weight in grams of one sheet of paper one square
meter in area. In the United States, basis weight is the weight in pounds of one ream (500 sheets) of paper cut
to the standard size (or trade size) for a specific grade of paper. Paper that is too heavy or too light may be
supplied incorrectly or cause paper jams, which may cause excessive wear of the machine. Mixed paper weight
(i.e., thickness) may cause several sheets to be supplied at once accidentally and may also cause blurring or
other printing problems if the toner fails to adhere correctly.
Appendix-15
Thickness
Avoid using paper that is too thick or thin. Signs that paper may be thin include frequent problems with paper
jams or with several sheets being supplied at once. Paper jams may also indicate that the paper is too thick. The
proper thickness is between 0.086 and 0.110 mm.
Moisture Content
Paper moisture content is the ratio of moisture to dryness expressed as a percentage. Moisture affects how the
paper is supplied, the electrostatic chargeability of the paper, and how the toner adheres.
Paper moisture content varies depending on the relative humidity in the room. High relative humidity causes
paper to become damp, making the edges expand so it appears wavy. Low relative humidity causes paper to
lose moisture, making the edges tighten and weakening print contrast.
Wavy or tight edges may cause the paper to slip when it is supplied. Try to keep the moisture content between
4 to 6%.
To maintain the right level of moisture content, bear in mind the following considerations.
•
Store paper in a cool, well-ventilated place.
•
Store paper flat and unopened in the package. Once the package is opened, reseal it if the paper is not to
be used for a while.
•
Store paper sealed in the original package and box. Put a pallet under the carton to keep it raised above the
floor. Especially during rainy seasons keep the paper a sufficient distance away from wooden or concrete
floors.
•
Before using paper that has been stored, keep it at the proper moisture level for at least 48 hours.
•
Do not store paper where it is exposed to heat, sunlight, or dampness.
Other Paper Specifications
Porosity: The density of the paper fibers
Stiffness: Paper must be stiff enough or it may buckle in the machine, causing jams.
Curl: Most paper naturally tends to curl after the package is opened. When paper passes through the fixing unit,
it curls upward slightly. To deliver flat printouts, load the paper so that the curl faces towards the bottom of the
paper tray.
Static electricity: During printing, paper is electrostatically charged so that the toner adheres. Choose paper
that can be discharged quickly so that copies do not cling together.
Whiteness: Paper whiteness affects print contrast. Use whiter paper for sharper, brighter copies.
Quality: Machine problems may occur if sheet sizes are not uniform or if corners are not square, edges are
rough, sheets are uncut, or edges or corners are crushed. In order to prevent these problems, be especially
careful when you cut the paper yourself.
Packaging: Choose paper that is properly packaged and stacked in boxes. Ideally, the packaging itself should
have been treated with a coating to inhibit moisture.
Appendix-16
Specially treated paper: We do not recommend printing onto the following types of paper, even if it conforms to
the basic specifications. When you use these kinds of paper, purchase a small amount first as a sample to test.
•
Glossy paper
•
Watermarked paper
•
Paper with an uneven surface
•
Perforated paper
Special Paper
This section describes printing onto special paper and print media.
The following paper and media can be used.
•
Transparencies
•
Preprinted paper
•
Bond paper
•
Recycled paper
•
Thin paper (from 60 g/m2 to105 g/m2 or less)
•
Letterhead
•
Colored paper
•
Prepunched paper
•
Envelopes
•
Cardstocks (Hagaki)
•
Thick paper (from 106 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 or less)
•
Labels
•
Coated paper
•
High-quality paper
When using these paper and media, choose those that are designed specifically for copiers or page printers (such
as laser printers). Use the multi purpose tray for transparencies, thick paper, envelopes, cardstocks, and label
paper.
Choosing Special Paper
Although special paper that meets the following requirements can be used with the machine, print quality will
vary considerably due to differences in the construction and quality of special paper. Thus, special paper is more
likely than regular paper to cause printing problems. Before purchasing special paper in volume, try testing a
sample to ensure the print quality is satisfactory. General precautions when printing onto special paper are given
below. Note that we are not responsible for any harm to the user or damage to the machine caused by moisture
or specifications of special paper.
Select a cassette or multi purpose tray for special paper.
Appendix-17
Transparencies
Transparencies must be able to withstand the heat of printing. Transparencies must meet the following
conditions.
Criteria
Specifications
Heat resistance
Must withstand at least 190°C
Thickness
0.100 to 0.110 mm
Material
Polyester
Dimensional accuracy
±0.7 mm
Squareness of corners
90° ±0.2°
To avoid problems, use the multi purpose tray for transparencies and load transparencies with the long side
facing the machine.
If transparencies jam frequently at output, try pulling the leading edge of sheets gently as they are ejected.
Hagaki
Before loading Hagaki into the multi purpose tray, fan
them and align the edges. If the Hagaki paper is curled,
straighten it before loading. Printing onto curled Hagaki
may cause jams.
Burrs
Burrs
Use unfolded Oufuku hagaki (available at post offices).
Some Hagaki may still have rough edges developed by
a paper cutter on the back side. Remove any such
rough edges by placing the Hagaki on a flat surface and
rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler.
Envelopes
Use the multi purpose tray for envelopes.
Due to the structure of envelopes, printing evenly over the entire surface may not be possible in some cases.
Thin envelopes in particular may be wrinkled by the machine in some cases as they pass through. Before
purchasing envelopes in volume, try testing a sample to ensure the print quality.
Storing envelopes for a long period may cause them to become wrinkled. Thus, keep the package sealed until
you are ready to use them.
Keep the following points in mind.
Do not use envelopes with exposed adhesive. In addition, do not use the type of envelope in which the adhesive
is exposed after the top layer is peeled off. Serious damage may be caused if the paper covering the adhesive
comes off in the machine.
Do not use envelopes with certain special features. For example, do not use envelopes with a grommet for
winding a string to close the flap or envelopes with an open or film-covered window.
If paper jams occur, load fewer envelopes at once.
To prevent paper jams when printing onto multiple envelopes, do not allow more than ten envelopes to remain
in the output tray at once.
Appendix-18
Thick Paper
Before loading thick paper in the multi purpose tray, fan it and align the edges. Some thick paper may still have
rough edges developed by a paper cutter on the back side. Remove any such rough edges just as with Hagaki
by placing the paper on a flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler. Printing onto paper
with rough edges may cause jams.
NOTE: If the paper is not supplied correctly even after it is smoothed, load the paper in the multi purpose tray
with the leading edge raised a few millimeters.
Label
Be sure to feed labels from the multi purpose tray.
For selecting labels, use extreme care so that the adhesive may not come in direct contact with any part of the
machine and that the labels are not easily peeled from the carrier sheet. Adhesives that stick to the drum or
rollers and peeled labels remaining in the machine may cause a failure.
When printing onto labels, you must be liable for the print quality and possible trouble.
Top sheet
Adhesive layer
Carrier sheet
Labels consist of three layers as shown in the
illustration. The adhesive layer contains materials that
are easily affected by the force applied in the machine.
The carrier sheet bears the top sheet until the label is
used. This composition of labels may cause more
problems.
The label surface must be covered completely with the
top sheet. Gaps between labels may cause peeling of
labels, resulting in a serious failure.
Some label paper has large margins on the top sheet. When using such paper, do not peel these margins from
the carrier sheet before completing output.
Allowed
Not allowed
Top sheet
Carrier sheet
Appendix-19
Use label paper that conforms to the following specifications.
Item
Specifications
Top sheet weight
44 to 74 g/m²
Basis weight
(overall paper weight)
104 to 151 g/m²
Top sheet thickness
0.086 to 0.107 mm
Overall paper thickness
0.115 to 0.145 mm
Moisture content
4 to 6 % (composite)
Colored Paper
Colored paper must conform to the specifications listed on page 2 of the Appendix. In addition, the pigments in
the paper must be able to withstand the heat of printing (up to 200°C or 392°F).
Preprinted Paper
Preprinted paper must conform to the specifications listed on page 2 of the Appendix. The colored ink must be
able to withstand the heat of printing. It must be resistant to silicone oil as well. Do not use paper with a treated
surface such as glossy paper used for calendars.
Recycled Paper
Recycled paper must conform to the specifications listed on page 2 of the Appendix; however, its whiteness may
be considered separately.
NOTE: Before purchasing recycled paper in volume, try testing a sample to ensure satisfactory print quality.
Appendix-20
Specifications
IMPORTANT: Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Common functions
Item
Description
Type
Desktop
Printing Method
Electrophotography by semiconductor laser, tandem drum system
Paper Weight
Paper Type
Paper Size
Warm-up Time
(22°C/71.6°F,
60%)
Paper
Capacity
Cassette 1, 2
30/30 ppm model, 35/35 ppm model:
60 to 220 g/m2
45/45 ppm model, 55/50 ppm model:
60 to 256 g/m2
Multi Purpose
Tray
60 to 300 g/m2
Cassette 1, 2
Plain, Rough, Vellum, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color (Colour),
Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8 (Duplex:
Same as Simplex)
Multi Purpose
Tray
Plain, Transparency (OHP film), Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled,
Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Color (Colour), Prepunched, Letterhead,
Thick, Coated, Envelope, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8
Cassette 1, 2
Maximum: 12 × 18"/A3 (Duplex: 12 × 18"/A3)
Minimum: Statement-R/A5-R (Duplex: Statement-R/A5-R)
Multi Purpose
Tray
Maximum: 12 × 48"/304.8 × 1220.0 mm
Minimum: Statement-R/A6-R
Power on
30/30 ppm model: 25 seconds or less
35/35 ppm model: 25 seconds or less
45/45 ppm model: 30 seconds or less
55/50 ppm model: 30 seconds or less
Low Power
30/30 ppm model: 15 seconds or less
35/35 ppm model: 15 seconds or less
45/45 ppm model: 20 seconds or less
55/50 ppm model: 20 seconds or less
Sleep
30/30 ppm model: 20 seconds or less
35/35 ppm model: 20 seconds or less
45/45 ppm model: 30 seconds or less
55/50 ppm model: 30 seconds or less
Cassette 1
500 sheets (80 g/m2)
Cassette 2
500 sheets (80 g/m2)
Multi Purpose
Tray
A4/Letter or less
150 sheets (80 g/m2)
More than A4/Letter
50 sheets (80 g/m2)
Appendix-21
Item
Output Tray
Capacity
Description
Inner tray
250 sheets (80 g/m2)
(When the inner job separator (JS-732) is installed, 180 sheets.)
with optional
inner job
separator
30 sheets (80 g/m2)
with optional
inner job
separator
(JS-732)
100 sheets (80 g/m2)
with optional
right job
separator
70 sheets (80 g/m2)
Image Write System
Semiconductor laser and electrophotography
Main Memory
Standard
2048 MB
Maximum
2048 MB
Hard Disk
Interface
Operating
Environment
30/30:160GB (standard)
35/35:160GB (standard)
45/45:320GB (160GB × 2) (standard)
55/50:320GB (160GB × 2) (standard)
Standard
USB Interface Connector: 1 (USB Hi-Speed)
USBPort: 2 (Hi-Speed USB)
Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T)
Option
Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T)
Fax: 2
A maximum of two interface options can be installed.
Only one network interface can be installed.
When a network interface is installed, only one fax line can be installed.
Temperature
10 to 32.5°C/50 to 90.5°F
Humidity
15 to 80 %
Altitude
2,500 m/8,202 ft maximum
Brightness
1,500 lux maximum
Dimension (W × D × H)
(Main unit only)
26 19/32 × 30 3/16 ×29 13/32"
668 × 767 × 747 mm
Weight
251.3 lb/114 kg
Appendix-22
Item
Description
Space Required (W × D)
(Using multi purpose tray)
38 29/64 × 30 3/16"
977 × 767 mm
Power Source
120 V Specification Model:
120 V AC 60 Hz 12.0 A
230 V Specification Model:
220 to 240 V AC 50/60 Hz 7.2 A
Options
Document Processor, Platen Cover , Document Table,
Paper Feeder (500-sheet x2), Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet x 2),
1,000-sheet Finisher, 4,000-sheet Finisher, Inner Job Separator,
Inner Job Separator (JS-732), Right Job Separator, Key Counter,
FAX Kit, Expansion Memory, Data Security Kit,
Printed Document Guard Kit, Internet Fax Kit (A), Folding Unit, Mailbox,
Side Feeder (3,000-sheet), Side Feeder (500-sheet x 3),
Gigabit Ethernet Board,
Large Capacity Side Feeder (500, 1,500-sheet x2), Emulation Option,
Hole Punch Unit, USB Keyboard, Banner Tray
Appendix-23
Copy functions
Item
Description
Copy Speed
30/30 ppm
model
35/35 ppm
model
45/45 ppm
model
55/50 ppm
model
First Copy
Time
(A4, feed from
Cassette)
A4/Letter
A4-R/Letter-R
A3/Ledger
B4/Legal
B5
A4/Letter
A4-R/Letter-R
A3/Ledger
B4/Legal
B5
A4/Letter
A4-R/Letter-R
A3/Ledger
B4
Legal
B5
A4/Letter
A4-R/Letter-R
A3/Ledger
B4
Legal
B5
Black and White copying
30 sheets/min
21 sheets/min
15 sheets/min
18 sheets/min
30 sheets/min
35 sheets/min
24 sheets/min
17 sheets/min
21 sheets/min
35 sheets/min
45 sheets/min
31 sheets/min
22 sheets/min
27 sheets/min
21 sheets/min
45 sheets/min
55 sheets/min
24 sheets/min
27 sheets/min
33 sheets/min
21 sheets/min
55 sheets/min
Black and
White
30/30 ppm model: 6.2 seconds or less
35/35 ppm model: 5.8 seconds or less
45/45 ppm model: 4.7 seconds or less
55/50 ppm model: 4.4 seconds or less
Full color
30/30 ppm model: 8.1 seconds or less
35/35 ppm model: 7.4 seconds or less
45/45 ppm model: 6.0 seconds or less
55/50 ppm model: 5.7 seconds or less
Full color copying
30 sheets/min
21 sheets/min
15 sheets/min
18 sheets/min
30 sheets/min
35 sheets/min
24 sheets/min
17 sheets/min
21 sheets/min
35 sheets/min
45 sheets/min
24 sheets/min
22 sheets/min
27 sheets/min
21 sheets/min
45 sheets/min
50 sheets/min
24 sheets/min
25 sheets/min
30 sheets/min
21 sheets/min
50 sheets/min
Zoom Level
Manual mode: 25 to 400%, 1% increments
Auto mode: Preset Zoom
Continuous Copying
1 to 999 sheets
Resolution
600 × 600 dpi
Supported Original Types
Sheet, Book, 3-dimensional objects (maximum original size: 12 × 18"/
A3)
Original Feed System
Fixed
Appendix-24
Printer functions
Item
Printing
Speed
First Print
Time
(A4, feed
from
Cassette)
Description
Black and White copying
30 sheets/min
15 sheets/min
35 sheets/min
17 sheets/min
45 sheets/min
22 sheets/min
55 sheets/min
27 sheets/min
30/30 ppm
model
35/35 ppm
model
45/45 ppm
model
55/50 ppm
model
A4/Letter
A3/Ledger
A4/Letter
A3/Ledger
A4/Letter
A3/Ledger
A4/Letter
A3/Ledger
Black and
White
30/30 ppm model: 7.3seconds or less
35/35 ppm model: 6.2 seconds or less
45/45 ppm model: 5.4 seconds or less
55/50 ppm model: 4.9 seconds or less
Full color
30/30 ppm model: 9.5 seconds or less
35/35 ppm model: 8.0 seconds or less
45/45 ppm model: 6.6 seconds or less
55/50 ppm model: 6.2 seconds or less
Full color copying
30 sheets/min
15 sheets/min
35 sheets/min
17 sheets/min
45 sheets/min
22 sheets/min
50 sheets/min
25 sheets/min
Resolution
600 × 600 dpi
Operating System
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista, Windows 7 ,
Windows Server 2008, Mac OS 10.x
Interface
USB Interface Connector: 1 (USB Hi-Speed)
Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T)
Standard
Page Description Language
PRESCRIBE
Emulations
PCL6 (PCL5c, PCL-XL), KPDL3 (PostScript3 compatible)
Appendix-25
Scanner functions
Item
Description
System requirements
CPU: 600Mhz or higher
RAM: 128MB or more
Resolution
600 dpi, 400 dpi, 300 dpi, 200 dpi, 200 ×100 dpi, 200 × 400 dpi
(Resolution in FAX mode included)
File Format
PDF (high compressive, encrypted, PDF/A), JPEG, TIFF, XPS
Scanning Speed *1
30/30 ppm model
35/35 ppm model
1-sided B/W 70 Images/min
Color 70 Images/min
2-sided B/W 100 Images/min
Color 80 Images/min
(A4 landscape, 300 dpi,
Image quality: Text/Photo original)
45/45 ppm model
55/50 ppm model
1-sided B/W 80 Images/min
Color 80 Images/min
2-sided B/W 140 Images/min
Color 110 Images/min
(A4 landscape, 300 dpi,
Image quality: Text/Photo original)
Interface
Ethernet (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T)
Network Protocol
TCP/IP
Transmission
System
PC transmission
*1
*2
*3
SMB
Scan to SMB
FTP
Scan to FTP, FTP over SSL
E-mail transmission SMTP Scan to E-mail
TWAIN scan*2
WIA scan*3
When using the dual scan document processor (except TWAIN and WIA scanning)
Available Operating System : Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008,
Windows 7
Available Operating System : Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Server 2008
Appendix-26
Document Processor (Option)
Description
Item
Document Processor
Document Processor (Dual scan DP)
Original Feed
Method
Automatic feed
Supported
Original Types
Sheet originals
Paper Size
Maximum: Ledger/A3
Minimum: Statement-R/A5-R
Paper Weight
1-sided: 45 to 160 g/m2
2-sided: 50 to 120 g/m2
1-sided: 35 to 220 g/m2
2-sided: 50 to 220 g/m2
Loading Capacity
100 sheets (50 to 80 g/m2) maximum
Mixed original sizes (auto selection):
30 sheets (50 to 80 g/m2) maximum
175 sheets (50 to 80 g/m2) maximum
Mixed original sizes (auto selection):
30 sheets (50 to 80 g/m2) maximum
Dimensions
(W) × (D) × (H)
22 23/32 × 21 13/64 × 7 5/64"
577 × 534 × 180 mm
23 5/8 × 20 13/64 × 6 45/64"
600 × 513 × 170 mm
Weight
32 lbs. or Less /14.5 kg or less
Paper Feeder (500-sheet x 2) (Option)
Item
Description
Paper Supply
Method
Feed & reverse roller method
(No. Sheets: 500, 80 g/m2, 2 cassettes/No. Sheets: 550, 64 g/m2, 2 cassettes)
Paper Size
A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5-R, A5-R, Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, 12 × 18", Letter, Letter-R,
Statement-R, Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R, 216 × 340 mm
Supported Paper
Paper weight: 60 - 256 g/m2
Media types: standard, recycled, Thick
Dimensions
(W) × (D) × (H)
23 35/64 × 27 35/64 × 12 13/32"
598 × 699.6 × 315 mm
Weight
Approx. 66.1 lbs. / Approx. 30 kg
Appendix-27
Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet x 2) (Option)
Item
Description
Paper Supply
Method
Feed & reverse roller method (No. Sheets: 3,000 (80 g/m2)/No. Sheets: 3,500 (64 g/
m2))
Paper Size
A4, B5, Letter
Supported Paper
Paper weight: 60 - 256 g/m2
Media types: standard, recycled, Thick
Dimensions
(W) × (D) × (H)
23 35/64 × 27 52/64 × 12 26/64"
598 × 706.6 × 315 mm
Weight
Approx. 63.93 lbs / Approx. 29 kg
Side Feeder (500-sheet x 3) (Option)
Item
Description
Paper Supply
Method
Feed & reverse roller method
(No. Sheets: 500, 80 g/m2, 3 cassettes/No. Sheets: 550, 64 g/m2, 3 cassettes)
Paper Size
A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5-R, A5-R, Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, 12 × 18", Letter, Letter-R,
Statement-R, Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R, 216 × 340 mm
Supported Paper
Paper weight: 60 - 256 g/m2
Media types: standard, recycled, Thick
Dimensions
(W) × (D) × (H)
23 35/64 × 28 11/32 × 21 7/64"
598 × 720 × 536 mm
Weight
Approx. 114.6 lbs. / Approx. 52 kg
Large Capacity Side Feeder (500, 1,500-sheet x 2) (Option)
Item
Description
Paper Supply
Method
Feed & reverse roller method (No. Sheets: 500 sheets (80 g/m2) × 1 cassette, 1,500
sheets (80 g/m2) × 2 cassettes/No. Sheets: 550 sheets (64 g/m2) × 1 cassette, 1,750
sheets (64 g/m2) × 2 cassettes)
Paper Size
Tray 5
A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5-R, A5-R, Ledger, Legal, Oficio II,
12 × 18", Letter, Letter-R, Statement-R, Folio, 8K, 16K,
16K-R, 216 × 340 mm
Tray 6, 7
A4, B5, Letter
Supported Paper
Paper weight: 60 - 256 g/m2
Media types: standard, recycled, Thick
Dimensions
(W) × (D) × (H)
23 35/64 × 28 11/32 × 21 7/64"
598 × 720 × 536 mm
Weight
Approx. 112.4 lbs / Approx. 51 kg
Appendix-28
Side Feeder (3,000-sheet) (Option)
Item
Description
Paper Supply
Method
Feed & reverse roller method
(No. Sheets: 3,000, 80 g/m2/No. Sheets: 3,500 64 g/m2)
Paper Size
A4, B5, Letter
Supported Paper
Paper weight: 60 - 300 g/m2
Media types: standard, recycled, Thick
Dimensions
(W) × (D) × (H)
12 41/64 × 24 13/32 × 19 27/32"
321 × 620 × 504 mm
Weight
Approx. 55.1 lbs. / Approx. 25 kg
1,000-sheet Finisher (Option)
Item
Description
Number of Trays
2 tray
Paper
Size
(80 g/
m 2)
Tray A
(Nonstapling)
A3, B4, Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, 12 × 18", 8K: 500 sheets
A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, Letter, Letter-R, 16K: 1,000 sheets
Tray B
A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5 (ISO), B5-R, A5-R, A6, B6-R, Letter, Letter-R, Ledger,
Legal, Oficio II, 12 × 18", Statement-R, Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R, 216 × 340 mm,
Oufuku hagaki, Cardstock, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C4, Envelope #10
(Commercial #10), Envelope #9 (Commercial #9), Envelope #6 (Commercial #6 3/4),
Envelope Monarch, Youkei 2, Youkei 4, Statement-R, Executive,
Custom (98 × 148mm to 297 × 432mm): 100 sheets
Supported Paper
Weight
Stapling: 90 g/m2 or less
Stapling
A3, B4, B5-R, Ledger, Legal, Oficio II,
12 × 18", 216 × 340 mm, Folio, 8K,
16K-R
30 sheets (60 to 90 g/m2)
20 sheets (91 to 105 g/m2)
2 cover sheet only (106 g/m2 to 135 g/m2)
A4, A4-R, B5, Letter, Letter-R, 16K
50 sheets (60 to 90 g/m2)
40 sheets (91 to 105 g/m2)
2 cover sheet only (106 g/m2 to 135 g/m2)
Number
of Sheets
Media
types
Plain, Recycled, Prepunched
Dimensions
(W) × (D) × (H)
26 7/32 × 24 11 × 32 × 41 21/64"
666 × 618.5 × 1,050 mm
Weight
Approx. 66.1 lbs. or less / Approx. 30 kg or less
Appendix-29
4,000-sheet Finisher (Option)
Item
Description
Number of Trays
3 trays
Paper
Size
(80 g/
m 2)
Tray A
(NonStapling)
A3, B4, B5-R, Ledger, Legal, 8K: 1,500 sheets
A4, A4-R, B5, Letter, Letter-R, 16K, 16K-R, Folio: 4,000 sheets*, **
A5, B6, Statement-R: 500 sheets
Tray B
A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5, A5-R, Folio, Ledger, Legal, 12 × 18", A3, B4, 8K,Letter,
Letter-R, Statement-R, 16K, 16K-R: 200 sheets
Tray C
A4, B5, B5 (ISO), B5-R, B6, A5, A5-R, A6, A6-R, Letter, Statement-R, 16K,
Cardstock, Oufuku hagaki: 100 sheets
Maximum
Number
A3, B4, B5-R, Ledger, Legal, Oficio II,
12 × 18", 216 × 340 mm, Folio, 8K,
16K-R
30 sheets (52 to 90 g/m2)
20 sheets (91 to 105 g/m2)
2 cover sheet only (106 g/m2 to 135 g/m2)
A4, A4-R, B5, Letter, Letter-R, 16K
65 sheets (52 to 90 g/m2)
55 sheets (91 to 105 g/m2)
2 cover sheet only (106 g/m2 to 135 g/m2)
Stapling
Media
types
Plain, Recycled, Prepunched
Dimensions
(W) × (D) × (H)
23 29/32 × 26 5/16 × 41 25/32"
607.2 × 668.5 × 1,061.3 mm
Weight
Approx. 88.2 lbs or less / Approx. 40 kg or less
*
**
When the Folding Unit is installed, 3000 sheets.
2000 sheets when output is on the tray.
Hole Punch Unit (Option)
Item
Description
Paper Size
A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, Folio, 8K, 16K, Letter-R, Legal, 12 × 18", Statement-R, A5-R,
B5-R, 16K-R
Paper Weight
45 - 300 g/m2
Media types
4,000-sheet Finisher
Plain, Transparency, Preprinted, Bond, Recycled,
Rough, Letterhead, Color (Colour), Prepunched,
Thick, Coated, High Quality
1,000-sheet Finisher
Plain, Transparency, Preprinted, Bond, Recycled,
Letterhead, Color (Colour), Prepunched, Thick,
Coated, High Quality
Appendix-30
Mailbox (Option)
Item
Description
Number of Trays
7
Paper Size
(80 g/m2)
A3, B4, Ledger, Legal: 50 sheets
A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, Letter, Letter-R, 216 × 340 mm, Executive, Folio, 8K,
16K, 16K-R, Statement-R, Oficio II: 100 sheets
Dimensions
(W) × (D) × (H)
20 1/16 × 15 3/4 × 18 1/2"
510 mm × 400 mm × 470 mm
Weight
Approx. 22 lbs. / Approx. 10 kg
Center-Folding Unit (Option)
Item
Sizes
Number of Sheets
Maximum Number
for Storage
(80 g/m2)
Media types
Description
Bi-Fold
A3, B4, A4-R, Ledger, Legal, Letter-R, Oficio II, 8K
Saddle Stitch
A3, B4, A4-R, Ledger, Legal, Letter-R, Oficio II, 8K
Tri-Fold
A4-R, Letter-R
Bi-Fold
5 sheets (60 to 90 g/m2)
3 sheets (91 to 120 g/m2)
1 sheet (121 to 256 g/m2)
Saddle Stitch
16 sheets (60 to 90 g/m2)
13 sheets (91 to 105 g/m2)
1 cover sheet only (106 g/m2 or heavier)
Tri-Fold
5 sheets (60 to 90 g/m2)
3 sheets (91 to 120 g/m2)
Bi-Fold
5 sheets or less per set: 30 sets or more
6 to 10 sheets per set: 20 sets or more
11 to 16 sheets per set: 10 sets or more.
Saddle Stitch
5 sheets or less per set: 30 sets or more
6 to 10 sheets per set: 20 sets or more
11 to 16 sheets per set: 10 sets or more.
Tri-Fold
1 sheet per set: 30 sets or more
2 to 5 sheets per set: 5 sets or more
Bi-Fold
Plain, Bond, Recycled, Prepunched, High Quality
Saddle Stitch
Plain, Recycled, Prepunched
Tri-Fold
Plain, Recycled, Prepunched
Appendix-31
Inner Job Separator (Option)
Item
Description
Number of Trays
1 tray
Maximum Sheets
30 sheets (80 g/m2)
Paper Size
A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, Legal, Oficio II, Letter, Letter-R, Executive,
Statement-R, Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R, 216 × 340mm
Paper Type
Paper weight: 60 - 256 g/m2
Paper type: Plain, Preprinted, Bond, Rough, Recycled, Letterhead, Color (Colour),
Prepunch, Coated, Thick, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8
Dimensions
(W) × (D) × (H)
17 7/16 × 15 7/16 × 4 1/64"
443 × 392 × 102 mm
Weight
1.76 lbs. / 0.8 kg
Inner Job Separator (JS-732) (Option)
Item
Description
Number of Trays
1 tray
Maximum Sheets
100 sheets (80 g/m2)
Paper Size
A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, Legal, Oficio II, Letter, Letter-R, Executive,
Statement-R, Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R, 216 × 340mm
Paper Type
Paper weight: 60 - 256 g/m2
Paper type: Plain, Preprinted, Bond, Rough, Recycled, Letterhead, Color (Colour),
Prepunch, Coated, Thick, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8
Dimensions
(W) × (D) × (H)
18 1/2 × 17 43/64 × 4 1/64"
470 × 449 × 102 mm
Weight
Approx. 4.63 lbs. / Approx. 2.1 kg
Appendix-32
Right Job Separator (Option)
Item
Description
Number of Trays
1 tray
Maximum Sheets
A4, A4-R, B5, Letter, Letter-R: 70 sheets (80 g/m2)
A3, B4, A4, B5-R, A5-R, Folio, Ledger, Legal, 16K, 16K-R, 216 × 340mm: 30 sheets
(80 g/m2)
Paper Size
A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, Letter, Letter-R,
Executive, Statement-R, Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R, 216 × 340mm
Paper Type
Paper weight: 60 - 256 g/m2
Paper type: Plain, Preprinted, Bond, Rough, Recycled, Letterhead, Color (Colour),
Prepunch, Coated, Thick, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8
Dimensions
(W) × (D) × (H)
14 27/32 × 17 13/32 × 5 29/32"
377 × 442 × 150 mm
Weight
5.1 lbs. / 2.3 kg
Banner Tray (Option)
Item
Description
Max. number of
sheets
10 sheets (Multi Purpose tray)
Paper length
210 (8.26") to 304.8 (12") mm
Paper weight
Max. 1220 (48") mm
Paper Type
Paper weight: 136 to 163 g/m2
Paper type: Heavy 2
Dimensions
(W) × (D) × (H)
9 27/32 × 14 23/32 × 5 63/64"
250 × 374 × 152 mm
Weight
Approx. 0.78 lbs. / Approx. 0.352 kg
NOTE: Consult your dealer or service representative for recommended paper types.
Appendix-33
Glossary
Accessibility
The machine is designed featuring good accessibility even for the elderly and those who are physically
challenged or visually impaired. Touch panel characters can be enlarged while the touch panel is adjustable in
two angles.
AppleTalk
AppleTalk, which comes with Apple Computer's Mac OS, is a network protocol. AppleTalk enables file/printer
sharing and also enables you to utilize application software that is on another computer on the same AppleTalk
network.
Auto Form Feed Timeout
During data transmission, the machine may sometimes have to wait until receiving the next data. This is the auto
form feed timeout. When the preset timeout passes, the machine automatically prints output. However, no
output is performed if the last page has no data to be printed.
Auto-IP
Auto-IP is a module that enables dynamic IPv4 addresses to be assigned to a device on startup. However,
DHCP requires a DHCP server. Auto-IP is a server-less method of choosing an IP address. IP addresses
between 169.254.0.0 to 169.254.255.255 are reserved for Auto-IP and assigned automatically.
Auto Paper Selection
A function to automatically select paper in the same size as originals when printing
Auto Sleep
A mode designed for electrical power saving, activated when the machine is left unused or there is no data
transfer for a specific period. In Sleep mode, power consumption is kept to a minimum.
Bonjour
Bonjour, also known as zero-configuration networking, is a service that automatically detects computers,
devices and services on an IP network. Bonjour, because an industry-standard IP protocol is used, allows
devices to automatically recognize each other without an IP address being specified or DNS server being set.
Bonjour also sends and receives network packets by UDP port 5353. If a firewall is enabled, the user must check
that UDP port 5353 is left open so that Bonjour will run correctly. Some firewalls are set up so as to reject only
certain Bonjour packets. If Bonjour does not run stably, check the firewall settings and ensure that Bonjour is
registered on the exceptions list and that Bonjour packets are accepted. If you install Bonjour on Windows XP
Service Pack 2 or later, the Windows firewall will be set up correctly for Bonjour.
Default Gateway
This indicates the device, such as a computer or router, that serves as the entrance/exit (gateway) for accessing
computers outside the network that you are on. When no specific gateway is designated for a destination IP
address, data is sent to the host designated as the Default Gateway.
Appendix-34
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) that automatically resolves IP addresses, subnet masks, and
gateway addresses on a TCP/IP network. DHCP minimizes the load of network management employing a large
number of client computers because it relieves individual clients including printers from the IP address being
assigned.
DHCP (IPv6)
DHCP (IPv6) is the next-generation of the Internet's Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol and supports IPv6. It
extends the BOOTP startup protocol that defines the protocols used for transferring configuration information to
hosts on the network. DHCP (IPv6) permits the DHCP server to use its expanded functionality to send
configuration parameters to an IPv6 node. Because the network addresses that can be used are allocated
automatically, the IPv6 node management workload is reduced in systems where the administrator has to
exercise close control over IP address allocation.
dpi(dots per inch)
A unit for resolution, representing the number of dots printed per inch (25.4 mm).
EcoPrint Mode
A printing mode that helps save toner. Copies made in this mode are thus lighter than normal.
Emulation
The function to interpret and execute other printers' page description languages. The machine emulates
operation of PCL6, KPDL3 (PostScript 3 compatible).
FTP(File Transfer Protocol)
A protocol to transfer files on the TCP/IP network, whether the Internet or an intranet. Along with HTTP and
SMTP/POP, FTP is now frequently used on the Internet.
Grayscale
A computer color expression. Displayed images of this sort are typically composed of shades of gray, varying
from black at the weakest intensity to white at the strongest, without any other colors. Gray levels are displayed
in numerical levels: that is, white and black only for 1 bit; 256 gray levels (including white and black) for 8 bits;
and 65,536 gray levels for 16 bits.
Help
A Help key is provided on this machine's operation panel. If you are unsure of how to operate the machine,
would like more information on its functions or are having problems getting the machine to work properly, press
the Help key to view a detailed explanation on the touch panel.
IP Address
An Internet protocol address is a unique number that represents a specific computer or related device on the
network. The format of an IP address is four sets of numbers separated by dots, e.g. 192.168.110.171. Each
number should be between 0 and 255.
Appendix-35
IPP
IPP (Internet Printing Protocol) is a standard that uses TCP/IP networks such as the Internet to enable print jobs
to be sent between remote computers and printers. IPP is an extension of the HTTP protocol used to view
websites and enables printing to be carried out via routers on printers in remote locations. It also supports the
HTTP authentication mechanisms along with SSL server and client authentication as well as encryption.
KPDL (Kyocera Page Description Language)
Kyocera's PostScript page description language compatible with Adobe PostScript Level 3.
Multi Purpose (MP) Tray
The paper supply tray on the right side of the machine. Use this tray instead of the cassettes when printing onto
envelopes, Hagaki, transparencies, or labels.
NetBEUI (NetBIOS Extended User Interface)
An interface, developed by IBM in 1985, as an update from NetBIOS. It enables more advanced functions on
smaller networks than other protocols such as TCP/IP, etc. It is not suitable for larger networks due to lack of
routing capabilities to choose the most appropriate routes. NetBEUI has been adopted by IBM for its OS/2 and
Microsoft for its Windows as a standard protocol for file sharing and printing services.
NetWare
Novell's network management software that is able to run on a variety of operating systems.
PDF/A
This is "ISO 19005-1. Document management - Electronic document file format for long-term preservation - Part
1: Use of PDF (PDF/A)", and is a file format based on PDF 1.4. It has been standardized as ISO 19005-1, and
is a specialization of PDF, which has been mainly used for printing, for long-term storage. A new part, ISO
19005-2 (PDF/A-2), is currently being prepared.
POP3 (Post Office Protocol 3)
A standard protocol to receive E-mail from the server in which the mail is stored on the Internet or an intranet.
PostScript
A page description language developed by Adobe Systems. It enables flexible font functions and highlyfunctional graphics, allowing higher quality printing. The first version called Level 1 was launched in 1985,
followed by Level 2 that enabled color printing and two-byte languages (e.g. Japanese) in 1990. In 1996, Level
3 was released as an update for the Internet access and PDF format as well as gradual improvements in
implementation technologies.
PPM (prints per minute)
This indicates the number of A4 size printouts made in one minute.
Printer Driver
The software to enable you to print data created on any application software. The printer driver for the machine
is contained in the DVD enclosed in the package. Install the printer driver on the computer connected to the
machine.
Appendix-36
RA(Stateless)
The IPv6 router communicates (transmits) information such as the global address prefix using ICMPv6. This
information is the Router Advertisement (RA). ICMPv6 stands for Internet Control Message Protocol, and is a
IPv6 standard defined in the RFC 2463 "Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMPv6) for the Internet Protocol
Version 6 (IPv6) Specification".
Send as E-mail
A function to send the image data stored in the machine as an E-mail attachment. E-mail addresses can be
selected from the list or entered at each time.
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)
A protocol for E-mail transmission over the Internet or an intranet. It is used for transferring mail between mail
servers as well as for sending mail from clients to their servers.
Status Page
The page lists machine conditions, such as the memory capacity, total number of prints and scans, and paper
source settings.
Subnet Mask
The subnet mask is a way of augmenting the network address section of an IP address. A subnet mask
represents all network address sections as 1 and all host address sections as 0. The number of bits in the prefix
indicates the length of the network address. The term "prefix" refers to something added to the beginning and,
in this context, indicates the first section of the IP address. When an IP address is written, the length of the
network address is indicated by the prefix length after a forward slash (/). For example, "24" in the address
"133.210.2.0/24". In this way, "133.210.2.0/24" denotes the IP address "133.210.2.0" with a 24-bit prefix
(network section). This new network address section (originally part of the host address) made possible by the
subnet mask is referred to as the subnet address. When you enter the subnet mask, be sure to set the DHCP
setting to Off.
TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol)
TCP/IP is a suite of protocols designed to define the way computers and other devices communicate with each
other over a network.
TCP/IP (IPv6)
TCP/IP (IPv6) is based on the current Internet protocol, TCP/IP (IPv4). IPv6 is the next-generation Internet
protocol and expands the available address space, which resolves the problem of the lack of addresses under
IPv4, while also introducing other improvements such as additional security functionality and the capacity to
prioritize data transmission.
TWAIN (Technology Without An Interesting Name)
A technical specification for connecting scanners, digital cameras, and other image equipment to computers.
The TWAIN compatible devices enable you to process image data on any relevant application software. TWAIN
is adopted on a large amount of graphic software (e.g. Adobe Photoshop) and OCR software.
Appendix-37
USB (Universal Serial Bus)2.0
A USB interface standard for Hi-Speed USB 2.0. The maximum transfer rate is 480 Mbps. This machine is
equipped with USB 2.0 for high-speed data transfer.
WIA (Windows Imaging Acquisition)
A function to import images supported after Windows Me/XP from digital cameras and other peripheral devices.
This function replaces what TWAIN used to do. The feature is provided as a part of Windows functions and
improves ease of operation, so that you import images directly to My Computer without using any application.
Appendix-38
Index
Index
Symbols
(Paper Width Guide) Lock 1-6
Numerics
1,000-sheet Finisher Appendix-4
Staple Jam 12-56
1,000-sheet Finisher (Option)
Paper Jams 12-42
2-sided/Book Original 6-11
4,000-sheet Finisher Appendix-4
Staple Jam 12-57
4,000-sheet Finisher (Option)
Paper Jams 12-43
A
Accessibility 9-115, Appendix-34
Accounting Setting
Accounting List 10-22
Address Book
Contact 9-83
Group 9-86
Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle 2-10
Adjustment/Maintenance
Auto Color Correction 9-72
Background Density Adj. 9-70
Calibration 9-75
Color Calibration Cycle 9-74
Color Registration 9-72
Correcting Black Lines 9-71
Density Adjustment 9-69
Developer Refresh 9-76
Display Brightness 9-72
Drum Refresh 9-70
First Print Position 9-76
Laser Scanner Cleaning 9-76
Silent Mode 9-72
System Initialization 9-71
Tone Curve Adjustment 9-75
Apache License (Version 2.0) xxxii
AppleTalk Appendix-34
Setup 2-15
Applications
Installing Applications 9-92
Launching Applications 9-93
Authorization Rules
Copy Restriction 10-13
Copy Restriction (Color) 10-13
Copy Restriction (Full Color) 10-13
Fax TX Restriction 10-13
Print Restriction 10-13
Print Restriction (Color) 10-13
Send Restriction 10-13
Storing Restr. in Box 10-13
Storing Restr. in Memory 10-13
Auto Image Rotation 4-44
Auto Low Power Mode 2-9
Auto Paper Selection Appendix-34
Auto Sending
Sending Log History 9-68
Auto Sleep 2-10, Appendix-34
B
Background density adj.
Copy 4-40
Send 6-22
Banner Tray Appendix-7
Bates Stamp 4-32, 6-40
Bonjour Appendix-34
Booklet 4-20
Booklet from Sheets
Left side 4-20
Right side 4-20
Top binding 4-20
Border Erase
Copy 4-18
Send 6-26
Index-1
Index
Bundled Items 2-2
C
Calibration 9-75
Calibration Cycle 9-74
Cassette
Loading Paper 2-29
Paper Size and Media Type 9-6
Cassette 1 to 7 1-4
Cassette 5 (Option)
Paper Jams 12-50
Cassette 6,7 (Option)
Paper Jams 12-52
Center-Folding Unit (Option)
Paper Jams 12-48
Centering 6-7
Changing Language 2-11, 9-2
Character Entry Method Appendix-9
Cleaning
Dual scanning area 11-16
Glass Platen 11-15
Platen Cover 11-15
Platen Cover / Glass Platen 11-15
Separator 11-18
Slit Glass 11-16
Transfer Roller 11-19
Cleaning Brush 1-5
Clip Holder 1-5
Collate/Offset 3-15
Color
Background Density Adj. 4-40, 6-22
Calibration Cycle 9-74
Color balance 4-35
Color Registration 9-72
Color Selection 6-23
Color Type 6-42, 9-48
Hue adjust 4-36
One touch image adjust 4-37
Single Color 4-34
Tone Curve Adjustment 9-75
Color balance 4-35
Color mode 3-7
Color Selection (Copy) 9-19
Color Selection (Send/Store) 9-19
Color Registration
Auto Correction 9-73
Manual Setting 9-73
Color type 6-42
Combine
Copy 4-14
Combine Mode
2-in-1 Mode 4-14
4-in-1 Mode 4-15
Page Boundary Lines 4-15
Common Settings
Color Toner Empty Action 9-16
Customize Status Display 9-40
Default Screen 9-3
Display Jobs Log 9-41
Error Handling 9-13
Function Defaults 9-16
Language 9-2
Low Toner Alert Level 9-40
Manual Staple 9-39
Message Banner Print 9-42
Offset One Page Documents 9-41
Orientation Confirmation 9-16
Original/Paper Settings 9-4
Paper Output 9-15
Sound 9-4
System Stamp 9-30
USB Keyboard Type 9-30
Connecting
LAN Cable 2-5
Power Cable 2-6
USB Cable 2-6
Connection Method 2-3
Continuous Scan
Copy 4-43
Send 6-24
Conventions in This Guide xxxvii
Copy 9-43, Appendix-8
Collate/Offset 3-15
Combine 4-14
Density 3-9
Duplex 3-13
EcoPrint 4-34
Original Image 3-10
Originals 4-2
Zoom 3-11
Copy Settings
Index-2
Index
Auto % Priority 9-45
Auto Image Rotation Action 9-44
Auto Paper Selection 9-44
Border Erase for Back Page 9-43
Paper Size for Small Original 9-45
Preset Limit 9-46
Quick Setup Registration 9-46
Reserve Next Priority 9-45
Copying Functions 4-1
Counting the Number of Pages
Printed 10-28
Counting the Number of Pages Printed
Counter 3-62, 10-33
Unknown ID Job 10-33
Cover 4-22
Custom Box
Creating a New Box 7-2
Deleting Documents 7-13
Editing Documents 7-10
Form Overlay 7-9
Join Documents 7-11
Move Documents 7-10
Printing Documents 7-5
Sending Documents 7-7
Storing Documents 7-4
User Privileges 3-50
D
Daily Maintenance
Emptying the Punch Waste Box (Option)
11-12
Replacing Staples 11-8
Toner Container Replacement 11-2
Waste Toner Box Replacement 11-5
Data Security
Data Sanitization 9-112, 9-113
Data Security Kit Appendix-8
Date/Timer
Auto Error Clear 9-80
Auto Panel Reset 9-78
Auto Sleep 9-79
Date Format 9-77
Date/Time 9-77
Error Job Skip 9-81
Interrupt Clear Timer 9-81
Low Power Timer 9-79
Sleep Act. (Job Separator) 9-82
Time Zone 9-78
Default 9-16
Auto Image Rotation 9-24
Backgrnd Density (Copy) 9-21
BackgrndDens.(Send/Store) 9-21
Border Erase 9-23
Border Erase to Back Page 9-23
Collate/Offset 9-24
Color Selection (Copy) 9-19
Color Selection (Send/Store) 9-19
Color TIFF Compression 9-26
Continuous Scan 9-27
EcoPrint 9-24
E-mail Subject/Body 9-29
File Format 9-20
File Name Entry 9-28
High Comp. PDF Image 9-25
Image Quality (File Format) 9-26
JPEG/TIFF Print 9-27
Margin Default 9-24
Original Image (Copy) 9-17
Original Image (Send/Store) 9-18
Original Orientation 9-17
PDF/A 9-28
Prevent Bleed(Send/Store) 9-22
Prevent Bleed-thru (Copy) 9-21
Repeat Copy 9-29
Scan Resolution 9-18
Toner SaveLevel(EcoPrint) 9-25
XPS Fit to Page 9-27
Zoom 9-22
Default Gateway Appendix-34
Default Setting
Apply Limit 10-26
Copier/Printer Count 10-24
Count by Paper Size 10-30
Density 6-19
Copy 3-9
Send 6-19
Dest. Check before Send 9-47
Destination
Address Book 3-40
Editing 9-87
Narrow Down 9-89
Index-3
Index
One Touch Key 3-42
Quick No. Search key 3-4
Search 3-41
Sending to Different Types of
Destinations (Multi Sending) 3-42
Sort 9-89
Speed Dial 3-42
Device 8-14
Canceling FAX Communication 8-16
Checking Status 8-14
Configuring 8-15
Displaying Screen 8-14
USB Memory 8-16
DHCP Appendix-35
DHCP (IPv6) Appendix-35
Document Box 3-43, 7-1
Basic Operation 3-45
Custom Box 3-43, 7-2
Document deletion time 7-3
Form Overlay 7-9
Job Box 3-43, 7-14
Quick Setup Registration 9-57
What is Document Box? 3-43
Document Finisher 1-4
Document Processor 1-5, Appendix-4,
Appendix-27
How to Load Originals 2-47
Loading Originals 2-46
Not Supported Originals 2-46
Part Names 2-46
Supported Originals 2-46
Document Table Appendix-8
Double Copy 4-29
dpi Appendix-35
DSM Scan 6-32
Protocol Detail 9-100
Duplex 3-13, 9-61
Duplex unit 12-33
Duplex Unit and Cassette 1 12-34
DVD 2-2
E
EcoPrint 4-34
EcoPrint Mode Appendix-35
Print 9-60
Edit Destination
Address Book 9-83
One Touch Key 9-87
E-mail
Send as E-mail 3-24
E-mail Subject/Body
Sending 6-29
Embedded Web Server RX 2-24
Emptying the Punch Waste Box (Option)
1,000-sheet Finisher (Option) 11-13
4,000-sheet Finisher (Option) 11-14
Emulation Appendix-35
Selection 9-58
Emulation Option Appendix-8
Energy Star Program xxxv
Enhanced WSD
Setup 9-102
Enhanced WSD (SSL)
Setup 9-103
Enlarged Display 9-115
Enter key 3-4
Entry
File Name 4-48
Entry Check for New Dest. 9-48
Error Handling
Duplexing Error 9-13
Finished Pages Exceeded 9-13
Finishing Error 9-13
Inserted Paper Mismatch 9-14
No Staple Error 9-13
Paper Jam before Staple 9-14
Paper Mismatch Error 9-14
Punch Waste Full Error 9-14
Skewed originals 9-14
Error Job Skip 9-81
Error Messages 12-8
Expansion Memory Appendix-8
F
FAX Kit Appendix-8
File
Format 6-14
PDF 6-16
File Name Entry 4-48
Sending 6-28
Index-4
Index
File Separation 6-15
Fixing unit 12-36
Fold 4-11
Folding Unit Appendix-6
Form Overlay 4-23
Storing a Form 7-20
Front Cover 1-4
FTP Appendix-35
FTP (Reception)
Protocol Detail 9-100
FTP Encrypted TX 6-38
G
Gigabit Ethernet Board Appendix-8
Glass Platen
Cleaning 11-15
GPL/LGPL xxix
Grayscale 6-23, Appendix-35
H
Handle 1-6
Handles 1-5
Help Appendix-35
Help Screen 3-62
Checking what to enter for 3-30
Host Name 9-96
HTTP
Protocol Detail 9-100
HTTP Security
Setup 9-104
HTTPS
Protocol Detail 9-100
Hue adjustment 4-36
I
Image Repeat 4-29
Included Guides 2
Inner Job Separator Appendix-6
Inner Job Separator (JS-732) Appendix-7
Inner Tray 1-6
Installing
Macintosh 2-19
Software 2-16
Windows 2-16
Interface Block 9-109
Interface Block Setting
Optional interface 9-109
USB Device 9-109
USB Host 9-109
Internet Browser 3-59
Internet Browser Setting
Browser Preferences 9-90
Internet Browser Setting 9-90
Proxy Settings 9-91
Internet Fax Kit (A) Appendix-8
Interrupt Clear Timer 9-81
Interrupt Copy 3-18
IP Address Appendix-35
IPP Appendix-36
IPP over SSL
Protocol Detail 9-100
IPP Security
Setup 9-104
IPSec 9-107
J
Job
Available Status 8-2
Canceling 3-52, 8-11
Checking History 8-9
Checking Status 8-2
Detailed Information 8-7
Detailed Information of Histories 8-10
Details of the Status Screens 8-3
Displaying History Screen 8-9
Displaying Status Screens 8-2
Pause and Resumption 8-11
Reordering 8-12
Sending the Log History 9-67
Job Accounting
Restricting the Use of the Machine 1024
Job Accounting Setting 10-20
Each Job Accounting 10-29
Job Accounting 10-20
Print Accounting Report 10-32
Total Job Accounting 10-29
Job Box
Index-5
Index
Form for Form Overlay 7-20
Private Print/Stored Job Box 7-14
Quick Copy/Proof and Hold 7-15
Repeat Copy 7-18
Job Finish Notice 6-36
Copy 4-46
Send 6-36
Job Log Subject
Sending Log History 9-68
K
Key Counter Appendix-7
Knopflerfish License xxxii
KPDL Appendix-36
L
Label Appendix-19
LAN Cable
Connecting 2-5
LAN Interface
Setup 9-108
Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet x 2)
Appendix-4
Laser Scanner Cleaning 9-76
LDAP
Protocol Detail 9-100
LDAP Security
Setup 9-105
Legal Information xxviii
Local Authorization
Copy Restriction 10-5
Copy Restriction (Color) 10-5
Copy Restriction (Full Color) 10-5
Fax TX Restriction 10-5
Print Restriction 10-5
Print Restriction (Color) 10-5
Send Restriction 10-5
Storing Restr. in Box 10-5
Storing Restr. in Memory 10-5
Login 3-2, 10-3
Logout 3-2, 10-3
Long document 5-5
Low Power Timer 9-79
LPD
Protocol Detail 9-100
M
Mailbox 1-4, Appendix-6
Main Power Switch 1-6
Management 10-1
Manual Staple
Manual Staple 9-39
Staple Position 9-39
Manual staple mode Appendix-4
Margin/Centering 4-16
Measurement 9-12
Media for Auto (Color/B&W) 9-10
Media Type Setting 9-8
Memo Page 4-26
Mirror Image 4-45
Mixed Size Originals 4-6
Combinations 4-6
Copy Size 4-8
Send 6-8
Monotype Imaging License Agreement xxxi
Multi Purpose (MP) Tray Appendix-36
Paper Size and Media 2-42, 9-7
Multi Purpose Tray 1-6
Multi Sending (Sending to Different Types
of Destinations ) 3-42
N
Negative Image 4-44
NetBEUI Appendix-36
Protocol Detail 9-100
NetWare Appendix-36
Setup 9-101
Network
Enhanced WSD 9-102
Enhanced WSD (SSL) 9-103
Host Name 9-96
IPSec 9-107
LAN Interface 9-108
NetWare 9-101
Preparation 2-13
Restart Network 9-108
Secure Protocol 9-103
TCP/IP (IPv4) 9-97
Index-6
Index
TCP/IP (IPv6) 9-98
WSD Print 9-102
WSD Scan 9-102
Network Cable 2-4
Connecting 2-5
Network Interface 2-4
Network Interface Connector 1-5
O
OHP Backing Sheet 4-51
One Touch Key
Changing the Registered
Information 9-88
Deleting the Registered
Information 9-88
Editing 9-88
One-touch image adjust 4-37
Open SSL xxix
Operation Panel 1-5
Option
1,000-sheet Finisher Appendix-4
4,000-sheet Finisher Appendix-4
Data Security Kit Appendix-8
Document Processor Appendix-4
Document Table Appendix-8
Emulation Option Appendix-8
Expansion Memory Appendix-8
FAX Kit Appendix-8
Folding Unit Appendix-6
Gigabit Ethernet Board Appendix-8
Inner Job Separator Appendix-6,
Appendix-7
Internet Fax Kit (A) Appendix-8
Key Counter Appendix-7
Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet x
2) Appendix-4
Large Capacity Side Feeder (500,
1,500-sheet x 2) Appendix-4
Mailbox Appendix-6
Overview Appendix-2
Paper Feeder (500-sheet x2)
Appendix-4
Printed Document Guard Kit Appendix8
Right Job Separator Appendix-7
Side Feeder (3,000-sheet) Appendix-4
Side Feeder (500-sheet x 3) Appendix4
USB Keyboard Appendix-8
Option Interface 1-5
Optional Job Separator
Paper Jams 12-39
Orientation Confirmation 9-16
Original
Loading in the Document
Processor 2-46
Placing on the Platen 2-44
Size xxxviii
Original Auto Detect 9-10
Original Image
Send 6-18
Original Orientation
Copy 4-9
Document Processor 4-9
Orientation Confirmation 9-16
Send 6-12
Original Placement Indicator
Indications and Status 2-48
Original Size
Send 6-2
Original Size Indicator Plates 1-5, 2-44
Original SSLeay License xxx
Originals
Automatic Detection 9-10
Copy 4-2
Custom 9-4
Setup 9-4
Size Selection 4-2, 6-2
P
Page # 4-24
Paper
Appropriate Paper Appendix-14
Auto Selection 9-10
Before Loading 2-28
Cassette 9-6
Checking the Remaining Amount of
Paper 8-13
Custom 9-5
Default Paper Source 9-9
Index-7
Index
Loading Envelopes 2-38
Loading in the Cassettes 2-29
Loading in the Multi Purpose Tray 2-36
Multi Purpose Tray 9-7
Paper Source for Cover Paper 9-11
Setup 9-4
Size and Media 2-40, Appendix-12
Special Paper 9-11, Appendix-17
Specifications Appendix-13
Weight 9-8
Paper Feeder (500-sheet x2) Appendix-4
Paper Jam 12-23
Bridge Unit (Option) 12-41
Cassette 1 12-24
Cassette 2 12-25
Cassettes 3 and 4 12-26
Document Processor 12-37
Inside the Right Covers 1, 3 and 4 12-31
Jam Location Indicators 12-23
Multi Purpose Tray 12-30
Precaution 12-24
Paper Jams
1,000-sheet Finisher (Option) 12-42
4,000-sheet Finisher (Option) 12-43
Cassette 5 (Option) 12-50
Cassette 6,7 (Option) 12-52
Center-Folding Unit (Option) 12-48
Optional Job Separator 12-39
Paper Length Guide 1-6, 2-29
Paper Output 4-13
Paper Selection 4-3
Cassette 4-3
Multi Purpose Tray 4-4
Paper Size for Small Original 9-45
Paper stopper 1-6
Paper Width Adjusting Tab 1-6
Paper Width Guide 1-6
Paper Width Guides 2-30
Part Names 1-1
PDF/A Appendix-36
Platen 1-5
Placing Originals 2-44
Platen Cover 1-4
Cleaning 11-15
POP Security (User 1)
Setup 9-106
POP Security (User 2)
Setup 9-106
POP Security (User 3)
Setup 9-107
POP3 Appendix-36
POP3 (E-mail RX)
Protocol Detail 9-100
Poster 4-28
PostScript Appendix-36
Power Cable
Connecting 2-6
Power Off 2-8
Power On 2-7
PPM Appendix-36
Preparation 2-1
Preparation for sending a document to a PC
3-30
Preparing Cables 2-4
Prevent Bleed-thru 4-42, 6-25
Print Job
Reordering 3-53
Print Report
Font List 9-65
Network Status 9-66
Service Status 9-66
Status Page 9-65
Printed Document Guard Kit Appendix-8
Printer Driver Appendix-36
Printer Settings
Color Setting 9-59
Copies 9-61
CR Action 9-63
Duplex 9-61
EcoPrint 9-60
Emulation 9-58
Form Feed Timeout 9-62
Gloss Mode 9-59
Job Name 9-63
LF Action 9-63
Orientation 9-62
Override A4/Letter 9-60
Paper Feed Mode 9-64
Toner SaveLevel(EcoPrint) 9-60
User Name 9-64
Printing 5-2
Help 5-4
Index-8
Index
Long document 5-5
print settings 5-3
Printing from Applications 5-2
Printing Reports/Sending Notice
Send Result Report 9-66
Priority Override 4-48, 8-12
Product Library 2-2
Programmed Copying 3-56
Editing and Deleting 3-57
Recalling 3-57
Registering 3-56
Protocol Detail 9-100
Punch 3-21
Q
Quick No. Search key 3-4
Quick Setup Screen 3-53
Changing Registration 3-54, 9-46, 9-47,
9-57
R
RA (Stateless) Appendix-37
Raw Port
Protocol Detail 9-100
Regular Maintenance 11-2
Release key 1-5
Repeat Copy 4-49
Maximum Number 4-50
Outputting 4-49
Selecting 4-49
Replacing Staples
1,000-sheet Finisher (Option) 11-8
4,000-sheet Finisher (Option) 11-10
Report
Print Report 9-65
Reserve Next 3-17
Reserve Next Priority 9-45
Resolution Appendix-25
Restart Network 9-108
Right Cover 1 1-6
Right Cover 1 Lever 1-6
Right Cover 2 1-6
Right Cover 2 Lever 1-6
Right Cover 3 1-6
Right Cover 3 Lever 1-6
Right Job Separator Appendix-7
S
Safety Conventions i
Saturation 4-41
Scan Resolution 6-20
Default settings 9-18
Scanning
TWAIN 6-33
Secure Protocol 9-103
HTTP Security 9-104
IPP Security 9-104
LDAP Security 9-105
POP Security (User 1) 9-106
POP Security (User 2) 9-106
POP Security (User 3) 9-107
SMTP Security 9-105
SSL 9-103
Send
Default Screen 9-49
Dest. Check before Send 9-47
Entry Check for New Dest. 9-48
File Format 6-14
Original Image 6-18
Original Size 6-2
Print 6-37
Sending Size 6-4
Store 6-37
Send and Forward
Color Setting 9-51
Destination 9-50
E-mail Subject 9-55
File Format 9-52
File Separation 9-54
Forward 9-49
FTP Encrypted TX 9-55
Scan Resolution 9-52
Send Log History
Sending Log History 9-68
Send to Folder
Sending 3-25
Sending 9-47
E-mail Subject/Body 6-29
File Name Entry 6-28
Index-9
Index
Send as E-mail 3-24
Send to Folder 3-25
Send to Folder (FTP) 3-27
Send to Folder (SMB) 3-27
Sending E-mail 2-25
Sending Functions 6-1
Sending Log History
Auto Sending 9-68
Job Log Subject 9-68
Send Log History 9-68
Sending Settings
Color Type 9-48
Quick Setup Registration 9-47
Send and Forward 9-49
Sending Size 6-4
Sending to Different Types of Destinations
(Multi Sending) 3-42
Separator
Cleaning 11-18
Setting Date and Time 2-12
Setting Driver
TWAIN 2-22
WIA 2-23
Sharpness 4-39
Copy 4-39
Sharpness adjust
Send 6-21
Shortcuts 3-58
Adding 3-58
Single Color 4-34
Sleep 2-10
Slit Glass 1-5
Cleaning 11-16
SMTP Appendix-37
SMTP (E-mail TX)
Protocol Detail 9-100
SMTP Security
Setup 9-105
SNMP
Protocol Detail 9-100
SNMPv3
Protocol Detail 9-100
Solving Malfunctions 12-2
Specifications Appendix-21
1,000-sheet Finisher Appendix-29
4,000-sheet Finisher Appendix-30
Banner Tray Appendix-33
Center-Folding Unit Appendix-31
Common functions Appendix-21
Copy functions Appendix-24
Document Processor Appendix-27
Hole Punch Unit Appendix-30
Inner Job Separator Appendix-32
Inner Job Separator (JS-732)
Appendix-32
Large Capacity Feeder Appendix-28
Large Capacity Side Feeder (500,
1,500-sheet x 2) Appendix-28
Mailbox Appendix-31
Paper Feeder Appendix-27
Printer functions Appendix-25
Right Job Separator Appendix-33
Scanner functions Appendix-26
Side Feeder (3,000-sheet) Appendix29
Side Feeder (500-sheet x 3) Appendix28
Specifying Destination 3-29, 3-40
SSL
Setup 9-103
Staple
Mixed Size Stapling 3-20
Staple Jam 12-56
1,000-sheet Finisher 12-56
4,000-sheet Finisher 12-57
Status / Job Cancel 8-1
Status Page 9-65, Appendix-37
Subnet Mask Appendix-37
Supplies
Checking the Remaining Amount 8-13
Support Tray Section of the Multi Purpose
Tray 1-6
Switching the Language 2-11
Symbols i
System
Data Security 9-112
Document Guard 9-110
Optional Functions 9-114
Restart Entire Device 9-95
System Initialization 9-95
System Menu 9-1
Adjustment/Maintenance 9-69
Index-10
Index
Application 9-92
Common Settings 9-2
Copy 9-43
Date/Timer 9-77
Document Box/Removable Memory 956
Edit Destination 9-83
Internet 9-90
Network 9-96
Printer 9-58
Report 9-65
Send 9-47
User Property 10-9
System Stamp
Basic 9-30
Printing Jobs 9-31
Sending Jobs 9-34
Storing Jobs 9-36
T
TCP/IP Appendix-37
TCP/IP (IPv4)
Setup 2-13
TCP/IP (IPv6) Appendix-35
TCP/IP Setting
IPv4 9-97
IPv6 9-98
Protocol Detail 9-100
Text Stamp 4-31, 6-39
ThinPrint
Protocol Detail 9-100
Tone Curve Adjustment 9-75
Toner Container 1-5
Checking the Remaining Amount of
Toner 8-13
Toner Container Release Lever 1-5
Trade Names xxviii
Transfer Roller
Cleaning 11-19
TWAIN Appendix-37
U
USB Appendix-38
USB Cable
Connecting 2-6
USB Interface 2-4
USB Interface Connector (B1) 1-5
USB Keyboard Appendix-8
USB Memory
Printing Documents 7-22
Removing 7-26
Saving Documents 7-24
USB Port (A1) 1-6
USB Port (A2) 1-5
User Login Administration
Adding 10-5
Changing User Properties 10-8
Guest Authorization Settings 10-12
Login 10-3
Logout 10-4
User Login Setting 10-2
Group Authorization Set. 10-10
Local Authorization 10-9
Obtain NW User Property 10-15
User Login 10-2
User Login/Job Accounting
Job Accounting Setting 10-20
Unknown ID Job 10-10
User Login Setting 10-2
W
Waste Toner Box 1-5
Status 8-13
Waste Toner Tray 1-5
Weekly Timer 3-61
WIA Appendix-38
WSD Print
Setup 9-102
WSD Scan 6-30
Setup 9-102
WSD Scan/DSM Scan 6-30
X
XPS
File formats 6-14, 9-20
Printing documents stored in
Removable USB Memory 7-22
Saving documents to Removable USB
Index-11
Index
Memory 7-24
Z
Zoom 3-11
Zoom Copying
Auto Zoom 3-11
Manual Zoom 3-11
Preset Zoom 3-11
XY Zoom 3-12
Zoom Mode
Copy 6-6
Send 6-6
Index-12
We recommend the use of our own brand supplies. We will not be liable for any damage caused by the
use of third party supplies in this machine.
TA Triumph-Adler GmbH
Betriebsstätte Norderstedt
Ohechaussee 235
22848 Norderstedt
Germany
Rev.2 2011.9
2LCGEEN002
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement